US20210087219A1 - Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs - Google Patents
Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20210087219A1 US20210087219A1 US17/111,096 US202017111096A US2021087219A1 US 20210087219 A1 US20210087219 A1 US 20210087219A1 US 202017111096 A US202017111096 A US 202017111096A US 2021087219 A1 US2021087219 A1 US 2021087219A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- oligonucleotide
- alkyl
- gene
- independently
- modification
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
- 108091034117 Oligonucleotide Proteins 0.000 title claims abstract description 427
- 239000002777 nucleoside Substances 0.000 title claims description 170
- 125000003835 nucleoside group Chemical group 0.000 title claims description 134
- JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methyl [5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)-2-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl] hydrogen phosphate Polymers Cc1cn(C2CC(OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)C(COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3CO)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)O2)c(=O)[nH]c1=O JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 title abstract description 151
- 125000002015 acyclic group Chemical group 0.000 title description 31
- 208000035657 Abasia Diseases 0.000 title description 29
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 110
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 claims description 333
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 claims description 313
- -1 phosphate triester Chemical class 0.000 claims description 124
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 claims description 109
- 230000009368 gene silencing by RNA Effects 0.000 claims description 101
- 235000000346 sugar Nutrition 0.000 claims description 100
- 108091030071 RNAI Proteins 0.000 claims description 92
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 claims description 87
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 62
- 108091032973 (ribonucleotides)n+m Proteins 0.000 claims description 61
- 239000002679 microRNA Substances 0.000 claims description 55
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 54
- 125000001072 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 53
- 125000000956 methoxy group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])O* 0.000 claims description 53
- 150000003833 nucleoside derivatives Chemical class 0.000 claims description 50
- 125000000623 heterocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 48
- 150000004713 phosphodiesters Chemical class 0.000 claims description 46
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 44
- 125000003342 alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 35
- 229910052717 sulfur Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 35
- 125000000304 alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 34
- RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-K thiophosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=S RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 claims description 33
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 31
- 229910019142 PO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 30
- 239000010452 phosphate Substances 0.000 claims description 28
- 108020004459 Small interfering RNA Proteins 0.000 claims description 26
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 25
- 108700011259 MicroRNAs Proteins 0.000 claims description 24
- 108091023037 Aptamer Proteins 0.000 claims description 22
- 125000000753 cycloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 18
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 18
- 125000003710 aryl alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 16
- 125000006239 protecting group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 15
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 claims description 13
- 108090000994 Catalytic RNA Proteins 0.000 claims description 11
- 102000053642 Catalytic RNA Human genes 0.000 claims description 11
- 108091092562 ribozyme Proteins 0.000 claims description 11
- NAGJZTKCGNOGPW-UHFFFAOYSA-K dioxido-sulfanylidene-sulfido-$l^{5}-phosphane Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([S-])=S NAGJZTKCGNOGPW-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 claims description 10
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 claims description 10
- 125000002743 phosphorus functional group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 10
- 239000012190 activator Substances 0.000 claims description 7
- 125000005600 alkyl phosphonate group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 7
- 239000000074 antisense oligonucleotide Substances 0.000 claims description 7
- 238000012230 antisense oligonucleotides Methods 0.000 claims description 7
- BHEPBYXIRTUNPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydridophosphorus(.) (triplet) Chemical group [PH] BHEPBYXIRTUNPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 6
- 125000002221 trityl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C([H])C([H])=C1C([*])(C1=C(C(=C(C(=C1[H])[H])[H])[H])[H])C1=C([H])C([H])=C([H])C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000001797 benzyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 claims description 4
- 150000008300 phosphoramidites Chemical class 0.000 claims description 4
- 125000002777 acetyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)=O 0.000 claims description 3
- PTMHPRAIXMAOOB-UHFFFAOYSA-L phosphoramidate Chemical compound NP([O-])([O-])=O PTMHPRAIXMAOOB-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 claims description 3
- ILMRJRBKQSSXGY-UHFFFAOYSA-N tert-butyl(dimethyl)silicon Chemical group C[Si](C)C(C)(C)C ILMRJRBKQSSXGY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000004200 2-methoxyethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])OC([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 claims description 2
- 125000001475 halogen functional group Chemical group 0.000 claims 3
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 abstract description 140
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 abstract description 60
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 abstract description 49
- 230000002401 inhibitory effect Effects 0.000 abstract description 11
- 125000003729 nucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 216
- 239000002773 nucleotide Substances 0.000 description 213
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 90
- 230000000692 anti-sense effect Effects 0.000 description 90
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 84
- 125000005647 linker group Chemical group 0.000 description 71
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 63
- 150000002632 lipids Chemical class 0.000 description 63
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 56
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 55
- 108091081021 Sense strand Proteins 0.000 description 54
- ISAKRJDGNUQOIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Uracil Chemical compound O=C1C=CNC(=O)N1 ISAKRJDGNUQOIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 54
- 239000002502 liposome Substances 0.000 description 48
- 150000007523 nucleic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 46
- 108700026220 vif Genes Proteins 0.000 description 41
- 102000039446 nucleic acids Human genes 0.000 description 40
- 108020004707 nucleic acids Proteins 0.000 description 40
- 108091070501 miRNA Proteins 0.000 description 36
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 33
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 description 32
- 238000003776 cleavage reaction Methods 0.000 description 31
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 31
- 125000002467 phosphate group Chemical group [H]OP(=O)(O[H])O[*] 0.000 description 31
- 230000007017 scission Effects 0.000 description 31
- CZPWVGJYEJSRLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrimidine Chemical compound C1=CN=CN=C1 CZPWVGJYEJSRLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 30
- 239000000839 emulsion Substances 0.000 description 29
- 230000008685 targeting Effects 0.000 description 28
- 229940035893 uracil Drugs 0.000 description 28
- PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-LMVFSUKVSA-N Ribose Natural products OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)C=O PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-LMVFSUKVSA-N 0.000 description 27
- HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-D-Furanose-Ribose Natural products OCC1OC(O)C(O)C1O HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 27
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 27
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 27
- 235000021317 phosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 27
- RPMWFBPWEKIHAW-QHCPKHFHSA-N [1-[(2s)-3-[bis(4-methoxyphenyl)-phenylmethoxy]-2-hydroxypropyl]-2-oxopyrimidin-4-yl]carbamic acid Chemical compound C1=CC(OC)=CC=C1C(C=1C=CC(OC)=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)OC[C@@H](O)CN1C(=O)N=C(NC(O)=O)C=C1 RPMWFBPWEKIHAW-QHCPKHFHSA-N 0.000 description 26
- 125000002091 cationic group Chemical group 0.000 description 26
- UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N guanine Chemical compound O=C1NC(N)=NC2=C1N=CN2 UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 26
- OPTASPLRGRRNAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N cytosine Chemical class NC=1C=CNC(=O)N=1 OPTASPLRGRRNAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 25
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 25
- 230000029812 viral genome replication Effects 0.000 description 25
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 24
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 description 23
- HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-SOOFDHNKSA-N D-ribofuranose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H]1O HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-SOOFDHNKSA-N 0.000 description 21
- 239000000693 micelle Substances 0.000 description 21
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 21
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 21
- 108020004414 DNA Proteins 0.000 description 20
- 108010001267 Protein Subunits Proteins 0.000 description 20
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-XVFCMESISA-N Uridine Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-XVFCMESISA-N 0.000 description 20
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 20
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 20
- 239000004530 micro-emulsion Substances 0.000 description 19
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K phosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 19
- 239000004094 surface-active agent Substances 0.000 description 19
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 description 18
- 239000002552 dosage form Substances 0.000 description 17
- 239000012071 phase Substances 0.000 description 17
- 229930024421 Adenine Natural products 0.000 description 16
- GFFGJBXGBJISGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Adenine Chemical compound NC1=NC=NC2=C1N=CN2 GFFGJBXGBJISGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 16
- 229960000643 adenine Drugs 0.000 description 16
- HVYWMOMLDIMFJA-DPAQBDIFSA-N cholesterol Chemical group C1C=C2C[C@@H](O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@@H]2[C@@H]1[C@@H]1CC[C@H]([C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)[C@@]1(C)CC2 HVYWMOMLDIMFJA-DPAQBDIFSA-N 0.000 description 16
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 16
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 16
- 108091093037 Peptide nucleic acid Proteins 0.000 description 15
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 description 15
- 108020004999 messenger RNA Proteins 0.000 description 15
- 229940068917 polyethylene glycols Drugs 0.000 description 15
- 101710163270 Nuclease Proteins 0.000 description 14
- 238000000137 annealing Methods 0.000 description 14
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 239000005549 deoxyribonucleoside Substances 0.000 description 14
- 150000002431 hydrogen Chemical group 0.000 description 14
- 150000003212 purines Chemical class 0.000 description 14
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 14
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 102000040650 (ribonucleotides)n+m Human genes 0.000 description 13
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 13
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 13
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 description 13
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 13
- 210000004379 membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 13
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 13
- YIMATHOGWXZHFX-WCTZXXKLSA-N (2r,3r,4r,5r)-5-(hydroxymethyl)-3-(2-methoxyethoxy)oxolane-2,4-diol Chemical compound COCCO[C@H]1[C@H](O)O[C@H](CO)[C@H]1O YIMATHOGWXZHFX-WCTZXXKLSA-N 0.000 description 12
- KDCGOANMDULRCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7H-purine Chemical compound N1=CNC2=NC=NC2=C1 KDCGOANMDULRCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 12
- 230000021615 conjugation Effects 0.000 description 12
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 12
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 230000001404 mediated effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 230000003278 mimic effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000000194 fatty acid Substances 0.000 description 11
- 230000003308 immunostimulating effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 238000011282 treatment Methods 0.000 description 11
- 102000002067 Protein Subunits Human genes 0.000 description 10
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 10
- PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-UHFFFAOYSA-N arabinose Natural products OCC(O)C(O)C(O)C=O PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- SRBFZHDQGSBBOR-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-D-Pyranose-Lyxose Natural products OC1COC(O)C(O)C1O SRBFZHDQGSBBOR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-PSQAKQOGSA-N beta-L-uridine Natural products O[C@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O[C@@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-PSQAKQOGSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 229940104302 cytosine Drugs 0.000 description 10
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 10
- 235000014113 dietary fatty acids Nutrition 0.000 description 10
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 description 10
- 230000000021 endosomolytic effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 229930195729 fatty acid Natural products 0.000 description 10
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000004927 fusion Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000000338 in vitro Methods 0.000 description 10
- 235000019198 oils Nutrition 0.000 description 10
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 description 10
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 10
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N uracil arabinoside Natural products OC1C(O)C(CO)OC1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 229940045145 uridine Drugs 0.000 description 10
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- RWRDLPDLKQPQOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrrolidine Chemical compound C1CCNC1 RWRDLPDLKQPQOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 238000012228 RNA interference-mediated gene silencing Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000002776 aggregation Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000004220 aggregation Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 9
- 239000008346 aqueous phase Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 9
- 125000005843 halogen group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 9
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 9
- 125000000547 substituted alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- YBJHBAHKTGYVGT-ZKWXMUAHSA-N (+)-Biotin Chemical compound N1C(=O)N[C@@H]2[C@H](CCCCC(=O)O)SC[C@@H]21 YBJHBAHKTGYVGT-ZKWXMUAHSA-N 0.000 description 8
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-beta-D-Xylofuranosyl-NH-Cytosine Natural products O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1C1C(O)C(O)C(CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-PSQAKQOGSA-N Cytidine Natural products O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-PSQAKQOGSA-N 0.000 description 8
- JZNWSCPGTDBMEW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerophosphorylethanolamin Natural products NCCOP(O)(=O)OCC(O)CO JZNWSCPGTDBMEW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 description 8
- 108091028043 Nucleic acid sequence Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 108091023040 Transcription factor Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 102000040945 Transcription factor Human genes 0.000 description 8
- 125000001931 aliphatic group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 125000003282 alkyl amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 8
- 229940024606 amino acid Drugs 0.000 description 8
- 235000001014 amino acid Nutrition 0.000 description 8
- 235000012000 cholesterol Nutrition 0.000 description 8
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-ZAKLUEHWSA-N cytidine Chemical compound O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-ZAKLUEHWSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 8
- 125000004663 dialkyl amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 239000012636 effector Substances 0.000 description 8
- 239000003112 inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 8
- 125000001570 methylene group Chemical group [H]C([H])([*:1])[*:2] 0.000 description 8
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229920000768 polyamine Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 108010010234 HDL Lipoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 102000015779 HDL Lipoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 7
- 108010007622 LDL Lipoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 102000007330 LDL Lipoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 7
- 108091005804 Peptidases Proteins 0.000 description 7
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfur Chemical compound [S] NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 108700025716 Tumor Suppressor Genes Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 102000044209 Tumor Suppressor Genes Human genes 0.000 description 7
- 125000002252 acyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-WDCZJNDASA-N arabinose Chemical compound OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)C=O PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-WDCZJNDASA-N 0.000 description 7
- 125000001769 aryl amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 7
- 125000004986 diarylamino group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 125000005240 diheteroarylamino group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 239000003995 emulsifying agent Substances 0.000 description 7
- 230000002255 enzymatic effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000000799 fusogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 125000005241 heteroarylamino group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 230000001976 improved effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000009437 off-target effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 125000004437 phosphorous atom Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 239000011574 phosphorus Substances 0.000 description 7
- 125000000548 ribosyl group Chemical group C1([C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O1)CO)* 0.000 description 7
- 210000002966 serum Anatomy 0.000 description 7
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000011593 sulfur Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000011191 terminal modification Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000001225 therapeutic effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 7
- LRFVTYWOQMYALW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9H-xanthine Chemical compound O=C1NC(=O)NC2=C1NC=N2 LRFVTYWOQMYALW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- SRBFZHDQGSBBOR-IOVATXLUSA-N D-xylopyranose Chemical compound O[C@@H]1COC(O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O SRBFZHDQGSBBOR-IOVATXLUSA-N 0.000 description 6
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 102000035195 Peptidases Human genes 0.000 description 6
- 229930182558 Sterol Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-XLPZGREQSA-N Thymidine Chemical compound O=C1NC(=O)C(C)=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)C1 IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-XLPZGREQSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 125000000129 anionic group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 6
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 6
- 150000001720 carbohydrates Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 235000014633 carbohydrates Nutrition 0.000 description 6
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000007385 chemical modification Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000010494 dissociation reaction Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000005593 dissociations Effects 0.000 description 6
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 150000004665 fatty acids Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 230000030279 gene silencing Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- FDGQSTZJBFJUBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N hypoxanthine Chemical compound O=C1NC=NC2=C1NC=N2 FDGQSTZJBFJUBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 238000001727 in vivo Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 6
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 6
- 230000037361 pathway Effects 0.000 description 6
- 150000008104 phosphatidylethanolamines Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 150000003230 pyrimidines Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 6
- PFNFFQXMRSDOHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N spermine Chemical compound NCCCNCCCCNCCCN PFNFFQXMRSDOHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 150000003432 sterols Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 235000003702 sterols Nutrition 0.000 description 6
- RWQNBRDOKXIBIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N thymine Chemical compound CC1=CNC(=O)NC1=O RWQNBRDOKXIBIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 108700028369 Alleles Proteins 0.000 description 5
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 108091029430 CpG site Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 241000196324 Embryophyta Species 0.000 description 5
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 241000282414 Homo sapiens Species 0.000 description 5
- 229940122938 MicroRNA inhibitor Drugs 0.000 description 5
- RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiophosphoric acid Chemical class OP(O)(S)=O RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 241000700605 Viruses Species 0.000 description 5
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 5
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 description 5
- 239000003963 antioxidant agent Substances 0.000 description 5
- 235000006708 antioxidants Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 238000004113 cell culture Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000003599 detergent Substances 0.000 description 5
- MWRBNPKJOOWZPW-CLFAGFIQSA-N dioleoyl phosphatidylethanolamine Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(COP(O)(=O)OCCN)OC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC MWRBNPKJOOWZPW-CLFAGFIQSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 208000035475 disorder Diseases 0.000 description 5
- NAGJZTKCGNOGPW-UHFFFAOYSA-N dithiophosphoric acid Chemical class OP(O)(S)=S NAGJZTKCGNOGPW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- OVBPIULPVIDEAO-LBPRGKRZSA-N folic acid Chemical compound C=1N=C2NC(N)=NC(=O)C2=NC=1CNC1=CC=C(C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(O)=O)C=C1 OVBPIULPVIDEAO-LBPRGKRZSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 235000011187 glycerol Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 230000012010 growth Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000028993 immune response Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000003834 intracellular effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 244000052769 pathogen Species 0.000 description 5
- 239000000816 peptidomimetic Substances 0.000 description 5
- WTJKGGKOPKCXLL-RRHRGVEJSA-N phosphatidylcholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC WTJKGGKOPKCXLL-RRHRGVEJSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 description 5
- 230000001737 promoting effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229940088594 vitamin Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 229930003231 vitamin Natural products 0.000 description 5
- 235000013343 vitamin Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 239000011782 vitamin Substances 0.000 description 5
- GVJHHUAWPYXKBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N (±)-α-Tocopherol Chemical compound OC1=C(C)C(C)=C2OC(CCCC(C)CCCC(C)CCCC(C)C)(C)CCC2=C1C GVJHHUAWPYXKBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- IIZPXYDJLKNOIY-JXPKJXOSSA-N 1-palmitoyl-2-arachidonoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCC\C=C/C\C=C/C\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCC IIZPXYDJLKNOIY-JXPKJXOSSA-N 0.000 description 4
- TZMSYXZUNZXBOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 10H-phenoxazine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2NC3=CC=CC=C3OC2=C1 TZMSYXZUNZXBOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 108020000948 Antisense Oligonucleotides Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 108091032955 Bacterial small RNA Proteins 0.000 description 4
- KXDHJXZQYSOELW-UHFFFAOYSA-M Carbamate Chemical compound NC([O-])=O KXDHJXZQYSOELW-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 4
- 108010042407 Endonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 108090000371 Esterases Proteins 0.000 description 4
- NYHBQMYGNKIUIF-UUOKFMHZSA-N Guanosine Chemical class C1=NC=2C(=O)NC(N)=NC=2N1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O NYHBQMYGNKIUIF-UUOKFMHZSA-N 0.000 description 4
- XQFRJNBWHJMXHO-RRKCRQDMSA-N IDUR Chemical compound C1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C(I)=C1 XQFRJNBWHJMXHO-RRKCRQDMSA-N 0.000 description 4
- UGQMRVRMYYASKQ-KQYNXXCUSA-N Inosine Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C2=NC=NC(O)=C2N=C1 UGQMRVRMYYASKQ-KQYNXXCUSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229930010555 Inosine Natural products 0.000 description 4
- NWIBSHFKIJFRCO-WUDYKRTCSA-N Mytomycin Chemical compound C1N2C(C(C(C)=C(N)C3=O)=O)=C3[C@@H](COC(N)=O)[C@@]2(OC)[C@@H]2[C@H]1N2 NWIBSHFKIJFRCO-WUDYKRTCSA-N 0.000 description 4
- ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phenol Chemical compound OC1=CC=CC=C1 ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 108091000080 Phosphotransferase Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 description 4
- 241000288906 Primates Species 0.000 description 4
- AUNGANRZJHBGPY-SCRDCRAPSA-N Riboflavin Chemical compound OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)CN1C=2C=C(C)C(C)=CC=2N=C2C1=NC(=O)NC2=O AUNGANRZJHBGPY-SCRDCRAPSA-N 0.000 description 4
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sulfate Chemical compound [O-]S([O-])(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 4
- 102000018165 U1 Small Nuclear Ribonucleoprotein Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 108010091281 U1 Small Nuclear Ribonucleoprotein Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 108091026838 U1 spliceosomal RNA Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 229910052770 Uranium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229910052783 alkali metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 150000001340 alkali metals Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 229960002685 biotin Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 235000020958 biotin Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 239000011616 biotin Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000004700 cellular uptake Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000009833 condensation Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000005494 condensation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000004064 cosurfactant Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- GHVNFZFCNZKVNT-UHFFFAOYSA-N decanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCC(O)=O GHVNFZFCNZKVNT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000003828 downregulation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 4
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 4
- 235000019152 folic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- IPCSVZSSVZVIGE-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexadecanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O IPCSVZSSVZVIGE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229920001477 hydrophilic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazole Natural products C1=CNC=N1 RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 125000001041 indolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 229960003786 inosine Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 229940067606 lecithin Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 235000010445 lecithin Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 239000000787 lecithin Substances 0.000 description 4
- 210000004185 liver Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- RLSSMJSEOOYNOY-UHFFFAOYSA-N m-cresol Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC(O)=C1 RLSSMJSEOOYNOY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000000269 nucleophilic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000001717 pathogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 150000003904 phospholipids Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 102000020233 phosphotransferase Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 4
- 125000001436 propyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 4
- 235000019833 protease Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- ZCCUUQDIBDJBTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N psoralen Chemical compound C1=C2OC(=O)C=CC2=CC2=C1OC=C2 ZCCUUQDIBDJBTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 150000003839 salts Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000004055 small Interfering RNA Substances 0.000 description 4
- ATHGHQPFGPMSJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N spermidine Chemical compound NCCCCNCCCN ATHGHQPFGPMSJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 4
- 150000008163 sugars Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 229910021653 sulphate ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000003612 virological effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- PORPENFLTBBHSG-MGBGTMOVSA-N 1,2-dihexadecanoyl-sn-glycerol-3-phosphate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP(O)(O)=O)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC PORPENFLTBBHSG-MGBGTMOVSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 125000002103 4,4'-dimethoxytriphenylmethyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C(*)(C1=C([H])C([H])=C(OC([H])([H])[H])C([H])=C1[H])C1=C([H])C([H])=C(OC([H])([H])[H])C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 3
- HDZZVAMISRMYHH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9beta-Ribofuranosyl-7-deazaadenin Natural products C1=CC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1C1OC(CO)C(O)C1O HDZZVAMISRMYHH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 241000726103 Atta Species 0.000 description 3
- 102000004506 Blood Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108010017384 Blood Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 241000282472 Canis lupus familiaris Species 0.000 description 3
- RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Diethyl ether Chemical compound CCOCC RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 102100031780 Endonuclease Human genes 0.000 description 3
- PIICEJLVQHRZGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylenediamine Chemical compound NCCN PIICEJLVQHRZGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 108060002716 Exonuclease Proteins 0.000 description 3
- OOFLZRMKTMLSMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N H4atta Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CC1=CC=CC(C=2N=C(C=C(C=2)C=2C3=CC=CC=C3C=C3C=CC=CC3=2)C=2N=C(CN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)C=CC=2)=N1 OOFLZRMKTMLSMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 3
- 241000725303 Human immunodeficiency virus Species 0.000 description 3
- UGQMRVRMYYASKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hypoxanthine nucleoside Natural products OC1C(O)C(CO)OC1N1C(NC=NC2=O)=C2N=C1 UGQMRVRMYYASKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 102000004856 Lectins Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108090001090 Lectins Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 241000124008 Mammalia Species 0.000 description 3
- LRHPLDYGYMQRHN-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-Butanol Chemical compound CCCCO LRHPLDYGYMQRHN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 206010028980 Neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 108010011536 PTEN Phosphohydrolase Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000014160 PTEN Phosphohydrolase Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 229920002873 Polyethylenimine Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 108010039918 Polylysine Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 239000004365 Protease Substances 0.000 description 3
- 108010076504 Protein Sorting Signals Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 241000283984 Rodentia Species 0.000 description 3
- 108091027568 Single-stranded nucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 108091027967 Small hairpin RNA Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000004338 Transferrin Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108090000901 Transferrin Proteins 0.000 description 3
- XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Urea Chemical compound NC(N)=O XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 150000001345 alkine derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 125000002947 alkylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 150000001540 azides Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 201000011510 cancer Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 229940106189 ceramide Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 125000003636 chemical group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N citric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(O)(C(O)=O)CC(O)=O KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000003184 complementary RNA Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 3
- POULHZVOKOAJMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N dodecanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O POULHZVOKOAJMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 3
- 235000019441 ethanol Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 102000013165 exonuclease Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 238000001125 extrusion Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000011724 folic acid Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 description 3
- 210000001035 gastrointestinal tract Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 125000005456 glyceride group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 229920002674 hyaluronan Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 238000010348 incorporation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006698 induction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000001802 infusion Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000004615 ingredient Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000005764 inhibitory process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000001990 intravenous administration Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000002523 lectin Substances 0.000 description 3
- 210000005229 liver cell Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 210000004962 mammalian cell Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- GJBIWQXFRRQYML-RRUDDRBXSA-N n-[1-[(2s)-3-[bis(4-methoxyphenyl)-phenylmethoxy]-2-[2-cyanoethoxy-[di(propan-2-yl)amino]phosphanyl]oxypropyl]-2-oxopyrimidin-4-yl]acetamide Chemical compound C1=CC(OC)=CC=C1C(C=1C=CC(OC)=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)OC[C@@H](OP(OCCC#N)N(C(C)C)C(C)C)CN1C(=O)N=C(NC(C)=O)C=C1 GJBIWQXFRRQYML-RRUDDRBXSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000001293 nucleolytic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000007764 o/w emulsion Substances 0.000 description 3
- 210000000056 organ Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 3
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 3
- 229920000656 polylysine Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 102000040430 polynucleotide Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108091033319 polynucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 239000002157 polynucleotide Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000003755 preservative agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- BDERNNFJNOPAEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N propan-1-ol Chemical compound CCCO BDERNNFJNOPAEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 102000005962 receptors Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108020003175 receptors Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229940063675 spermine Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 230000000087 stabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 125000000446 sulfanediyl group Chemical group *S* 0.000 description 3
- 208000024891 symptom Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 229920001059 synthetic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229940124597 therapeutic agent Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 150000003568 thioethers Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 229940113082 thymine Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 239000012581 transferrin Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000014616 translation Effects 0.000 description 3
- HDZZVAMISRMYHH-KCGFPETGSA-N tubercidin Chemical compound C1=CC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O HDZZVAMISRMYHH-KCGFPETGSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000007762 w/o emulsion Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229940075420 xanthine Drugs 0.000 description 3
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-SVZMEOIVSA-N (+)-Galactose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-SVZMEOIVSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NOOLISFMXDJSKH-UTLUCORTSA-N (+)-Neomenthol Chemical group CC(C)[C@@H]1CC[C@@H](C)C[C@@H]1O NOOLISFMXDJSKH-UTLUCORTSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KIUKXJAPPMFGSW-DNGZLQJQSA-N (2S,3S,4S,5R,6R)-6-[(2S,3R,4R,5S,6R)-3-Acetamido-2-[(2S,3S,4R,5R,6R)-6-[(2R,3R,4R,5S,6R)-3-acetamido-2,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)oxan-4-yl]oxy-2-carboxy-4,5-dihydroxyoxan-3-yl]oxy-5-hydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)oxan-4-yl]oxy-3,4,5-trihydroxyoxane-2-carboxylic acid Chemical compound CC(=O)N[C@H]1[C@H](O)O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](O[C@H]3[C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O3)C(O)=O)O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O2)NC(C)=O)[C@@H](C(O)=O)O1 KIUKXJAPPMFGSW-DNGZLQJQSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004169 (C1-C6) alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- KILNVBDSWZSGLL-KXQOOQHDSA-N 1,2-dihexadecanoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC KILNVBDSWZSGLL-KXQOOQHDSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NRJAVPSFFCBXDT-HUESYALOSA-N 1,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC NRJAVPSFFCBXDT-HUESYALOSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WERYXYBDKMZEQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-butanediol Substances OCCCCO WERYXYBDKMZEQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MPCAJMNYNOGXPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,5-anhydrohexitol Chemical class OCC1OCC(O)C(O)C1O MPCAJMNYNOGXPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RYCNUMLMNKHWPZ-SNVBAGLBSA-N 1-acetyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CC(=O)OC[C@@H](O)COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C RYCNUMLMNKHWPZ-SNVBAGLBSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LDGWQMRUWMSZIU-LQDDAWAPSA-M 2,3-bis[(z)-octadec-9-enoxy]propyl-trimethylazanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCCOCC(C[N+](C)(C)C)OCCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC LDGWQMRUWMSZIU-LQDDAWAPSA-M 0.000 description 2
- KSXTUUUQYQYKCR-LQDDAWAPSA-M 2,3-bis[[(z)-octadec-9-enoyl]oxy]propyl-trimethylazanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(C[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC KSXTUUUQYQYKCR-LQDDAWAPSA-M 0.000 description 2
- WALUVDCNGPQPOD-UHFFFAOYSA-M 2,3-di(tetradecoxy)propyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-dimethylazanium;bromide Chemical compound [Br-].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCOCC(C[N+](C)(C)CCO)OCCCCCCCCCCCCCC WALUVDCNGPQPOD-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- WOKDXPHSIQRTJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[3-[3-[3-[3-[3-[3-[3-[3-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-2-hydroxypropoxy]-2-hydroxypropoxy]-2-hydroxypropoxy]-2-hydroxypropoxy]-2-hydroxypropoxy]-2-hydroxypropoxy]-2-hydroxypropoxy]-2-hydroxypropoxy]propane-1,2-diol Chemical compound OCC(O)COCC(O)COCC(O)COCC(O)COCC(O)COCC(O)COCC(O)COCC(O)COCC(O)COCC(O)CO WOKDXPHSIQRTJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ASFAFOSQXBRFMV-LJQANCHMSA-N 3-n-(2-benzyl-1,3-dihydroxypropan-2-yl)-1-n-[(1r)-1-(4-fluorophenyl)ethyl]-5-[methyl(methylsulfonyl)amino]benzene-1,3-dicarboxamide Chemical compound N([C@H](C)C=1C=CC(F)=CC=1)C(=O)C(C=1)=CC(N(C)S(C)(=O)=O)=CC=1C(=O)NC(CO)(CO)CC1=CC=CC=C1 ASFAFOSQXBRFMV-LJQANCHMSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VXGRJERITKFWPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4',5'-Dihydropsoralen Natural products C1=C2OC(=O)C=CC2=CC2=C1OCC2 VXGRJERITKFWPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FJKROLUGYXJWQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-hydroxybenzoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 FJKROLUGYXJWQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OIVLITBTBDPEFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5,6-dihydrouracil Chemical compound O=C1CCNC(=O)N1 OIVLITBTBDPEFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UJBCLAXPPIDQEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-prop-1-ynyl-1h-pyrimidine-2,4-dione Chemical compound CC#CC1=CNC(=O)NC1=O UJBCLAXPPIDQEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QNNARSZPGNJZIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-amino-5-prop-1-ynyl-1h-pyrimidin-2-one Chemical compound CC#CC1=CNC(=O)N=C1N QNNARSZPGNJZIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HBAQYPYDRFILMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 8-[3-(1-cyclopropylpyrazol-4-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-5-yl]-3-methyl-3,8-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octan-2-one Chemical class C1(CC1)N1N=CC(=C1)C1=NNC2=C1N=C(N=C2)N1C2C(N(CC1CC2)C)=O HBAQYPYDRFILMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MSSXOMSJDRHRMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9H-purine-2,6-diamine Chemical compound NC1=NC(N)=C2NC=NC2=N1 MSSXOMSJDRHRMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108010088751 Albumins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000009027 Albumins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 101800002011 Amphipathic peptide Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 101000719121 Arabidopsis thaliana Protein MEI2-like 1 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- CIWBSHSKHKDKBQ-JLAZNSOCSA-N Ascorbic acid Chemical compound OC[C@H](O)[C@H]1OC(=O)C(O)=C1O CIWBSHSKHKDKBQ-JLAZNSOCSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BSYNRYMUTXBXSQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Aspirin Chemical compound CC(=O)OC1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O BSYNRYMUTXBXSQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000894006 Bacteria Species 0.000 description 2
- 101710113962 Bombinin-like peptides Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 239000005632 Capric acid (CAS 334-48-5) Substances 0.000 description 2
- BVKZGUZCCUSVTD-UHFFFAOYSA-L Carbonate Chemical compound [O-]C([O-])=O BVKZGUZCCUSVTD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 229920002134 Carboxymethyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 108010001857 Cell Surface Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000000844 Cell Surface Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108050000299 Chemokine receptor Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241001647372 Chlamydia pneumoniae Species 0.000 description 2
- 108020004394 Complementary RNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000711573 Coronaviridae Species 0.000 description 2
- MIKUYHXYGGJMLM-GIMIYPNGSA-N Crotonoside Natural products C1=NC2=C(N)NC(=O)N=C2N1[C@H]1O[C@@H](CO)[C@H](O)[C@@H]1O MIKUYHXYGGJMLM-GIMIYPNGSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102100033270 Cyclin-dependent kinase inhibitor 1 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 241000701022 Cytomegalovirus Species 0.000 description 2
- AUNGANRZJHBGPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N D-Lyxoflavin Natural products OCC(O)C(O)C(O)CN1C=2C=C(C)C(C)=CC=2N=C2C1=NC(=O)NC2=O AUNGANRZJHBGPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NYHBQMYGNKIUIF-UHFFFAOYSA-N D-guanosine Natural products C1=2NC(N)=NC(=O)C=2N=CN1C1OC(CO)C(O)C1O NYHBQMYGNKIUIF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-QTVWNMPRSA-N D-mannopyranose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-QTVWNMPRSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NOOLISFMXDJSKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N DL-menthol Chemical group CC(C)C1CCC(C)CC1O NOOLISFMXDJSKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XULFJDKZVHTRLG-JDVCJPALSA-N DOSPA trifluoroacetate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C(F)(F)F.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCCOCC(C[N+](C)(C)CCNC(=O)C(CCCNCCCN)NCCCN)OCCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC XULFJDKZVHTRLG-JDVCJPALSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000725619 Dengue virus Species 0.000 description 2
- LCGLNKUTAGEVQW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethyl ether Chemical compound COC LCGLNKUTAGEVQW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000255601 Drosophila melanogaster Species 0.000 description 2
- KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N EDTA Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000710188 Encephalomyocarditis virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000709661 Enterovirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000991587 Enterovirus C Species 0.000 description 2
- IAYPIBMASNFSPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene oxide Chemical compound C1CO1 IAYPIBMASNFSPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000233866 Fungi Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000531123 GB virus C Species 0.000 description 2
- 102100041003 Glutamate carboxypeptidase 2 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- DHMQDGOQFOQNFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycine Chemical compound NCC(O)=O DHMQDGOQFOQNFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- AEMRFAOFKBGASW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycolic acid Chemical class OCC(O)=O AEMRFAOFKBGASW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108090000288 Glycoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000003886 Glycoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 241000711549 Hepacivirus C Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000700721 Hepatitis B virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000724675 Hepatitis E virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 206010019771 Hepatitis F Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010019776 Hepatitis H Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000037262 Hepatitis delta Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 241000724709 Hepatitis delta virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000709721 Hepatovirus A Species 0.000 description 2
- NTYJJOPFIAHURM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Histamine Chemical compound NCCC1=CN=CN1 NTYJJOPFIAHURM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101000857677 Homo sapiens Runt-related transcription factor 1 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000598436 Human T-cell lymphotropic virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000701085 Human alphaherpesvirus 3 Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000701044 Human gammaherpesvirus 4 Species 0.000 description 2
- 241001502974 Human gammaherpesvirus 8 Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000713772 Human immunodeficiency virus 1 Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000701806 Human papillomavirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 101150017040 I gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000701460 JC polyomavirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 235000010643 Leucaena leucocephala Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 240000007472 Leucaena leucocephala Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000829100 Macaca mulatta polyomavirus 1 Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000712079 Measles morbillivirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000713869 Moloney murine leukemia virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000710908 Murray Valley encephalitis virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000186362 Mycobacterium leprae Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000187479 Mycobacterium tuberculosis Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000187917 Mycobacterium ulcerans Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000202934 Mycoplasma pneumoniae Species 0.000 description 2
- OVBPIULPVIDEAO-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-Pteroyl-L-glutaminsaeure Natural products C=1N=C2NC(N)=NC(=O)C2=NC=1CNC1=CC=C(C(=O)NC(CCC(O)=O)C(O)=O)C=C1 OVBPIULPVIDEAO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CMWTZPSULFXXJA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Naproxen Natural products C1=C(C(C)C(O)=O)C=CC2=CC(OC)=CC=C21 CMWTZPSULFXXJA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 235000021314 Palmitic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- KPKZJLCSROULON-QKGLWVMZSA-N Phalloidin Chemical compound N1C(=O)[C@@H]([C@@H](O)C)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](C[C@@](C)(O)CO)NC(=O)[C@H](C2)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@@H]3C[C@H](O)CN3C(=O)[C@@H]1CSC1=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1 KPKZJLCSROULON-QKGLWVMZSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ABLZXFCXXLZCGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorous acid Chemical class OP(O)=O ABLZXFCXXLZCGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000224016 Plasmodium Species 0.000 description 2
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000004372 Polyvinyl alcohol Substances 0.000 description 2
- 101710099377 Protein argonaute 2 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102100034207 Protein argonaute-2 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- RADKZDMFGJYCBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyridoxal Chemical compound CC1=NC=C(CO)C(C=O)=C1O RADKZDMFGJYCBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910004856 P—O—P Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 241000725643 Respiratory syncytial virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 102100025373 Runt-related transcription factor 1 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 229910020008 S(O) Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 241000700584 Simplexvirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 229920002125 Sokalan® Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 206010041896 St. Louis Encephalitis Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 241000191967 Staphylococcus aureus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000193998 Streptococcus pneumoniae Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000193996 Streptococcus pyogenes Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000710771 Tick-borne encephalitis virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 108060008682 Tumor Necrosis Factor Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000000852 Tumor Necrosis Factor-alpha Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 241000251539 Vertebrata <Metazoa> Species 0.000 description 2
- 229930003427 Vitamin E Natural products 0.000 description 2
- 241000710886 West Nile virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000710772 Yellow fever virus Species 0.000 description 2
- HIHOWBSBBDRPDW-PTHRTHQKSA-N [(3s,8s,9s,10r,13r,14s,17r)-10,13-dimethyl-17-[(2r)-6-methylheptan-2-yl]-2,3,4,7,8,9,11,12,14,15,16,17-dodecahydro-1h-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-3-yl] n-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]carbamate Chemical compound C1C=C2C[C@@H](OC(=O)NCCN(C)C)CC[C@]2(C)[C@@H]2[C@@H]1[C@@H]1CC[C@H]([C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)[C@@]1(C)CC2 HIHOWBSBBDRPDW-PTHRTHQKSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DUOPMEBLLUYTNT-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-acetyloxy-2-(acetyloxymethoxy)propyl] acetate Chemical compound CC(=O)OCOC(COC(C)=O)COC(C)=O DUOPMEBLLUYTNT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QVVLSVHZGVMJEK-UHFFFAOYSA-N [5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)-2-(phosphonooxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl] [5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methyl hydrogen phosphate Chemical compound O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1C1OC(COP(O)(O)=O)C(OP(O)(=O)OCC2C(CC(O2)N2C3=NC=NC(N)=C3N=C2)O)C1 QVVLSVHZGVMJEK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960001138 acetylsalicylic acid Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 230000002378 acidificating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000013543 active substance Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000004414 alkyl thio group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 210000003484 anatomy Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000010171 animal model Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000002178 anthracenyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC2=CC3=CC=CC=C3C=C12)* 0.000 description 2
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003613 bile acid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052796 boron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 125000002837 carbocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 150000001721 carbon Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 description 2
- 239000011203 carbon fibre reinforced carbon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000010948 carboxy methyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 125000002057 carboxymethyl group Chemical group [H]OC(=O)C([H])([H])[*] 0.000 description 2
- POIUWJQBRNEFGX-XAMSXPGMSA-N cathelicidin Chemical compound C([C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(C)C)C1=CC=CC=C1 POIUWJQBRNEFGX-XAMSXPGMSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000001767 cationic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000001768 cations Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000004663 cell proliferation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002738 chelating agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 2
- BHQCQFFYRZLCQQ-OELDTZBJSA-N cholic acid Chemical compound C([C@H]1C[C@H]2O)[C@H](O)CC[C@]1(C)[C@@H]1[C@@H]2[C@@H]2CC[C@H]([C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C)[C@@]2(C)[C@@H](O)C1 BHQCQFFYRZLCQQ-OELDTZBJSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000004587 chromatography analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000084 colloidal system Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000004093 cyano group Chemical group *C#N 0.000 description 2
- NNBZCPXTIHJBJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N decalin Chemical compound C1CCCC2CCCCC21 NNBZCPXTIHJBJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000003413 degradative effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000412 dendrimer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920000736 dendritic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229940009976 deoxycholate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- KXGVEGMKQFWNSR-LLQZFEROSA-M deoxycholate Chemical compound C([C@H]1CC2)[C@H](O)CC[C@]1(C)[C@@H]1[C@@H]2[C@@H]2CC[C@H]([C@@H](CCC([O-])=O)C)[C@@]2(C)[C@@H](O)C1 KXGVEGMKQFWNSR-LLQZFEROSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000001982 diacylglycerols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000005265 dialkylamine group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 239000001177 diphosphate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000009509 drug development Methods 0.000 description 2
- 210000002472 endoplasmic reticulum Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 210000001163 endosome Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000003623 enhancer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003925 fat Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000019197 fats Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 150000002191 fatty alcohols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- GNBHRKFJIUUOQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorescein Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC=C(O)C=C1OC1=CC(O)=CC=C21 GNBHRKFJIUUOQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960000304 folic acid Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 150000002224 folic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000004108 freeze drying Methods 0.000 description 2
- WIGCFUFOHFEKBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N gamma-tocopherol Natural products CC(C)CCCC(C)CCCC(C)CCCC1CCC2C(C)C(O)C(C)C(C)C2O1 WIGCFUFOHFEKBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000037440 gene silencing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012226 gene silencing method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 235000021472 generally recognized as safe Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-O guanidinium Chemical compound NC(N)=[NH2+] ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-O 0.000 description 2
- 229940029575 guanosine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229960003160 hyaluronic acid Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000009396 hybridization Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000002460 imidazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 210000000987 immune system Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- USSYUMHVHQSYNA-SLDJZXPVSA-N indolicidin Chemical compound CC[C@H](C)[C@H](N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N1CCC[C@H]1C(=O)N[C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(N)=O)CC1=CNC2=CC=CC=C12 USSYUMHVHQSYNA-SLDJZXPVSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910001411 inorganic cation Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- CDAISMWEOUEBRE-GPIVLXJGSA-N inositol Chemical compound O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H]1O CDAISMWEOUEBRE-GPIVLXJGSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NOESYZHRGYRDHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N insulin Chemical compound N1C(=O)C(NC(=O)C(CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)CN)C(C)CC)CSSCC(C(NC(CO)C(=O)NC(CC(C)C)C(=O)NC(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)C(=O)NC(CCC(N)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(C)C)C(=O)NC(CCC(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(N)=O)C(=O)NC(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)C(=O)NC(CSSCC(NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(C)NC(=O)C(CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC=2NC=NC=2)NC(=O)C(CO)NC(=O)CNC2=O)C(=O)NCC(=O)NC(CCC(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)NCC(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC=CC=3)C(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC=CC=3)C(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC(O)=CC=3)C(=O)NC(C(C)O)C(=O)N3C(CCC3)C(=O)NC(CCCCN)C(=O)NC(C)C(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(N)=O)C(O)=O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)CC)NC(=O)C(CO)NC(=O)C(C(C)O)NC(=O)C1CSSCC2NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)C(CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(CC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)C(N)CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(C)C)CC1=CN=CN1 NOESYZHRGYRDHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108010044426 integrins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 238000007918 intramuscular administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000001449 isopropyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- JVTAAEKCZFNVCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N lactic acid Chemical class CC(O)C(O)=O JVTAAEKCZFNVCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000002634 lipophilic molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000006166 lysate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 210000001161 mammalian embryo Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940041616 menthol Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 125000004184 methoxymethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])OC([H])([H])* 0.000 description 2
- LXCFILQKKLGQFO-UHFFFAOYSA-N methylparaben Chemical compound COC(=O)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 LXCFILQKKLGQFO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- YACKEPLHDIMKIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N methylphosphonic acid Chemical compound CP(O)(O)=O YACKEPLHDIMKIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960004857 mitomycin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 150000002772 monosaccharides Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 2
- WQEPLUUGTLDZJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-Pentadecanoic acid Natural products CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O WQEPLUUGTLDZJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960002009 naproxen Drugs 0.000 description 2
- CMWTZPSULFXXJA-VIFPVBQESA-M naproxen(1-) Chemical compound C1=C([C@H](C)C([O-])=O)C=CC2=CC(OC)=CC=C21 CMWTZPSULFXXJA-VIFPVBQESA-M 0.000 description 2
- 125000004433 nitrogen atom Chemical group N* 0.000 description 2
- 108091027963 non-coding RNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000042567 non-coding RNA Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 229940049964 oleate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 150000002892 organic cations Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000003933 pentacenyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC2=CC3=CC4=CC5=CC=CC=C5C=C4C=C3C=C12)* 0.000 description 2
- UEZVMMHDMIWARA-UHFFFAOYSA-M phosphonate Chemical group [O-]P(=O)=O UEZVMMHDMIWARA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 150000008298 phosphoramidates Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- PTMHPRAIXMAOOB-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphoramidic acid Chemical class NP(O)(O)=O PTMHPRAIXMAOOB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LFGREXWGYUGZLY-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphoryl Chemical class [P]=O LFGREXWGYUGZLY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000004962 physiological condition Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920001308 poly(aminoacid) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000008488 polyadenylation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920000447 polyanionic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920000223 polyglycerol Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920002451 polyvinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000011148 porous material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003389 potentiating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- WGYKZJWCGVVSQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N propylamine Chemical compound CCCN WGYKZJWCGVVSQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QELSKZZBTMNZEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N propylparaben Chemical compound CCCOC(=O)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 QELSKZZBTMNZEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000000746 purification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000004219 purine nucleobase group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000000561 purinyl group Chemical group N1=C(N=C2N=CNC2=C1)* 0.000 description 2
- BBEAQIROQSPTKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyrene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C=CC3=CC=CC4=CC=C1C2=C43 BBEAQIROQSPTKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000001725 pyrenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000000719 pyrrolidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000014493 regulation of gene expression Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229960002477 riboflavin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 235000019192 riboflavin Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000002151 riboflavin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003161 ribonuclease inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000003290 ribose derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229920002477 rna polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000003441 saturated fatty acids Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 150000004671 saturated fatty acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- CDAISMWEOUEBRE-UHFFFAOYSA-N scyllo-inosotol Natural products OC1C(O)C(O)C(O)C(O)C1O CDAISMWEOUEBRE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052711 selenium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000005063 solubilization Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007928 solubilization Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000527 sonication Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000009870 specific binding Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229940063673 spermidine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 150000003408 sphingolipids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000006641 stabilisation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000011105 stabilization Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007858 starting material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940031000 streptococcus pneumoniae Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000007920 subcutaneous administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- RAHZWNYVWXNFOC-UHFFFAOYSA-N sulfur dioxide Inorganic materials O=S=O RAHZWNYVWXNFOC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000001935 tetracenyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC2=CC3=CC4=CC=CC=C4C=C3C=C12)* 0.000 description 2
- 239000005451 thionucleotide Substances 0.000 description 2
- UMGDCJDMYOKAJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N thiourea Chemical compound NC(N)=S UMGDCJDMYOKAJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000001988 toxicity Effects 0.000 description 2
- 231100000419 toxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 2
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000003626 triacylglycerols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000001226 triphosphate Substances 0.000 description 2
- DCXXMTOCNZCJGO-UHFFFAOYSA-N tristearoylglycerol Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)COC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC DCXXMTOCNZCJGO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000701161 unidentified adenovirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 239000002691 unilamellar liposome Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000015112 vegetable and seed oil Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000008158 vegetable oil Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000035899 viability Effects 0.000 description 2
- 235000019165 vitamin E Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000011709 vitamin E Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940046009 vitamin E Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229940051021 yellow-fever virus Drugs 0.000 description 2
- DTGKSKDOIYIVQL-WEDXCCLWSA-N (+)-borneol Chemical group C1C[C@@]2(C)[C@@H](O)C[C@@H]1C2(C)C DTGKSKDOIYIVQL-WEDXCCLWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DNIAPMSPPWPWGF-VKHMYHEASA-N (+)-propylene glycol Chemical group C[C@H](O)CO DNIAPMSPPWPWGF-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 1
- REPVLJRCJUVQFA-UHFFFAOYSA-N (-)-isopinocampheol Chemical group C1C(O)C(C)C2C(C)(C)C1C2 REPVLJRCJUVQFA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LVUCQZQLDPFLBJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N (2-cyano-3-methyl-2-propan-2-ylbutyl)peroxyphosphonamidous acid Chemical group CC(C)C(C(C)C)(C#N)COOP(N)O LVUCQZQLDPFLBJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-REOHCLBHSA-N (2S)-2-Amino-3-hydroxypropansäure Chemical compound OC[C@H](N)C(O)=O MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JNYAEWCLZODPBN-JGWLITMVSA-N (2r,3r,4s)-2-[(1r)-1,2-dihydroxyethyl]oxolane-3,4-diol Chemical compound OC[C@@H](O)[C@H]1OC[C@H](O)[C@H]1O JNYAEWCLZODPBN-JGWLITMVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MDKGKXOCJGEUJW-VIFPVBQESA-N (2s)-2-[4-(thiophene-2-carbonyl)phenyl]propanoic acid Chemical compound C1=CC([C@@H](C(O)=O)C)=CC=C1C(=O)C1=CC=CS1 MDKGKXOCJGEUJW-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- XUNKPNYCNUKOAU-VXJRNSOOSA-N (2s)-2-[[(2s)-2-[[(2s)-2-[[(2s)-2-[[(2s)-2-[[(2s)-2-[[(2s)-2-[[(2s)-2-[[(2s)-2-amino-5-(diaminomethylideneamino)pentanoyl]amino]-5-(diaminomethylideneamino)pentanoyl]amino]-5-(diaminomethylideneamino)pentanoyl]amino]-5-(diaminomethylideneamino)pentanoyl]a Chemical compound NC(N)=NCCC[C@H](N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCN=C(N)N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCN=C(N)N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCN=C(N)N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCN=C(N)N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCN=C(N)N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCN=C(N)N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCN=C(N)N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCN=C(N)N)C(O)=O XUNKPNYCNUKOAU-VXJRNSOOSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LOGFVTREOLYCPF-KXNHARMFSA-N (2s,3r)-2-[[(2r)-1-[(2s)-2,6-diaminohexanoyl]pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]amino]-3-hydroxybutanoic acid Chemical compound C[C@@H](O)[C@@H](C(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H]1CCCN1C(=O)[C@@H](N)CCCCN LOGFVTREOLYCPF-KXNHARMFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KJTPWUVVLPCPJD-AUWJEWJLSA-N (2z)-7-amino-2-[(4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylphenyl)methylidene]-5,6-dimethoxy-3h-inden-1-one Chemical compound O=C1C=2C(N)=C(OC)C(OC)=CC=2C\C1=C\C1=CC(C)=C(O)C(C)=C1 KJTPWUVVLPCPJD-AUWJEWJLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BHQCQFFYRZLCQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N (3alpha,5alpha,7alpha,12alpha)-3,7,12-trihydroxy-cholan-24-oic acid Natural products OC1CC2CC(O)CCC2(C)C2C1C1CCC(C(CCC(O)=O)C)C1(C)C(O)C2 BHQCQFFYRZLCQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MXYDYSQZZPJVJD-MAZCIEHSSA-N (6z,9z,28z,31z)-heptatriaconta-6,9,28,31-tetraen-19-ol Chemical compound CCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCCCCCC(O)CCCCCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCC MXYDYSQZZPJVJD-MAZCIEHSSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OYHQOLUKZRVURQ-NTGFUMLPSA-N (9Z,12Z)-9,10,12,13-tetratritiooctadeca-9,12-dienoic acid Chemical compound C(CCCCCCC\C(=C(/C\C(=C(/CCCCC)\[3H])\[3H])\[3H])\[3H])(=O)O OYHQOLUKZRVURQ-NTGFUMLPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000008 (C1-C10) alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- WRIDQFICGBMAFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N (E)-8-Octadecenoic acid Natural products CCCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCC(O)=O WRIDQFICGBMAFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VDVMOGXIBBDZNI-DLEQIPTRSA-N (Z)-octadec-9-enoic acid propane-1,2,3-triol Chemical compound OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O VDVMOGXIBBDZNI-DLEQIPTRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010031343 (lysyl-phenylalanyl-phenylalanyl)3-lysine Proteins 0.000 description 1
- AVZIYOYFVVSTGQ-RBWRNIRVSA-N (z)-octadec-9-enoic acid;propane-1,2,3-triol Chemical compound OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O AVZIYOYFVVSTGQ-RBWRNIRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FJXSLZRUXGTLPF-HKIWRJGFSA-N (z)-octadec-9-enoic acid;propane-1,2,3-triol Chemical compound OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O FJXSLZRUXGTLPF-HKIWRJGFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IIZBNUQFTQVTGU-PTTKHPGGSA-N (z)-octadec-9-enoic acid;propane-1,2,3-triol Chemical compound OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O IIZBNUQFTQVTGU-PTTKHPGGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LVGUZGTVOIAKKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane Chemical compound FCC(F)(F)F LVGUZGTVOIAKKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000000178 1,2,4-triazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- CITHEXJVPOWHKC-UUWRZZSWSA-N 1,2-di-O-myristoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCC CITHEXJVPOWHKC-UUWRZZSWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FVXDQWZBHIXIEJ-LNDKUQBDSA-N 1,2-di-[(9Z,12Z)-octadecadienoyl]-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCC FVXDQWZBHIXIEJ-LNDKUQBDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SLKDGVPOSSLUAI-PGUFJCEWSA-N 1,2-dihexadecanoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine zwitterion Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP(O)(=O)OCCN)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC SLKDGVPOSSLUAI-PGUFJCEWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZIZMDHZLHJBNSQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2-dihydrophenazine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N=C(C=CCC3)C3=NC2=C1 ZIZMDHZLHJBNSQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SNKAWJBJQDLSFF-NVKMUCNASA-N 1,2-dioleoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC SNKAWJBJQDLSFF-NVKMUCNASA-N 0.000 description 1
- TZCPCKNHXULUIY-RGULYWFUSA-N 1,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoserine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP(O)(=O)OC[C@H](N)C(O)=O)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC TZCPCKNHXULUIY-RGULYWFUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WNXJIVFYUVYPPR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-dioxolane Chemical compound C1COCO1 WNXJIVFYUVYPPR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YPFDHNVEDLHUCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-propanediol Chemical group OCCCO YPFDHNVEDLHUCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940035437 1,3-propanediol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- PXYVJPKAFCXHPQ-QYCRHRGJSA-N 1-[2,2-bis[(9z,12z)-octadeca-9,12-dienyl]-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl]-n-methylmethanamine Chemical compound CCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCCCCCC1(CCCCCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCC)OCC(CNC)O1 PXYVJPKAFCXHPQ-QYCRHRGJSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JRLOEMCOOZSCQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-[3-(2-quinolinylmethoxy)phenyl]-1-hexanol Chemical compound CCCCCC(O)C1=CC=CC(OCC=2N=C3C=CC=CC3=CC=2)=C1 JRLOEMCOOZSCQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MZMNEDXVUJLQAF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-o-tert-butyl 2-o-methyl 4-hydroxypyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxylate Chemical compound COC(=O)C1CC(O)CN1C(=O)OC(C)(C)C MZMNEDXVUJLQAF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RZRNAYUHWVFMIP-KTKRTIGZSA-N 1-oleoylglycerol Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(O)CO RZRNAYUHWVFMIP-KTKRTIGZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FPIPGXGPPPQFEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 13-cis retinol Natural products OCC=C(C)C=CC=C(C)C=CC1=C(C)CCCC1(C)C FPIPGXGPPPQFEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NVKAWKQGWWIWPM-ABEVXSGRSA-N 17-β-hydroxy-5-α-Androstan-3-one Chemical compound C1C(=O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@H]3CC[C@](C)([C@H](CC4)O)[C@@H]4[C@@H]3CC[C@H]21 NVKAWKQGWWIWPM-ABEVXSGRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101150028074 2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- UTQNKKSJPHTPBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2,2-trichloroethanone Chemical group ClC(Cl)(Cl)[C]=O UTQNKKSJPHTPBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YQTCQNIPQMJNTI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2-dimethylpropan-1-one Chemical group CC(C)(C)[C]=O YQTCQNIPQMJNTI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VEPOHXYIFQMVHW-XOZOLZJESA-N 2,3-dihydroxybutanedioic acid (2S,3S)-3,4-dimethyl-2-phenylmorpholine Chemical compound OC(C(O)C(O)=O)C(O)=O.C[C@H]1[C@@H](OCCN1C)c1ccccc1 VEPOHXYIFQMVHW-XOZOLZJESA-N 0.000 description 1
- VAPDZNUFNKUROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,4,6-triiodophenol Chemical compound OC1=C(I)C=C(I)C=C1I VAPDZNUFNKUROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MPXDAIBTYWGBSL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,4-difluoro-1-methylbenzene Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(F)C=C1F MPXDAIBTYWGBSL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001917 2,4-dinitrophenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(=C([H])C(=C1*)[N+]([O-])=O)[N+]([O-])=O 0.000 description 1
- WYDKPTZGVLTYPG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,8-diamino-3,7-dihydropurin-6-one Chemical compound N1C(N)=NC(=O)C2=C1N=C(N)N2 WYDKPTZGVLTYPG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IZGFERLHOCMZQF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(10h-phenoxazin-1-yloxy)ethanamine Chemical compound O1C2=CC=CC=C2NC2=C1C=CC=C2OCCN IZGFERLHOCMZQF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AZUHIVLOSAPWDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(1h-imidazol-2-yl)-1h-imidazole Chemical compound C1=CNC(C=2NC=CN=2)=N1 AZUHIVLOSAPWDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FDZGOVDEFRJXFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(3-aminopropyl)-7h-purin-6-amine Chemical compound NCCCC1=NC(N)=C2NC=NC2=N1 FDZGOVDEFRJXFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GYBYENDYMBEUMS-QYCRHRGJSA-N 2-[2,2-bis[(9z,12z)-octadeca-9,12-dienyl]-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl]-n-methylethanamine Chemical compound CCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCCCCCC1(CCCCCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCC)OCC(CCNC)O1 GYBYENDYMBEUMS-QYCRHRGJSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OIQOAYVCKAHSEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[2,3-bis(2-hydroxyethoxy)propoxy]ethanol;hexadecanoic acid;octadecanoic acid Chemical compound OCCOCC(OCCO)COCCO.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O OIQOAYVCKAHSEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HTOVHZGIBCAAJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-2-propyl-1h-purin-6-one Chemical compound CCCC1(N)NC(=O)C2=NC=NC2=N1 HTOVHZGIBCAAJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VKRFXNXJOJJPAO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-4-(2,4-dioxo-1h-pyrimidin-3-yl)butanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CCN1C(=O)C=CNC1=O VKRFXNXJOJJPAO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FZWGECJQACGGTI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-7-methyl-1,7-dihydro-6H-purin-6-one Chemical compound NC1=NC(O)=C2N(C)C=NC2=N1 FZWGECJQACGGTI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KJJPLEZQSCZCKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-aminopropane-1,3-diol Chemical group OCC(N)CO KJJPLEZQSCZCKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MWBWWFOAEOYUST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-aminopurine Chemical compound NC1=NC=C2N=CNC2=N1 MWBWWFOAEOYUST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CFWRDBDJAOHXSH-SECBINFHSA-N 2-azaniumylethyl [(2r)-2,3-diacetyloxypropyl] phosphate Chemical compound CC(=O)OC[C@@H](OC(C)=O)COP(O)(=O)OCCN CFWRDBDJAOHXSH-SECBINFHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- TWJNQYPJQDRXPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-cyanobenzohydrazide Chemical compound NNC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C#N TWJNQYPJQDRXPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- USCCECGPGBGFOM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-propyl-7h-purin-6-amine Chemical compound CCCC1=NC(N)=C2NC=NC2=N1 USCCECGPGBGFOM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LQJBNNIYVWPHFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 20:1omega9c fatty acid Natural products CCCCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(O)=O LQJBNNIYVWPHFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108020005345 3' Untranslated Regions Proteins 0.000 description 1
- UMCMPZBLKLEWAF-BCTGSCMUSA-N 3-[(3-cholamidopropyl)dimethylammonio]propane-1-sulfonate Chemical compound C([C@H]1C[C@H]2O)[C@H](O)CC[C@]1(C)[C@@H]1[C@@H]2[C@@H]2CC[C@H]([C@@H](CCC(=O)NCCC[N+](C)(C)CCCS([O-])(=O)=O)C)[C@@]2(C)[C@@H](O)C1 UMCMPZBLKLEWAF-BCTGSCMUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ILBCSMHIEBDGJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[4-(3-aminopropylamino)butylamino]propylcarbamic acid Chemical compound NCCCNCCCCNCCCNC(O)=O ILBCSMHIEBDGJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KOLPWZCZXAMXKS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methylcytosine Chemical compound CN1C(N)=CC=NC1=O KOLPWZCZXAMXKS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VPLZGVOSFFCKFC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyluracil Chemical compound CN1C(=O)C=CNC1=O VPLZGVOSFFCKFC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LOJNBPNACKZWAI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-nitro-1h-pyrrole Chemical compound [O-][N+](=O)C=1C=CNC=1 LOJNBPNACKZWAI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HIAJCGFYHIANNA-QIZZZRFXSA-N 3b-Hydroxy-5-cholenoic acid Chemical compound C1C=C2C[C@@H](O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@@H]2[C@@H]1[C@@H]1CC[C@H]([C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C)[C@@]1(C)CC2 HIAJCGFYHIANNA-QIZZZRFXSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FWMNVWWHGCHHJJ-SKKKGAJSSA-N 4-amino-1-[(2r)-6-amino-2-[[(2r)-2-[[(2r)-2-[[(2r)-2-amino-3-phenylpropanoyl]amino]-3-phenylpropanoyl]amino]-4-methylpentanoyl]amino]hexanoyl]piperidine-4-carboxylic acid Chemical compound C([C@H](C(=O)N[C@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N1CCC(N)(CC1)C(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](N)CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 FWMNVWWHGCHHJJ-SKKKGAJSSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000549 4-dimethylaminophenol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- VHYFNPMBLIVWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-dimethylaminopyridine Substances CN(C)C1=CC=NC=C1 VHYFNPMBLIVWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PHAFOFIVSNSAPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-fluoro-6-methyl-1h-benzimidazole Chemical compound CC1=CC(F)=C2NC=NC2=C1 PHAFOFIVSNSAPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940090248 4-hydroxybenzoic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- QCXGJTGMGJOYDP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-methyl-1h-benzimidazole Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC2=C1N=CN2 QCXGJTGMGJOYDP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101150017816 40 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 125000004032 5'-inosinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- WPQLFQWYPPALOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-(2-aminopropyl)-1h-pyrimidine-2,4-dione Chemical compound CC(N)CC1=CNC(=O)NC1=O WPQLFQWYPPALOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LMNPKIOZMGYQIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-(trifluoromethyl)-1h-pyrimidine-2,4-dione Chemical compound FC(F)(F)C1=CNC(=O)NC1=O LMNPKIOZMGYQIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000040125 5-hydroxytryptamine receptor family Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091032151 5-hydroxytryptamine receptor family Proteins 0.000 description 1
- KELXHQACBIUYSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-methoxy-1h-pyrimidine-2,4-dione Chemical compound COC1=CNC(=O)NC1=O KELXHQACBIUYSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LRSASMSXMSNRBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-methylcytosine Chemical compound CC1=CNC(=O)N=C1N LRSASMSXMSNRBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OZFPSOBLQZPIAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-nitro-1h-indole Chemical compound [O-][N+](=O)C1=CC=C2NC=CC2=C1 OZFPSOBLQZPIAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OHILKUISCGPRMQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)-1h-pyrimidin-2-one Chemical compound NC1=NC(=O)NC=C1C(F)(F)F OHILKUISCGPRMQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CKOMXBHMKXXTNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-methyladenine Chemical compound CNC1=NC=NC2=C1N=CN2 CKOMXBHMKXXTNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VVZVRYMWEIFUEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-methylpurin-6-amine Chemical compound CC1(N)N=CN=C2N=CN=C12 VVZVRYMWEIFUEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CLGFIVUFZRGQRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7,8-dihydro-8-oxoguanine Chemical compound O=C1NC(N)=NC2=C1NC(=O)N2 CLGFIVUFZRGQRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LHCPRYRLDOSKHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7-deaza-8-aza-adenine Chemical compound NC1=NC=NC2=C1C=NN2 LHCPRYRLDOSKHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PFUVOLUPRFCPMN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7h-purine-6,8-diamine Chemical compound C1=NC(N)=C2NC(N)=NC2=N1 PFUVOLUPRFCPMN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RGKBRPAAQSHTED-UHFFFAOYSA-N 8-oxoadenine Chemical compound NC1=NC=NC2=C1NC(=O)N2 RGKBRPAAQSHTED-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QSBYPNXLFMSGKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-Heptadecensaeure Natural products CCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(O)=O QSBYPNXLFMSGKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010062307 AAVALLPAVLLALLAP Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000251468 Actinopterygii Species 0.000 description 1
- 229920001817 Agar Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 108091010877 Allograft inflammatory factor 1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-XLOQQCSPSA-N Alpha-Lactose Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](CO)O[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-XLOQQCSPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005995 Aluminium silicate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108090000531 Amidohydrolases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004092 Amidohydrolases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091029845 Aminoallyl nucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108700042778 Antimicrobial Peptides Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000044503 Antimicrobial Peptides Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020005544 Antisense RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100037435 Antiviral innate immune response receptor RIG-I Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710127675 Antiviral innate immune response receptor RIG-I Proteins 0.000 description 1
- IYMAXBFPHPZYIK-BQBZGAKWSA-N Arg-Gly-Asp Chemical compound NC(N)=NCCC[C@H](N)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(O)=O IYMAXBFPHPZYIK-BQBZGAKWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004475 Arginine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000416162 Astragalus gummifer Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010032963 Ataxin-1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010032953 Ataxin-7 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010032951 Ataxin2 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000282672 Ateles sp. Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000972773 Aulopiformes Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000271566 Aves Species 0.000 description 1
- 108700020463 BRCA1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000036365 BRCA1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101150072950 BRCA1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108060000903 Beta-catenin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000157302 Bison bison athabascae Species 0.000 description 1
- 229940122361 Bisphosphonate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Boron Chemical compound [B] ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000283690 Bos taurus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100263837 Bovine ephemeral fever virus (strain BB7721) beta gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004255 Butylated hydroxyanisole Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004322 Butylated hydroxytoluene Substances 0.000 description 1
- NLZUEZXRPGMBCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butylhydroxytoluene Chemical compound CC1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=C(O)C(C(C)(C)C)=C1 NLZUEZXRPGMBCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101710155834 C-C motif chemokine 7 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- YDNKGFDKKRUKPY-JHOUSYSJSA-N C16 ceramide Natural products CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)N[C@@H](CO)[C@H](O)C=CCCCCCCCCCCCCC YDNKGFDKKRUKPY-JHOUSYSJSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QYOVMAREBTZLBT-KTKRTIGZSA-N CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCO Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCO QYOVMAREBTZLBT-KTKRTIGZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101150050712 CRK gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100381481 Caenorhabditis elegans baz-2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100504320 Caenorhabditis elegans mcp-1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100346155 Caenorhabditis elegans oma-2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100036290 Calcium-binding mitochondrial carrier protein SCaMC-1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000282465 Canis Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000282461 Canis lupus Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000004215 Carbon black (E152) Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108050000084 Caveolin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000009193 Caveolin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108050004290 Cecropin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000282693 Cercopithecidae Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000282994 Cervidae Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010055166 Chemokine CCL5 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000009410 Chemokine receptor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010012236 Chemokines Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004380 Cholic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108091026890 Coding region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091033380 Coding strand Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091035707 Consensus sequence Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000699800 Cricetinae Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000004971 Cross linker Substances 0.000 description 1
- 240000008067 Cucumis sativus Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000010799 Cucumis sativus var sativus Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 108010069514 Cyclic Peptides Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000001189 Cyclic Peptides Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108050006400 Cyclin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010068192 Cyclin A Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090000259 Cyclin D Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090000257 Cyclin E Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100033233 Cyclin-dependent kinase inhibitor 1B Human genes 0.000 description 1
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N D-Glucitol Natural products OC[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N D-OH-Asp Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC(O)=O CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHZGCJCMOBCMKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N D-mannomethylose Natural products CC1OC(O)C(O)C(O)C1O SHZGCJCMOBCMKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108090000323 DNA Topoisomerases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091008102 DNA aptamers Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000033616 DNA repair Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004568 DNA-binding Effects 0.000 description 1
- 201000008163 Dentatorubral pallidoluysian atrophy Diseases 0.000 description 1
- FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-JCYAYHJZSA-N Dextrotartaric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)=O FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-JCYAYHJZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RWSOTUBLDIXVET-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dihydrogen sulfide Chemical class S RWSOTUBLDIXVET-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000271571 Dromaius novaehollandiae Species 0.000 description 1
- 101150029707 ERBB2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150039808 Egfr gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004533 Endonucleases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108050009340 Endothelin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000002045 Endothelin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101100316840 Enterobacteria phage P4 Beta gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000283086 Equidae Species 0.000 description 1
- 108700039887 Essential Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene glycol Chemical class OCCO LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000206602 Eukaryota Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000282324 Felis Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000282326 Felis catus Species 0.000 description 1
- 102100035427 Forkhead box protein O1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formaldehyde Chemical compound O=C WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940123457 Free radical scavenger Drugs 0.000 description 1
- PNNNRSAQSRJVSB-SLPGGIOYSA-N Fucose Natural products C[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)C=O PNNNRSAQSRJVSB-SLPGGIOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108091006027 G proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000030782 GTP binding Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091000058 GTP-Binding Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000287828 Gallus gallus Species 0.000 description 1
- 108700039691 Genetic Promoter Regions Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101710183768 Glutamate carboxypeptidase 2 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- ZWZWYGMENQVNFU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerophosphorylserin Natural products OC(=O)C(N)COP(O)(=O)OCC(O)CO ZWZWYGMENQVNFU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004471 Glycine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010009202 Growth Factor Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920002907 Guar gum Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 108020005004 Guide RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920000569 Gum karaya Polymers 0.000 description 1
- SQUHHTBVTRBESD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hexa-Ac-myo-Inositol Natural products CC(=O)OC1C(OC(C)=O)C(OC(C)=O)C(OC(C)=O)C(OC(C)=O)C1OC(C)=O SQUHHTBVTRBESD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101100164984 Homo sapiens ATXN3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000944380 Homo sapiens Cyclin-dependent kinase inhibitor 1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000944361 Homo sapiens Cyclin-dependent kinase inhibitor 1B Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000877727 Homo sapiens Forkhead box protein O1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000892862 Homo sapiens Glutamate carboxypeptidase 2 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000746367 Homo sapiens Granulocyte colony-stimulating factor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100464893 Homo sapiens PPM1D gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000613490 Homo sapiens Paired box protein Pax-3 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000947178 Homo sapiens Platelet basic protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000701517 Homo sapiens Putative protein ATXN8OS Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001061518 Homo sapiens RNA-binding protein FUS Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000574648 Homo sapiens Retinoid-inducible serine carboxypeptidase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000659267 Homo sapiens Tumor suppressor candidate 2 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- PMMYEEVYMWASQN-DMTCNVIQSA-N Hydroxyproline Chemical compound O[C@H]1CN[C@H](C(O)=O)C1 PMMYEEVYMWASQN-DMTCNVIQSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010091358 Hypoxanthine Phosphoribosyltransferase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- HEFNNWSXXWATRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ibuprofen Chemical compound CC(C)CC1=CC=C(C(C)C(O)=O)C=C1 HEFNNWSXXWATRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108060003951 Immunoglobulin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010061218 Inflammation Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108090001061 Insulin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100023915 Insulin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100034343 Integrase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710203526 Integrase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000008070 Interferon-gamma Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010074328 Interferon-gamma Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003777 Interleukin-1 beta Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000193 Interleukin-1 beta Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004310 Ion Channels Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101150041215 JNK gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150038517 JUN gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-UWTATZPHSA-N L-Aspartic acid Natural products OC(=O)[C@H](N)CC(O)=O CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-UWTATZPHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-BYPYZUCNSA-P L-argininium(2+) Chemical compound NC(=[NH2+])NCCC[C@H]([NH3+])C(O)=O ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-BYPYZUCNSA-P 0.000 description 1
- CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-N L-aspartic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(O)=O CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHZGCJCMOBCMKK-DHVFOXMCSA-N L-fucopyranose Chemical compound C[C@@H]1OC(O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H]1O SHZGCJCMOBCMKK-DHVFOXMCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LRQKBLKVPFOOQJ-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-norleucine Chemical compound CCCC[C@H]([NH3+])C([O-])=O LRQKBLKVPFOOQJ-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N Lactose Natural products OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O[C@H]2[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)O[C@@H]2CO)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004166 Lanolin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000005639 Lauric acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- SMEROWZSTRWXGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithocholsaeure Natural products C1CC2CC(O)CCC2(C)C2C1C1CCC(C(CCC(O)=O)C)C1(C)CC2 SMEROWZSTRWXGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004472 Lysine Substances 0.000 description 1
- KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lysine Natural products NCCCCC(N)C(O)=O KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108060006687 MAP kinase kinase kinase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150018665 MAPK3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150023943 MCP-2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150078498 MYB gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000282553 Macaca Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000283923 Marmota monax Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010007013 Melanocyte-Stimulating Hormones Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010036176 Melitten Proteins 0.000 description 1
- AFVFQIVMOAPDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanesulfonic acid Chemical compound CS(O)(=O)=O AFVFQIVMOAPDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108060004795 Methyltransferase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091007780 MiR-122 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091030146 MiRBase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000029749 Microtubule Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091022875 Microtubule Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000015728 Mucins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010063954 Mucins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000699670 Mus sp. Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000282339 Mustela Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000021360 Myristic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- TUNFSRHWOTWDNC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Myristic acid Natural products CCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O TUNFSRHWOTWDNC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000251752 Myxine glutinosa Species 0.000 description 1
- SGSSKEDGVONRGC-UHFFFAOYSA-N N(2)-methylguanine Chemical compound O=C1NC(NC)=NC2=C1N=CN2 SGSSKEDGVONRGC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IJCKBIINTQEGLY-UHFFFAOYSA-N N(4)-acetylcytosine Chemical compound CC(=O)NC1=CC=NC(=O)N1 IJCKBIINTQEGLY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZMANZCXQSJIPKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-Diethylethanamine Substances CCN(CC)CC ZMANZCXQSJIPKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OVRNDRQMDRJTHS-CBQIKETKSA-N N-Acetyl-D-Galactosamine Chemical compound CC(=O)N[C@H]1[C@@H](O)O[C@H](CO)[C@H](O)[C@@H]1O OVRNDRQMDRJTHS-CBQIKETKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BACYUWVYYTXETD-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-Lauroylsarcosine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)N(C)CC(O)=O BACYUWVYYTXETD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MBLBDJOUHNCFQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-acetyl-D-galactosamine Natural products CC(=O)NC(C=O)C(O)C(O)C(O)CO MBLBDJOUHNCFQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CRJGESKKUOMBCT-VQTJNVASSA-N N-acetylsphinganine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)NC(C)=O CRJGESKKUOMBCT-VQTJNVASSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000003945 NF-kappa B Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010057466 NF-kappa B Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000737052 Naso hexacanthus Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000012902 Nervous system disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000025966 Neurological disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 102000004108 Neurotransmitter Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000590 Neurotransmitter Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- KYRVNWMVYQXFEU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nocodazole Chemical compound C1=C2NC(NC(=O)OC)=NC2=CC=C1C(=O)C1=CC=CS1 KYRVNWMVYQXFEU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108020003217 Nuclear RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000043141 Nuclear RNA Human genes 0.000 description 1
- WSDRAZIPGVLSNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N O.P(=O)(O)(O)O.O.O.P(=O)(O)(O)O Chemical group O.P(=O)(O)(O)O.O.O.P(=O)(O)(O)O WSDRAZIPGVLSNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WTAYIFXKJBMZLY-XZABIIKCSA-N OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O Chemical compound OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O WTAYIFXKJBMZLY-XZABIIKCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005642 Oleic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oleic acid Natural products CCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(O)=O ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108700020796 Oncogene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000283973 Oryctolagus cuniculus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101150109373 PPM1D gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100040891 Paired box protein Pax-3 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000282579 Pan Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000004264 Petrolatum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 101150045653 Pf4 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010009711 Phalloidine Proteins 0.000 description 1
- PCNDJXKNXGMECE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phenazine Natural products C1=CC=CC2=NC3=CC=CC=C3N=C21 PCNDJXKNXGMECE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108090000608 Phosphoric Monoester Hydrolases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004160 Phosphoric Monoester Hydrolases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229920001363 Polidocanol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920003171 Poly (ethylene oxide) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002556 Polyethylene Glycol 300 Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002565 Polyethylene Glycol 400 Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 108010020346 Polyglutamic Acid Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010050254 Presenilins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 244000028344 Primula vulgaris Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000016311 Primula vulgaris Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 108010050808 Procollagen Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100036691 Proliferating cell nuclear antigen Human genes 0.000 description 1
- DNIAPMSPPWPWGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Propylene glycol Chemical class CC(O)CO DNIAPMSPPWPWGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010060862 Prostate cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000000236 Prostatic Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 102000007327 Protamines Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010007568 Protamines Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229940124158 Protease/peptidase inhibitor Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 108010029485 Protein Isoforms Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000001708 Protein Isoforms Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000001253 Protein Kinase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000315 Protein Kinase C Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229930185560 Pseudouridine Natural products 0.000 description 1
- PTJWIQPHWPFNBW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pseudouridine C Natural products OC1C(O)C(CO)OC1C1=CNC(=O)NC1=O PTJWIQPHWPFNBW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000007615 Pulmonary Surfactant-Associated Protein A Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010007100 Pulmonary Surfactant-Associated Protein A Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150040459 RAS gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091034057 RNA (poly(A)) Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091008103 RNA aptamers Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000000574 RNA-Induced Silencing Complex Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010016790 RNA-Induced Silencing Complex Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100028469 RNA-binding protein FUS Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000292 RNA-binding protein FUS Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003890 RNA-binding protein FUS Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101150062264 Raf gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000700159 Rattus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100372762 Rattus norvegicus Flt1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100037486 Reverse transcriptase/ribonuclease H Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010083644 Ribonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000006382 Ribonucleases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000004389 Ribonucleoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010081734 Ribonucleoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091028664 Ribonucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091006627 SLC12A9 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091006463 SLC25A24 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150099493 STAT3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000277331 Salmonidae Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100228790 Schizosaccharomyces pombe (strain 972 / ATCC 24843) yip11 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Serine Natural products OCC(N)C(O)=O MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010056088 Somatostatin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000005157 Somatostatin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- HVUMOYIDDBPOLL-XWVZOOPGSA-N Sorbitan monostearate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@@H](O)[C@H]1OC[C@H](O)[C@H]1O HVUMOYIDDBPOLL-XWVZOOPGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000021355 Stearic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 241000934878 Sterculia Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000272534 Struthio camelus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000251576 Styela clava Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000282887 Suidae Species 0.000 description 1
- 229940100389 Sulfonylurea Drugs 0.000 description 1
- UCKMPCXJQFINFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulphide Chemical compound [S-2] UCKMPCXJQFINFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010002687 Survivin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tartaric acid Natural products [H+].[H+].[O-]C(=O)C(O)C(O)C([O-])=O FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108091036066 Three prime untranslated region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010061174 Thyrotropin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000011923 Thyrotropin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229920001615 Tragacanth Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 108700019146 Transgenes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100166027 Trichoplusia ni ascovirus 2c MCP-2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- GSEJCLTVZPLZKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Triethanolamine Chemical compound OCCN(CCO)CCO GSEJCLTVZPLZKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DTQVDTLACAAQTR-UHFFFAOYSA-M Trifluoroacetate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C(F)(F)F DTQVDTLACAAQTR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- BAECOWNUKCLBPZ-HIUWNOOHSA-N Triolein Natural products O([C@H](OCC(=O)CCCCCCC/C=C\CCCCCCCC)COC(=O)CCCCCCC/C=C\CCCCCCCC)C(=O)CCCCCCC/C=C\CCCCCCCC BAECOWNUKCLBPZ-HIUWNOOHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PHYFQTYBJUILEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Trioleoylglycerol Natural products CCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(OC(=O)CCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC)COC(=O)CCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC PHYFQTYBJUILEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108090000704 Tubulin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010091356 Tumor Protein p73 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010046308 Type II DNA Topoisomerases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010019530 Vascular Endothelial Growth Factors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- JXLYSJRDGCGARV-WWYNWVTFSA-N Vinblastine Natural products O=C(O[C@H]1[C@](O)(C(=O)OC)[C@@H]2N(C)c3c(cc(c(OC)c3)[C@]3(C(=O)OC)c4[nH]c5c(c4CCN4C[C@](O)(CC)C[C@H](C3)C4)cccc5)[C@@]32[C@H]2[C@@]1(CC)C=CCN2CC3)C JXLYSJRDGCGARV-WWYNWVTFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108020005202 Viral DNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108700005077 Viral Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108020000999 Viral RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- FPIPGXGPPPQFEQ-BOOMUCAASA-N Vitamin A Natural products OC/C=C(/C)\C=C\C=C(\C)/C=C/C1=C(C)CCCC1(C)C FPIPGXGPPPQFEQ-BOOMUCAASA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229930003270 Vitamin B Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 229930003448 Vitamin K Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 241000282485 Vulpes vulpes Species 0.000 description 1
- 101150077398 WNT-1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000269370 Xenopus <genus> Species 0.000 description 1
- CWRILEGKIAOYKP-SSDOTTSWSA-M [(2r)-3-acetyloxy-2-hydroxypropyl] 2-aminoethyl phosphate Chemical compound CC(=O)OC[C@@H](O)COP([O-])(=O)OCCN CWRILEGKIAOYKP-SSDOTTSWSA-M 0.000 description 1
- JCAQMQLAHNGVPY-UUOKFMHZSA-N [(2r,3s,4r,5r)-3,4-dihydroxy-5-(2,2,4-trioxo-1h-imidazo[4,5-c][1,2,6]thiadiazin-7-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methyl dihydrogen phosphate Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](COP(O)(O)=O)O[C@H]1N1C(NS(=O)(=O)NC2=O)=C2N=C1 JCAQMQLAHNGVPY-UUOKFMHZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ATBOMIWRCZXYSZ-XZBBILGWSA-N [1-[2,3-dihydroxypropoxy(hydroxy)phosphoryl]oxy-3-hexadecanoyloxypropan-2-yl] (9e,12e)-octadeca-9,12-dienoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(COP(O)(=O)OCC(O)CO)OC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C\C\C=C\CCCCC ATBOMIWRCZXYSZ-XZBBILGWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FGYYWCMRFGLJOB-MQWKRIRWSA-N [2,3-dihydroxypropoxy(hydroxy)phosphoryl] (2s)-2,6-diaminohexanoate Chemical compound NCCCC[C@H](N)C(=O)OP(O)(=O)OCC(O)CO FGYYWCMRFGLJOB-MQWKRIRWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NYDLOCKCVISJKK-WRBBJXAJSA-N [3-(dimethylamino)-2-[(z)-octadec-9-enoyl]oxypropyl] (z)-octadec-9-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(CN(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC NYDLOCKCVISJKK-WRBBJXAJSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HMNZFMSWFCAGGW-XPWSMXQVSA-N [3-[hydroxy(2-hydroxyethoxy)phosphoryl]oxy-2-[(e)-octadec-9-enoyl]oxypropyl] (e)-octadec-9-enoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C\CCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(COP(O)(=O)OCCO)OC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C\CCCCCCCC HMNZFMSWFCAGGW-XPWSMXQVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HTZKKVLICDYWHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N [5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methyl [5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)-2-(phosphonooxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl] hydrogen phosphate Chemical compound O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1C1OC(COP(O)(=O)OC2C(OC(C2)N2C(N=C(N)C=C2)=O)COP(O)(O)=O)C(O)C1 HTZKKVLICDYWHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YKTSYUJCYHOUJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N [O--].[Al+3].[Al+3].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-] Chemical compound [O--].[Al+3].[Al+3].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-] YKTSYUJCYHOUJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001241 acetals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetic acid Substances CC(O)=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XVIYCJDWYLJQBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetic acid;adamantane Chemical compound CC(O)=O.C1C(C2)CC3CC1CC2C3 XVIYCJDWYLJQBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000641 acridinyl group Chemical class C1(=CC=CC2=NC3=CC=CC=C3C=C12)* 0.000 description 1
- 230000033289 adaptive immune response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000005006 adaptive immune system Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 108091005764 adaptor proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000443 aerosol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004479 aerosol dispenser Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010419 agar Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000008272 agar Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940023476 agar Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 101150084233 ago2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 125000003172 aldehyde group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000001299 aldehydes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- PPQRONHOSHZGFQ-LMVFSUKVSA-N aldehydo-D-ribose 5-phosphate Chemical group OP(=O)(O)OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)C=O PPQRONHOSHZGFQ-LMVFSUKVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000010443 alginic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920000615 alginic acid Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000000783 alginic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960001126 alginic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000004781 alginic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005024 alkenyl aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005217 alkenylheteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000004703 alkoxides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004183 alkoxy alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000003545 alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004948 alkyl aryl alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000002877 alkyl aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000005215 alkyl ethers Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005213 alkyl heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000006350 alkyl thio alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000002168 alkylating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940100198 alkylating agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000005025 alkynylaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- FPIPGXGPPPQFEQ-OVSJKPMPSA-N all-trans-retinol Chemical compound OC\C=C(/C)\C=C\C=C(/C)\C=C\C1=C(C)CCCC1(C)C FPIPGXGPPPQFEQ-OVSJKPMPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001361 allenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 102000018568 alpha-Defensin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108050007802 alpha-defensin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- AWUCVROLDVIAJX-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-glycerophosphate Natural products OCC(O)COP(O)(O)=O AWUCVROLDVIAJX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000020661 alpha-linolenic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- DTOSIQBPPRVQHS-PDBXOOCHSA-N alpha-linolenic acid Chemical compound CC\C=C/C\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O DTOSIQBPPRVQHS-PDBXOOCHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000012211 aluminium silicate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- SNAAJJQQZSMGQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminum magnesium Chemical compound [Mg].[Al] SNAAJJQQZSMGQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001409 amidines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000002431 aminoalkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229960003473 androstanolone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000033115 angiogenesis Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940031955 anhydrous lanolin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000001450 anions Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000000844 anti-bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000840 anti-viral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000427 antigen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108091007433 antigens Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000036639 antigens Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 239000002246 antineoplastic agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003078 antioxidant effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003443 antiviral agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000006907 apoptotic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007900 aqueous suspension Substances 0.000 description 1
- ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N arginine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCCNC(N)=N ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010072041 arginyl-glycyl-aspartic acid Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 125000005018 aryl alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005015 aryl alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004104 aryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000010323 ascorbic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960005070 ascorbic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000011668 ascorbic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010044715 asialofetuin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229960005261 aspartic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229960000892 attapulgite Drugs 0.000 description 1
- RHISNKCGUDDGEG-UHFFFAOYSA-N bactenecin Chemical compound CCC(C)C1NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(C(C)CC)NC(=O)C(CCCN=C(N)N)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(N)CCCN=C(N)N)CSSCC(C(=O)NC(CCCN=C(N)N)C(O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(CCCN=C(N)N)NC1=O RHISNKCGUDDGEG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010016341 bactenecin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 244000052616 bacterial pathogen Species 0.000 description 1
- 108700041737 bcl-2 Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 235000013871 bee wax Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000012166 beeswax Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000012216 bentonite Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000440 bentonite Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000278 bentonite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- SVPXDRXYRYOSEX-UHFFFAOYSA-N bentoquatam Chemical compound O.O=[Si]=O.O=[Al]O[Al]=O SVPXDRXYRYOSEX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000686 benzalkonium chloride Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000003236 benzoyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- CADWTSSKOVRVJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzyl(dimethyl)azanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].C[NH+](C)CC1=CC=CC=C1 CADWTSSKOVRVJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WGDUUQDYDIIBKT-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-Pseudouridine Natural products OC1OC(CN2C=CC(=O)NC2=O)C(O)C1O WGDUUQDYDIIBKT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108050002883 beta-defensin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000012265 beta-defensin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 230000001588 bifunctional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003833 bile salt Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940093761 bile salts Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004166 bioassay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004071 biological effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002051 biphasic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000004663 bisphosphonates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000021324 borage oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- KGBXLFKZBHKPEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N boric acid Chemical compound OB(O)O KGBXLFKZBHKPEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004327 boric acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- CKDOCTFBFTVPSN-UHFFFAOYSA-N borneol Chemical group C1CC2(C)C(C)CC1C2(C)C CKDOCTFBFTVPSN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940116229 borneol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000000484 butyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 235000019282 butylated hydroxyanisole Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- CZBZUDVBLSSABA-UHFFFAOYSA-N butylated hydroxyanisole Chemical compound COC1=CC=C(O)C(C(C)(C)C)=C1.COC1=CC=C(O)C=C1C(C)(C)C CZBZUDVBLSSABA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940043253 butylated hydroxyanisole Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000010354 butylated hydroxytoluene Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940095259 butylated hydroxytoluene Drugs 0.000 description 1
- LDVVMCZRFWMZSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N captan Chemical compound C1C=CCC2C(=O)N(SC(Cl)(Cl)Cl)C(=O)C21 LDVVMCZRFWMZSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004202 carbamide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910002091 carbon monoxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000002915 carbonyl group Chemical group [*:2]C([*:1])=O 0.000 description 1
- 150000003857 carboxamides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 239000001768 carboxy methyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008112 carboxymethyl-cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- IVUMCTKHWDRRMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N carprofen Chemical compound C1=CC(Cl)=C[C]2C3=CC=C(C(C(O)=O)C)C=C3N=C21 IVUMCTKHWDRRMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003184 carprofen Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000010418 carrageenan Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920001525 carrageenan Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000000679 carrageenan Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940113118 carrageenan Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 108020001778 catalytic domains Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000003197 catalytic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 241001233037 catfish Species 0.000 description 1
- 108060001132 cathelicidin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000014509 cathelicidin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010046237 cecropin P1-LI Proteins 0.000 description 1
- PRIVBYDFWSFUFP-RJLJEYQFSA-N cecropin p1 Chemical compound O=C([C@H](CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H]([C@@H](C)CC)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H]([C@@H](C)CC)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CCCNC(N)=N)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCCN)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCCN)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCCN)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCCN)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CCCCN)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CO)[C@@H](C)O)[C@@H](C)CC)[C@@H](C)CC)NCC(=O)NCC(=O)N1CCC[C@H]1C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(O)=O PRIVBYDFWSFUFP-RJLJEYQFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000024245 cell differentiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000170 cell membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000004656 cell transport Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000002421 cell wall Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 235000010980 cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003086 cellulose ether Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006184 cellulose methylcellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- ZVEQCJWYRWKARO-UHFFFAOYSA-N ceramide Natural products CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)C(=O)NC(CO)C(O)C=CCCC=C(C)CCCCCCCCC ZVEQCJWYRWKARO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001783 ceramides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229930183167 cerebroside Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000001784 cerebrosides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000020221 chamomile extract Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940119217 chamomile extract Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- BHONFOAYRQZPKZ-LCLOTLQISA-N chembl269478 Chemical compound C([C@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)NC(=O)[C@H]([C@@H](C)CC)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCCN)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCCNC(N)=N)[C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCSC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(O)=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 BHONFOAYRQZPKZ-LCLOTLQISA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003638 chemical reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012710 chemistry, manufacturing and control Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940009025 chenodeoxycholate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- RUDATBOHQWOJDD-BSWAIDMHSA-M chenodeoxycholate Chemical compound C([C@H]1C[C@H]2O)[C@H](O)CC[C@]1(C)[C@@H]1[C@@H]2[C@@H]2CC[C@H]([C@@H](CCC([O-])=O)C)[C@@]2(C)CC1 RUDATBOHQWOJDD-BSWAIDMHSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 150000003841 chloride salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000460 chlorine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002668 chloroacetyl group Chemical group ClCC(=O)* 0.000 description 1
- 229940099352 cholate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019416 cholic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960002471 cholic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000015165 citric acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000004154 complement system Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002299 complementary DNA Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000006482 condensation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013270 controlled release Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002537 cosmetic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000006071 cream Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004132 cross linking Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002425 crystallisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008025 crystallization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000000392 cycloalkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000001995 cyclobutyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- JVHIPYJQMFNCEK-UHFFFAOYSA-N cytochalasin Natural products N1C(=O)C2(C(C=CC(C)CC(C)CC=C3)OC(C)=O)C3C(O)C(=C)C(C)C2C1CC1=CC=CC=C1 JVHIPYJQMFNCEK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZMAODHOXRBLOQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N cytochalasin-A Natural products N1C(=O)C23OC(=O)C=CC(=O)CCCC(C)CC=CC3C(O)C(=C)C(C)C2C1CC1=CC=CC=C1 ZMAODHOXRBLOQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000009089 cytolysis Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000805 cytoplasm Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001086 cytosolic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940127089 cytotoxic agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- STORWMDPIHOSMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N decanoic acid;octanoic acid;propane-1,2,3-triol Chemical compound OCC(O)CO.CCCCCCCC(O)=O.CCCCCCCCCC(O)=O STORWMDPIHOSMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002939 deleterious effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012217 deletion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037430 deletion Effects 0.000 description 1
- KXGVEGMKQFWNSR-UHFFFAOYSA-N deoxycholic acid Natural products C1CC2CC(O)CCC2(C)C2C1C1CCC(C(CCC(O)=O)C)C1(C)C(O)C2 KXGVEGMKQFWNSR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005547 deoxyribonucleotide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002637 deoxyribonucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000001985 dialkylglycerols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- GUJOJGAPFQRJSV-UHFFFAOYSA-N dialuminum;dioxosilane;oxygen(2-);hydrate Chemical compound O.[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Al+3].[Al+3].O=[Si]=O.O=[Si]=O.O=[Si]=O.O=[Si]=O GUJOJGAPFQRJSV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000000502 dialysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- UMGXUWVIJIQANV-UHFFFAOYSA-M didecyl(dimethyl)azanium;bromide Chemical compound [Br-].CCCCCCCCCC[N+](C)(C)CCCCCCCCCC UMGXUWVIJIQANV-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- ZBCBWPMODOFKDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N diethanolamine Chemical group OCCNCCO ZBCBWPMODOFKDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OGQYPPBGSLZBEG-UHFFFAOYSA-N dimethyl(dioctadecyl)azanium Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[N+](C)(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC OGQYPPBGSLZBEG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PSLWZOIUBRXAQW-UHFFFAOYSA-M dimethyl(dioctadecyl)azanium;bromide Chemical compound [Br-].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[N+](C)(C)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC PSLWZOIUBRXAQW-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- UAKOZKUVZRMOFN-JDVCJPALSA-M dimethyl-bis[(z)-octadec-9-enyl]azanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC[N+](C)(C)CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC UAKOZKUVZRMOFN-JDVCJPALSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229960003724 dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000005982 diphenylmethyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])(*)C1=C([H])C([H])=C([H])C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- XPPKVPWEQAFLFU-UHFFFAOYSA-J diphosphate(4-) Chemical class [O-]P([O-])(=O)OP([O-])([O-])=O XPPKVPWEQAFLFU-UHFFFAOYSA-J 0.000 description 1
- 235000011180 diphosphates Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000001840 diploid cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N disiloxane Chemical class [SiH3]O[SiH3] KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZGSPNIOCEDOHGS-UHFFFAOYSA-L disodium [3-[2,3-di(octadeca-9,12-dienoyloxy)propoxy-oxidophosphoryl]oxy-2-hydroxypropyl] 2,3-di(octadeca-9,12-dienoyloxy)propyl phosphate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].CCCCCC=CCC=CCCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(OC(=O)CCCCCCCC=CCC=CCCCCC)COP([O-])(=O)OCC(O)COP([O-])(=O)OCC(OC(=O)CCCCCCCC=CCC=CCCCCC)COC(=O)CCCCCCCC=CCC=CCCCCC ZGSPNIOCEDOHGS-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 239000006185 dispersion Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 1
- PMMYEEVYMWASQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N dl-hydroxyproline Natural products OC1C[NH2+]C(C([O-])=O)C1 PMMYEEVYMWASQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DTGKSKDOIYIVQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N dl-isoborneol Chemical group C1CC2(C)C(O)CC1C2(C)C DTGKSKDOIYIVQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012154 double-distilled water Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003937 drug carrier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003792 electrolyte Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001804 emulsifying effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- ZUBDGKVDJUIMQQ-UBFCDGJISA-N endothelin-1 Chemical compound C([C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H]1NC(=O)[C@H](CC=2C=CC=CC=2)NC(=O)[C@@H](CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)NC(=O)[C@H](C(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H]2CSSC[C@@H](C(N[C@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCSC)C(=O)N[C@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N2)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](N)CSSC1)C1=CNC=N1 ZUBDGKVDJUIMQQ-UBFCDGJISA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002158 endotoxin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007071 enzymatic hydrolysis Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006047 enzymatic hydrolysis reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008995 epigenetic change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 108700021358 erbB-1 Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108700020302 erbB-2 Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 125000004185 ester group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000002170 ethers Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005745 ethoxymethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])OC([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008020 evaporation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001747 exhibiting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001036 exonucleolytic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002194 fatty esters Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000019688 fish Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- LPEPZBJOKDYZAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N flufenamic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1NC1=CC=CC(C(F)(F)F)=C1 LPEPZBJOKDYZAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004369 flufenamic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 1
- GVEPBJHOBDJJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluoranthrene Natural products C1=CC(C2=CC=CC=C22)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 GVEPBJHOBDJJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FGIVSGPRGVABAB-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluoren-9-ylmethyl hydrogen carbonate Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(COC(=O)O)C3=CC=CC=C3C2=C1 FGIVSGPRGVABAB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000001153 fluoro group Chemical group F* 0.000 description 1
- 229940014144 folate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000037406 food intake Effects 0.000 description 1
- 101150078861 fos gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 244000053095 fungal pathogen Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000005021 gait Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229930182830 galactose Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 229940044627 gamma-interferon Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229920000370 gamma-poly(glutamate) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- QPJBWNIQKHGLAU-IQZHVAEDSA-N ganglioside GM1 Chemical class O[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](OC[C@H](NC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)[C@H](O)\C=C\CCCCCCCCCCCCC)O[C@H](CO)[C@H]1O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O[C@]2(O[C@H]([C@H](NC(C)=O)[C@@H](O)C2)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)CO)C(O)=O)[C@@H](O[C@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](O[C@H]3[C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O3)O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O2)NC(C)=O)[C@@H](CO)O1 QPJBWNIQKHGLAU-IQZHVAEDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002068 genetic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007614 genetic variation Effects 0.000 description 1
- RZRNAYUHWVFMIP-HXUWFJFHSA-N glycerol monolinoleate Natural products CCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](O)CO RZRNAYUHWVFMIP-HXUWFJFHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003976 glyceryl group Polymers [H]C([*])([H])C(O[H])([H])C(O[H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 229960004275 glycolic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000002339 glycosphingolipids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000002288 golgi apparatus Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229920000578 graft copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 101150098203 grb2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000003102 growth factor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001963 growth medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010417 guar gum Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000665 guar gum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960002154 guar gum Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 101150113725 hd gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910001385 heavy metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- KWLMIXQRALPRBC-UHFFFAOYSA-L hectorite Chemical compound [Li+].[OH-].[OH-].[Na+].[Mg+2].O1[Si]2([O-])O[Si]1([O-])O[Si]([O-])(O1)O[Si]1([O-])O2 KWLMIXQRALPRBC-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229910000271 hectorite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000004447 heteroarylalkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004446 heteroarylalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005312 heteroarylalkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004449 heterocyclylalkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004415 heterocyclylalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- GNOIPBMMFNIUFM-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexamethylphosphoric triamide Chemical compound CN(C)P(=O)(N(C)C)N(C)C GNOIPBMMFNIUFM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000004128 high performance liquid chromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960001340 histamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000000265 homogenisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940088597 hormone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000005556 hormone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108091008039 hormone receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000049862 human SCPEP1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 210000005260 human cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000003906 humectant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940099552 hyaluronan Drugs 0.000 description 1
- KIUKXJAPPMFGSW-MNSSHETKSA-N hyaluronan Chemical compound CC(=O)N[C@H]1[C@H](O)O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)C1O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@H]2[C@@H](C(O[C@H]3[C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O3)C(O)=O)O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O2)NC(C)=O)[C@@H](C(O)=O)O1 KIUKXJAPPMFGSW-MNSSHETKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000036571 hydration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006703 hydration reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000007857 hydrazones Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229930195733 hydrocarbon Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000002430 hydrocarbons Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000416 hydrocolloid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007062 hydrolysis Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006460 hydrolysis reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960002591 hydroxyproline Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229960001680 ibuprofen Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000002632 imidazolidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000002636 imidazolinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 102000018358 immunoglobulin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229940072221 immunoglobulins Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000000099 in vitro assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005462 in vivo assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 208000015181 infectious disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000004054 inflammatory process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000005007 innate immune system Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910003480 inorganic solid Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229960000367 inositol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940125396 insulin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 102000006495 integrins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 239000000138 intercalating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000968 intestinal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001361 intraarterial administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007912 intraperitoneal administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007913 intrathecal administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007914 intraventricular administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052740 iodine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000002563 ionic surfactant Substances 0.000 description 1
- QXJSBBXBKPUZAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N isooleic acid Natural products CCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCCC(O)=O QXJSBBXBKPUZAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004628 isothiazolidinyl group Chemical group S1N(CCC1)* 0.000 description 1
- 239000007951 isotonicity adjuster Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000003965 isoxazolidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- NLYAJNPCOHFWQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N kaolin Chemical compound O.O.O=[Al]O[Si](=O)O[Si](=O)O[Al]=O NLYAJNPCOHFWQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000010494 karaya gum Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000231 karaya gum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940039371 karaya gum Drugs 0.000 description 1
- DKYWVDODHFEZIM-UHFFFAOYSA-N ketoprofen Chemical compound OC(=O)C(C)C1=CC=CC(C(=O)C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 DKYWVDODHFEZIM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000991 ketoprofen Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000003734 kidney Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004310 lactic acid Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000014655 lactic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960000448 lactic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000008101 lactose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940039717 lanolin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019388 lanolin Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- DDVBPZROPPMBLW-ZJBINBEQSA-N latrunculin a Chemical compound C([C@H]1[C@@]2(O)C[C@H]3C[C@H](O2)CC[C@@H](/C=C\C=C/CC\C(C)=C/C(=O)O3)C)SC(=O)N1 DDVBPZROPPMBLW-ZJBINBEQSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DDVBPZROPPMBLW-UHFFFAOYSA-N latrunculin-A Natural products O1C(=O)C=C(C)CCC=CC=CC(C)CCC(O2)CC1CC2(O)C1CSC(=O)N1 DDVBPZROPPMBLW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940070765 laurate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000008141 laxative Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940125722 laxative agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 231100000518 lethal Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000001665 lethal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960004488 linolenic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- KQQKGWQCNNTQJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N linolenic acid Natural products CC=CCCC=CCC=CCCCCCCCC(O)=O KQQKGWQCNNTQJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920006008 lipopolysaccharide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000007791 liquid phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000006193 liquid solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- SMEROWZSTRWXGI-HVATVPOCSA-N lithocholic acid Chemical compound C([C@H]1CC2)[C@H](O)CC[C@]1(C)[C@@H]1[C@@H]2[C@@H]2CC[C@H]([C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C)[C@@]2(C)CC1 SMEROWZSTRWXGI-HVATVPOCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004807 localization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005923 long-lasting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004072 lung Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000004324 lymphatic system Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000003712 lysosome Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001868 lysosomic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002960 margaryl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 238000010946 mechanistic model Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002609 medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- VDXZNPDIRNWWCW-JFTDCZMZSA-N melittin Chemical compound NCC(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N1CCC[C@H]1C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(N)=O)CC1=CNC2=CC=CC=C12 VDXZNPDIRNWWCW-JFTDCZMZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000004692 metal hydroxides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- MYWUZJCMWCOHBA-VIFPVBQESA-N methamphetamine Chemical compound CN[C@@H](C)CC1=CC=CC=C1 MYWUZJCMWCOHBA-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- YFBPRJGDJKVWAH-UHFFFAOYSA-N methiocarb Chemical compound CNC(=O)OC1=CC(C)=C(SC)C(C)=C1 YFBPRJGDJKVWAH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DJLUSNAYRNFVSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl 2-(2,4-dioxo-1h-pyrimidin-5-yl)acetate Chemical compound COC(=O)CC1=CNC(=O)NC1=O DJLUSNAYRNFVSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000010270 methyl p-hydroxybenzoate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000004292 methyl p-hydroxybenzoate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007069 methylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000006362 methylene amino carbonyl group Chemical group [H]N(C([*:2])=O)C([H])([H])[*:1] 0.000 description 1
- 229960002216 methylparaben Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 108091051828 miR-122 stem-loop Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000011859 microparticle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004688 microtubule Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 101150115039 mig gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000002480 mineral oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940042472 mineral oil Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000010446 mineral oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 108091005601 modified peptides Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940074096 monoolein Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000021281 monounsaturated fatty acids Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229910052901 montmorillonite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000004573 morpholin-4-yl group Chemical group N1(CCOCC1)* 0.000 description 1
- 125000002757 morpholinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000002703 mutagenesis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 231100000350 mutagenesis Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- GLGLUQVVDHRLQK-WRBBJXAJSA-N n,n-dimethyl-2,3-bis[(z)-octadec-9-enoxy]propan-1-amine Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCCOCC(CN(C)C)OCCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC GLGLUQVVDHRLQK-WRBBJXAJSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XJVXMWNLQRTRGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-(3-methylbut-3-enyl)-2-methylsulfanyl-7h-purin-6-amine Chemical compound CSC1=NC(NCCC(C)=C)=C2NC=NC2=N1 XJVXMWNLQRTRGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FZQMZXGTZAPBAK-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-(3-methylbutyl)-7h-purin-6-amine Chemical compound CC(C)CCNC1=NC=NC2=C1NC=N2 FZQMZXGTZAPBAK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QNILTEGFHQSKFF-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-propan-2-ylprop-2-enamide Chemical compound CC(C)NC(=O)C=C QNILTEGFHQSKFF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940075566 naphthalene Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000002858 neurotransmitter agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- VVGIYYKRAMHVLU-UHFFFAOYSA-N newbouldiamide Natural products CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)C(O)C(O)C(CO)NC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC VVGIYYKRAMHVLU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000002829 nitrogen Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229950006344 nocodazole Drugs 0.000 description 1
- QTNLALDFXILRQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N nonadecane-1,2,3-triol Chemical group CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)C(O)CO QTNLALDFXILRQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002736 nonionic surfactant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000009871 nonspecific binding Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000956 nontoxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000025308 nuclear transport Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004940 nucleus Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000000050 nutritive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- QIQXTHQIDYTFRH-UHFFFAOYSA-N octadecanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O QIQXTHQIDYTFRH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OQCDKBAXFALNLD-UHFFFAOYSA-N octadecanoic acid Natural products CCCCCCCC(C)CCCCCCCCC(O)=O OQCDKBAXFALNLD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HEGSGKPQLMEBJL-RKQHYHRCSA-N octyl beta-D-glucopyranoside Chemical compound CCCCCCCCO[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O HEGSGKPQLMEBJL-RKQHYHRCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003883 ointment base Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-KTKRTIGZSA-N oleic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-KTKRTIGZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960002969 oleic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000021313 oleic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000002515 oligonucleotide synthesis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002905 orthoesters Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000000160 oxazolidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001590 oxidative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002923 oximes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004430 oxygen atom Chemical group O* 0.000 description 1
- 125000003854 p-chlorophenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(*)=C([H])C([H])=C1Cl 0.000 description 1
- 125000006503 p-nitrobenzyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(=C([H])C([H])=C1[N+]([O-])=O)C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 102000002574 p38 Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010068338 p38 Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108700025694 p53 Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000012856 packing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052625 palygorskite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000003071 parasitic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- MCYTYTUNNNZWOK-LCLOTLQISA-N penetratin Chemical compound C([C@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)NC(=O)[C@H]([C@@H](C)CC)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCCN)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCCNC(N)=N)[C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCSC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(N)=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 MCYTYTUNNNZWOK-LCLOTLQISA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010043655 penetratin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- JLFNLZLINWHATN-UHFFFAOYSA-N pentaethylene glycol Chemical compound OCCOCCOCCOCCOCCO JLFNLZLINWHATN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000137 peptide hydrolase inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000035699 permeability Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000002824 peroxisome Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229940066842 petrolatum Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019271 petrolatum Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000008177 pharmaceutical agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008194 pharmaceutical composition Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008251 pharmaceutical emulsion Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000546 pharmaceutical excipient Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940124531 pharmaceutical excipient Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000000144 pharmacologic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010587 phase diagram Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010363 phase shift Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002991 phenoxazines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- FAQJJMHZNSSFSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenylglyoxylic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 FAQJJMHZNSSFSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003905 phosphatidylinositols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- ACVYVLVWPXVTIT-UHFFFAOYSA-M phosphinate Chemical compound [O-][PH2]=O ACVYVLVWPXVTIT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- AQSJGOWTSHOLKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphite(3-) Chemical class [O-]P([O-])[O-] AQSJGOWTSHOLKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SXADIBFZNXBEGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphoramidous acid Chemical class NP(O)O SXADIBFZNXBEGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003014 phosphoric acid esters Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- RHDXSLLGPJSSGW-VEGRVEBRSA-N phosphoric acid;(2r,3r,4r)-2,3,4,5-tetrahydroxypentanal Chemical group OP(O)(O)=O.OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)C=O RHDXSLLGPJSSGW-VEGRVEBRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000026731 phosphorylation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006366 phosphorylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000005642 phosphothioate group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- SHUZOJHMOBOZST-UHFFFAOYSA-N phylloquinone Natural products CC(C)CCCCC(C)CCC(C)CCCC(=CCC1=C(C)C(=O)c2ccccc2C1=O)C SHUZOJHMOBOZST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000004193 piperazinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000003386 piperidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000036470 plasma concentration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000013612 plasmid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960002226 polidocanol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229920002627 poly(phosphazenes) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001481 poly(stearyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 108010064470 polyaspartate Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005646 polycarboxylate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002851 polycationic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 125000005575 polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229920002643 polyglutamic acid Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001855 polyketal Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 102000054765 polymorphisms of proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229920000056 polyoxyethylene ether Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000010482 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000244 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920006324 polyoxymethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001282 polysaccharide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005017 polysaccharide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000004804 polysaccharides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940068968 polysorbate 80 Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229920000053 polysorbate 80 Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000166 polytrimethylene carbonate Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229920002635 polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004814 polyurethane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000004032 porphyrins Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000023603 positive regulation of transcription initiation, DNA-dependent Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000029279 positive regulation of transcription, DNA-dependent Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960003101 pranoprofen Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 1
- 108091007428 primary miRNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000770 proinflammatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000035755 proliferation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002035 prolonged effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003380 propellant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010232 propyl p-hydroxybenzoate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000004405 propyl p-hydroxybenzoate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000013772 propylene glycol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960003415 propylparaben Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940048914 protamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019419 proteases Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000000159 protein binding assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108060006633 protein kinase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000001243 protein synthesis Methods 0.000 description 1
- PTJWIQPHWPFNBW-GBNDHIKLSA-N pseudouridine Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1C1=CNC(=O)NC1=O PTJWIQPHWPFNBW-GBNDHIKLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002685 pulmonary effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002213 purine nucleotide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000003072 pyrazolidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000002755 pyrazolinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- UBQKCCHYAOITMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridin-2-ol Chemical compound OC1=CC=CC=N1 UBQKCCHYAOITMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000008518 pyridopyrimidines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229960003581 pyridoxal Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000008164 pyridoxal Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011674 pyridoxal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000000714 pyrimidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000003242 quaternary ammonium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000001567 quinoxalinyl group Chemical group N1=C(C=NC2=CC=CC=C12)* 0.000 description 1
- GHBFNMLVSPCDGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N rac-1-monooctanoylglycerol Chemical compound CCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(O)CO GHBFNMLVSPCDGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002516 radical scavenger Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002265 redox agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000006479 redox reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006722 reduction reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006578 reductive coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002342 ribonucleoside Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002336 ribonucleotide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002652 ribonucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000003419 rna directed dna polymerase inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019515 salmon Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- COFLCBMDHTVQRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N sapphyrin Chemical compound N1C(C=2NC(C=C3N=C(C=C4NC(=C5)C=C4)C=C3)=CC=2)=CC=C1C=C1C=CC5=N1 COFLCBMDHTVQRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108700004121 sarkosyl Proteins 0.000 description 1
- JRPHGDYSKGJTKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-K selenophosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=[Se] JRPHGDYSKGJTKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 238000001338 self-assembly Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000004400 serine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000004904 shortening Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002545 silicone oil Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000004513 sizing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003384 small molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- HRZFUMHJMZEROT-UHFFFAOYSA-L sodium disulfite Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]S(=O)S([O-])(=O)=O HRZFUMHJMZEROT-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229940001584 sodium metabisulfite Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000010262 sodium metabisulphite Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000007909 solid dosage form Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007790 solid phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010532 solid phase synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003381 solubilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- NHXLMOGPVYXJNR-ATOGVRKGSA-N somatostatin Chemical compound C([C@H]1C(=O)N[C@H](C(N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CSSC[C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=2C=CC=CC=2)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=2C=CC=CC=2)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=2C3=CC=CC=C3NC=2)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@H](C(=O)N1)[C@@H](C)O)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](C)N)C(O)=O)=O)[C@H](O)C)C1=CC=CC=C1 NHXLMOGPVYXJNR-ATOGVRKGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000553 somatostatin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000011076 sorbitan monostearate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000001587 sorbitan monostearate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940035048 sorbitan monostearate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000010356 sorbitol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000600 sorbitol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000001324 spliceosome Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000007921 spray Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001694 spray drying Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108700026239 src Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000003381 stabilizer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008117 stearic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000365 steroidogenetic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003431 steroids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000004936 stimulating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000005017 substituted alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005415 substituted alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004426 substituted alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000003107 substituted aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005346 substituted cycloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229940124530 sulfonamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000003456 sulfonamides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- BDHFUVZGWQCTTF-UHFFFAOYSA-M sulfonate Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)=O BDHFUVZGWQCTTF-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- YROXIXLRRCOBKF-UHFFFAOYSA-N sulfonylurea Chemical compound OC(=N)N=S(=O)=O YROXIXLRRCOBKF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004434 sulfur atom Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000001629 suppression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960004492 suprofen Drugs 0.000 description 1
- RJVBVECTCMRNFG-ANKJNSLFSA-N swinholide a Chemical compound C1[C@H](OC)C[C@H](C)O[C@H]1CC[C@H](C)[C@H](O)[C@H](C)[C@@H]1[C@@H](C)[C@H](O)C[C@H](O)[C@H](C)[C@@H](OC)C[C@H](CC=C2)O[C@@H]2C[C@@H](O)C/C=C(\C)/C=C/C(=O)O[C@H]([C@@H](C)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](C)CC[C@@H]2O[C@@H](C)C[C@H](C2)OC)[C@@H](C)[C@H](O)C[C@H](O)[C@H](C)[C@@H](OC)C[C@H](CC=C2)O[C@@H]2C[C@@H](O)C/C=C(\C)/C=C/C(=O)O1 RJVBVECTCMRNFG-ANKJNSLFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GDACDJNQZCXLNU-UHFFFAOYSA-N swinholide-A Natural products C1C(OC)CC(C)OC1CCC(C)C(O)C(C)C1C(C)C(O)CC(O)C(C)C(OC)CC(CC=C2)OC2CC(O)CC=C(C)C=CC(=O)O1 GDACDJNQZCXLNU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 210000002437 synoviocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000002194 synthesizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009897 systematic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009885 systemic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000002906 tartaric acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011975 tartaric acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000000999 tert-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 210000001550 testis Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- TUNFSRHWOTWDNC-HKGQFRNVSA-N tetradecanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCC[14C](O)=O TUNFSRHWOTWDNC-HKGQFRNVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JYKSTGLAIMQDRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetraglycerol Chemical compound OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO.OCC(O)CO JYKSTGLAIMQDRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003718 tetrahydrofuranyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000001412 tetrahydropyranyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- ABZLKHKQJHEPAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetramethylrhodamine Chemical compound C=12C=CC(N(C)C)=CC2=[O+]C2=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C([O-])=O ABZLKHKQJHEPAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940126585 therapeutic drug Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 231100001274 therapeutic index Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 125000001984 thiazolidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005309 thioalkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004001 thioalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000003396 thiol group Chemical class [H]S* 0.000 description 1
- 150000003573 thiols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229960000874 thyrotropin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000001748 thyrotropin Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229930003799 tocopherol Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 239000011732 tocopherol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002640 tocopherol group Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000019149 tocopherols Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- JOXIMZWYDAKGHI-UHFFFAOYSA-M toluene-4-sulfonate Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C1 JOXIMZWYDAKGHI-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 230000000699 topical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000331 toxic Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000002588 toxic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000010487 tragacanth Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000196 tragacanth Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940116362 tragacanth Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000005029 transcription elongation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005026 transcription initiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002103 transcriptional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000037317 transdermal delivery Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052723 transition metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000003624 transition metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000009752 translational inhibition Effects 0.000 description 1
- PBKWZFANFUTEPS-CWUSWOHSSA-N transportan Chemical compound C([C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(N)=O)[C@@H](C)CC)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)NC(=O)CN)[C@@H](C)O)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 PBKWZFANFUTEPS-CWUSWOHSSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010062760 transportan Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000011269 treatment regimen Methods 0.000 description 1
- ITMCEJHCFYSIIV-UHFFFAOYSA-M triflate Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)(=O)C(F)(F)F ITMCEJHCFYSIIV-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 125000004044 trifluoroacetyl group Chemical group FC(C(=O)*)(F)F 0.000 description 1
- 125000000025 triisopropylsilyl group Chemical group C(C)(C)[Si](C(C)C)(C(C)C)* 0.000 description 1
- 125000000026 trimethylsilyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])[Si]([*])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- PHYFQTYBJUILEZ-IUPFWZBJSA-N triolein Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(OC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC)COC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC PHYFQTYBJUILEZ-IUPFWZBJSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940117972 triolein Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000011178 triphosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000002264 triphosphate group Chemical class [H]OP(=O)(O[H])OP(=O)(O[H])OP(=O)(O[H])O* 0.000 description 1
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000009281 ultraviolet germicidal irradiation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000004670 unsaturated fatty acids Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000003827 upregulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001291 vacuum drying Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003981 vehicle Substances 0.000 description 1
- PXXNTAGJWPJAGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N vertaline Natural products C1C2C=3C=C(OC)C(OC)=CC=3OC(C=C3)=CC=C3CCC(=O)OC1CC1N2CCCC1 PXXNTAGJWPJAGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003048 vinblastine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- JXLYSJRDGCGARV-XQKSVPLYSA-N vincaleukoblastine Chemical compound C([C@@H](C[C@]1(C(=O)OC)C=2C(=CC3=C([C@]45[C@H]([C@@]([C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@]6(CC)C=CCN([C@H]56)CC4)(O)C(=O)OC)N3C)C=2)OC)C[C@@](C2)(O)CC)N2CCC2=C1NC1=CC=CC=C21 JXLYSJRDGCGARV-XQKSVPLYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OGWKCGZFUXNPDA-XQKSVPLYSA-N vincristine Chemical compound C([N@]1C[C@@H](C[C@]2(C(=O)OC)C=3C(=CC4=C([C@]56[C@H]([C@@]([C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@]7(CC)C=CCN([C@H]67)CC5)(O)C(=O)OC)N4C=O)C=3)OC)C[C@@](C1)(O)CC)CC1=C2NC2=CC=CC=C12 OGWKCGZFUXNPDA-XQKSVPLYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004528 vincristine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- OGWKCGZFUXNPDA-UHFFFAOYSA-N vincristine Natural products C1C(CC)(O)CC(CC2(C(=O)OC)C=3C(=CC4=C(C56C(C(C(OC(C)=O)C7(CC)C=CCN(C67)CC5)(O)C(=O)OC)N4C=O)C=3)OC)CN1CCC1=C2NC2=CC=CC=C12 OGWKCGZFUXNPDA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000019155 vitamin A Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011719 vitamin A Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019156 vitamin B Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011720 vitamin B Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019168 vitamin K Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011712 vitamin K Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003721 vitamin K derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940045997 vitamin a Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000003722 vitamin derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940046010 vitamin k Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000011800 void material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008307 w/o/w-emulsion Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001993 wax Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940124024 weight reducing agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910052727 yttrium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- UHVMMEOXYDMDKI-JKYCWFKZSA-L zinc;1-(5-cyanopyridin-2-yl)-3-[(1s,2s)-2-(6-fluoro-2-hydroxy-3-propanoylphenyl)cyclopropyl]urea;diacetate Chemical compound [Zn+2].CC([O-])=O.CC([O-])=O.CCC(=O)C1=CC=C(F)C([C@H]2[C@H](C2)NC(=O)NC=2N=CC(=CC=2)C#N)=C1O UHVMMEOXYDMDKI-JKYCWFKZSA-L 0.000 description 1
- SFVVQRJOGUKCEG-OPQSFPLASA-N β-MSH Chemical compound C1C[C@@H](O)[C@H]2C(COC(=O)[C@@](O)([C@@H](C)O)C(C)C)=CCN21 SFVVQRJOGUKCEG-OPQSFPLASA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003952 β-lactams Chemical group 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
- C07H21/00—Compounds containing two or more mononucleotide units having separate phosphate or polyphosphate groups linked by saccharide radicals of nucleoside groups, e.g. nucleic acids
- C07H21/02—Compounds containing two or more mononucleotide units having separate phosphate or polyphosphate groups linked by saccharide radicals of nucleoside groups, e.g. nucleic acids with ribosyl as saccharide radical
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
- C07H21/00—Compounds containing two or more mononucleotide units having separate phosphate or polyphosphate groups linked by saccharide radicals of nucleoside groups, e.g. nucleic acids
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
- C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
- C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
- C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
- C07F9/645—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
- C07F9/6509—Six-membered rings
- C07F9/6512—Six-membered rings having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 3
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
- C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
- C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
- C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
- C07F9/655—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms
- C07F9/6552—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms the oxygen atom being part of a six-membered ring
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
- C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
- C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
- C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
- C07F9/6558—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing at least two different or differently substituted hetero rings neither condensed among themselves nor condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system
- C07F9/65583—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing at least two different or differently substituted hetero rings neither condensed among themselves nor condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system each of the hetero rings containing nitrogen as ring hetero atom
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
- C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
- C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
- C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
- C07F9/6561—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing systems of two or more relevant hetero rings condensed among themselves or condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system, with or without other non-condensed hetero rings
- C07F9/65616—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom containing systems of two or more relevant hetero rings condensed among themselves or condensed with a common carbocyclic ring or ring system, with or without other non-condensed hetero rings containing the ring system having three or more than three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members, e.g. purine or analogs
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
- C07H19/00—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
- C07H19/02—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
- C07H19/04—Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
- C07H19/16—Purine radicals
- C07H19/20—Purine radicals with the saccharide radical esterified by phosphoric or polyphosphoric acids
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
- C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
- C12N15/11—DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
- C12N15/111—General methods applicable to biologically active non-coding nucleic acids
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
- C12N2310/10—Type of nucleic acid
- C12N2310/14—Type of nucleic acid interfering N.A.
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
- C12N2310/30—Chemical structure
- C12N2310/31—Chemical structure of the backbone
- C12N2310/315—Phosphorothioates
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
- C12N2310/30—Chemical structure
- C12N2310/32—Chemical structure of the sugar
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
- C12N2310/30—Chemical structure
- C12N2310/33—Chemical structure of the base
- C12N2310/332—Abasic residue
Definitions
- Oligonucleotides and their analogs have been developed for various uses in molecular biology, including use as probes, primers, linkers, adapters, and gene fragments. In a number of these applications, the oligonucleotides specifically hybridize to a target nucleic acid.
- modifications have been introduced into oligonucleotides to increase their usefulness in diagnostics, as research reagents and as therapeutic entities.
- modifications include those designed for a variety of purposes, for example: to increase binding to a target nucleic acid (i.e., increase their melting temperature, T m ), to assist in identification of the oligonucleotide or an oligonucleotide-target complex, to increase cell penetration, to stabilize against nucleases and other enzymes that degrade or interfere with the structure or activity of the oligonucleotide, to provide a mode of disruption (a terminating event) once sequence-specifically bound to a target, and to improve the pharmacokinetic properties of the oligonucleotide.
- T m melting temperature
- the invention provides acyclic and abasic nucleosides having the structure of formula (I), formula (II), formula (III) or isomers thereof. These monomers are useful for modifying of oligonucleotides at one or more positions.
- the invention provides oligonucleotides comprising conformationally locked dinucleotide monomers having the structure of formula (IV)-formula (VI), or isomers thereof.
- the said oligonucleotides can be single-stranded RNAi agent (single-stranded siRNA), double-stranded RNAi agent (double-stranded siRNA), micro RNA, antimicroRNA, aptamer, ribozyme, decoy oligonucleotide, triplex forming oligonucleotide, U1 adaptor, or antisense oligonucleotides.
- the invention provides single-stranded and double-stranded oligonucleotides that cleave a target RNA sequence by a RISC mediated pathway.
- the invention provides methods of inhibiting the expression of a target gene in cell, the method comprising: contacting a cell with an oligonucleotide described herein.
- FIG. 1 shows the in vitro activity of N1, internal and 3′-end acyclic GNA modified ssRNA siRNA in a PTEN assay.
- FIG. 2 shows the in vitro activity of N1, internal and 3′-end acyclic GNA modified ssRNA siRNA in a PTEN assay.
- FIG. 3 shows schematic representations of some the monomers used for oligonucleotide synthesis.
- the invention provides acyclic and abasic nucleoside monomers having the structure of formula (I), formula (II), formula (III):
- each B is independently H or a nucleobase
- X 1 and X 2 are independently for each occurrence absent, O, S, or NR′
- each of R′, R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 and R 10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR 13 , N(R′)(R′′), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkenyl, or ⁇ -hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted;
- R 11 and R 12 are independently for each occurrence H, protecting group, a reactive phosphorus group, or solid support;
- R 13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl,
- B is a nucleobase
- any known nucleobase in the art can be employed.
- a detailed description of the nucleobases amenable to the invention is provided below in the oligonucleotide section.
- each B is selected independently from the nucleobases disclosed herein.
- monomers having reactive phosphorus groups are provided that are useful for forming internucleoside linkages including for example phosphodiester and phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages.
- Such reactive phosphorus groups are known in the art and contain phosphorus atoms in P III or P V valence state including, but not limited to, phosphoramidite, H-phosphonate, alkyl-phosphonate, phosphate triesters and phosphorus containing chiral auxiliaries.
- solid phase synthesis of oligonucleotides utilizes phosphoramidites (P III chemistry) as reactive phosphites.
- the intermediate phosphite compounds are subsequently oxidized to the Pv state using known methods to yield, in preferred embodiments, phosphodiester or phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages.
- the reactive phosphorous group is a diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite group.
- one of R 11 and 10 2 is a protecting group and the other is a reactive phosphorus group or a solid support.
- R 11 is a protecting group and R 12 is a reactive phosphorus group or a solid support.
- Exemplary hydroxyl protecting groups include, but are not limited to acetyl, t-butyl, t-butoxymethyl, methoxymethyl, tetrahydropyranyl, 1-ethoxyethyl, 1-(2-chloroethoxy)ethyl, 2-trimethylsilylethyl, p-chlorophenyl, 2,4-dinitrophenyl, benzyl, benzoyl, p-phenylbenzoyl, 2,6-dichlorobenzyl, diphenylmethyl, p-nitrobenzyl, triphenylmethyl (trityl), 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl, trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl, triphenylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl, benzoylformate, chloroacetyl, trichloroacet
- each of the hydroxyl protecting groups is, independently, acetyl, benzyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl or 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl.
- the hydroxyl protecting group is selected from the group consisting of trityl, monomethoxytrityl and 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl group.
- X 1 and X 2 are each independently O or S.
- the monomer of formula (I) is:
- each B is independently H or a nucleobase
- each of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 and R 10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR 13 , N(R′)(R′′), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkenyl, or ⁇ -hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted;
- R 11 and R 12 are independently for each occurrence H, protecting group, a reactive phosphorus group, or solid support;
- R 13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl
- the monomer of formula (II) is:
- each B is independently H or a nucleobase
- each of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 and R 10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR 13 , N(R′)(R′′), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkenyl, or ⁇ -hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted;
- R 11 and R 12 are independently for each occurrence H, protecting group, a reactive phosphorus group, or solid support;
- R 13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl
- the monomer of formula (III) is:
- each B is independently H or a nucleobase
- each of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 and R 10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR 13 , N(R′)(R′′), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkenyl, or ⁇ -hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted;
- R 11 and R 12 are independently for each occurrence H, protecting group, a reactive phosphorus group, or solid support;
- R 13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl
- the invention provides oligonucleotides comprising at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more) monomer described in the above formulas.
- the monomers described herein can be placed at any position in an oligonucleotide.
- the monomers described herein can be placed the last position on the 5′-end (5′-end terminal position), the last position on 3′-end (3′-end terminal position), at an internal position.
- the invention provides an oligonucleotide comprising at least one modified nucleoside of formula (I), (II), (III), (I′), (II′), or (III′), optionally in combination with natural base and derivatives thereof, or modified nucleobase.
- the modified base includes high affinity modification such as G-clamp and analogs, phenoxazines and analogs; bi- and tricyclic non-natural nucleoside bases.
- the invention further provides said modified oligonucleotides with 3′, 5′ or both 3′ and 5′ terminal phosphate or phosphate mimics.
- the phosphate or phosphate mimics includes ⁇ - and/or ⁇ -configuration with respect to the sugar ring or combinations thereof.
- the phosphate or phosphate mimics include but not limited to: natural phosphate, -phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, borano phosphate, borano thiophospahte, phosphonate, halogen substituted phosphoantes, phosphoramidates, phosphodiester, phosphotriester, thiophosphodiester, thiophosphotriester, diphosphates and triphosphates.
- the invention also provides sugar modified purine dimers at 3′ and 5′-terminals (i.e. 5′/3′-GG, AA, AG, GA, GI, IA etc.), wherein the purine bases are natural or chemically modified preferably at 2, 6 and 7 positions of the base or combinations thereof.
- the invention also provides nucleoside at position 1 (5′-end) with 2′ and/or 4′-sugar modified natural and modified nucleobase, purine or pyrimidine nucleobase mimics or combinations thereof.
- the said modified oligonucleotides could be single stranded siRNA, double stranded siRNA, micro RNA, antimicroRNA, aptamer or antisense oligonucleotide containing a motif selected from the modifications described herein and combinations of modifications thereof.
- the invention provides that the said modified oligonucleotide is one of the strands or constitute for both strands of a double strands siRNA.
- the modified oligonucleotide is the guide or antisense strand and in another occurrence the modified oligonucleotide is sense or passenger strand of the double stranded siRNA or both the strands of ds siRNA bear modified oligonucleotides.
- the oligonucleotides containing the monomers of any of the above formulas can also be used in a method of inhibiting the expression of a target gene in a cell. Such method comprises contacting the cell with the oligonucleotide comprising the monomers of any of the above formulas.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one monomer of formula (IV), (V) or (VI):
- each B is independently H or a nucleobase
- X 1 and X 2 are independently for each occurrence absent, O, S, or NR′
- each of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 and R 10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR 13 , N(R′)(R′′), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkenyl, or ⁇ -hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted;
- R 11 and R 12 are independently for each occurrence H,
- R 13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkyl, or ⁇ -hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted;
- R 14 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR 12 , N(R′)(R′′), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkyl, or ⁇ -hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted;
- X 3 , X 4 , X 5 , and Z 3 are each independently for each occurrence H, O ⁇ , OM, OR 13 , S ⁇ , SR 13 , SM, N(R′)(R
- RNAi in human cells basic structural and functional features of small interfering RNA. Mol. Cell 10, 549-561 (2002); and Liu, J. et al. Argonaute2 is the catalytic engine of mammalian RNAi. Science 305, 1437-1441 (2004)).
- the 5′ phosphate group is seen to be essential for slicing fidelity, because the position of the cleavage site in the target RNA strand is determined by its distance from the 5′ phosphate group of the guide RNA strand (Elbashir, S. M., Martinez, J., Patkaniowska, A., Lendeckel, W. & Tuschl, T.
- R 11 is
- t 0.
- R 11 is
- R 12 is H.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one monomer of formula (IV′):
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one monomer of formula (V′):
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one monomer of formula (VI′):
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one monomer of formula (VII), (VIII), or (IX):
- each B is independently H or a nucleobase
- each of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 and R 10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR 13 , N(R′)(R′′), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkenyl, or ⁇ -hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted;
- R 11 and R 12 are independently for each occurrence H,
- R 13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkyl, or ⁇ -hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted;
- R 14 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR 12 , N(R′)(R′′), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ⁇ -amino alkyl, ⁇ -hydroxy alkyl, or ⁇ -hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted
- X 3 , X 4 , X 5 , and Z 3 are each independently for each occurrence H, O ⁇ , OM, OR 13 , S ⁇ , SR 13 , SM, N(R′)(R′′
- n1 and n2 are independently 0-20.
- the oligonucleotides comprising the monomers of the above formulas (IV), (V), (VI), (IV′), (V′), (VI′), (VII), (VIII), or (IX) can be single stranded siRNA, double stranded siRNA, micro RNA, antimicroRNA, aptamer or antisense oligonucleotide containing a motif selected from the modifications described herein and combinations of modifications thereof.
- the oligonucleotide is one of the strands or constitutes both strands of a double-stranded siRNA. In one occurrence the oligonucleotide is the guide or antisense strand and in another occurrence the oligonucleotide is the sense or passenger strand of the double stranded siRNA.
- the oligonucleotides containing the monomers of any of the above formulas can also be used in a method of inhibiting the expression of a target gene in a cell. Such method comprises contacting the cell with the oligonucleotide comprising the monomers of any of the above formulas.
- an oligonucleotide comprises two or more acyclic and/or abasic monomers described herein, they can be the same, different or any combination thereof.
- Such two or more monomers can be located at any position within the oligonucleotide. For example one at the 5′-end terminal position and at one or more internal positions; one at the 3′-end terminal position and at one or more internal positions; one at the 5′-end terminal position, one at the 3′-end terminal position and at one or more internal positions.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) acyclic and/or abasic monomers described herein at the 5′-end, e.g., within the first 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 positions from said end.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) acyclic and/or abasic monomers described herein at the 3′-end, e.g., within the first 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 positions from said end.
- the oligonucleotide comprises two acyclic and/or abasic monomers described herein within the first two positions at the 3′-end.
- the intersugar linkage between the two acyclic and/or abasic monomers is non-phosphodiester linkage, e.g., a non-phosphodiester internucleoside linkage selected from the group consisting of phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, H-phosphonate, alkyl-phosphonate, phosphoramidate internucleoside linkages, and any combinations thereof.
- the monomers described herein are linked to the rest of the oligonucleotide via a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, e.g. a non-phosphodiester internucleoside linkage selected from the group consisting of phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, H-phosphonate, alkyl-phosphonate, phosphoramidate internucleoside linkages, and any combinations thereof.
- a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage e.g. a non-phosphodiester internucleoside linkage selected from the group consisting of phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, H-phosphonate, alkyl-phosphonate, phosphoramidate internucleoside linkages, and any combinations thereof.
- acyclic and/or abasic monomers described herein can be in a continuous chain, alternate with one or more other non acyclic and/or abasic nucleosides, or any combination thereof.
- an oligonucleotide of the invention comprises: (a) 1-20 first-type regions, each first-type region independently comprising 1-20 contiguous nucleosides wherein each nucleoside of each first-type region comprises a first-type modification; (b) 0-20 second-type regions, each second-type region independently comprising 1-20 contiguous nucleosides wherein each nucleoside of each second-type region comprises a second-type modification; and (c) 0-20 third-type regions, each third-type region independently comprising 1-20 contiguous nucleosides wherein each nucleoside of each third-type region comprises a third-type modification; wherein the first-type modification, the second-type modification, and the third-type modification are each independently selected from 2′-F, 2′-OCH 3 , 2′-O(CH 2 )2OCH 3 , BNA, F-HNA, 2′-H and 2′-OH.
- the monomers and oligonucleotides described herein contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)-, ⁇ or ⁇ , or as (D)- or (L)- such as for amino acids. Included herein are all such possible isomers, as well as their racemic and optically pure forms.
- Optical isomers may be prepared from their respective optically active precursors by the procedures described above, or by resolving the racemic mixtures.
- the resolution can be carried out in the presence of a resolving agent, by chromatography or by repeated crystallization or by some combination of these techniques which are known to those skilled in the art. Further details regarding resolutions can be found in Jacques, et al., Enantiomers, Racemates, and Resolutions (John Wiley & Sons, 1981).
- the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds, other unsaturation, or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers or cis- and trans-isomers.
- an oligonucleotide of the invention comprises 5′ phosphorothioate or 5′-phosphorodithioate, nucleotides 1 and 2 having cationic modifications via C-5 position of pyrimidines, 2-Position of Purines, N2-G, G-clamp, 8-position of purines, 6-position of purines, internal nucleotides having a 2′-F sugar with base modifications (Pseudouridine, G-clamp, phenoxazine, pyridopyrimidines, gem2′-Me-up/2′-F-down), 3′-end with two purines with novel 2′-substituted MOE analogs, 5′-end nucleotides with novel 2′-substituted MOE analogs, 5′-end having a 3′-F and a 2′-5′-linkage, 4′-substituted nucleoside at the nucleotide 1 at 5′-end and the substituent
- the oligonucleotide is a single-stranded oligonucleotide.
- the oligonucleotide is a double-stranded oligonucleotide.
- the oligonucleotide has a hairpin structure.
- the oligonucleotide has a dumbbell structure.
- the oligonucleotide is an RNAi agent, an antisense, a microRNA, a pre-microRNA, a supermir, an antimir, an antagomir, a ribozyme, a decoy oligonucleotide, an immunostimulatory oligonucleotide, RNA activator, U1 adaptor or an aptamer oligonucleotide.
- the oligonucleotide is a single-stranded RNAi agent.
- the oligonucleotide is a double-stranded RNAi agent.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one modification.
- the modification is selected from the group consisting of a sugar modification, a non-phosphodiester intersugar (or internucleoside) linkage, nucleobase modification, and ligand conjugation.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least two different modifications selected from the group consisting of a sugar modification, a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, nucleobase modification, and ligand conjugation.
- the at least two different modifications are present in the same subunit of the oligonucleotide, e.g. present in the same nucleotide.
- the oligonucleotide is a double-stranded oligonucleotide and at least one strand comprises at least one modification.
- sense strand comprises at least one modification.
- antisense strand comprises at least one modification.
- only the sense strand comprises at least one modification.
- only the antisense strand comprises at least one modification.
- sense strand comprises at least one acyclic and/or abasic nucleoside described herein.
- antisense strand comprises at least one acyclic and/or abasic nucleoside described herein.
- both the sense and the antisense strands each comprise at least one acyclic and/or abasic nucleoside described herein.
- each strand comprises at least one at least one acyclic and/or abasic nucleoside described herein
- nucleosides can both be located on one end of the duplex (5′-end of one strand and 3′-end of the other strand), at opposite ends (5′-end of both strands or 3′-end of both strands), one at the end and one in the middle (5′ or 3′ end of one strand and an internal position of the other strand).
- both strands of the double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise at least one modification each. In another embodiment, both strands of the double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise at least one modification that is the same in both strands. In yet another embodiment, both strands of the double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise the same modification.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one ligand conjugate. In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is a double-stranded oligonucleotide and only one strand comprises the ligand conjugate. In a further embodiment, the strand is sense strand. In another embodiment, the strand is antisense strand.
- both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise at least one ligand conjugate.
- the ligand conjugate is same in both strands.
- the ligand is different between the two strands.
- the oligonucleotide comprises two or more ligand conjugates.
- the two or more ligands can be same ligand, different ligands, same type of ligand (e.g., targeting ligand, endosomolytic ligand, PK modulator), different types of ligands, or a combination thereof.
- the RNAi agent is double stranded and only the sense strand comprises the acyclic and/or abasic monomer described herein.
- the RNAi agent is double stranded and only the antisense strand comprises the acyclic and/or abasic monomer described herein.
- the RNAi agent is double-stranded and both the sense and the antisense strands comprise at least one acyclic and/or abasic monomer described herein.
- both the sense and the antisense strands comprise a acyclic and/or abasic monomer of the invention, such monomers can be same or different.
- the acyclic and/or abasic monomer described herein is the same in both the sense and the antisense strands.
- the acyclic and/or abasic monomer is different in the sense and the antisense strands
- oligonucleotide refers to a polymer or oligomer of nucleotide or nucleoside monomers consisting of naturally occurring bases, sugars and intersugar linkages.
- oligonucleotide also includes polymers or oligomers comprising non-naturally occurring monomers, or portions thereof, which function similarly. Such modified or substituted oligonucleotides are often preferred over native forms because of properties such as, for example, enhanced cellular uptake and increased stability in the presence of nucleases.
- the oligonucleotide as used herein can be single-stranded or double-stranded.
- a single-stranded oligonucleotide can have double-stranded regions and a double-stranded oligonucleotide can have single-stranded regions.
- oligonucleotides include, but are not limited to structural genes, genes including control and termination regions, self-replicating systems such as viral or plasmid DNA, single-stranded and double-stranded siRNAs and other RNA interference reagents (RNAi agents or iRNA agents), shRNA, antisense oligonucleotides, ribozymes, microRNAs, microRNA mimics, supermirs, aptamers, antimirs, antagomirs, U1 adaptors, triplex-forming oligonucleotides, RNA activators, immuno-stimulatory oligonucleotides, and decoy oligonucleotides.
- RNAi agents or iRNA agents RNA interference reagents
- shRNA antisense oligonucleotides
- ribozymes ribozymes
- microRNAs microRNA mimics
- supermirs supermirs
- aptamers antimirs
- antagomirs U1
- Double-stranded and single-stranded oligonucleotides that are effective in inducing RNA interference are also referred to as siRNA, RNAi agent, or iRNA agent, herein.
- RNA interference inducing oligonucleotides associate with a cytoplasmic multi-protein complex known as RNAi-induced silencing complex (RISC).
- RISC RNAi-induced silencing complex
- single-stranded and double-stranded RNAi agents are sufficiently long that they can be cleaved by an endogenous molecule, e.g. by Dicer, to produce smaller oligonucleotides that can enter the RISC machinery and participate in RISC mediated cleavage of a target sequence, e.g. a target mRNA.
- Oligonucleotides of the present invention can be of various lengths. In particular embodiments, oligonucleotides can range from about 10 to 100 nucleotides in length. In various related embodiments, oligonucleotides, single-stranded, double-stranded, and triple-stranded, can range in length from about 10 to about 50 nucleotides, from about 20 to about 50 nucleotides, from about 15 to about 30 nucleotides, from about 20 to about 30 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, oligonucleotide is from about 9 to about 39 nucleotides in length. In some other embodiments, oligonucleotide is at least 30 nucleotides in length.
- the oligonucleotides of the invention can comprise any oligonucleotide modification described herein and below.
- it can be desirable to modify one or both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide.
- the two strands will include different modifications.
- multiple different modifications can be included on each of the strands.
- the various modifications on a given strand can differ from each other, and can also differ from the various modifications on other strands.
- one strand can have a modification, e.g., a modification described herein
- a different strand can have a different modification, e.g., a different modification described herein.
- one strand can have two or more different modifications
- the another strand can include a modification that differs from the at least two modifications on the first strand.
- double-stranded oligonucleotides comprising a duplex structure of between 20 and 23, but specifically 21, base pairs have been hailed as particularly effective in inducing RNA interference (Elbashir et al., EMBO 2001, 20:6877-6888). However, others have found that shorter or longer double-stranded oligonucleotides can be effective as well.
- the double-stranded oligonucleotides comprise two oligonucleotide strands that are sufficiently complementary to hybridize to form a duplex structure.
- the duplex structure is between 15 and 30, more generally between 18 and 25, yet more generally between 19 and 24, and most generally between 19 and 21 base pairs in length.
- longer double-stranded oligonucleotides of between 25 and 30 base pairs in length are preferred.
- shorter double-stranded oligonucleotides of between 10 and 15 base pairs in length are preferred.
- the double-stranded oligonucleotide is at least 21 nucleotides long.
- the double-stranded oligonucleotide comprises a sense strand and an antisense strand, wherein the antisense RNA strand has a region of complementarity which is complementary to at least a part of a target sequence, and the duplex region is 14-30 nucleotides in length.
- the region of complementarity to the target sequence is between 14 and 30, more generally between 18 and 25, yet more generally between 19 and 24, and most generally between 19 and 21 nucleotides in length.
- antisense strand refers to an oligonucleotide that is substantially or 100% complementary to a target sequence of interest.
- antisense strand includes the antisense region of both oligonucleotides that are formed from two separate strands, as well as unimolecular oligonucleotides that are capable of forming hairpin or dumbbell type structures.
- antisense strand and guide strand are used interchangeably herein.
- sense strand refers to an oligonucleotide that has the same nucleoside sequence, in whole or in part, as a target sequence such as a messenger RNA or a sequence of DNA.
- target sequence such as a messenger RNA or a sequence of DNA.
- sense strand and passenger strand are used interchangeably herein.
- target sequence is meant any nucleic acid sequence whose expression or activity is to be modulated.
- the target nucleic acid can be DNA or RNA, such as endogenous DNA or RNA, viral DNA or viral RNA, or other RNA encoded by a gene, virus, bacteria, fungus, mammal, or plant.
- nucleic acid can form hydrogen bond(s) with another nucleic acid sequence by either traditional Watson-Crick or other non-traditional types.
- the binding free energy for a nucleic acid molecule with its complementary sequence is sufficient to allow the relevant function of the nucleic acid to proceed, e.g., RNAi activity. Determination of binding free energies for nucleic acid molecules is well known in the art (see, e.g., Turner et al, 1987 , CSH Symp. Quant. Biol . LII pp. 123-133; Frier et al., 1986 , Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci .
- a percent complementarity indicates the percentage of contiguous residues in a nucleic acid molecule that can form hydrogen bonds (e.g., Watson-Crick base pairing) with a second nucleic acid sequence (e.g., 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 out of 10 being 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 100% complementary). “Perfectly complementary” or 100% complementarity means that all the contiguous residues of a nucleic acid sequence will hydrogen bond with the same number of contiguous residues in a second nucleic acid sequence.
- nucleoside units of two strands can hydrogen bond with each other.
- Substantial complementarity refers to polynucleotide strands exhibiting 90% or greater complementarity, excluding regions of the polynucleotide strands, such as overhangs, that are selected so as to be noncomplementary. Specific binding requires a sufficient degree of complementarity to avoid non-specific binding of the oligomeric compound to non-target sequences under conditions in which specific binding is desired, i.e., under physiological conditions in the case of in vivo assays or therapeutic treatment, or in the case of in vitro assays, under conditions in which the assays are performed.
- the non-target sequences typically differ by at least 5 nucleotides.
- the double-stranded oligonucleotide is sufficiently large that it can be cleaved by an endogenous molecule, e.g., by Dicer, to produce smaller double-stranded oligonucleotides, e.g., RNAi agents.
- the double-stranded oligonucleotide modulates the expression of a target gene via RISC mediated cleavage of the target sequence.
- the double-stranded region of a double-stranded oligonucleotide is equal to or at least, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 nucleotide pairs in length.
- the antisense strand of a double-stranded oligonucleotide is equal to or at least 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 nucleotides in length.
- the sense strand of a double-stranded oligonucleotide is equal to or at least 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 nucleotides in length.
- one strand has at least one stretch of 1-5 single-stranded nucleotides in the double-stranded region.
- stretch of single-stranded nucleotides in the double-stranded region is meant that there is present at least one nucleotidebase pair at both ends of the single-stranded stretch.
- both strands have at least one stretch of 1-5 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) single-stranded nucleotides in the double stranded region.
- both strands have a stretch of 1-5 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) single-stranded nucleotides in the double stranded region
- such single-stranded nucleotides can be opposite to each other (e.g., a stretch of mismatches) or they can be located such that the second strand has no single-stranded nucleotides opposite to the single-stranded oligonucleotides of the first strand and vice versa (e.g., a single-stranded loop).
- the single-stranded nucleotides are present within 8 nucleotides from either end, for example 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2 nucleotide from either the 5′ or 3′ end of the region of complementarity between the two strands.
- each strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide has a ZXY structure, such as is described in International Application No. PCT/US2004/07070 filed on Mar. 8, 2004, contents of which are hereby incorporated in their entireties.
- the present invention also includes double-stranded oligonucleotide wherein the two strands are linked together.
- the two strands can be linked to each other at both ends, or at one end only. By linking at one end is meant that 5′-end of first strand is linked to the 3′-end of the second strand or 3′-end of first strand is linked to 5′-end of the second strand.
- 5′-end of first strand is linked to 3′-end of second strand and 3′-end of first strand is linked to 5′-end of second strand.
- the two strands can be linked together by an oligonucleotide linker including, but not limited to, (N) n ; wherein N is independently a modified or unmodified nucleotide and n is 3-23. In some embodiments, n is 3-10, e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10. In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide linker is selected from the group consisting of GNRA, (G) 4 , (U) 4 , and (dT) 4 , wherein N is a modified or unmodified nucleotide and R is a modified or unmodified purine nucleotide.
- nucleotides in the linker can be involved in base-pair interactions with other nucleotides in the linker.
- the two strands can also be linked together by a non-nucleosidic linker, e.g. a linker described herein. It will be appreciated by one of skill in the art that any oligonucleotide chemical modifications or variations describe herein can be used in the oligonucleotide linker.
- Hairpin and dumbbell type RNAi agents will have a duplex region equal to or at least 14, 15, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 29, 21, 22, 23, 24, or 25 nucleotide pairs.
- the duplex region can be equal to or less than 200, 100, or 50, in length. In some embodiments, ranges for the duplex region are 15-30, 17 to 23, 19 to 23, and 19 to 21 nucleotides pairs in length.
- the hairpin oligonucleotides can mimic the natural precursors of microRNAs.
- the hairpin RNAi agents can have a single strand overhang or terminal unpaired region, in some embodiments at the 3′, and in some embodiments on the antisense side of the hairpin.
- the overhangs are 1-4, more generally 2-3 nucleotides in length.
- hairpin RNAi agents In some embodiments of hairpin RNAi agents, 3′-end of antisense is linked to 5′-end of sense strand. In some embodiments of hairpin RNAi agents, 5′-end of antisense is linked to 3′-end of sense strand.
- the hairpin oligonucleotides are also referred to as “shRNA” herein.
- the single-stranded oligonucleotides of the present invention also comprise nucleotide sequence that is substantially complementary to a “sense” nucleic acid encoding a gene expression product, e.g., complementary to the coding strand of a double-stranded cDNA molecule or complementary to an RNA sequence, e.g., a pre-mRNA, mRNA, miRNA, or pre-miRNA.
- the single-stranded oligonucleotides of the invention include antisense oligonucleotides and single-stranded RNAi agents.
- the region of complementarity is less than 30 nucleotides in length, and at least 15 nucleotides in length.
- the single stranded oligonucleotides are 10 to 25 nucleotides in length (e.g., 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, or 24 nucleotides in length). In some embodiments the strand is 25-30 nucleotides. In some embodiments, the single-stranded oligonucleotide is 15-29 nucleotides in length. Single strands having less than 100% complementarity to the mRNA, RNA or DNA are also embraced by the present invention. In some embodiments, the single-stranded oligonucleotide has a ZXY structure, such as is described in International Application No. PCT/US2004/07070 filed on Mar. 8, 2004.
- the single-stranded oligonucleotide can hybridize to a complementary RNA, e.g., mRNA, pre-mRNA, and prevent access of the translation machinery to the target RNA transcript, thereby preventing protein synthesis.
- the single-stranded oligonucleotide can also hybridize to a complementary RNA and the RNA target can be subsequently cleaved by an enzyme such as RNase H and thus preventing translation of target RNA.
- the single-stranded oligonucleotide modulates the expression of a target gene via RISC mediated cleavage of the target sequence.
- a “single-stranded RNAi agent” as used herein, is an RNAi agent which is made up of a single molecule.
- a single-stranded RNAi agent can include a duplexed region, formed by intra-strand pairing, e.g., it can be, or include, a hairpin or pan-handle structure.
- Single-stranded RNAi agents can be antisense with regard to the target molecule.
- a single-stranded RNAi agent can be sufficiently long that it can enter the RISC and participate in RISC mediated cleavage of a target mRNA.
- Single-stranded siRNAs ss siRNAs
- a single-strand RNAi agent is at least 14, and in other embodiments at least 15, at least 20, at least 25, at least 29, at least 35, at least 40, or at least 50 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, it is less than 200, 100, or 60 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments single-stranded RNAi agents are 5′ phosphorylated or include a phosphoryl analog at the 5′ prime terminus. Preferably, the single-stranded RNAi agent has length from 15-29 nucleotides.
- single-stranded RNAi agents or at least one strand of the double-stranded RNAi agent includes at least one of the following motifs: (a) 5′-phosphorothioate or 5′-phosphorodithioate; (b) a cationic modification of nucleotides 1 and 2 on the 5′ terminal, wherein the cationic modification is at C5 position of pyrimidines and C2, C6, C8, exocyclic N2 or exocyclic N6 of purines; (c) at least one G-clamp nucleotide in the first two terminal nucleotides at the 5′ end and the other nucleotide having a cationic modification, wherein the cationic modification is at C5 position of pyrimidines or C2, C6, C8, exocyclic N2 or exocyclic N6 position of purines; (d) at least one 2′-F modified nucleotide comprising a nucleobase base modification; (e) at least one gem-2
- both strands of a double stranded oligonucleotide independently comprise at least one of the above described motifs. In some other embodiments, both strands of a double stranded oligonucleotide comprise at least one
- Single-stranded oligonucleotides including those described and/or identified as single stranded siRNAs, microRNAs or mirs which may be used as targets or may serve as a template for the design of oligonucleotides of the invention are taught in, for example, Esau, et al. US Publication #20050261218 (U.S. Ser. No. 10/909,125) entitled “Oligonucleotides and compositions for use in modulation small non-coding RNAs” the entire contents of which is incorporated herein by reference. It will be appreciated by one of skill in the art that any oligonucleotide chemical modifications or variations describe herein also apply to single stranded oligonucleotides.
- MicroRNAs are a highly conserved class of small RNA molecules that are transcribed from DNA in the genomes of plants and animals, but are not translated into protein. Pre-microRNAs are processed into miRNAs. Processed microRNAs are single stranded ⁇ 17-25 nucleotide (nt) RNA molecules that become incorporated into the RNA-induced silencing complex (RISC) and have been identified as key regulators of development, cell proliferation, apoptosis and differentiation. They are believed to play a role in regulation of gene expression by binding to the 3′-untranslated region of specific mRNAs. RISC mediates down-regulation of gene expression through translational inhibition, transcript cleavage, or both. RISC is also implicated in transcriptional silencing in the nucleus of a wide range of eukaryotes.
- RISC RNA-induced silencing complex
- MicroRNAs have also been implicated in modulation of pathogens in hosts. For example, see Jopling, C. L., et al., Science (2005) vol. 309, pp 1577-1581. Without wishing to be bound by theory, administration of a microRNA, microRNA mimic, and/or anti microRNA oligonucleotide, leads to modulation of pathogen viability, growth, development, and/or replication.
- the oligonucleotide is a microRNA, microRNA mimic, and/or anti microRNA, wherein microRNA is a host microRNA.
- miRNA sequences identified to date is large and growing, illustrative examples of which can be found, for example, in: “ miRBase: microRNA sequences, targets and gene nomenclature ” Griffiths-Jones S, Grocock R J, van Dongen S, Bateman A, Enright A J. NAR, 2006, 34, Database Issue, D140-D144; “ The microRNA Registry ” Griffiths-Jones S. NAR, 2004, 32, Database Issue, D109-D111; and also on the worldwide web at http://microrna.dot.sanger.dot.ac.dot.uk/sequences/.
- Ribozymes are oligonucleotides having specific catalytic domains that possess endonuclease activity (Kim and Cech, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 1987 December; 84(24):8788-92; Forster and Symons, Cell. 1987 Apr. 24; 49(2):211-20). At least six basic varieties of naturally-occurring enzymatic RNAs are known presently. In general, enzymatic nucleic acids act by first binding to a target RNA. Such binding occurs through the target binding portion of an enzymatic nucleic acid which is held in close proximity to an enzymatic portion of the molecule that acts to cleave the target RNA.
- the enzymatic nucleic acid first recognizes and then binds a target RNA through complementary base-pairing, and once bound to the correct site, acts enzymatically to cut the target RNA. Strategic cleavage of such a target RNA will destroy its ability to direct synthesis of an encoded protein. After an enzymatic nucleic acid has bound and cleaved its RNA target, it is released from that RNA to search for another target and can repeatedly bind and cleave new targets.
- Ribozymes can be designed as described in Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 93/23569 and Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 94/02595, each specifically incorporated herein by reference, and synthesized to be tested in vitro and in vivo, as described therein.
- Aptamers are nucleic acid or peptide molecules that bind to a particular molecule of interest with high affinity and specificity (Tuerk and Gold, Science 249:505 (1990); Ellington and Szostak, Nature 346:818 (1990)).
- DNA or RNA aptamers have been successfully produced which bind many different entities from large proteins to small organic molecules. See Eaton, Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 1:10-16 (1997), Famulok, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 9:324-9 (1999), and Hermann and Patel, Science 287:820-5 (2000).
- Aptamers can be RNA or DNA based.
- aptamers are engineered through repeated rounds of in vitro selection or equivalently, SELEX (systematic evolution of ligands by exponential enrichment) to bind to various molecular targets such as small molecules, proteins, nucleic acids, and even cells, tissues and organisms.
- the aptamer can be prepared by any known method, including synthetic, recombinant, and purification methods, and can be used alone or in combination with other aptamers specific for the same target.
- the term “aptamer” specifically includes “secondary aptamers” containing a consensus sequence derived from comparing two or more known aptamers to a given target.
- oligonucleotides bearing the consensus binding sequence of a specific transcription factor can be used as tools for manipulating gene expression in living cells.
- This strategy involves the intracellular delivery of such “decoy oligonucleotides”, which are then recognized and bound by the target factor. Occupation of the transcription factor's DNA-binding site by the decoy renders the transcription factor incapable of subsequently binding to the promoter regions of target genes. Decoys can be used as therapeutic agents, either to inhibit the expression of genes that are activated by a transcription factor, or to up-regulate genes that are suppressed by the binding of a transcription factor. Examples of the utilization of decoy oligonucleotides can be found in Mann et al., J. Clin. Invest., 2000, 106: 1071-1075, which is expressly incorporated by reference herein, in its entirety.
- miRNA mimics represent a class of molecules that can be used to imitate the gene modulating activity of one or more miRNAs.
- miRNA mimic refers to synthetic non-coding RNAs (i.e. the miRNA is not obtained by purification from a source of the endogenous miRNA) that are capable of entering the RNAi pathway and regulating gene expression.
- miRNA mimics can be designed as mature molecules (e.g. single stranded) or mimic precursors (e.g., pri- or pre-miRNAs).
- miRNA mimics are double stranded molecules (e.g., with a duplex region of between about 16 and about 31 nucleotides in length) and contain one or more sequences that have identity with the mature strand of a given miRNA. Double-stranded miRNA mimics have designs similar to as described above for double-stranded oligonucleotides.
- a miRNA mimic comprises a duplex region of between 16 and 31 nucleotides and one or more of the following chemical modification patterns: the sense strand contains 2′-O-methyl modifications of nucleotides 1 and 2 (counting from the 5′ end of the sense oligonucleotide), and all of the Cs and Us; the antisense strand modifications can comprise 2′ F modification of all of the Cs and Us, phosphorylation of the 5′ end of the oligonucleotide, and stabilized internucleotide linkages associated with a 2 nucleotide 3′ overhang.
- a supermir refers to an oligonucleotide, e.g., single stranded, double stranded or partially double stranded, which has a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to an miRNA and that is antisense with respect to its target. This term includes oligonucleotides which comprise at least one non-naturally-occurring portion which functions similarly.
- the supermir does not include a sense strand, and in another preferred embodiment, the supermir does not self-hybridize to a significant extent.
- An supermir featured in the invention can have secondary structure, but it is substantially single-stranded under physiological conditions.
- a supermir that is substantially single-stranded is single-stranded to the extent that less than about 50% (e.g., less than about 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, or 5%) of the supermir is duplexed with itself.
- the supermir can include a hairpin segment, e.g., sequence, preferably at the 3′ end can self hybridize and form a duplex region, e.g., a duplex region of at least 1, 2, 3, or 4 and preferably less than 8, 7, 6, or 5 nucleotides, e.g., 5 nucleotides.
- the duplexed region can be connected by a linker, e.g., a nucleotide linker, e.g., 3, 4, 5, or 6 dTs, e.g., modified dTs.
- a linker e.g., a nucleotide linker, e.g., 3, 4, 5, or 6 dTs, e.g., modified dTs.
- the supermir is duplexed with a shorter oligo, e.g., of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides in length, e.g., at one or both of the 3′ and 5′ end or at one end and in the non-terminal or middle of the supermir.
- microRNA inhibitor or “miR inhibitor” are synonymous and refer to oligonucleotides or modified oligonucleotides that interfere with the activity of specific miRNAs.
- Inhibitors can adopt a variety of configurations including single stranded, double stranded (RNA/RNA or RNA/DNA duplexes), and hairpin designs, in general, microRNA inhibitors comprise one or more sequences or portions of sequences that are complementary or partially complementary with the mature strand (or strands) of the miRNA to be targeted, in addition, the miRNA inhibitor can also comprise additional sequences located 5′ and 3′ to the sequence that is the reverse complement of the mature miRNA.
- the additional sequences can be the reverse complements of the sequences that are adjacent to the mature miRNA in the pri-miRNA from which the mature miRNA is derived, or the additional sequences can be arbitrary sequences (having a mixture of A, G, C, U, or dT). In some embodiments, one or both of the additional sequences are arbitrary sequences capable of forming hairpins. Thus, in some embodiments, the sequence that is the reverse complement of the miRNA is flanked on the 5′ side and on the 3′ side by hairpin structures.
- MicroRNA inhibitors when double stranded, can include mismatches between nucleotides on opposite strands. Furthermore, microRNA inhibitors can be linked to conjugate moieties in order to facilitate uptake of the inhibitor into a cell.
- MicroRNA inhibitors including hairpin miRNA inhibitors, are described in detail in Vermeulen et al., “Double-Stranded Regions Are Essential Design Components Of Potent Inhibitors of RISC Function,” RNA 13: 723-730 (2007) and in WO2007/095387 and WO 2008/036825 each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- a person of ordinary skill in the art can select a sequence from the database for a desired miRNA and design an inhibitor useful for the methods disclosed herein.
- Antagomirs are RNA-like oligonucleotides that harbor various modifications for RNAse protection and pharmacologic properties, such as enhanced tissue and cellular uptake. They differ from normal RNA by, for example, complete 2′-O-methylation of sugar, phosphorothioate intersugar linkage and, for example, a cholesterol-moiety at 3′-end.
- antagomir comprises a 2′-O-methylmodification at all nucleotides, a cholesterol moiety at 3′-end, two phsophorothioate intersugar linkages at the first two positions at the 5′-end and four phosphorothioate linkages at the 3′-end of the molecule.
- Antagomirs can be used to efficiently silence endogenous miRNAs by forming duplexes comprising the antagomir and endogenous miRNA, thereby preventing miRNA-induced gene silencing.
- An example of antagomir-mediated miRNA silencing is the silencing of miR-122, described in Krutzfeldt et al, Nature, 2005, 438: 685-689, which is expressly incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- U1 adaptors inhibit polyA sites and are bifunctional oligonucleotides with a target domain complementary to a site in the target gene's terminal exon and a ‘U1 domain’ that binds to the U1 smaller nuclear RNA component of the U1 snRNP.
- U1 snRNP is a ribonucleoprotein complex that functions primarily to direct early steps in spliceosome formation by binding to the pre-mRNA exon-intron boundary, Brown and Simpson, 1998, Annu Rev Plant Physiol Plant MoI Biol 49:77-95.
- the oligonucleotide of the invention is a U1 adaptor, wherein the oligonucleotide comprises at least one annealing domain (targeting domain) linked to at least one effector domain (U1 domain), wherein the annealing domain hybridizes to a target gene sequence and the effector domain hybridizes to the U1 snRNA of U1 snRNP.
- the U1 adaptor comprises one annealing domain.
- the U1 adaptor comprises one effector domain.
- the annealing domain will typically be from about 10 to about 50 nucleotides in length, more typically from about 10 to about 30 nucleotides or about 10 to about 20 nucleotides. In some preferred embodiments, the annealing domain is 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or 21 nucleotides in length.
- the annealing domain may be at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 97%, or, more preferably, 100% complementary to the target gene.
- the annealing domain hybridizes with a target site within the 3′ terminal exon of a pre-mRNA, which includes the terminal coding region and the 3′UTR and polyadenylation signal sequences (e.g., through the polyadenylation site).
- the target sequence is within about 500 basepair, about 250 basepair, about 100 basepair, or about 50 basepair of the poly (A) signal sequence of the pre-mRNA.
- the annealing domain comprises 1, 2, 3, or 4, mismatches with the target gene sequence.
- the effector domain may be from about 8 nucleotides to about 30 nucleotides, from about 10 nucleotides to about 20 nucleotides, or from about 10 to about 15 nucleotides in length.
- the U1 domain can hybridize with U1 snRNA, particularly the 5′-end and more specifically nucleotides 2-11. In another embodiment, the U1 domain is perfectly complementary to nucleotides 2-11 of endogenous U1 snRNA.
- the U1 domain comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO: 1 (5′-GCCAGGUAAGUAU-3′), SEQ ID NO: 2 (5′-CCAGGUAAGUAU-3′), SEQ ID NO: 4 (5′-CAGGUAAGUAU-3′), SEQ ID NO: 5 (5′-CAGGUAAGU-3′), SEQ ID NO: 6 (5′-CAGGUAAG-3′), and SEQ ID NO: 7 (5′-CAGGUAA-3′).
- the U1 domain comprises a nucleotide sequence SEQ ID NO: 8 (5′-CAGGUAAGUA-3′).
- the annealing and effector domains of the U1 adaptor can be linked such that the effector domain is at the 5′ end and/or 3′ end of the annealing domain.
- the two domains can be linked by such that the 3′ end of one domain is linked to 5′ end of the other domain, or 3′ end of one domain is linked to 3′ end of the other domain, or 5′ end of one domain is linked to 5′ end of the other domain.
- the annealing and effector domains can be linked directly to each other or by a nucleotide based or non-nucleotide based linker. When the linker is nucleotide based, the linker can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, up to 15, up to 20, or up to 25 nucleotides.
- the linker between the annealing domain and the effector domain is multivalent, e.g., bivalent, tetravalent or pentavalent.
- a multivalent linker can be used to link together a single annealing domain with a plurality of adaptor domains.
- U1 adaptor can comprise any oligonucleotide modification described herein.
- exemplary modifications for U1 adaptors include those that increase annealing affinity, specificity, bioavailability in the cell and organism, cellular and/or nuclear transport, stability, and/or resistance to degradation.
- the U1 adaptor can be administered in combination with at least one other RNAi agent.
- Nucleic acids of the present invention can be immunostimulatory, including immunostimulatory oligonucleotides (single- or double-stranded) capable of inducing an immune response when administered to a subject, which can be a mammal or other patient.
- the immune response can be an innate or an adaptive immune response.
- the immune system is divided into a more innate immune system, and acquired adaptive immune system of vertebrates, the latter of which is further divided into humoral cellular components.
- the immune response can be mucosal.
- Immunostimulatory nucleic acids are considered to be non-sequence specific when it is not required that they specifically bind to and reduce the expression of a target polynucleotide in order to provoke an immune response.
- certain immunostimulatory nucleic acids can comprise a sequence corresponding to a region of a naturally occurring gene or mRNA, but they can still be considered non-sequence specific immunostimulatory nucleic acids.
- the immunostimulatory nucleic acid or oligonucleotide comprises at least one CpG dinucleotide.
- the oligonucleotide or CpG dinucleotide can be unmethylated or methylated.
- the immunostimulatory nucleic acid comprises at least one CpG dinucleotide having a methylated cytosine.
- the nucleic acid comprises a single CpG dinucleotide, wherein the cytosine in said CpG dinucleotide is methylated.
- the immunostimulatory oligonucleotide comprises a phosphate or a phosphate modification at the 5′-end.
- oligonucleotides with modified or unmodified 5′-phospahtes induce an anti-viral or an antibacterial response, in particular, the induction of type I IFN, IL-18 and/or IL-1 ⁇ by modulating RIG-I.
- RNAa small RNA-induced gene activation
- RNAa gene activation by RNAa is long-lasting. Induction of gene expression has been seen to last for over ten days. The prolonged effect of RNAa could be attributed to epigenetic changes at dsRNA target sites.
- the oligonucleotide is an RNA activator, wherein oligonucleotide increases the expression of a gene. In some embodiments, increased gene expression inhibits viability, growth development, and/or reproduction.
- TFO triplex forming oligonucleotides
- triplex-forming oligonucleotides preferably are at least 15, more preferably 25, still more preferably 30 or more nucleotides in length, up to 50 or 100 nucleotides.
- Formation of the triple helical structure with the target DNA induces steric and functional changes, blocking transcription initiation and elongation, allowing the introduction of desired sequence changes in the endogenous DNA and resulting in the specific down-regulation of gene expression.
- Examples of such suppression of gene expression in cells treated with TFOs include knockout of episomal supFG1 and endogenous HPRT genes in mammalian cells (Vasquez et al., Nucl Acids Res.
- TFOs designed according to the abovementioned principles can induce directed mutagenesis capable of effecting DNA repair, thus providing both down-regulation and up-regulation of expression of endogenous genes (Seidman and Glazer, J Gin Invest 2003; 112:487-94).
- Detailed description of the design, synthesis and administration of effective TFOs can be found in U.S. Pat. App. Nos. 2003 017068 and 2003 0096980 to Frothier et al, and 2002 01282118 and 2002 0123476 to Emanuele et al, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,721,138 to Lawn, contents of which are herein incorporated in their entireties.
- Unmodified oligonucleotides can be less than optimal in some applications, e.g., unmodified oligonucleotides can be prone to degradation by e.g., cellular nucleases. However, chemical modifications to one or more of the subunits of oligonucleotide can confer improved properties, e.g., can render oligonucleotides more stable to nucleases.
- Typical oligonucleotide modifications can include one or more of: (i) alteration, e.g., replacement, of one or both of the non-linking phosphate oxygens and/or of one or more of the linking phosphate oxygens in the phosphodiester intersugar linkage; (ii) alteration, e.g., replacement, of a constituent of the ribose sugar, e.g., of the 2′ hydroxyl on the ribose sugar; (iii) wholesale replacement of the phosphate moiety with “dephospho” linkers; (iv) modification or replacement of a naturally occurring base with a non-natural base; (v) replacement or modification of the ribose-phosphate backbone, e.g.
- PNA peptide nucleic acid
- modification of the 3′ end or 5′ end of the oligonucleotide e.g., removal, modification or replacement of a terminal phosphate group or conjugation of a moiety, e.g., conjugation of a ligand, to either the 3′ or 5′ end of oligonucleotide
- modification of the sugar e.g., six membered rings.
- modification does not mean that one must start with a reference or naturally occurring ribonucleic acid and modify it to produce a modified ribonucleic acid bur rather modified simply indicates a difference from a naturally occurring molecule.
- modifications e.g., those described herein, can be provided as asymmetrical modifications.
- a modification described herein can be the sole modification, or the sole type of modification included on multiple nucleotides, or a modification can be combined with one or more other modifications described herein.
- the modifications described herein can also be combined onto an oligonucleotide, e.g. different nucleotides of an oligonucleotide have different modifications described herein.
- the phosphate group in the intersugar linkage can be modified by replacing one of the oxygens with a different substituent.
- One result of this modification to RNA phosphate intersugar linkages can be increased resistance of the oligonucleotide to nucleolytic breakdown.
- modified phosphate groups include phosphorothioate, phosphoroselenoate, borano phosphates, borano phosphate esters, hydrogen phosphonates, phosphoroamidites, alkyl or aryl phosphonates and phosphotriesters.
- one of the non-bridging phosphate oxygen atoms in the intersugar linkage can be replaced by any of the following: S, Se, BR 3 (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl), C (i.e. an alkyl group, an aryl group, etc. . . . ), H, NR 2 (R is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, aryl), or OR (R is optionally substituted alkyl or aryl).
- the phosphorous atom in an unmodified phosphate group is achiral.
- the stereogenic phosphorous atom can possess either the “R” configuration (herein Rp) or the “S” configuration (herein Sp).
- Phosphorodithioates have both non-bridging oxygens replaced by sulfur.
- the phosphorus center in the phosphorodithioates is achiral which precludes the formation of oligonucleotides diastereomers.
- modifications to both non-bridging oxygens, which eliminate the chiral center, e.g. phosphorodithioate formation can be desirable in that they cannot produce diastereomer mixtures.
- the non-bridging oxygens can be independently any one of O, S, Se, B, C, H, N, or OR (R is alkyl or aryl).
- the phosphate linker can also be modified by replacement of bridging oxygen, (i.e. oxygen that links the phosphate to the nucleoside), with nitrogen (bridged phosphoroamidates), sulfur (bridged phosphorothioates) and carbon (bridged methylenephosphonates).
- bridging oxygen i.e. oxygen that links the phosphate to the nucleoside
- nitrogen bridged phosphoroamidates
- sulfur bridged phosphorothioates
- carbon bridged methylenephosphonates
- Modified phosphate linkages where at least one of the oxygen linked to the phosphate has been replaced or the phosphate group has been replaced by a non-phosphorous group are also referred to as “non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage” or “non-phosphodiester linker.”
- the phosphate group can be replaced by non-phosphorus containing connectors, e.g. dephospho linkers.
- Dephospho linkers are also referred to as non-phosphodiester linkers herein. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that since the charged phosphodiester group is the reaction center in nucleolytic degradation, its replacement with neutral structural mimics should impart enhanced nuclease stability. Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable, in some embodiment, to introduce alterations in which the charged phosphate group is replaced by a neutral moiety.
- moieties which can replace the phosphate group include, but are not limited to, amides (for example amide-3 (3′-CH 2 —C( ⁇ O)—N(H)-5′) and amide-4 (3′-CH 2 —N(H)—C( ⁇ O)-5′)), hydroxylamino, siloxane (dialkylsiloxxane), carboxamide, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, carboxylate ester, thioether, ethylene oxide linker, sulfide, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfonate ester, thioformacetal (3′-S—CH 2 —O-5′), formacetal (3′-O—CH 2 —O-5′), oxime, methyleneimino, methykenecarbonylamino, methylenemethylimino (MMI, 3′-CH 2 —N(CH 3 )—O-5′), methylenehydrazo, methyl enedimethyl
- Preferred embodiments include methylenemethylimino (MMI), methylenecarbonylamino, amides, carbamate and ethylene oxide linker.
- a modification of a non-bridging oxygen can necessitate modification of 2′-OH, e.g., a modification that does not participate in cleavage of the neighboring intersugar linkage, e.g., arabinose sugar, 2′-O-alkyl, 2′-F, LNA and ENA.
- Preferred non-phosphodiester intersugar linkages include phosphorothioates, phosphorothioates with an at least 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% 95% or more enantiomeric excess of Sp isomer, phosphorothioates with an at least 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% 95% or more enantiomeric excess of Rp isomer, phosphorodithioates, phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotrioesters, alkyl-phosphonaters (e.g., methyl-phosphonate), selenophosphates, phosphoramidates (e.g., N-alkylphosphoramidate), and boranophosphonates.
- phosphorodithioates phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotrioesters, alkyl-phosphonaters (e.g., methyl-phosphonate), sel
- Oligonucleotide-mimicking scaffolds can also be constructed wherein the phosphate linker and ribose sugar are replaced by nuclease resistant nucleoside or nucleotide surrogates. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that the absence of a repetitively charged backbone diminishes binding to proteins that recognize polyanions (e.g. nucleases). Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable in some embodiment, to introduce alterations in which the bases are tethered by a neutral surrogate backbone.
- Examples include the morpholino, cyclobutyl, pyrrolidine, peptide nucleic acid (PNA), aminoethylglycyl PNA (aegPNA) and backnone-extended pyrrolidine PNA (bepPNA) nucleoside surrogates.
- PNA peptide nucleic acid
- aegPNA aminoethylglycyl PNA
- bepPNA backnone-extended pyrrolidine PNA
- An oligonucleotide can include modification of all or some of the sugar groups of the nucleic acid.
- the 2′ hydroxyl group (OH) can be modified or replaced with a number of different “oxy” or “deoxy” substituents.
- enhanced stability is expected since the hydroxyl can no longer be deprotonated to form a 2′-alkoxide ion.
- the 2′-alkoxide can catalyze degradation by intramolecular nucleophilic attack on the linker phosphorus atom.
- a modification at the 2′ position can be present in the arabinose configuration
- the term “arabinose configuration” refers to the placement of a substituent on the C2′ of ribose in the same configuration as the 2′-OH is in the arabinose.
- the sugar group can comprise two different modifications at the same carbon in the sugar, e.g., gem modification.
- the sugar group can also contain one or more carbons that possess the opposite stereochemical configuration than that of the corresponding carbon in ribose.
- an oligonucleotide can include nucleotides containing e.g., arabinose, as the sugar.
- the monomer can have an alpha linkage at the 1′ position on the sugar, e.g., alpha-nucleosides.
- the monomer can also have the opposite configuration at the 4′-position, e.g., C5′ and H4′ or substituents replacing them are interchanged with each other. When the C5′ and H4′ or substituents replacing them are interchanged with each other, the sugar is said to be modified at the 4′ position.
- Oligonucleotides can also include abasic sugars, which lack a nucleobase at C-1′ or has other chemical groups in place of a nucleobase at C1′. See for example U.S. Pat. No. 5,998,203, contents of which are herein incorporated in their entirety. These abasic sugars can also be further containing modifications at one or more of the constituent sugar atoms. Oligonucleotides can also contain one or more sugars that are the L isomer, e.g. L-nucleosides. Modification to the sugar group can also include replacement of the 4′-O with a sulfur, optionally substituted nitrogen or CH 2 group. In some embodiments, linkage between C1′ and nucleobase is in the a configuration.
- Modifications can also include acyclic nucleotides, wherein a C—C bonds between ribose carbons (e.g., C1′-C2′, C2′-C3′, C3′-C4′, C4′-04′, C1′-O4′) is absent and/or at least one of ribose carbons or oxygen (e.g., C1′, C2′, C3′, C4′ or O4′) are independently or in combination absent from the nucleotide.
- acyclic nucleotide is
- B is a modified or unmodified nucleobase
- R 1 and R 2 independently are H, halogen, OR 3 , or alkyl
- R 3 is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl or sugar).
- Preferred sugar modifications are 2′-H, 2′-O-Me (2′-O-methyl), 2′-O-MOE (2′-O-methoxyethyl), 2′-F, 2′-O-[2-(methylamino)-2-oxoethyl] (2′-O-NMA), 2′-S-methyl, 2′-O—CH 2 -(4′-C) (LNA), 2′-O—CH 2 CH 2 -(4′-C) (ENA), 2′-O-aminopropyl (2′-O-AP), 2′-O-dimethylaminoethyl (2′-O-DMAOE), 2′-O-dimethylaminopropyl (2′-O-DMAP), 2′-O-dimethylaminoethyloxyethyl (2′-O-DMAEOE) and gem 2′-OMe/2′F with 2′-O-Me in the arabinose configuration.
- xylose configuration refers to the placement of a substituent on the C3′ of ribose in the same configuration as the 3′-OH is in the xylose sugar.
- the hydrogen attached to C4′ and/or C1′ can be replaced by a straight- or branched-optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, wherein backbone of the alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl can contain one or more of O, S, S(O), SO 2 , N(R′), C(O), N(R′)C(O)O, OC(O)N(R′), CH(Z′), phosphorous containing linkage, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclic or optionally substituted cycloalkyl, where R′ is hydrogen, acyl or optionally substituted aliphatic, Z′ is selected from the group consisting of OR 11 , COR 11 , CO 2 R 11 ,
- NR 21 R 31 CONR 21 R 31 , CON(H)NR 21 R 31 , ONR 21 R 31 , CON(H)N ⁇ CR 41 R 51 , N(R 21 )C( ⁇ NR 31 )NR 21 R 31 , N(R 21 )C(O)NR 21 R 31 , N(R 21 )C(S)NR 21 R 31 , OC(O)NR 21 R 31 , SC(O)NR 21 R 31 , N(R 21 )C(S)OR 11 , N(R 21 )C(O)OR 11 , N(R 21 )C(O)SR 11 , N(R 21 )N ⁇ CR 41 R 51 , ON ⁇ CR 41 R 51 , SO 2 R 11 , SOR 11 , SR 11 , and substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic; R 21 and R 31 for each occurrence are independently hydrogen, acyl, unsubstituted or substituted aliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl heterocyclic, OR 11 ,
- C4′ and C5′ together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic, preferably comprising at least one —PX(Y)—, wherein X is H, OH, OM, SH, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted alkylthio, optionally substituted alkylamino or optionally substituted dialkylamino, where M is independently for each occurrence an alki metal or transition metal with an overall charge of +1; and Y is O, S, or NR′, where R′ is hydrogen, optionally substituted aliphatic.
- this modification is at the 5 terminal of the oligonucleotide.
- the 3′ and 5′ ends of an oligonucleotide can be modified. Such modifications can be at the 3′ end, 5′ end or both ends of the molecule.
- the 3′ and/or 5′ ends of an oligonucleotide can be conjugated to other functional molecular entities such as labeling moieties, e.g., fluorophores (e.g., pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes) or protecting groups (based e.g., on sulfur, silicon, boron or ester).
- the functional molecular entities can be attached to the sugar through a phosphate group and/or a linker.
- the terminal atom of the linker can connect to or replace the linking atom of the phosphate group or the C-3′ or C-5′ O, N, S or C group of the sugar.
- the linker can connect to or replace the terminal atom of a nucleotide surrogate (e.g., PNAs).
- this array can substitute for a hairpin RNA loop in a hairpin-type RNA agent.
- Terminal modifications useful for modulating activity include modification of the 5′ end with phosphate or phosphate analogs.
- antisense strands of dsRNAs are 5′ phosphorylated or include a phosphoryl analog at the 5′ terminus.
- 5′-phosphate modifications include those which are compatible with RISC mediated gene silencing. Modifications at the 5′-terminal end can also be useful in stimulating or inhibiting the immune system of a subject.
- the 5′-end of the oligonucleotide comprises the modification
- W, X and Y are each independently selected from the group consisting of O, OR (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl), S, Se, BR 3 (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl), BH 3 ⁇ , C (i.e. an alkyl group, an aryl group, etc. . . .
- a and Z are each independently for each occurrence absent, O, S, CH 2 , NR (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl), or optionally substituted alkylene, wherein backbone of the alkylene can comprise one or more of O, S, SS and NR (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl) internally and/or at the end; and n is 0-2. In some embodiments n is 1 or 2. It is understood that A is replacing the oxygen linked to 5′ carbon of sugar.
- W and Y together with the P to which they are attached can form an optionally substituted 5-8 membered heterocyclic, wherein W an Y are each independently O, S, NR′ or alkylene.
- the heterocyclic is substituted with an aryl or heteroaryl.
- one or both hydrogen on C5′ of the 5′-terminal nucleotides are replaced with a halogen, e.g., F.
- Exemplary 5′-modifications include, but are not limited to, 5′-monophosphate ((HO) 2 (O)P—O-5′); 5′-diphosphate ((HO) 2 (O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-triphosphate ((HO) 2 (O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-monothiophosphate (phosphorothioate; (HO)2(S)P—O-5′); 5′-monodithiophosphate (phosphorodithioate; (HO)(HS)(S)P—O-5′), 5′-phosphorothiolate ((HO) 2 (O)P—S-5′); 5′-alpha-thiotriphosphate; 5′-beta-thiotriphosphate; 5′-gamma-thiotriphosphate; 5′-phosphoramidates ((HO) 2 (O)P—NH-5′
- exemplary 5′-modifications include where Z is optionally substituted alkyl at least once, e.g., ((HO) 2 (X)P—O[—(CH 2 ) a —O—P(X)(OH)—O] b -5′, ((HO)2(X)P—O[—(CH 2 ) a —P(X)(OH)—O] b -5′, ((HO)2(X)P—[—(CH 2 ) a —O—P(X)(OH)—O] b -5′; dialkyl terminal phosphates and phosphate mimics: HO[—(CH 2 ) a —O—P(X)(OH)—O] b -5′, H2N[—(CH 2 ) a —O—P(X)(OH)—O] b -5′, H[—(CH 2 ) a —O—P(X)(OH)—O] b -5′,
- Terminal modifications can also be useful for monitoring distribution, and in such cases the preferred groups to be added include fluorophores, e.g., fluorescein or an Alexa dye, e.g., Alexa 488. Terminal modifications can also be useful for enhancing uptake, useful modifications for this include targeting ligands. Terminal modifications can also be useful for cross-linking an oligonucleotide to another moiety; modifications useful for this include mitomycin C, psoralen, and derivatives thereof.
- fluorophores e.g., fluorescein or an Alexa dye, e.g., Alexa 488.
- Terminal modifications can also be useful for enhancing uptake, useful modifications for this include targeting ligands. Terminal modifications can also be useful for cross-linking an oligonucleotide to another moiety; modifications useful for this include mitomycin C, psoralen, and derivatives thereof.
- Adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine and uracil are the most common bases (or nucleobases) found in nucleic acids. These bases can be modified or replaced to provide oligonucleotides having improved properties.
- nuclease resistant oligonucleotides can be prepared with these bases or with synthetic and natural nucleobases (e.g., inosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, isoguanisine, or tubercidine) and any one of the above modifications.
- substituted or modified analogs of any of the above bases and “universal bases” can be employed.
- nucleotide When a natural base is replaced by a non-natural and/or universal base, the nucleotide is said to comprise a modified nucleobase and/or a nucleobase modification herein.
- Modified nucleobase and/or nucleobase modifications also include natural, non-natural and universal bases, which comprise conjugated moieties, e.g. a ligand described herein.
- Preferred conjugate moieties for conjugation with nucleobases include cationic amino groups which can be conjugated to the nucleobase via an appropriate alkyl, alkenyl or a linker with an amide linkage.
- An oligonucleotide can also include nucleobase (often referred to in the art simply as “base”) modifications or substitutions.
- nucleobases include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases thymine (T), cytosine (C) and uracil (U).
- Modified nucleobases include other synthetic and natural nucleobases such as inosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, isoguanisine, tubercidine, 2-(halo)adenine, 2-(alkyl)adenine, 2-(propyl)adenine, 2-(amino)adenine, 2-(aminoalkyl)adenine, 2-(aminopropyl)adenine, 2-(methylthio)-N 6 -(isopentenyl)adenine, 6-(alkyl)adenine, 6-(methyl)adenine, 7-(deaza)adenine, 8-(alkenyl)adenine, 8-(alkyl)adenine, 8-(alkynyl)adenine, 8-(amino)adenine, 8-(halo)adenine, 8-(hydroxyl)adenine, 8-(thioalkyl)adenine, 8-(thiol
- a universal nucleobase is any modified or nucleobase that can base pair with all of the four naturally occurring nucleobases without substantially affecting the melting behavior, recognition by intracellular enzymes or activity of the oligonucleotide duplex.
- Some exemplary universal nucleobases include, but are not limited to, 2,4-difluorotoluene, nitropyrrolyl, nitroindolyl, 8-aza-7-deazaadenine, 4-fluoro-6-methylbenzimidazle, 4-methylbenzimidazle, 3-methyl isocarbostyrilyl, 5-methyl isocarbostyrilyl, 3-methyl-7-propynyl isocarbostyrilyl, 7-azaindolyl, 6-methyl-7-azaindolyl, imidizopyridinyl, 9-methyl-imidizopyridinyl, pyrrolopyrizinyl, isocarbostyrilyl, 7-propynyl isocarbostyrilyl, propynyl-7-azaindolyl, 2,4,5-trimethylphenyl, 4-methylinolyl, 4,6-dimethylindolyl, phenyl, napthalenyl
- nucleobases include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,687,808; those disclosed in International Application No. PCT/US09/038425, filed Mar. 26, 2009; those disclosed in the Concise Encyclopedia Of Polymer Science And Engineering, pages 858-859, Kroschwitz, J. I., ed. John Wiley & Sons, 1990; those disclosed by English et al., Angewandte Chemie, International Edition, 1991, 30, 613; those disclosed in Modified Nucleosides in Biochemistry, Biotechnology and Medicine, Herdewijin, P. Ed. Wiley-VCH, 2008; and those disclosed by Sanghvi, Y. S., Chapter 15, dsRNA Research and Applications, pages 289-302, Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B., Eds., CRC Press, 1993. Contents of all of the above are herein incorporated by reference.
- oligonucleotides used in accordance with this invention can be synthesized with solid phase synthesis, see for example “Oligonucleotide synthesis, a practical approach”, Ed. M. J. Gait, IRL Press, 1984; “Oligonucleotides and Analogues, A Practical Approach”, Ed. F.
- phosphinate oligonucleotides The preparation of phosphinate oligonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,508,270. The preparation of alkyl phosphonate oligonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,469,863. The preparation of phosphoramidite oligonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,256,775 or U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,878. The preparation of phosphotriester oligonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,023,243. The preparation of boranophosphate oligonucleotide is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,130,302 and 5,177,198.
- 3′-Deoxy-3′-amino phosphoramidate oligonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,476,925.
- 3′-Deoxy-3′-methylenephosphonate oligonucleotides is described in An, H, et al. J. Org. Chem. 2001, 66, 2789-2801.
- Preparation of sulfur bridged nucleotides is described in Sproat et al. Nucleosides Nucleotides 1988, 7,651 and Crosstick et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1989, 30, 4693.
- MMI linked oligonucleosides also identified herein as MMI linked oligonucleosides, methylenedimethylhydrazo linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as MDH linked oligonucleosides, and methylenecarbonylamino linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as amide-3 linked oligonucleosides, and methyleneaminocarbonyl linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as amide-4 linked oligonucleosides as well as mixed intersugar linkage compounds having, as for instance, alternating MMI and PO or PS linkages can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos.
- Cyclobutyl sugar surrogate compounds can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,359,044. Pyrrolidine sugar surrogate can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,519,134. Morpholino sugar surrogates can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,142,047 and 5,235,033, and other related patent disclosures.
- Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNAs) are known per se and can be prepared in accordance with any of the various procedures referred to in Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNA): Synthesis, Properties and Potential Applications, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry, 1996, 4, 5-23. They can also be prepared in accordance with U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,083.
- oligonucleotides are polymers of subunits or monomers
- many of the modifications described herein can occur at a position which is repeated within an oligonucleotide, e.g., a modification of a nucleobase, a sugar, a phosphate moiety, or the non-bridging oxygen of a phosphate moiety. It is not necessary for all positions in a given oligonucleotide to be uniformly modified, and in fact more than one of the aforementioned modifications can be incorporated in a single oligonucleotide or even at a single nucleoside within an oligonucleotide.
- the modification will occur at all of the subject positions in the oligonucleotide but in many, and in fact in most cases it will not.
- a modification can occur at a 3′ or 5′ terminal position, can occur in the internal region, can occur in 3′, 5′ or both terminal regions, e.g. at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides of an oligonucleotide.
- the terminal nucleotide e.g., 3′-terminal or preferably 5′-terminal does not comprise a modification.
- the terminal nucleotide or the last 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides of at least one end of the oligonucleotide all comprise at least one modification.
- the modification is same.
- the terminal nucleotide or the last 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides at both ends of the oligonucleotide all comprise at least one modification. It is to be understood that type of modification and number of modified nucleotides on one end is independent of type of modification and number of modified nucleotides on the other end.
- a modification can occur in a double strand region, a single strand region, or in both.
- a modification can occur in the double strand region of an oligonucleotide or can occur in a single strand region of an oligonucleotide.
- a modification described herein does not occur in the region corresponding to the target cleavage site region.
- a phosphorothioate modification at a non-bridging oxygen position can occur at one or both termini, can occur in a terminal regions, e.g., at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides of a strand, or can occur in double strand and single strand regions, particularly at termini.
- Some modifications can preferably be included on an oligonucleotide at a particular location, e.g., at an internal position of a strand, or on the 5′ or 3′ end of an oligonucleotide.
- a preferred location of a modification on an oligonucleotide can confer preferred properties on the oligonucleotide.
- preferred locations of particular modifications can confer optimum gene silencing properties, or increased resistance to endonuclease or exonuclease activity.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), of 5′-5′, 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-5′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage.
- the last nucleotide on the terminal end is linked via a 5′-5′, 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-5′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage to the rest of the oligonucleotide.
- the last nucleotide on both the terminal ends is linked via a 5′-5′, 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage to the rest of the oligonucleotide.
- at least one 5′-5′, 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-5′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage is a non-phosphodiester linkage.
- An oligonucleotide can comprise at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 more), 5′-pyrimidine-purine-3′ (5′-PyPu-3′) and/or 5′-pyrimidine-pyrimidine-3′ (5′-PyPy-3′) dinucleotide sequence motif, wherein the 5′-most pyrimidine ribose sugar is modified at the 2′-position.
- Preferred 2′-modifications include, but are not limited to, 2′-H, 2′-O-Me (2′-O-methyl), 2′-O-MOE (2′-O-methoxyethyl), 2′-F, 2′-O-[2-(methylamino)-2-oxoethyl] (2′-O-NMA), 2′-O—CH 2 CH 2 N(CH 2 CH 2 NMe 2 )2, 2′-S-methyl, 2′-O—CH 2 -(4′-C) (LNA) and 2′-O—CH 2 CH 2 -(4′-C) (ENA). Double-stranded oligonucleotides including these modifications are particularly stabilized against endonuclease activity.
- the 3′ most nucleotide in the dinucleotide motif also comprises a ribose sugar which is modified at the 2′-position.
- the modification can be the same or different on the two nucleotides.
- the 5′ most pyrimidine in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif in the oligonucleotide comprises a ribose sugar which is modified at the 2′-position.
- both nucleotides in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprise a ribose sugar comprising a 2′-modification.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the intersugar linkage between the two nucleotides is not a phosphodiester.
- the intersugar linkage is a non-phosphodiester linkage described herein. Preferred non-phosphodiester linkages include, but are not limited to, phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, N-alkyl phosphoramidate, alkyl phosphonate (e.g., methyl phosphonate) and borano phosphonate.
- the intersugar linkage between the two nucleotides in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif is a non-phosphodiester linkage.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein at least one of the nucleotides comprises a nucleobase modification, e.g. a modified nucleobase or a nucleobase with one or more conjugated moieties.
- the 5′ most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide sequence motif comprises the nucleobase modification.
- the 3′ most nucleotide in the dinucleotide motif also comprises the nucleobase modification.
- both nucleotides in the dinucleotide motif comprise a nucleobase modification. In some embodiments, at least one nucleotides in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprises a nucleobase modification. In still another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine. In yet still another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the 5′-most pyrimidine ribose sugar is modified at the 2′-position and the oligonucleotide further comprises at least one of a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, a nucleobase modification or a 2′ modification.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the 5′-most pyrimidine ribose sugar is modified at the 2′-position and the oligonucleotide further comprises at least one of a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, a nucleobase
- the 5′-most pyrimidines in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprise a ribose sugar modified at the 2′-position
- the oligonucleotide further comprises at least one of a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, a nucleobase modification or a 2′ modification.
- the non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, the nucleobase modification and/or the 2′-modification is comprised within the dinucleotide motif, e.g.
- the intersugar linkage between the two nucleosides of the dinucleotide motif is a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, one or both nucleosides comprise a nucleobase modification and/or the 3′-nucleoside of the motif comprises a 2′-modification.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif, wherein the ribose sugar of the 5′-most pyrimidine is replaced by a non ribose moiety, e.g., a six membered ring.
- the 5′-most pyrimidines all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprise a non ribose sugar, e.g. a six membered ring.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10, 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the C 5 position of the 5′-most pyrimidine is conjugated with a ligand, e.g. a cationic group, e.g. a cationic amino group.
- the 5′-most pyrimidines all occurrences of dinucleotide motif are conjugated with a ligand, at the C 5 position, wherein each ligand is selected independently of other ligands.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ dinucleotide wherein the N 2 ,N 6 , and/or C 8 position of the purine is conjugated with a ligand, e.g. a cationic group, e.g. a cationic amino group.
- the 3′-most purines in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif are conjugated with a ligand at the N 2 ,N 6 , and/or C 8 positions, wherein each ligand is selected independently of other ligands.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein both nucleotides comprise nucleobase modifications, e.g., the C 5 position of the pyrimidine and the N 2 ,N 6 , and/or C 8 position of the purine is conjugated with a ligand, e.g. a cationic group, wherein each ligand is selected independently.
- a ligand e.g. a cationic group
- both nucleotides in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif are conjugated with a ligand, wherein each ligand is selected independently of other ligands.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine.
- the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein at least one of the nucleotides comprises a nucleobase modification and neither nucleotide comprises a modification at the 2′ position of the ribose sugar.
- at least one nucleotide in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprise a nucleobase modification and neither nucleotide comprises a modification at the 2′ position of the ribose sugar.
- both nucleotides in the dinucleotide motif comprise a nucleobase modification and neither nucleotide comprises a modification at the 2′ position of the ribose sugar.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the intersugar linkage between the two nucleotides is not a phosphodiester and neither nucleotide comprises a modification at the 2′ position of the ribose sugar.
- the intersugar linkage is a non-phosphodiester linkage described herein.
- the intersugar linkage between the two nucleotides in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif is a non-phosphodiester linkage and neither nucleotide comprises a modification at the 2′ position of the ribose sugar.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the 5′-most pyrimidine comprises a modification at the 2′-position, the intersugar linkage between the two nucleosides is a non-phosphodiester linkage and at least one of the nucleotides comprises a nucleobase modification.
- the 5′ most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif comprises the nucleobase modification.
- the 3′ most nucleotide in the dinucleotide motif comprises the nucleobase modification.
- both the nucleotides in the dinucleotide motif comprise the nucleobase modification.
- the 5′ most pyrimidine in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprises a 2′-modified ribose sugar, intersugar linkage between the two nucleosides is a non-phosphodiester linkage and at least one of the nucleosides comprises a nucleobase modification.
- the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′dinucleotide motif wherein the 3′ most nucleoside comprises a modification at the 2′-position, intersugar linkage between the two nucleosides is a non-phosphodiester linkage and at least one of the nucleosides comprises a nucleobase modification.
- the 5′-most nucleoside in the dinucleotide motif comprises the nucleobase modification.
- the 3′-most nucleoside in the dinucleotide motif comprises the nucleobase modification.
- both nucleosides in the dinucleotide comprise the nucleobase modification.
- the 3′ most nucleoside in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprises a 2′-modified ribose sugar, intersugar linkage between the two nucleotides is a non-phosphodiester linkage and at least one of the nucleosides comprises a nucleobase modification.
- oligonucleotide comprises a motif selected from the group consisting of: 2′-modified uridines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-uridine-adenosine-3′ (5′-UA-3′), 2′-modified uridines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-uridine-guanosine-3′ (5′-UG-3′), 2′-modified cytidines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-cytidine-adenosine-3′ (5′-CA-3′), 2′-modified cytidines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-cytidine-Guanosine-3′ (5′-CA-3′), 2′-modified 5′-most uridines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-uridine-uridine-3′ (5′-UU-3′), 2′-modified 5′-most cytidines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-cytidine-
- the oligonucleotide comprises a 5′-purine-purine-3′ (5′-PuPu-3′) dinucleotide motif at the 5′ and/or 3′ terminal end, wherein both nucleoside sugars are modified, e.g., 2′-modified.
- at least one of the purines is modified at the 2, 6, 7, 8, N 2 exocyclic, and/or N 6 exocyclic positions, or combinations thereof.
- the intersugar linkage between the purines is a non-phosphodiester linkage.
- the 5′ terminal nucleoside of the oligonucleotide comprises a sugar modification, e.g., a 2′ modification, a 4′ modification or an O4′ modification, e.g., replacement of O4′ with S, substituted N, NH or CH 2 .
- the 5′ terminal nucleotide further comprises a modified nucleobase or nucleobase modification.
- Double-stranded oligonucleotides having at least one single-stranded nucleotide overhang have unexpectedly superior inhibitory properties than their blunt-ended counterparts.
- the term “overhang” refers to a double-stranded structure where at least one end of one strand is longer than the corresponding end of the other strand forming the double-stranded structure.
- the single-stranded overhang is located at the 3-terminal end of the antisense strand or, alternatively, at the 3′-terminal end of the sense strand.
- the double-stranded oligonucleotide can also have a blunt end, generally located at the 5′-end of the antisense strand.
- the antisense strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide has a single-stranded overhang at the 3′-end, and the 5′-end is blunt.
- At least one end of the double-stranded region has a single-stranded nucleotide overhang of 1 to 4, generally 1 or 2 nucleotides. In some embodiment, both ends of the double-stranded region have a single-stranded nucleotide overhang of 1 to 4, generally 1 or 2 nucleotides.
- all or some of the bases in the single strand overhang will be modified, e.g., with a modification described herein.
- Modifications in the single-stranded overhangs can include, e.g., the use of modifications at the 2′ OH group of the ribose sugar, e.g., the use of deoxyribonucleotides, e.g., deoxythymidine, instead of ribonucleotides, and modifications in the phosphate group, e.g., phosphothioate modifications.
- Overhangs need not be homologous with the target sequence.
- the single strand overhangs are asymmetrically modified with a modification described herein, e.g. a first single stand overhang comprises a modification that is not present in a second single strand overhang.
- the overhang comprises at least one 5′-5′, 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-5′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage.
- the single stranded overhang is linked via a 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-5′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage to the rest of the oligonucleotide.
- the unpaired nucleotide adjacent to the terminal nucleotide base pair on the end of the double-stranded region is a purine.
- the single-stranded overhang has the sequence 5′-GCNN-3′, wherein N is independently for each occurrence, A, G, C, U, dT, dU or absent.
- the single-stranded overhang has the sequence 5′-NN-3′, wherein N is a modified or unmodified nucleotide described herein.
- the antisense strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide has 1-10 nucleotide single-stranded overhang at each of the 3′ end and the 5′ end over the sense strand.
- the sense strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide has 1-10 nucleotide single-stranded overhang at each of the 3′ end and the 5′ end over the antisense strand.
- the antisense strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide can contain one or more mismatches to the target sequence. In a preferred embodiment, the antisense strand contains no more than 3 mismatches. If the antisense strand contains mismatches to a target sequence, it is preferable that the area of mismatch not be located in the center of the region of complementarity between the antisense strand and the target sequence. If the antisense strand contains mismatches to the target sequence, it is preferable that the mismatch be restricted to 5 nucleotides from either end, for example 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 nucleotide from either the 5′ or 3′ end of the region of complementarity between the antisense strand and the target sequence. Methods known in the art can be used to determine whether a double-stranded oligonucleotide containing a mismatch to a target sequence is effective in inhibiting the expression of the target gene.
- the sense-strand comprises a mismatch to the antisense strand. In some embodiments, the sense strand comprises no more than 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 mismatches to the antisense strand. In preferred embodiments, the sense strand comprises no more than 3 mismatches to the antisense strand.
- the sense-strand comprises a mismatch to the antisense strand and the mismatch is within the 5 nucleotides from the 3′-end of the sense strand, for example 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 nucleotide from the end of the region of complementarity between the sense and the antisense strands.
- the sense-strand comprises a mismatch to the antisense strand and the mismatch is located in the target cleavage site region.
- the sense strand comprises a nucleobase modification, e.g. an optionally substituted natural or non-natural nucleobase, a universal nucleobase, in the target cleavage site region.
- the “target cleavage site” herein means the intersugar linkage in the target gene, e.g. target mRNA, or the sense strand that is cleaved by the RISC mechanism by utilizing the RNAi agent.
- the “target cleavage site region” comprises at least one or at least two nucleotides on 3′, 5′ or both sides of the cleavage site.
- the target cleavage site region comprises two nucleotides on both sides of the cleavage site.
- the target cleavage site is the intersugar linkage in the sense strand that would get cleaved if the sense strand itself was the target to be cleaved by the RNAi mechanism.
- the target cleavage site can be determined using methods known in the art, for example the 5′-RACE assay as detailed in Soutschek et al., Nature (2004) 432, 173-178.
- the cleavage site region for a conical double stranded RNAi agent comprising two 21-nucleotides long strands wherein the strands form a double stranded region of 19 consecutive nucleotide base pairs having 2-nucleotide single stranded overhangs at the 3′-ends
- the cleavage site region corresponds to positions 9-12 from the 5′-end of the sense strand.
- At least one of antisense strand or target sequence strand has at least one stretch of 1-5 single-stranded nucleotides in the region of complementarity between the antisense strand and the target sequence.
- both the antisense strand and the target sequence strand have at least one stretch of 1-5 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) single-stranded nucleotides in the region of complementarity between the antisense strand and the target sequence.
- both strands have a stretch of 1-5 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) single-stranded nucleotides in the double stranded region
- such single-stranded nucleotides can be opposite to each other (e.g., a stretch of mismatches) or they can be located such that the second strand has no single-stranded nucleotides opposite to the single-stranded oligonucleotides of the first strand and vice versa (e.g., a single-stranded loop).
- Location of the single-stranded nucleotides is chosen as to minimize any deleterious effect on the gene silencing activity of the antisense strand.
- the single-stranded nucleotides are present within 8 nucleotides from either end, for example 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2 nucleotide from either the 5′ or 3′ end of the region of complementarity between the antisense strand and the target sequence.
- the antisense strand comprises the stretch of single-stranded nucleotides and which nucleotides are located in the target cleavage region.
- RNAi agents with mismatches in inhibiting expression of the target gene is important, especially if the particular region of complementarity in the target gene is known to have polymorphic sequence variation within the population.
- RNAi agent e.g., double-stranded or single-stranded RNAi agent.
- the phrase “different from each other” refers to the target sequences having different nucleotides at that position.
- the RNAi agent strand that is complementary to the target sequences comprises universal nucleobases at positions complementary to where the target sequences are different from each other.
- the antisense strand of the double-stranded RNAi agent comprises universal nucleobases at positions complementary to where the sequences to be targeted do not match each other.
- RNAi agents can be used to alter the expression of different transcripts/alleles of a single gene, different isoforms of a single gene, different splice variants of a single gene, different transcripts of more than one gene, wild-type and mutated forms of a gene, or homolog of a gene in different species.
- the double-stranded RNAi agents of the invention can also target more than one RNA region by having each strand targeting a sequence or part thereof independently.
- a double-stranded RNAi agent can include a first and second sequence that are sufficiently complementary to each other to hybridize.
- the first sequence can be complementary to a first target sequence and the second sequence can be complementary to a second target sequence.
- the first and second sequences of the RNAi agent can be on different RNA strands, and the mismatch between the first and second sequences can be less than 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, or 1%.
- the first and second sequences of the RNAi agent can be on the same RNA strand, and in a related embodiment more than 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 1% of the RNAi agent can be in bimolecular form.
- the first and second sequences of the RNAi agent can be fully complementary to each other.
- the first target sequence can be a first target gene and the second target sequence can be a second target gene, or the first and second target sequences can be different regions of a single target gene.
- the first and second sequences can differ by at least 1 nucleotide.
- the first and second target sequences can be transcripts encoded by first and second sequence variants, e.g., first and second alleles, of a gene.
- the sequence variants can be mutations, or polymorphisms, for example.
- the first target sequence can include a nucleotide substitution, insertion, or deletion relative to the second target sequence, or the second target sequence can be a mutant or variant of the first target sequence.
- the first and second target sequences can comprise viral or human genes.
- the first and second target sequences can also be on variant transcripts of an oncogene or include different mutations of a tumor suppressor gene transcript.
- the first and second target sequences can correspond to hot-spots for genetic variation.
- the double stranded oligonucleotides can be optimized for RNA interference by increasing the propensity of the duplex to disassociate or melt (decreasing the free energy of duplex association), in the region of the 5′ end of the antisense strand.
- This can be accomplished, e.g., by the inclusion of modifications or modified nucleosides which increase the propensity of the duplex to disassociate or melt in the region of the 5′ end of the antisense strand. It can also be accomplished by inclusion of modifications or modified nucleosides or attachment of a ligand that increases the propensity of the duplex to disassociate of melt in the region of the 5′end of the antisense strand. While not wishing to be bound by theory, the effect can be due to promoting the effect of an enzyme such as helicase, for example, promoting the effect of the enzyme in the proximity of the 5′ end of the antisense strand.
- Modifications which increase the tendency of the 5′ end of the antisense strand in the duplex to dissociate can be used alone or in combination with other modifications described herein, e.g., with modifications which decrease the tendency of the 3′ end of the antisense in the duplex to dissociate.
- modifications which decrease the tendency of the 3′ end of the antisense in the duplex to dissociate can be used alone or in combination with other modifications described herein, e.g., with modifications which increase the tendency of the 5′ end of the antisense in the duplex to dissociate.
- Nucleic acid base pairs can be ranked on the basis of their propensity to promote dissociation or melting (e.g., on the free energy of association or dissociation of a particular pairing, the simplest approach is to examine the pairs on an individual pair basis, though next neighbor or similar analysis can also be used).
- A:U is preferred over G:C
- G:U is preferred over G:C
- mismatches e.g., non-canonical or other than canonical pairings are preferred over canonical (A:T, A:U, G:C) pairings
- pairings which include a universal base are preferred over canonical pairings.
- pairings which decrease the propensity to form a duplex are used at 1 or more of the positions in the duplex at the 5′ end of the antisense strand.
- the terminal pair (the most 5′ pair in terms of the antisense strand), and the subsequent 4 base pairing positions (going in the 3′ direction in terms of the antisense strand) in the duplex are preferred for placement of modifications to decrease the propensity to form a duplex. More preferred are placements in the terminal most pair and the subsequent 3, 2, or 1 base pairings.
- At least 1, and more preferably 2, 3, 4, or 5 of the base pairs from the 5′-end of antisense strand in the duplex be chosen independently from the group of: A:U, G:U, I:C, mismatched pairs, e.g., non-canonical or other than canonical pairings or pairings which include a universal base.
- at least one, at least 2, or at least 3 base-pairs include a universal base.
- Modifications or changes which promote dissociation are preferably made in the sense strand, though in some embodiments, such modifications/changes will be made in the antisense strand.
- Nucleic acid base pairs can also be ranked on the basis of their propensity to promote stability and inhibit dissociation or melting (e.g., on the free energy of association or dissociation of a particular pairing, the simplest approach is to examine the pairs on an individual pair basis, though next neighbor or similar analysis can also be used).
- G:C is preferred over A:U
- Watson-Crick matches A:T, A:U, G:C
- A:T, A:U, G:C are preferred over non-canonical or other than canonical pairings
- analogs that increase stability are preferred over Watson-Crick matches (A:T, A:U, G:C), e.g.
- 2-amino-A:U is preferred over A:U
- 2-thio U or 5-Me-thio-U:A are preferred over U:A
- G-clamp an analog of C having 4 hydrogen bonds
- guanadinium-G-clamp:G is preferred over C:G
- psuedo uridine:A is preferred over U:A
- sugar modifications e.g., 2′ modifications, e.g., 2′F, ENA, or LNA, which enhance binding are preferred over non-modified moieties and can be present on one or both strands to enhance stability of the duplex.
- pairings which increase the propensity to form a duplex are used at 1 or more of the positions in the duplex at the 3′ end of the antisense strand.
- the terminal pair (the most 3′ pair in terms of the antisense strand), and the subsequent 4 base pairing positions (going in the 5′ direction in terms of the antisense strand) in the duplex are preferred for placement of modifications to increase the propensity to form a duplex. More preferred are placements in the terminal most pair and the subsequent 3, 2, or 1 base pairings.
- At least 1, and more preferably 2, 3, 4, or 5 of the pairs of the recited regions be chosen independently from the group of: G:C, a pair having an analog that increases stability over Watson-Crick matches (A:T, A:U, G:C), 2-amino-A:U, 2-thio U or 5 Me-thio-U:A, G-clamp (an analog of C having 4 hydrogen bonds):G, guanadinium-G-clamp:G, psuedo uridine:A, a base pair in which one or both subunits have a sugar modification, e.g., a 2′ modification, e.g., 2′F, ENA, or LNA, which enhance binding.
- at least one, at least, at least 2, or at least 3, of the base pairs promote duplex stability.
- At least one, at least 2, or at least 3, of the base pairs are a pair in which one or both subunits has a sugar modification, e.g., a 2′ modification, e.g., 2′-O-methyl, 2′-O-Me (2′-O-methyl), 2′-O-MOE (2′-O-methoxyethyl), 2′-F, 2′-O—CH 2 -(4′-C) (LNA) and 2′-O—CH 2 CH 2 -(4′-C) (ENA), which enhance binding.
- a sugar modification e.g., a 2′ modification, e.g., 2′-O-methyl, 2′-O-Me (2′-O-methyl), 2′-O-MOE (2′-O-methoxyethyl
- 2′-F 2′-O—CH 2 -(4′-C) (LNA)
- G-clamps and guanidinium G-clamps are discussed in the following references: Holmes and Gait, “The Synthesis of 2′-O-Methyl G-Clamp Containing Oligonucleotides and Their Inhibition of the HIV-1 Tat-TAR Interaction,” Nucleosides, Nucleotides & Nucleic Acids, 22:1259-1262, 2003; Holmes et al., “Steric inhibition of human immunodeficiency virus type-1 Tat-dependent trans-activation in vitro and in cells by oligonucleotides containing 2′-O-methyl G-clamp ribonucleoside analogues,” Nucleic Acids Research, 31:2759-2768, 2003; Wilds, et al., “Stural basis for recognition of guanosine by a synthetic tricyclic cytosine analogue: Guanidinium G-clamp,” Helvetica Chimica Acta, 86:966-978, 2003; Rajee
- an oligonucleotide can be modified to both decrease the stability of the antisense 5′end of the duplex and increase the stability of the antisense 3′ end of the duplex. This can be effected by combining one or more of the stability decreasing modifications in the antisense 5′ end of the duplex with one or more of the stability increasing modifications in the antisense 3′ end of the duplex.
- oligonucleotide comprises a cap structure at 3′ (3′-cap), 5′ (5′-cap) or both ends.
- oligonucleotide comprises a 3′-cap.
- oligonucleotide comprises a 5′-cap.
- oligonucleotide comprises both a 3′ cap and a 5′ cap. It is to be understood that when an oligonucleotide comprises both a 3′ cap and a 5′ cap, such caps can be same or they can be different.
- cap structure refers to chemical modifications, which have been incorporated at either terminus of oligonucleotide. See for example U.S. Pat. No. 5,998,203 and International Patent Publication WO03/70918, contents of which are herein incorporated in their entireties. Without wishing to be bound by theory, the monomers of the invention can be used as caps.
- Exemplary 5′-caps include, but are not limited to, ligands, 5′-5′-inverted nucleotide, 5′-5′-inverted abasic nucleotide residue, 2′-5′ linkage, 5′-amino, 5′-amino-alkyl phosphate, 5′-hexylphosphate, 5′-aminohexyl phosphate, bridging and/or non-bridging 5′-phosphoramidate, bridging and/or non-bridging 5′-phosphorothioate and/or 5′-phosphorodithioate, bridging or non bridging 5′-methylphosphonate, non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage between the end two nucleotides, 4′,5′-methylene nucleotide, I-(beta-D-erythrofuranosyl) nucleotide, 4′-thio nucleotide, carbocyclic nucleotide, 1,5-anhydrohe
- Exemplary 3′-caps include, but are not limited to, ligands, 3′-3′-inverted nucleotide, 3′-3′-inverted abasic nucleotide residue, 3′-2′-inverted nucleotide moiety, 3′-2′-inverted abasic moiety, 2′-5′-linkage, 3′-amino, 3′-amino-alkyl phosphate, 3′-hexylphosphate, 3′-aminohexyl phosphate, bridging and/or non-bridging 3′-phosphoramidate, bridging and/or non-bridging 3′-phosphorothioate and/or 3′-phosphorodithioate, bridging or non bridging 3′-methylphosphonate, non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage between the end two nucleotides, I-(beta-D-erythrofuranosyl) nucleotide, 4′-thio nucleotide,
- a double-stranded oligonucleotide comprises, on at least one end of the duplex region, a G-C base pair at the terminal position of the duplex region (e.g., the last base pair of the duplex) or the four consecutive base from the duplex region end comprise at least two G-C base pairs.
- both ends of duplex region comprise a terminal G-C base pair and/or the first four consecutive base pairs from the terminal end comprise at least two G-C base pairs.
- the first base-paired nucleotide next to single-stranded overhang is a C.
- off-target and the phrase “off-target effects” refer to any instance in which an oligonucleotide against a given target causes an unintended affect by interacting either directly or indirectly with another mRNA sequence, a DNA sequence or a cellular protein or other moiety.
- an “off-target effect” may occur when there is a simultaneous degradation of other transcripts due to partial homology or complementarity between that other transcript and the sense and/or antisense strand of a double-stranded RNAi agent.
- both strands of the double-stranded RNAi agent have the potential to enter the RISC complex and reduce the gene expression of corresponding complementary sequences.
- an unwanted off-target effect happens ins when the sense strand enters the RISC complex and reduces the gene expression of a complementary sequence which is not the desired target of the RNAi agent.
- the sense strand can be chemically modified so that it can no longer act in the RISC mediated cleavage of a target sequence. Without wishing to be bound by theory, such modifications minimize off-target RNAi effects due to sense strand.
- the sense strand does not have a free terminal 5′-OH group. In another embodiment, the sense strand does not have a 5′-phosphate group. In some embodiments, the 5′-OH of sense strand is modified so that it can not be phosphorylated, e.g. with a cap moiety. In some embodiments, the cap moiety comprises L-sugar nucleotide, an alpha nucleotide, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl, a cycloalkyl or a heterocycle. In some embodiments, the linkage between the 5′ end of sense strand and a conjugate is a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage. In a preferred embodiment, the linkage between the 5′ end of sense strand and a conjugate does not have a phosphate group.
- the sense strand comprises at least one modified nucleotide in the target cleavage site region.
- the modification include modification at 2′ position of ribose sugar or nucleobase modification.
- ends of double-stranded oligonucleotide can be modified so that the end corresponding to 5′end of sense strand has a higher thermal stability as compared to the end corresponding 3′ end of sense strand, as described above in the Terminal end thermal stability section above. Without wishing to be bound by theory, this allows preferential incorporation of the antisense strand into the RISC complex and reduces off-target effects of sense strand.
- Modifications described herein can be used to asymmetrically modified a double-stranded oligonucleotide.
- An asymmetrically modified double-stranded oligonucleotide is one in which one strand has a modification which is not present on the other strand.
- an asymmetrical modification is a modification found on one strand but not on the other strand.
- Any modification, e.g., any modification described herein, can be present as an asymmetrical modification.
- An asymmetrical modification can confer any of the desired properties associated with a modification, e.g., those properties discussed herein.
- an asymmetrical modification can confer resistance to degradation, an alteration in half life; target the oligonucleotide to a particular target, e.g., to a particular tissue; modulate, e.g., increase or decrease, the affinity of a strand for its complement or target sequence; or hinder or promote modification of a terminal moiety, e.g., modification by a kinase or other enzymes involved in the RISC mechanism pathway.
- the designation of a modification as having one property does not mean that it has no other property, e.g., a modification referred to as one which promotes stabilization might also enhance targeting.
- Asymmetrical modifications can include those in which only one strand is modified as well as those in which both are modified.
- first strand of the double-stranded region comprises at least one asymmetric modification that is not present in the second strand of the double stranded region or vice versa.
- asymmetrical modification allows a double-stranded RNAi agent to be optimized in view of the different or “asymmetrical” functions of the sense and antisense strands.
- both strands can be modified to increase nuclease resistance, however, since some changes can inhibit RISC activity, these changes can be chosen for the sense stand.
- some modifications e.g., a ligand
- ligands especially bulky ones (e.g. cholesterol), are preferentially added to the sense strand.
- the ligand can be present at either (or both) the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense strand of a RNAi agent.
- Each strand can include one or more asymmetrical modifications.
- one strand can include a first asymmetrical modification which confers a first property on the oligonucleotide and the other strand can have a second asymmetrical modification which confers a second property on the oligonucleotide.
- one strand e.g., the sense strand can have a modification which targets the oligonucleotide to a tissue
- the other strand e.g., the antisense strand, has a modification which promotes hybridization with the target gene sequence.
- both strands can be modified to optimize the same property, e.g., to increase resistance to nucleolytic degradation, but different modifications are chosen for the sense and the antisense strands, because the modifications affect other properties as well.
- a strand can have at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or more modifications and all or substantially all of the monomers, e.g., nucleotides of a strand can be asymmetrically modified.
- the asymmetric modifications are chosen so that only one of the two strands of double-stranded RNAi agent is effective in inducing RNAi. Inhibiting the induction of RNAi by one strand can reduce the off target effects due to cleavage of a target sequence by that strand.
- asymmetrical modifications which result in one or more of the following are used: modifications of the 5′ end of the sense strand which inhibit kinase activation of the sense strand, including, e.g., attachments of ligands or the use modifications which protect against 5′ exonucleolytic degradation; or modifications of either strand, but preferably the sense strand, which enhance binding between 5′-end of the sense and 3′-end of the antisense strand and thereby promote a “tight” structure at this end of the molecule.
- the end region of the RNAi agent defined by the 3′ end of the sense strand and the 5′end of the antisense strand is also important for function.
- This region can include the terminal 2, 3, or 4 paired nucleotides and any 3′ overhang.
- Preferred embodiments include asymmetrical modifications of either strand, but preferably the sense strand, which decrease binding between 3′-end of the sense and 5′-end of the antisense strand and thereby promote an “open” structure at this end of the molecule.
- Such modifications include placing conjugates which target the molecule or modifications which promote nuclease resistance on the sense strand in this region. Modification of the antisense strand which inhibit kinase activation are avoided in preferred embodiments.
- Particularly preferred asymmetric modification are modifications of 2′-OH of ribose sugar and modification (or replacement) of intersugar phosphodiester linkage.
- Other preferred asymmetric modifications include conjugation of ligands. Each strand can be conjugated with ligands that are different between the two strands.
- one strand has an asymmetrical 2′-modification, e.g., a 2′-O-alkyl modification, and the other strand has an asymmetrical modification of the intersugar phosphodiester linkage.
- one strand has an asymmetrical 2′-modification, e.g., a 2′-O-alkyl modification
- the other strand also has an asymmetrical 2′-modification that is different from the first strand's asymmetrical 2′-modification, e.g., 2′-fluoro modification.
- one strand is asymmetrically modified with 2′-O-alkyl, e.g. 2′-OMe modification and the second strand is asymmetrically modified with 2′-fluoro modification.
- one strand is asymmetrically modified with 2′-O-alkyl, e.g. 2′-OMe modification and the second strand is asymmetrically modified with intersugar linkage modification, e.g. a phosphorothioate modification.
- one strand is asymmetrically modified with 2′-fluoro modification and the second strand is asymmetrically modified with intersugar linkage modification, e.g. a phosphorothioate modification.
- RNAi agents wherein there are multiple 2′-O-alkyl, e.g., 2′-OMe modifications on the sense strand and multiple 2′-fluoro and/or multiple modified intersugar linkages on the antisense strand.
- Modifications e.g., those described herein, which modulate, e.g., increase or decrease, the affinity of a strand for its compliment or target, can be provided as asymmetrical modifications.
- the present invention also includes oligonucleotides which are chimeric oligonucleotides.
- “Chimeric” oligonucleotides or “chimeras,” in the context of this invention, are oligonucleotide which contain two or more chemically distinct regions, each made up of at least one monomer unit, i.e., a modified or unmodified nucleotide in the case of an oligonucleotide.
- Chimeric oligonucleotides can be described as having a particular motif.
- the motifs include, but are not limited to, an alternating motif, a gapped motif, a hemimer motif, a uniformly fully modified motif and a positionally modified motif.
- the phrase “chemically distinct region” refers to an oligonucleotide region which is different from other regions by having a modification that is not present elsewhere in the oligonucleotide or by not having a modification that is present elsewhere in the oligonucleotide.
- An oligonucleotide can comprise two or more chemically distinct regions.
- a region that comprises no modifications is also considered chemically distinct.
- a chemically distinct region can be repeated within an oligonucleotide.
- a pattern of chemically distinct regions in an oligonucleotide can be realized such that a first chemically distinct region is followed by one or more second chemically distinct regions.
- This sequence of chemically distinct regions can be repeated one or more times. Preferably, the sequence is repeated more than one time. Both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotides can comprise these sequences.
- Each chemically distinct region can actually comprise as little as a single nucleotide. In some embodiments, each chemically distinct region comprises 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 or 18 nucleotides.
- alternating nucleotides comprise the same modification, e.g. all the odd number nucleotides in a strand have the same modification and/or all the even number nucleotides in a strand have the similar modification to the first strand. In some embodiments, all the odd number nucleotides in an oligonucleotide have the same modification and all the even numbered nucleotides have a modification that is not present in the odd number nucleotides and vice versa.
- nucleotides of one strand can be complementary in position to nucleotides of the second strand which are similarly modified.
- the shift is such that the similarly modified nucleotides of the first strand and second strand are not in complementary position to each other.
- the first strand has an alternating modification pattern wherein alternating nucleotides comprise a 2′-modification, e.g., 2′-O-Methyl modification.
- the first strand comprises an alternating 2′-O-Methyl modification and the second strand comprises an alternating 2′-fluoro modification.
- both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise alternating 2′-O-methyl modifications.
- both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise alternating 2′-O-methyl modifications
- such 2′-modified nucleotides can be in complementary position in the duplex region.
- such 2′-modified nucleotides may not be in complementary positions in the duplex region.
- the oligonucleotide comprises two chemically distinct regions, wherein each region is 1-10 nucleotides in length.
- the oligonucleotide comprises three chemically distinct region.
- the middle region is about 5-15, (e.g., 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15) nucleotide in length and each flanking or wing region is independently 1-10 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10) nucleotides in length. All three regions can have different modifications or the wing regions can be similarly modified to each other. In some embodiments, the wing regions are of equal length, e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 nucleotides long.
- alternating motif refers to a an oligonucleotide comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits wherein the monomer subunits have two different types of sugar groups that alternate for essentially the entire sequence of the oligonucleotide.
- Oligonucleotides having an alternating motif can be described by the formula: 5′-A(-L-B-L-A)n(-L-B)nn-3′ where A and B are monomelic subunits that have different sugar groups, each L is an internucleoside linking group, n is from about 4 to about 12 and nn is 0 or 1. This permits alternating oligonucleotides from about 9 to about 26 monomer subunits in length. This length range is not meant to be limiting as longer and shorter oligonucleotides are also amenable to the present invention.
- one of A and B is a 2′-modified nucleoside as provided herein.
- nucleoside having a modification of a first type may be an unmodified nucleoside.
- type region refers to a portion of an oligomeric compound wherein the nucleosides and internucleoside linkages within the region all comprise the same type of modifications; and the nucleosides and/or the internucleoside linkages of any neighboring portions include at least one different type of modification.
- uniformly fully modified motif refers to an oligonucleotide comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits that each have the same type of sugar group.
- the uniformly fully modified motif includes a contiguous sequence of nucleosides of the invention.
- one or both of the 3′ and 5′-ends of the contiguous sequence of the nucleosides provided herein comprise terminal groups such as one or more unmodified nucleosides.
- hemimer motif refers to an oligonucleotide having a short contiguous sequence of monomer subunits having one type of sugar group located at the 5′ or the 3′ end wherein the remainder of the monomer subunits have a different type of sugar group.
- a hemimer is an oligomeric compound of uniform sugar groups further comprising a short region (1, 2, 3, 4 or about 5 monomelic subunits) having uniform but different sugar groups and located on either the 3′ or the 5′ end of the oligomeric compound.
- the hemimer motif comprises a contiguous sequence of from about 10 to about 28 monomer subunits of one type with from 1 to 5 or from 2 to about 5 monomer subunits of a second type located at one of the termini.
- a hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 8 to about 20 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-12 contiguous nucleosides of the invention located at one of the termini.
- a hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 8 to about 20 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-5 contiguous nucleosides of the invention located at one of the termini.
- a hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 12 to about 18 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribo-nucleosides having from 1-3 contiguous nucleosides of the invention located at one of the termini. In one embodiment, a hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 10 to about 14 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-3 contiguous nucleosides of the invention located at one of the termini.
- blockmer motif refers to an oligonucleotide comprising an otherwise contiguous sequence of monomer subunits wherein the sugar groups of each monomer subunit is the same except for an interrupting internal block of contiguous monomer subunits having a different type of sugar group.
- a blockmer overlaps somewhat with a gapmer in the definition but typically only the monomer subunits in the block have non-naturally occurring sugar groups in a blockmer and only the monomer subunits in the external regions have non-naturally occurring sugar groups in a gapmer with the remainder of monomer subunits in the blockmer or gapmer being ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides or ⁇ -D-ribonucleosides.
- blockmer oligonucleotides are provided herein wherein all of the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups.
- positionally modified motif is meant to include an otherwise contiguous sequence of monomer subunits having one type of sugar group that is interrupted with two or more regions of from 1 to about 5 contiguous monomer subunits having another type of sugar group.
- Each of the two or more regions of from 1 to about 5 contiguous monomer subunits are independently uniformly modified with respect to the type of sugar group.
- each of the two or more regions have the same type of sugar group.
- each of the two or more regions have a different type of sugar group.
- positionally modified oligonucleotides comprising a sequence of from 8 to 20 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides that further includes two or three regions of from 2 to about 5 contiguous nucleosides of the invention.
- Positionally modified oligonucleotides are distinguished from gapped motifs, hemimer motifs, blockmer motifs and alternating motifs because the pattern of regional substitution defined by any positional motif does not fit into the definition provided herein for one of these other motifs.
- the term positionally modified oligomeric compound includes many different specific substitution patterns.
- the term “gapmer” or “gapped oligomeric compound” refers to an oligomeric compound having two external regions or wings and an internal region or gap.
- the three regions form a contiguous sequence of monomer subunits with the sugar groups of the external regions being different than the sugar groups of the internal region and wherein the sugar group of each monomer subunit within a particular region is the same.
- the gapmer is a symmetric gapmer and when the sugar group used in the 5′-external region is different from the sugar group used in the 3′-external region, the gapmer is an asymmetric gapmer.
- the external regions are small (each independently 1, 2, 3, 4 or about 5 monomer subunits) and the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups with the internal region comprising 3-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides.
- the external regions each, independently, comprise from 1 to about 5 monomer subunits having non-naturally occurring sugar groups and the internal region comprises from 6 to 18 unmodified nucleosides.
- the internal region or the gap generally comprises ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribo-nucleosides but can comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups.
- the gapped oligonucleotides comprise an internal region of ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides with one of the external regions comprising nucleosides of the invention. In one embodiment, the gapped oligonucleotide comprise an internal region of ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides with both of the external regions comprising nucleosides of the invention. In one embodiment, the gapped oligonucleotide comprise an internal region of ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides with both of the external regions comprising nucleosides of the invention.
- gapped oligonucleotides are provided herein wherein all of the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups.
- gapped oliogonucleotides are provided comprising one or two nucleosides of the invention at the 5′-end, two or three nucleosides of the invention at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 16 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides.
- gapped oligonucleotides are provided comprising one nucleoside of the invention at the 5′-end, two nucleosides of the invention at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 16 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides.
- gapped oligonucleotides comprising two nucleosides of the invention at the 5′-end, two nucleosides of the invention at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 14 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides. In one embodiment, gapped oligonucleotides are provided that are from about 10 to about 21 monomer subunits in length. In one embodiment, gapped oligonucleotides are provided that are from about 12 to about 16 monomer subunits in length. In one embodiment, gapped oligonucleotides are provided that are from about 12 to about 14 monomer subunits in length.
- the 5′-terminal nucleoside of an oligonucleotides of the present invention comprises a phosphorous moiety at the 5′-end.
- the 5′-terminal nucleoside comprises a 2′-modification.
- the 2′-modification of the 5′-terminal nucleoside is a cationic modification.
- the 5′-terminal nucleoside comprises a 5′-modification.
- the 5′-terminal nucleoside comprises a 2′-modification and a 5′-modification.
- the 5′-terminal nucleoside is a monomer of formula (I), (II) or (III).
- the 5′-terminal nucleoside is a 5′-stabilizing nucleoside.
- the modifications of the 5′-terminal nucleoside stabilize the 5′-phosphate.
- oligonucleotides comprising modifications of the 5′-terminal nucleoside are resistant to exonucleases.
- oligonucleotides comprising modifications of the 5′-terminal nucleoside have improved antisense properties.
- oligonucleotides comprising modifications of the 5′-terminal nucleoside have improved association with members of the RISC pathway.
- oligonucleotides comprising modifications of the 5′-terminal nucleoside have improved affinity for Ago2.
- the 5′terminal nucleoside is attached to a plurality of nucleosides by a modified linkage. In certain such embodiments, the 5′terminal nucleoside is a plurality of nucleosides by a phosphorothioate linkage.
- oligonucleotides of the present invention comprise one or more regions of alternating modifications. In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides comprise one or more regions of alternating nucleoside modifications. In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides comprise one or more regions of alternating linkage modifications. In certan embodiments, oligonucleotides comprise one or more regions of alternating nucleoside and linkage modifications.
- oligonucleotides of the present invention comprise one or more regions of alternating 2′-F modified nucleosides and 2′-OMe modified nucleosides.
- regions of alternating 2′F modified and 2′OMe modified nucleosides also comprise alternating linkages.
- the linkages at the 3′ end of the 2′-F modified nucleosides are phosphorothioate linkages.
- the linkages at the 3′end of the 2′OMe nucleosides are phosphodiester linkages.
- such alternating regions are:
- oligomeric compounds comprise 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11 such alternating regions. Such regions may be contiguous or may be interrupted by differently modified nucleosides or linkages.
- one or more alternating regions in an alternating motif include more than a single nucleoside of a type.
- oligomeric compounds of the present invention may include one or more regions of any of the following nucleoside motifs:
- a and B are each selected from 2′-F, 2′-OMe, BNA, DNA, MOE, and monomer of formula (I), (II) or (III).
- A is DNA. In certain embodiments, B is 4′-CH 2 O-2′-BNA. In certain embodiments, A is DNA and B is 4′-CH 2 O-2′-BNA. In certain embodiments A is 4′-CH 2 O-2′-BNA. In certain embodiments, B is DNA. In certain embodiments A is 4′-CH 2 O-2′-BNA and B is DNA. In certain embodiments, A is 2′-F. In certain embodiments, B is 2′-OMe. In certain embodiments, A is 2′-F and B is 2′-OMe. In certain embodiments, A is 2′-OMe. In certain embodiments, B is 2′-F. In certain embodiments, A is 2′-OMe and B is 2′-F. In certain embodiments, A is DNA and B is 2′-OMe. In certain embodiments, A is 2′-OMe and B is DNA.
- oligomeric compounds having such an alternating motif also comprise a 5′ terminal nucleoside comprising a phosphate stabilizing modification. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds having such an alternating motif also comprise a 5′ terminal nucleoside comprising a 2′-cationic modification. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds having such an alternating motif also comprise a 5′ terminal monomer of formula (I), (II) or (III).
- oligonucleotides of the present invention comprise a region having a 2-2-3 motif. Such regions comprises the following motif:
- A is a first type of modified nucleoside
- B, C, D, and E are nucleosides that are differently modified than A, however, B, C, D, and E may have the same or different modifications as one another;
- w and z are from 0 to 15;
- x and y are from 1 to 15.
- A is a 2′-OMe modified nucleoside.
- B, C, D, and E are all 2′-F modified nucleosides.
- A is a 2′-OMe modified nucleoside and B, C, D, and E are all 2′-F modified nucleosides.
- the linkages of a 2-2-3 motif are all modified linkages. In certain embodiments, the linkages are all phosphorothioate linkages. In certain embodiments, the linkages at the 3′-end of each modification of the first type are phosphodiester.
- Z is 0.
- the region of three nucleosides of the first type are at the 3′-end of the oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, such region is at the 3′-end of the oligomeric compound, with no additional groups attached to the 3′ end of the region of three nucleosides of the first type.
- an oligomeric compound comprising an oligonucleotide where Z is 0, may comprise a terminal group attached to the 3′-terminal nucleoside. Such terminal groups may include additional nucleosides. Such additional nucleosides are typically non-hybridizing nucleosides.
- oligonucleotide may comprise two or more motifs.
- oligomeric compounds may have nucleoside motifs as described in the table below.
- the term “None” indicates that a particular feature is not present in the oligonucleotide.
- “None” in the column labeled “5′ motif/modification” indicates that the 5′ end of the oligonucleotide comprises the first nucleoside of the central motif.
- the lengths of the regions defined by a nucleoside motif and that of a linkage motif need not be the same.
- the 3′ region in the nucleoside motif table above is 2 nucleosides
- the 3′-region of the linkage motif table above is 6-8 nucleosides.
- Combining the tables results in an oligonucleotide having two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides and six to eight 3′-terminal phosphorothioate linkages (so some of the linkages in the central region of the nucleoside motif are phosphorothioate as well).
- nucleoside motifs and sequence motifs are combined to show five non-limiting examples in the table below.
- the first column of the table lists nucleosides and linkages by position from N1 (the first nucleoside at the 5′-end) to N20 (the 20 th position from the 5′-end).
- oligonucleotides of the present invention are longer than 20 nucleosides (the table is merely exemplary). Certain positions in the table recite the nucleoside or linkage “none” indicating that the oligonucleotide has no nucleoside at that position.
- Column A represent an oligomeric compound consisting of 20 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III); a region of alternating nucleosides; a region of alternating linkages; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, each of which comprises a uracil base; and a region of six phosphorothioate linkages at the 3′-end.
- Column B represents an oligomeric compound consisting of 18 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III); a 2-2-3 motif wherein the modified nucleoside of the 2-2-3 motif are 2′O-Me and the remaining nucleosides are all 2′-F; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, each of which comprises a uracil base; and a region of six phosphorothioate linkages at the 3′-end.
- Column C represents an oligomeric compound consisting of 20 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III); a region of uniformly modified 2′-F nucleosides; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, each of which comprises a uracil base; and wherein each internucleoside linkage is a phosphorothioate linkage.
- Column D represents an oligomeric compound consisting of 20 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III); a region of alternating 2′-OMe/2′-F nucleosides; a region of uniform 2′F nucleosides; a region of alternating phosphorothioate/phosphodiester linkages; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, each of which comprises an adenine base; and a region of six phosphorothioate linkages at the 3′-end.
- a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III) a region of alternating 2′-OMe/2′-F nucleosides; a region of uniform 2′F nucleosides; a region of alternating phosphorothioate/phosphodiester linkages; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, each
- Column E represents an oligomeric compound consisting of 17 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III); a 2-2-3 motif wherein the modified nucleoside of the 2-2-3 motif are 2′F and the remaining nucleosides are all 2′-OMe; three 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides.
- Column F represents an oligomeric compound consisting of 18 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a region of alternating 2′-OMe/2′-F nucleosides; a region of uniform 2′F nucleosides; a region of alternating phosphorothioate/phosphodiester linkages; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, one of which comprises a uracil base and the other of which comprises an adenine base; and a region of six phosphorothioate linkages at the 3′-end.
- lengths of oligomeric compounds can be easily manipulated by lengthening or shortening one or more of the described regions, without disrupting the motif.
- oligonucleotide comprises two or more chemically distinct regions and has a structure as described in International Application No. PCT/US09/038433, filed Mar. 26, 2009, contents of which are herein incorporated in their entirety.
- Ligands can include naturally occurring molecules, or recombinant or synthetic molecules.
- exemplary ligands include, but are not limited to, polylysine (PLL), poly L-aspartic acid, poly L-glutamic acid, styrene-maleic acid anhydride copolymer, poly(L-lactide-co-glycolied) copolymer, divinyl ether-maleic anhydride copolymer, N-(2-hydroxypropyl)methacrylamide copolymer (HMPA), polyethylene glycol (PEG, e.g., PEG-2K, PEG-5K, PEG-10K, PEG-12K, PEG-15K, PEG-20K, PEG-40K), MPEG, [MPEG] 2 , polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyurethane, poly(2-ethylacryllic acid), N-iso
- psoralen mitomycin C
- porphyrins e.g., TPPC4, texaphyrin, Sapphyrin
- polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons e.g., phenazine, dihydrophenazine
- artificial endonucleases e.g., EDTA
- lipophilic molecules e.g., steroids, bile acids, cholesterol, cholic acid, adamantane acetic acid, 1-pyrene butyric acid, dihydrotestosterone, 1,3-Bis-O(hexadecyl)glycerol, geranyloxyhexyl group, hexadecylglycerol, borneol, menthol, 1,3-propanediol, heptadecyl group, palmitic acid, myristic acid, O3-(oleoyl)lithocholic acid, O3-(oleoyl)cholenic acid, dime
- biotin transport/absorption facilitators
- transport/absorption facilitators e.g., naproxen, aspirin, vitamin E, folic acid
- synthetic ribonucleases e.g., imidazole, bisimidazole, histamine, imidazole clusters, acridine-imidazole conjugates, Eu3+ complexes of tetraazamacrocycles), dinitrophenyl, HRP, AP, antibodies, hormones and hormone receptors, lectins, carbohydrates, multivalent carbohydrates, vitamins (e.g., vitamin A, vitamin E, vitamin K, vitamin B, e.g., folic acid, B12, riboflavin, biotin and pyridoxal), vitamin cofactors, lipopolysaccharide, an activator of p38 MAP kinase, an activator of NF- ⁇ B, taxon, vincristine, vinblastine, cytochalasin, nocodazole
- Peptide and peptidomimetic ligands include those having naturally occurring or modified peptides, e.g., D or L peptides; ⁇ , ⁇ , or ⁇ peptides; N-methyl peptides; azapeptides; peptides having one or more amide, i.e., peptide, linkages replaced with one or more urea, thiourea, carbamate, or sulfonyl urea linkages; or cyclic peptides.
- a peptidomimetic also referred to herein as an oligopeptidomimetic is a molecule capable of folding into a defined three-dimensional structure similar to a natural peptide.
- the peptide or peptidomimetic ligand can be about 5-50 amino acids long, e.g., about 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 amino acids long.
- amphipathic peptides include, but are not limited to, cecropins, lycotoxins, paradaxins, buforin, CPF, bombinin-like peptide (BLP), cathelicidins, ceratotoxins, S. clava peptides, hagfish intestinal antimicrobial peptides (HFIAPs), magainines, brevinins-2, dermaseptins, melittins, pleurocidin, H 2 A peptides, Xenopus peptides , esculentinis-1, and caerins.
- endosomolytic ligand refers to molecules having endosomolytic properties. Endosomolytic ligands promote the lysis of and/or transport of the composition of the invention, or its components, from the cellular compartments such as the endosome, lysosome, endoplasmic reticulum (ER), golgi apparatus, microtubule, peroxisome, or other vesicular bodies within the cell, to the cytoplasm of the cell.
- Some exemplary endosomolytic ligands include, but are not limited to, imidazoles, poly or oligoimidazoles, linear or branched polyethyleneimines (PEIs), linear and branched polyamines, e.g.
- spermine cationic linear and branched polyamines, polycarboxylates, polycations, masked oligo or poly cations or anions, acetals, polyacetals, ketals/polyketals, orthoesters, linear or branched polymers with masked or unmasked cationic or anionic charges, dendrimers with masked or unmasked cationic or anionic charges, polyanionic peptides, polyanionic peptidomimetics, pH-sensitive peptides, natural and synthetic fusogenic lipids, natural and synthetic cationic lipids.
- Exemplary endosomolytic/fusogenic peptides include, but are not limited to,
- fusogenic lipids fuse with and consequently destabilize a membrane.
- Fusogenic lipids usually have small head groups and unsaturated acyl chains.
- Exemplary fusogenic lipids include, but are not limited to, 1,2-dileoyl-sn-3-phosphoethanolamine (DOPE), phosphatidylethanolamine (POPE), palmitoyloleoylphosphatidylcholine (POPC), (6Z,9Z,28Z,31Z)-heptatriaconta-6,9,28,31-tetraen-19-ol (Di-Lin), N-methyl(2,2-di((9Z,12Z)-octadeca-9,12-dienyl)-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methanamine (DLin-k-DMA) and N-methyl-2-(2,2-di((9Z,12Z)-octadeca-9,12-dienyl)-1,
- Exemplary cell permeation peptides include, but are not limited to,
- SEQ ID NO: 27 RQIKIWFQNRRMKWKK (penetratin); SEQ ID NO: 28, GRKKRRQRRRPPQC (Tat fragment 48-60); SEQ ID NO: 29, GALFLGWLGAAGSTMGAWSQPKKKRKV (signal sequence based peptide); SEQ ID NO: 30, LLIILRRRIRKQAHAHSK (PVEC); SEQ ID NO: 31, GWTLNSAGYLLKINLKALAALAKKIL (transportan); SEQ ID NO: 32, KLALKLALKALKAALKLA (amphiphilic model peptide); SEQ ID NO: 33, RRRRRRRRR (Arg9); SEQ ID NO: 34, KFFKFFKFFK (Bacterial cell wall permeating peptide); SEQ ID NO: 35, LLGDFFRKSKEKIGKEFKRIVQRIKDFLRNLVPRTES (LL-37); SEQ ID NO: 36, SWLSKTAKKLENSAKKRISEGIAIAIQGGPR (cecro
- NH 2 alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid
- targeting ligand refers to any molecule that provides an enhanced affinity for a selected target, e.g., a cell, cell type, tissue, organ, region of the body, or a compartment, e.g., a cellular, tissue or organ compartment.
- Some exemplary targeting ligands include, but are not limited to, antibodies, antigens, folates, receptor ligands, carbohydrates, aptamers, integrin receptor ligands, chemokine receptor ligands, transferrin, biotin, serotonin receptor ligands, PSMA, endothelin, GCPII, somatostatin, LDL and HDL ligands.
- Carbohydrate based targeting ligands include, but are not limited to, D-galactose, multivalent galactose, N-acetyl-D-galactose (GalNAc), multivalent GalNAc, e.g. GaNAc2 and GalNAc3; D-mannose, multivalent mannose, multivalent lactose, N-acetyl-galactosamine, N-acetyl-gulucosamine, multivalent fucose, glycosylated polyaminoacids and lectins.
- the term multivalent indicates that more than one monosaccharide unit is present. Such monosaccharide subunits can be linked to each other through glycosidic linkages or linked to a scaffold molecule.
- PK modulating ligand and “PK modulator” refers to molecules which can modulate the pharmacokinetics of the composition of the invention.
- Some exemplary PK modulator include, but are not limited to, lipophilic molecules, bile acids, sterols, phospholipid analogues, peptides, protein binding agents, vitamins, fatty acids, phenoxazine, aspirin, naproxen, ibuprofen, suprofen, ketoprofen, (S)-(+)-pranoprofen, carprofen, PEGs, biotin, and transthyretia-binding ligands (e.g., tetraiidothyroacetic acid, 2,4,6-triiodophenol and flufenamic acid).
- Oligonucleotides that comprise a number of phosphorothioate intersugar linkages are also known to bind to serum protein, thus short oligonucleotides, e.g. oligonucleotides of comprising from about 5 to 30 nucleotides (e.g., 5 to 25 nucleotides, preferably 5 to 20 nucleotides, e.g., 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 nucleotides), and that comprise a plurality of phosphorothioate linkages in the backbone are also amenable to the present invention as ligands (e.g. as PK modulating ligands).
- ligands e.g. as PK modulating ligands
- the PK modulating oligonucleotide can comprise at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or more phosphorothioate and/or phosphorodithioate linkages. In some embodiments, all internucleotide linkages in PK modulating oligonucleotide are phosphorothioate and/or phosphorodithioates linkages.
- aptamers that bind serum components e.g. serum proteins
- Binding to serum components can be predicted from albumin binding assays, such as those described in Oravcova, et al., Journal of Chromatography B (1996), 677: 1-27.
- the ligands can all have same properties, all have different properties or some ligands have the same properties while others have different properties.
- a ligand can have targeting properties, have endosomolytic activity or have PK modulating properties.
- all the ligands have different properties.
- ligand on one strand of double-stranded oligonucleotide has affinity for a ligand on the second strand.
- a ligand is covalently linked to both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide.
- point of attachment for an oligonuclotide can be an atom of the ligand self or an atom on a carrier molecule to which the ligand itself is attached.
- Ligands can be coupled to the oligonucleotides at various places, for example, 3′-end, 5′-end, and/or at an internal position. When two or more ligands are present, the ligand can be on opposite ends of an oligonucleotide. In preferred embodiments, the ligand is attached to the oligonucleotides via an intervening tether/linker. The ligand or tethered ligand can be present on a monomer when said monomer is incorporated into the growing strand. In some embodiments, the ligand can be incorporated via coupling to a “precursor” monomer after said “precursor” monomer has been incorporated into the growing strand.
- a monomer having, e.g., an amino-terminated tether (i.e., having no associated ligand), e.g., monomer-linker-NH 2 can be incorporated into a growing oligonucleotide strand.
- a ligand having an electrophilic group e.g., a pentafluorophenyl ester or aldehyde group, can subsequently be attached to the precursor monomer by coupling the electrophilic group of the ligand with the terminal nucleophilic group of the precursor monomer's tether.
- a monomer having a chemical group suitable for taking part in Click Chemistry reaction can be incorporated e.g., an azide or alkyne terminated tether/linker.
- a ligand having complementary chemical group e.g. an alkyne or azide can be attached to the precursor monomer by coupling the alkyne and the azide together.
- ligands can be attached to one or both strands.
- a double-stranded RNAi agent comprises a ligand conjugated to the sense strand.
- a double-stranded RNAi agent comprises a ligand conjugated to the antisense strand.
- ligand can be conjugated to nucleobases, sugar moieties, or internucleosidic linkages of nucleic acid molecules. Conjugation to purine nucleobases or derivatives thereof can occur at any position including, endocyclic and exocyclic atoms. In some embodiments, the 2-, 6-, 7-, or 8-positions of a purine nucleobase are attached to a conjugate moiety. Conjugation to pyrimidine nucleobases or derivatives thereof can also occur at any position. In some embodiments, the 2-, 5-, and 6-positions of a pyrimidine nucleobase can be substituted with a conjugate moiety. When a ligand is conjugated to a nucleobase, the preferred position is one that does not interfere with hybridization, i.e., does not interfere with the hydrogen bonding interactions needed for base pairing.
- Conjugation to sugar moieties of nucleosides can occur at any carbon atom.
- Example carbon atoms of a sugar moiety that can be attached to a conjugate moiety include the 2′, 3′, and 5′ carbon atoms. The 1′ position can also be attached to a conjugate moiety, such as in an abasic residue.
- Internucleosidic linkages can also bear conjugate moieties.
- the conjugate moiety can be attached directly to the phosphorus atom or to an O, N, or S atom bound to the phosphorus atom.
- amine- or amide-containing internucleosidic linkages e.g., PNA
- the conjugate moiety can be attached to the nitrogen atom of the amine or amide or to an adjacent carbon atom.
- an oligomeric compound is attached to a conjugate moiety by contacting a reactive group (e.g., OH, SH, amine, carboxyl, aldehyde, and the like) on the oligomeric compound with a reactive group on the conjugate moiety.
- a reactive group e.g., OH, SH, amine, carboxyl, aldehyde, and the like
- one reactive group is electrophilic and the other is nucleophilic.
- an electrophilic group can be a carbonyl-containing functionality and a nucleophilic group can be an amine or thiol.
- Methods for conjugation of nucleic acids and related oligomeric compounds with and without linking groups are well described in the literature such as, for example, in Manoharan in Antisense Research and Applications, Crooke and LeBleu, eds., CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla., 1993, Chapter 17, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the ligands e.g. endosomolytic ligands, targeting ligands or other ligands
- a monomer which is then incorporated into the growing oligonucleotide strand during chemical synthesis.
- Such monomers are also referred to as carrier monomers herein.
- the carrier monomer is a cyclic group or acyclic group; preferably, the cyclic group is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, [1,3]-dioxolane, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, quinoxalinyl, pyridazinonyl, tetrahydrofuryl and decalin; preferably, the acyclic group is selected from serinol backbone or diethanolamine backbone.
- the cyclic carrier monomer is based on pyrrolidinyl such as 4-hydroxyproline or a derivative thereof.
- the covalent linkages between the oligonucleotide and other components can be mediated by a linker.
- This linker can be cleavable linker or non-cleavable linker, depending on the application.
- a “cleavable linker” refers to linkers that are capable of cleavage under various conditions. Conditions suitable for cleavage can include, but are not limited to, pH, UV irradiation, enzymatic activity, temperature, hydrolysis, elimination and substitution reactions, redox reactions, and thermodynamic properties of the linkage.
- a cleavable linker can be used to release the oligonucleotide after transport to the desired target. The intended nature of the conjugation or coupling interaction, or the desired biological effect, will determine the choice of linker group.
- linker means an organic moiety that connects two parts of a compound.
- Linkers typically comprise a direct bond or an atom such as oxygen or sulfur, a unit such as NR 1 , C(O), C(O)NH, SO, SO 2 , SO 2 NH or a chain of atoms, such as substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkylarylalkyl, alkylarylalkenyl, alkylarylalkynyl, alkylaryl
- the linker is —[(P-Q-R) q —X—(P′-Q′-R′) q′ ] q′′ -T-, wherein: P, R, T, P′ and R′ are each independently for each occurrence absent, CO, NH, O, S, OC(O), NHC(O), CH 2 , CH 2 NH, CH 2 O; NHCH(R a )C(O), —C(O)—CH(R a )—NH—, C(O)-(optionally substituted alkyl)-NH—, CH ⁇ N—O,
- R 50 and R 51 are independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, or R 50 and R 51 taken together to form a cyclic ring;
- Q and Q′ are each independently for each occurrence absent, —(CH 2 ) n —, —C(R 100 )(R 200 )(CH 2 ) n —, —(CH 2 ) n C(R 100 )(R 200 )—, —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m CH 2 CH 2 —, or —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m CH 2 CH 2 NH—;
- X is absent or a cleavable linking group
- R is H or an amino acid side chain
- R 100 and R 200 are each independently for each occurrence H, CH 3 , OH, SH or N(R X ) 2 ;
- R X is independently for each occurrence H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl or benzyl;
- q, q′ and q′′ are each independently for each occurrence 0-20 and wherein the repeating unit can be the same or different;
- n is independently for each occurrence 1-20;
- n is independently for each occurrence 0-50.
- the linker comprises at least one cleavable linking group.
- the linker is a branched linker.
- the branchpoint of the branched linker may be at least trivalent, but can be a tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent atom, or a group presenting such multiple valencies.
- the branchpoint is, —N, —N(Q)-C, —O—C, —S—C, —SS—C, —C(O)N(Q)-C, —OC(O)N(Q)-C, —N(Q)C(O)—C, or —N(Q)C(O)O—C; wherein Q is independently for each occurrence H or optionally substituted alkyl.
- the branchpoint is glycerol or derivative thereof.
- a cleavable linking group is one which is sufficiently stable outside the cell, but which upon entry into a target cell is cleaved to release the two parts the linker is holding together.
- the cleavable linking group is cleaved at least 10 times or more, preferably at least 100 times faster in the target cell or under a first reference condition (which can, e.g., be selected to mimic or represent intracellular conditions) than in the blood or serum of a subject, or under a second reference condition (which can, e.g., be selected to mimic or represent conditions found in the blood or serum).
- Cleavable linking groups are susceptible to cleavage agents, e.g., pH, redox potential or the presence of degradative molecules. Generally, cleavage agents are more prevalent or found at higher levels or activities inside cells than in serum or blood. Examples of such degradative agents include: redox agents which are selected for particular substrates or which have no substrate specificity, including, e.g., oxidative or reductive enzymes or reductive agents such as mercaptans, present in cells, that can degrade a redox cleavable linking group by reduction; esterases; amidases; endosomes or agents that can create an acidic environment, e.g., those that result in a pH of five or lower; enzymes that can hydrolyze or degrade an acid cleavable linking group by acting as a general acid, peptidases (which can be substrate specific) and proteases, and phosphatases.
- redox agents which are selected for particular substrates or which have no substrate specificity,
- a linker can include a cleavable linking group that is cleavable by a particular enzyme.
- the type of cleavable linking group incorporated into a linker can depend on the cell to be targeted. For example, liver targeting ligands can be linked to the cationic lipids through a linker that includes an ester group. Liver cells are rich in esterases, and therefore the linker will be cleaved more efficiently in liver cells than in cell types that are not esterase-rich. Other cell-types rich in esterases include cells of the lung, renal cortex, and testis.
- Linkers that contain peptide bonds can be used when targeting cell types rich in peptidases, such as liver cells and synoviocytes.
- cleavable linking group is cleaved at least 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 times faster in the cell (or under in vitro conditions selected to mimic intracellular conditions) as compared to blood or serum (or under in vitro conditions selected to mimic extracellular conditions). In some embodiments, the cleavable linking group is cleaved by less than 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 55%, or 1% in the blood (or in vitro conditions selected to mimic extracellular conditions) as compared to in the cell (or under in vitro conditions selected to mimic intracellular conditions)
- Exemplary cleavable linking groups include, but are not limited to, redox cleavable linking groups (e.g., —S—S— and —C(R) 2 —S—S—, wherein R is H or C 1 -C 6 alkyl and at least one R is C 1 -C 6 alkyl such as CH 3 or CH 2 CH 3 ); phosphate-based cleavable linking groups (e.g., —O—P(O)(OR)—O—, —O—P(S)(OR)—O—, —O—P(S)(SR)—O—, —S—P(O)(OR)—O—, —O—P(O)(OR)—S—, —S—P(O)(OR)—S—, —O—P(S)(ORk)-S—, —S—P(S)(OR)—O—, —O—P(O)(R)—O—, —O—P
- a peptide based cleavable linking group comprises two or more amino acids.
- the peptide-based cleavage linkage comprises the amino acid sequence that is the substrate for a peptidase or a protease found in cells.
- an acid cleavable linking group is cleaveable in an acidic environment with a pH of about 6.5 or lower (e.g., about 6.-, 5.5, 5.0, or lower), or by agents such as enzymes that can act as a general acid.
- the oligonucleotide compounds of the invention can be prepared using solution-phase or solid-phase organic synthesis, or enzymatically by methods known in the art.
- Organic synthesis offers the advantage that the oligonucleotide strands comprising non-natural or modified nucleotides can be easily prepared. Any other means for such synthesis known in the art can additionally or alternatively be employed. It is also known to use similar techniques to prepare other oligonucleotides, such as the phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates and alkylated derivatives.
- the double-stranded oligonucleotide compounds of the invention can be prepared using a two-step procedure. First, the individual strands of the double-stranded molecule are prepared separately. Then, the component strands are annealed.
- the oligonucleotide can be prepared in a solution (e.g., an aqueous and/or organic solution) that is appropriate for formulation.
- a solution e.g., an aqueous and/or organic solution
- the oligonucleotide preparation can be precipitated and redissolved in pure double-distilled water, and lyophilized. The dried oligonucleotide can then be resuspended in a solution appropriate for the intended formulation process.
- oligonucleotides of the invention are prepared by connecting nucleosides with optionally protected phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages.
- Representative protecting groups for phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages such as phosphodiester and phosphorothioate linkages include ⁇ -cyanoethyl, diphenylsilylethyl, ⁇ -cyanobutenyl, cyano p-xylyl (CPX), N-methyl-N-trifluoroacetyl ethyl (META), acetoxy phenoxy ethyl (APE) and butene-4-yl groups. See for example U.S. Pat. No. 4,725,677 and Re.
- One aspect of the present invention relates to a method of modulating the expression of a target gene in a cell.
- the method comprises: contacting a cell with a composition of the invention.
- the method comprises further the step of allowing the cell to internalize the composition.
- the method further comprises the step of providing a composition of the invention.
- the method can be performed in a cell culture, e.g., in vitro or ex vivo, or in vivo, e.g., to treat a subject identified as being in need of treatment by a composition of the invention.
- contacting or “contact” as used herein in connection with contacting a cell includes subjecting the cell to an appropriate culture media which comprises an oligonucleotide of the invention. Where the cell is in vivo, “contacting” or “contact” includes administering the oligonucleotide in a pharmaceutical composition to a subject via an appropriate administration route such that the oligonucleotide contacts the cell in vivo.
- a therapeutically effective amount of a compound described herein can be administered to a subject.
- Methods of administering compounds to a subject are known in the art and easily available to one of skill in the art.
- the cell is a mammalian cell.
- the invention provides a method for modulating the expression of the target gene in a subject.
- the method comprises: administering a composition featured in the invention to the subject such that expression of the target gene is modulated.
- administer refers to the placement of a composition into a subject by a method or route which results in at least partial localization of the composition at a desired site such that expression of the target gene is modulated.
- An oligonucleotide described herein can be administered by any appropriate route known in the art including, but not limited to oral or parenteral routes, including intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), pulmonary, nasal, rectal, and topical (including buccal and sublingual) administration.
- Exemplary modes of administration include, but are not limited to, injection, infusion, instillation, inhalation, or ingestion.
- injection includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intraventricular, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, sub capsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, intracerebro spinal, and intrasternal injection and infusion.
- the compositions are administered by intravenous infusion or injection.
- treatment delaying or preventing the onset of such a disease or disorder, reversing, alleviating, ameliorating, inhibiting, slowing down or stopping the progression, aggravation, deterioration or severity of a condition associated with such a disease or disorder.
- the symptoms of a disease or disorder are alleviated by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 40%, or at least 50%.
- a “subject” means a human or animal. Usually the animal is a vertebrate such as a primate, rodent, domestic animal or game animal. Primates include chimpanzees, cynomologous monkeys, spider monkeys, and macaques, e.g., Rhesus. Rodents include mice, rats, woodchucks, ferrets, rabbits and hamsters.
- Domestic and game animals include cows, horses, pigs, deer, bison, buffalo, feline species, e.g., domestic cat, canine species, e.g., dog, fox, wolf, avian species, e.g., chicken, emu, ostrich, and fish, e.g., trout, catfish and salmon.
- Patient or subject includes any subset of the foregoing, e.g., all of the above, but excluding one or more groups or species such as humans, primates or rodents.
- the subject is a mammal, e.g., a primate, e.g., a human.
- the terms, “patient” and “subject” are used interchangeably herein.
- a subject identified as being in need of treatment by an oligonucleotide or composition of the invention further comprise selecting a subject identified as being in need of treatment by an oligonucleotide or composition of the invention.
- a subject suffering from a disease or disorder can be selected based on the symptoms presented.
- the oligonucleotide can be administrated to a subject in combination with a pharmaceutically active agent.
- exemplary pharmaceutically active compound include, but are not limited to, those found in Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine, 13 th Edition, Eds. T. R. Harrison et al. McGraw-Hill N.Y., NY; Physicians Desk Reference, 50 th Edition, 1997, Oradell N.J., Medical Economics Co.; Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 8 th Edition, Goodman and Gilman, 1990; and United States Pharmacopeia, The National Formulary, USP XII NF XVII, 1990, the complete contents of all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the oligonucleotide and the pharmaceutically active agent may be administrated to the subject in the same pharmaceutical composition or in different pharmaceutical compositions (at the same time or at different times).
- the amount of oligonucleotide which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally out of one hundred percent, this amount will range from about 0.1% to 99% of oligonucleotide, preferably from about 5% to about 70%, most preferably from 10% to about 30%.
- Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population).
- the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50.
- Compositions that exhibit large therapeutic indices, are preferred.
- the data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans.
- the dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity.
- the dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
- the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
- a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the therapeutic which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture.
- Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography. The effects of any particular dosage can be monitored by a suitable bioassay.
- the dosage may be determined by a physician and adjusted, as necessary, to suit observed effects of the treatment.
- the compositions are administered so that oligonucleotide is given at a dose from 1 ⁇ g/kg to 150 mg/kg, 1 ⁇ g/kg to 100 mg/kg, 1 ⁇ g/kg to 50 mg/kg, 1 ⁇ g/kg to 20 mg/kg, 1 ⁇ g/kg to 10 mg/kg, 1 ⁇ g/kg to 1 mg/kg, 100 ⁇ g/kg to 100 mg/kg, 100 ⁇ g/kg to 50 mg/kg, 100 ⁇ g/kg to 20 mg/kg, 100 ⁇ g/kg to 10 mg/kg, 100 ⁇ g/kg to 1 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg to 50 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg, 10 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg, 10 mg/kg to 50 mg/kg, or 10 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg.
- the dosing schedule can vary from once a week to daily depending on a number of clinical factors, such as the subject's sensitivity to the polypeptides.
- the desired dose can be administered at one time or divided into subdoses, e.g., 2-4 subdoses and administered over a period of time, e.g., at appropriate intervals through the day or other appropriate schedule. Such sub-doses can be administered as unit dosage forms. Examples of dosing schedules are administration once a week, twice a week, three times a week, daily, twice daily, three times daily or four or more times daily.
- RNA nucleic acid that encodes an RNA
- the target gene can be a gene derived from a cell, an endogenous gene, a transgene, or exogenous genes such as genes of a pathogen, for example a virus, which is present in the cell after infection thereof.
- the cell containing the target gene can be derived from or contained in any organism, for example a plant, animal, protozoan, virus, bacterium, or fungus.
- Target genes include genes promoting unwanted cell proliferation, growth factor gene, growth factor receptor gene, genes expressing kinases, an adaptor protein gene, a gene encoding a G protein super family molecule, a gene encoding a transcription factor, a gene which mediates angiogenesis, a viral gene, a gene required for viral replication, a cellular gene which mediates viral function, a gene of a bacterial pathogen, a gene of an amoebic pathogen, a gene of a parasitic pathogen, a gene of a fungal pathogen, a gene which mediates an unwanted immune response, a gene which mediates the processing of pain, a gene which mediates a neurological disease, an allene gene found in cells characterized by loss of heterozygosity, or one allege gene of a polymorphic gene.
- target genes include, but are not limited to, PDGF beta gene; Erb-B gene, Src gene; CRK gene; GRB2 gene; RAS gene; MEKK gene; JNK gene; RAF gene; Erk1/2 gene; PCNA(p21) gene; MYB gene; c-MYC gene; JUN gene; FOS gene; BCL-2 gene; Cyclin D gene; VEGF gene; EGFR gene; Cyclin A gene; Cyclin E gene; WNT-1 gene; beta-catenin gene; c-MET gene; PKC gene; NFKB gene; STAT3 gene; survivin gene; Her2/Neu gene; topoisomerase I gene; topoisomerase II alpha gene; p73 gene; p21(WAF1/CIP1) gene; p27(KIP1) gene; PPM1D gene; caveolin I gene; MIB I gene; MTAI gene; M68 gene; tumor suppressor genes; p53 gene; DN-p63 gene; pRb tumor suppressor gene
- Louis Encephalitis gene a gene that is required for St. Louis Encephalitis replication, Tick-borne encephalitis virus gene, a gene that is required for Tick-borne encephalitis virus replication, Murray Valley encephalitis virus gene, a gene that is required for Murray Valley encephalitis virus replication, dengue virus gene, a gene that is required for dengue virus gene replication, Simian Virus 40 gene, a gene that is required for Simian Virus 40 replication, Human T Cell Lymphotropic Virus gene, a gene that is required for Human T Cell Lymphotropic Virus replication, Moloney-Murine Leukemia Virus gene, a gene that is required for Moloney-Murine Leukemia Virus replication, encephalomyocarditis virus gene, a gene that is required for encephalomyocarditis virus replication, measles virus gene, a gene that is required for measles virus replication, Varicella zoster virus gene, a gene that is required for Varicella
- the loss of heterozygosity can result in homozygosity for sequence, e.g., genes, in the area of LOH.
- This can result in a significant genetic difference between normal and disease-state cells, e.g., cancer cells, and provides a useful difference between normal and disease-state cells, e.g., cancer cells.
- This difference can arise because a gene or other sequence is heterozygous in diploid cells but is hemizygous in cells having LOH.
- the regions of LOH will often include a gene, the loss of which promotes unwanted proliferation, e.g., a tumor suppressor gene, and other sequences including, e.g., other genes, in some cases a gene which is essential for normal function, e.g., growth.
- Methods of the invention rely, in part, on the specific modulation of one allele of an essential gene with a composition of the invention.
- modulate gene expression means that expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecule or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits is up regulated or down regulated, such that expression, level, or activity is greater than or less than that observed in the absence of the modulator.
- modulate can mean “inhibit,” but the use of the word “modulate” is not limited to this definition.
- gene expression modulation happens when the expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecule or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits is at least 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%, 2-fold, 3-fold, 4-fold, 5-fold or more different from that observed in the absence of the modulator, e.g., RNAi agent.
- the % and/or fold difference can be calculated relative to the control or the non-control, for example,
- the term “inhibit”, “down-regulate”, or “reduce”, means that the expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecules or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits, or activity of one or more proteins or protein subunits, is reduced below that observed in the absence of modulator.
- the gene expression is down-regulated when expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecules or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits, or activity of one or more proteins or protein subunits, is reduced at least 10% lower relative to a corresponding non-modulated control, and preferably at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99% or most preferably, 100% (i.e., no gene expression).
- the term “increase” or “up-regulate”, means that the expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecules or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits, or activity of one or more proteins or protein subunits, is increased above that observed in the absence of modulator.
- the gene expression is up-regulated when expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecules or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits, or activity of one or more proteins or protein subunits, is increased at least 10% relative to a corresponding non-modulated control, and preferably at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 100%, 1.1-fold, 1.25-fold, 1.5-fold, 1.75-fold, 2-fold, 3-fold, 4-fold, 5-fold, 10-fold, 50-fold, 100-fold or more.
- RNAi agents e.g., antisense, antagomir, aptamer and ribozyme, and such practice is within the invention.
- a formulated RNAi composition can assume a variety of states.
- the composition is at least partially crystalline, uniformly crystalline, and/or anhydrous (e.g., less than 80, 50, 30, 20, or 10% water).
- the RNAi is in an aqueous phase, e.g., in a solution that includes water.
- the aqueous phase or the crystalline compositions can, e.g., be incorporated into a delivery vehicle, e.g., a liposome (particularly for the aqueous phase) or a particle (e.g., a microparticle as can be appropriate for a crystalline composition).
- a delivery vehicle e.g., a liposome (particularly for the aqueous phase) or a particle (e.g., a microparticle as can be appropriate for a crystalline composition).
- the RNAi composition is formulated in a manner that is compatible with the intended method of administration.
- the composition is prepared by at least one of the following methods: spray drying, lyophilization, vacuum drying, evaporation, fluid bed drying, or a combination of these techniques; or sonication with a lipid, freeze-drying, condensation and other self-assembly.
- RNAi preparation can be formulated in combination with another agent, e.g., another therapeutic agent or an agent that stabilizes the RNAi agent, e.g., a protein that complex with RNAi agent to form an iRNP.
- another agent e.g., another therapeutic agent or an agent that stabilizes the RNAi agent, e.g., a protein that complex with RNAi agent to form an iRNP.
- agents include chelators, e.g., EDTA (e.g., to remove divalent cations such as Mg 2+), salts, RNAse inhibitors (e.g., a broad specificity RNAse inhibitor such as RNAsin) and so forth.
- the RNAi preparation includes another RNAi agent, e.g., a second RNAi that can mediated RNAi with respect to a second gene, or with respect to the same gene. Still other preparation can include at least 3, 5, ten, twenty, fifty, or a hundred or more different RNAi species. Such RNAi agents can mediate RNAi with respect to a similar number of different genes.
- the RNAi preparation includes at least a second therapeutic agent (e.g., an agent other than RNA or DNA).
- a second therapeutic agent e.g., an agent other than RNA or DNA
- an RNAi composition for the treatment of a viral disease e.g., HIV
- a known antiviral agent e.g., a protease inhibitor or reverse transcriptase inhibitor
- an RNAi agent composition for the treatment of a cancer might further comprise a chemotherapeutic agent.
- oligonucleotides of the invention can be formulated in liposomes.
- a liposome is a structure having lipid-containing membranes enclosing an aqueous interior. Liposomes may have one or more lipid membranes. Liposomes may be characterized by membrane type and by size. Small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs) have a single membrane and typically range between 0.02 and 0.05 ⁇ m in diameter; large unilamellar vesicles (LUVS) are typically larger than 0.05 ⁇ m.
- SUVs Small unilamellar vesicles
- Oligolamellar large vesicles and multilamellar vesicles have multiple, usually concentric, membrane layers and are typically larger than 0.1 ⁇ m. Liposomes with several nonconcentric membranes, i.e., several smaller vesicles contained within a larger vesicle, are termed multivesicular vesicles.
- Liposomes may further include one or more additional lipids and/or other components such as cholesterol.
- Other lipids may be included in the liposome compositions for a variety of purposes, such as to prevent lipid oxidation, to stabilize the bilayer, to reduce aggregation during formation or to attach ligands onto the liposome surface. Any of a number of lipids may be present, including amphipathic, neutral, cationic, and anionic lipids. Such lipids can be used alone or in combination.
- bilayer stabilizing components such as polyamide oligomers (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,320,017), peptides, proteins, detergents, lipid-derivatives, such as PEG conjugated to phosphatidylethanolamine, PEG conjugated to phosphatidic acid, PEG conjugated to ceramides (see, U.S. Pat. No. 5,885,613), PEG conjugated dialkylamines and PEG conjugated 1,2-diacyloxypropan-3-amines.
- bilayer stabilizing components such as polyamide oligomers (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,320,017), peptides, proteins, detergents, lipid-derivatives, such as PEG conjugated to phosphatidylethanolamine, PEG conjugated to phosphatidic acid, PEG conjugated to ceramides (see, U.S. Pat. No. 5,885,613), PEG conjugated dialkylamines and
- Liposome can include components selected to reduce aggregation of lipid particles during formation, which may result from steric stabilization of particles which prevents charge-induced aggregation during formation.
- Suitable components that reduce aggregation include, but are not limited to, polyethylene glycol (PEG)-modified lipids, monosialoganglioside Gm1, and polyamide oligomers (“PAO”) such as (described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,320,017).
- Exemplary suitable PEG-modified lipids include, but are not limited to, PEG-modified phosphatidylethanolamine and phosphatidic acid, PEG-ceramide conjugates (e.g., PEG-CerC14 or PEG-CerC20), PEG-modified dialkylamines and PEG-modified 1,2-diacyloxypropan-3-amines. Particularly preferred are PEG-modified diacylglycerols and dialkylglycerols. Other compounds with uncharged, hydrophilic, steric-barrier moieties, which prevent aggregation during formation, like PEG, Gm1, or ATTA, can also be coupled to lipids to reduce aggregation during formation.
- ATTA-lipids are described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 6,320,017, and PEG-lipid conjugates are described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,820,873, 5,534,499 and 5,885,613.
- concentration of the lipid component selected to reduce aggregation is about 1 to 15% (by mole percent of lipids). It should be noted that aggregation preventing compounds do not necessarily require lipid conjugation to function properly. Free PEG or free ATTA in solution may be sufficient to prevent aggregation. If the liposomes are stable after formulation, the PEG or ATTA can be dialyzed away before administration to a subject.
- Neutral lipids when present in the liposome composition, can be any of a number of lipid species which exist either in an uncharged or neutral zwitterionic form at physiological pH.
- Such lipids include, for example diacylphosphatidylcholine, diacylphosphatidylethanolamine, ceramide, sphingomyelin, dihydrosphingomyelin, cephalin, and cerebrosides.
- the selection of neutral lipids for use in liposomes described herein is generally guided by consideration of, e.g., liposome size and stability of the liposomes in the bloodstream.
- the neutral lipid component is a lipid having two acyl groups, (i.e., diacylphosphatidylcholine and diacylphosphatidylethanolamine).
- Lipids having a variety of acyl chain groups of varying chain length and degree of saturation are available or may be isolated or synthesized by well-known techniques.
- lipids containing saturated fatty acids with carbon chain lengths in the range of C 14 to C 22 are preferred.
- lipids with mono or diunsaturated fatty acids with carbon chain lengths in the range of C 14 to C 22 are used.
- lipids having mixtures of saturated and unsaturated fatty acid chains can be used.
- the neutral lipids used in the present invention are DOPE, DSPC, POPC, DMPC, DPPC or any related phosphatidylcholine.
- the neutral lipids useful in the present invention may also be composed of sphingomyelin, dihydrosphingomyeline, or phospholipids with other head groups, such as serine and inositol.
- the sterol component of the lipid mixture when present, can be any of those sterols conventionally used in the field of liposome, lipid vesicle or lipid particle preparation.
- a preferred sterol is cholesterol.
- Cationic lipids when present in the liposome composition, can be any of a number of lipid species which carry a net positive charge at about physiological pH.
- lipids include, but are not limited to, N,N-dioleyl-N,N-dimethylammonium chloride (“DODAC”); N-(2,3-dioleyloxy)propyl-N,N—N-triethylammonium chloride (“DOTMA”); N,N-distearyl-N,N-dimethylammonium bromide (“DDAB”); N-(2,3-dioleoyloxy)propyl)-N,N,N-trimethylammonium chloride (“DOTAP”); 1,2-Dioleyloxy-3-trimethylaminopropane chloride salt (“DOTAP.Cl”); 3 ⁇ -(N—(N′,N′-dimethylaminoethane)-carbamoyl)cholesterol (“DC-Chol”), N-
- cationic lipids can be used, such as, e.g., LIPOFECTIN (including DOTMA and DOPE, available from GIBCO/BRL), and LIPOFECTAMINE (comprising DOSPA and DOPE, available from GIBCO/BRL).
- LIPOFECTIN including DOTMA and DOPE, available from GIBCO/BRL
- LIPOFECTAMINE comprising DOSPA and DOPE, available from GIBCO/BRL
- Other cationic lipids suitable for lipid particle formation are described in WO98/39359, WO96/37194.
- Other cationic lipids suitable for liposome formation are described in U.S. Provisional applications No. 61/018,616 (filed Jan. 2, 2008), No. 61/039,748 (filed Mar. 26, 2008), No. 61/047,087 (filed Apr. 22, 2008) and No. 61/051,528 (filed May 21-2008), all of which are incorporated by
- Anionic lipids when present in the liposome composition, can be any of a number of lipid species which carry a net negative charge at about physiological pH.
- Such lipids include, but are not limited to, phosphatidylglycerol, cardiolipin, diacylphosphatidylserine, diacylphosphatidic acid, N-dodecanoyl phosphatidylethanoloamine, N-succinyl phosphatidylethanolamine, N-glutaryl phosphatidylethanolamine, lysylphosphatidylglycerol, and other anionic modifying groups joined to neutral lipids.
- Amphipathic lipids refer to any suitable material, wherein the hydrophobic portion of the lipid material orients into a hydrophobic phase, while the hydrophilic portion orients toward the aqueous phase.
- Such compounds include, but are not limited to, phospholipids, aminolipids, and sphingolipids.
- Representative phospholipids include sphingomyelin, phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylserine, phosphatidylinositol, phosphatidic acid, palmitoyloleoylphosphatdylcholine, lysophosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidylethanolamine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, dioleoylphosphatidylcholine, distearoylphosphatidylcholine, or dilinoleoylphosphatidylcholine.
- phosphorus-lacking compounds such as sphingolipids, glycosphingolipid families, diacylglycerols, and ⁇ -acyloxyacids, can also be used. Additionally, such amphipathic lipids can be readily mixed with other lipids, such as triglycerides and sterols.
- programmable fusion lipids are also suitable for inclusion in the liposome compostions of the present invention.
- Liposomes containing programmable fusion lipids have little tendency to fuse with cell membranes and deliver their payload until a given signal event occurs. This allows the liposome to distribute more evenly after injection into an organism or disease site before it starts fusing with cells.
- the signal event can be, for example, a change in pH, temperature, ionic environment, or time.
- a fusion delaying or “cloaking” component such as an ATTA-lipid conjugate or a PEG-lipid conjugate, can simply exchange out of the liposome membrane over time.
- the liposome By the time the liposome is suitably distributed in the body, it has lost sufficient cloaking agent so as to be fusogenic. With other signal events, it is desirable to choose a signal that is associated with the disease site or target cell, such as increased temperature at a site of inflammation.
- a liposome can also include a targeting moiety, e.g., a targeting moiety that is specific to a cell type or tissue.
- a targeting moiety e.g., a targeting moiety that is specific to a cell type or tissue.
- PEG polyethylene glycol
- targeting moieties such as ligands, cell surface receptors, glycoproteins, vitamins (e.g., riboflavin), aptamers and monoclonal antibodies, can also be used.
- the targeting moieties can include the entire protein or fragments thereof. Targeting mechanisms generally require that the targeting agents be positioned on the surface of the liposome in such a manner that the targeting moiety is available for interaction with the target, for example, a cell surface receptor.
- a targeting moiety such as receptor binding ligand, for targeting the liposome is linked to the lipids forming the liposome.
- the targeting moiety is attached to the distal ends of the PEG chains forming the hydrophilic polymer coating (Klibanov, et al., Journal of Liposome Research 2: 321-334 (1992); Kirpotin et al., FEBS Letters 388: 115-118 (1996)).
- a variety of different targeting agents and methods are known and available in the art, including those described, e.g., in Sapra, P. and Allen, T M, Prog. Lipid Res. 42(5):439-62 (2003); and Abra, R M et al., J. Liposome Res.
- a liposome composition of the invention can be prepared by a variety of methods that are known in the art. See e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,235,871, 4,897,355 and 5,171,678; published PCT applications WO 96/14057 and WO 96/37194; Felgner, P. L. et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA (1987) 8:7413-7417, Bangham, et al. M. Mol. Biol. (1965) 23:238, Olson, et al. Biochim. Biophys. Acta (1979) 557:9, Szoka, et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
- a liposome composition of the invention can be prepared by first dissolving the lipid components of a liposome in a detergent so that micelles are formed with the lipid component.
- the detergent can have a high critical micelle concentration and maybe nonionic.
- Exemplary detergents include, but are not limited to, cholate, CHAPS, octylglucoside, deoxycholate and lauroyl sarcosine.
- the RNAi agent preparation e.g., an emulsion, is then added to the micelles that include the lipid components. After condensation, the detergent is removed, e.g., by dialysis, to yield a liposome containing the RNAi agent.
- a carrier compound that assists in condensation can be added during the condensation reaction, e.g., by controlled addition.
- the carrier compound can be a polymer other than a nucleic acid (e.g., spermine or spermidine).
- pH of the mixture can also be adjusted.
- liposomes of the present invention may be prepared by diffusing a lipid derivatized with a hydrophilic polymer into preformed liposome, such as by exposing preformed liposomes to micelles composed of lipid-grafted polymers, at lipid concentrations corresponding to the final mole percent of derivatized lipid which is desired in the liposome.
- Liposomes containing a hydrophilic polymer can also be formed by homogenization, lipid-field hydration, or extrusion techniques, as are known in the art.
- the RNAi agent is first dispersed by sonication in a lysophosphatidylcholine or other low CMC surfactant (including polymer grafted lipids).
- the resulting micellar suspension of RNAi agent is then used to rehydrate a dried lipid sample that contains a suitable mole percent of polymer-grafted lipid, or cholesterol.
- the lipid and active agent suspension is then formed into liposomes using extrusion techniques as are known in the art, and the resulting liposomes separated from the unencapsulated solution by standard column separation.
- the liposomes are prepared to have substantially homogeneous sizes in a selected size range.
- One effective sizing method involves extruding an aqueous suspension of the liposomes through a series of polycarbonate membranes having a selected uniform pore size; the pore size of the membrane will correspond roughly with the largest sizes of liposomes produced by extrusion through that membrane. See e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,737,323.
- RNAi agents are described in PCT application #PCT/US2007/080331 (filed Oct. 3, 2007) and U.S. Provisional applications No. 61/018,616 (filed Jan. 2, 2008), No. 61/039,748 (filed Mar. 26, 2008), No. 61/047,087 (filed Apr. 22, 2008) and No. 61/051,528 (filed May 21-2008), No. 61/113,179 (filed Nov. 10, 2008) all of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties for all purposes.
- microemulsification technology to improve bioavailability of some lipophilic (water insoluble) pharmaceutical agents.
- examples include Trimetrine (Dordunoo, S. K., et al., Drug Development and Industrial Pharmacy, 17(12), 1685-1713, 1991 and REV 5901 (Sheen, P. C., et al., J Pharm Sci 80(7), 712-714, 1991).
- microemulsification provides enhanced bioavailability by preferentially directing absorption to the lymphatic system instead of the circulatory system, which thereby bypasses the liver, and prevents destruction of the compounds in the hepatobiliary circulation.
- the formulations contain micelles formed from a compound of the present invention and at least one amphiphilic carrier, in which the micelles have an average diameter of less than about 100 nm. More preferred embodiments provide micelles having an average diameter less than about 50 nm, and even more preferred embodiments provide micelles having an average diameter less than about 30 nm, or even less than about 20 nm.
- micelles are a particular type of molecular assembly in which amphipathic molecules are arranged in a spherical structure such that all hydrophobic portions on the molecules are directed inward, leaving the hydrophilic portions in contact with the surrounding aqueous phase. The converse arrangement exists if the environment is hydrophobic.
- amphiphilic carriers While all suitable amphiphilic carriers are contemplated, the presently preferred carriers are generally those that have Generally-Recognized-as-Safe (GRAS) status, and that can both solubilize the compound of the present invention and microemulsify it at a later stage when the solution comes into a contact with a complex water phase (such as one found in human gastrointestinal tract).
- GRAS Generally-Recognized-as-Safe
- amphiphilic ingredients that satisfy these requirements have HLB (hydrophilic to lipophilic balance) values of 2-20, and their structures contain straight chain aliphatic radicals in the range of C-6 to C-20. Examples are polyethylene-glycolized fatty glycerides and polyethylene glycols.
- amphiphilic carriers include, but are not limited to, lecithin, hyaluronic acid, pharmaceutically acceptable salts of hyaluronic acid, glycolic acid, lactic acid, chamomile extract, cucumber extract, oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, monoolein, monooleates, monolaurates, borage oil, evening of primrose oil, menthol, trihydroxy oxo cholanyl glycine and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, glycerin, polyglycerin, lysine, polylysine, triolein, polyoxyethylene ethers and analogues thereof, polidocanol alkyl ethers and analogues thereof, chenodeoxycholate, deoxycholate, and mixtures thereof.
- Particularly preferred amphiphilic carriers are saturated and monounsaturated polyethyleneglycolyzed fatty acid glycerides, such as those obtained from fully or partially hydrogenated various vegetable oils.
- oils may advantageously consist of tri-. di- and mono-fatty acid glycerides and di- and mono-polyethyleneglycol esters of the corresponding fatty acids, with a particularly preferred fatty acid composition including capric acid 4-10, capric acid 3-9, lauric acid 40-50, myristic acid 14-24, palmitic acid 4-14 and stearic acid 5-15%.
- amphiphilic carriers includes partially esterified sorbitan and/or sorbitol, with saturated or mono-unsaturated fatty acids (SPAN-series) or corresponding ethoxylated analogs (TWEEN-series).
- SPAN-series saturated or mono-unsaturated fatty acids
- TWEEN-series corresponding ethoxylated analogs
- amphiphilic carriers are particularly contemplated, including Gelucire-series, Labrafil, Labrasol, or Lauroglycol (all manufactured and distributed by Gattefosse Corporation, Saint Priest, France), PEG-mono-oleate, PEG-di-oleate, PEG-monolaurate and di-laurate, Lecithin, Polysorbate 80, etc (produced and distributed by a number of companies in USA and worldwide).
- Mixed micelle formulation suitable for delivery through transdermal membranes may be prepared by mixing an aqueous solution of the RNAi composition, an alkali metal C 8 to C 22 alkyl sulphate, and an amphiphilic carrier.
- the amphiphilic carrier may be added at the same time or after addition of the alkali metal alkyl sulphate.
- Mixed micelles will form with substantially any kind of mixing of the ingredients but vigorous mixing in order to provide smaller size micelles.
- a first micelle composition is prepared which contains the RNAi composition and at least the alkali metal alkyl sulphate.
- the first micelle composition is then mixed with at least three amphiphilic carriers to form a mixed micelle composition.
- the micelle composition is prepared by mixing the RNAi composition, the alkali metal alkyl sulphate and at least one of the amphiphilic carriers, followed by addition of the remaining micelle amphiphilic carriers, with vigorous mixing.
- Phenol and/or m-cresol may be added to the mixed micelle composition to stabilize the formulation and protect against bacterial growth.
- phenol and/or m-cresol may be added with the amphiphilic carriers.
- An isotonic agent such as glycerin may also be added after formation of the mixed micelle composition.
- the formulation can be put into an aerosol dispenser and the dispenser is charged with a propellant, such as hydrogen-containing chlorofluorocarbons, hydrogen-containing fluorocarbons, dimethyl ether, diethyl ether and TEA 134a (1,1,1,2 tetrafluoroethane).
- a propellant such as hydrogen-containing chlorofluorocarbons, hydrogen-containing fluorocarbons, dimethyl ether, diethyl ether and TEA 134a (1,1,1,2 tetrafluoroethane).
- the oligonucleotides of the present invention may be prepared and formulated as emulsions.
- Emulsions are typically heterogenous systems of one liquid dispersed in another in the form of droplets (Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199; Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., Volume 1, p.
- Emulsions are often biphasic systems comprising two immiscible liquid phases intimately mixed and dispersed with each other.
- emulsions may be of either the water-in-oil (w/o) or the oil-in-water (o/w) variety.
- Emulsions may contain additional components in addition to the dispersed phases, and the active drug which may be present as a solution in either the aqueous phase, oily phase or itself as a separate phase.
- compositions such as emulsifiers, stabilizers, dyes, and anti-oxidants may also be present in emulsions as needed.
- Pharmaceutical emulsions may also be multiple emulsions that are comprised of more than two phases such as, for example, in the case of oil-in-water-in-oil (o/w/o) and water-in-oil-in-water (w/o/w) emulsions.
- Such complex formulations often provide certain advantages that simple binary emulsions do not.
- Multiple emulsions in which individual oil droplets of an o/w emulsion enclose small water droplets constitute a w/o/w emulsion.
- a system of oil droplets enclosed in globules of water stabilized in an oily continuous phase provides an o/w/o emulsion.
- Emulsions are characterized by little or no thermodynamic stability. Often, the dispersed or discontinuous phase of the emulsion is well dispersed into the external or continuous phase and maintained in this form through the means of emulsifiers or the viscosity of the formulation. Either of the phases of the emulsion may be a semisolid or a solid, as is the case of emulsion-style ointment bases and creams. Other means of stabilizing emulsions entail the use of emulsifiers that may be incorporated into either phase of the emulsion.
- Emulsifiers may broadly be classified into four categories: synthetic surfactants, naturally occurring emulsifiers, absorption bases, and finely dispersed solids (Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199).
- Synthetic surfactants also known as surface active agents, have found wide applicability in the formulation of emulsions and have been reviewed in the literature (Rieger, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 285; Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., 1988, volume 1, p. 199).
- Surfactants are typically amphiphilic and comprise a hydrophilic and a hydrophobic portion.
- HLB hydrophile/lipophile balance
- surfactants may be classified into different classes based on the nature of the hydrophilic group: nonionic, anionic, cationic and amphoteric (Rieger, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 285).
- Naturally occurring emulsifiers used in emulsion formulations include lanolin, beeswax, phosphatides, lecithin and acacia.
- Absorption bases possess hydrophilic properties such that they can soak up water to form w/o emulsions yet retain their semisolid consistencies, such as anhydrous lanolin and hydrophilic petrolatum. Finely divided solids have also been used as good emulsifiers especially in combination with surfactants and in viscous preparations.
- polar inorganic solids such as heavy metal hydroxides, nonswelling clays such as bentonite, attapulgite, hectorite, kaolin, montmorillonite, colloidal aluminum silicate and colloidal magnesium aluminum silicate, pigments and nonpolar solids such as carbon or glyceryl tristearate.
- non-emulsifying materials is also included in emulsion formulations and contributes to the properties of emulsions. These include fats, oils, waxes, fatty acids, fatty alcohols, fatty esters, humectants, hydrophilic colloids, preservatives and antioxidants (Block, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 335; Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199).
- Hydrophilic colloids or hydrocolloids include naturally occurring gums and synthetic polymers such as polysaccharides (for example, acacia, agar, alginic acid, carrageenan, guar gum, karaya gum, and tragacanth), cellulose derivatives (for example, carboxymethylcellulose and carboxypropylcellulose), and synthetic polymers (for example, carbomers, cellulose ethers, and carboxyvinyl polymers). These disperse or swell in water to form colloidal solutions that stabilize emulsions by forming strong interfacial films around the dispersed-phase droplets and by increasing the viscosity of the external phase.
- polysaccharides for example, acacia, agar, alginic acid, carrageenan, guar gum, karaya gum, and tragacanth
- cellulose derivatives for example, carboxymethylcellulose and carboxypropylcellulose
- synthetic polymers for example, carbomers, cellulose ethers, and
- emulsions often contain a number of ingredients such as carbohydrates, proteins, sterols and phosphatides that may readily support the growth of microbes, these formulations often incorporate preservatives.
- preservatives included in emulsion formulations include methyl paraben, propyl paraben, quaternary ammonium salts, benzalkonium chloride, esters of p-hydroxybenzoic acid, and boric acid.
- Antioxidants are also commonly added to emulsion formulations to prevent deterioration of the formulation.
- Antioxidants used may be free radical scavengers such as tocopherols, alkyl gallates, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, or reducing agents such as ascorbic acid and sodium metabisulfite, and antioxidant synergists such as citric acid, tartaric acid, and lecithin.
- free radical scavengers such as tocopherols, alkyl gallates, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, or reducing agents such as ascorbic acid and sodium metabisulfite
- antioxidant synergists such as citric acid, tartaric acid, and lecithin.
- Emulsion formulations for oral delivery have been very widely used because of ease of formulation, as well as efficacy from an absorption and bioavailability standpoint (Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p.
- the compositions of FLiPs are formulated as microemulsions.
- a microemulsion may be defined as a system of water, oil and amphiphile which is a single optically isotropic and thermodynamically stable liquid solution (Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 245).
- microemulsions are systems that are prepared by first dispersing an oil in an aqueous surfactant solution and then adding a sufficient amount of a fourth component, generally an intermediate chain-length alcohol to form a transparent system.
- microemulsions have also been described as thermodynamically stable, isotropically clear dispersions of two immiscible liquids that are stabilized by interfacial films of surface-active molecules (Leung and Shah, in: Controlled Release of Drugs: Polymers and Aggregate Systems, Rosoff, M., Ed., 1989, VCH Publishers, New York, pages 185-215).
- Microemulsions commonly are prepared via a combination of three to five components that include oil, water, surfactant, cosurfactant and electrolyte.
- microemulsion is of the water-in-oil (w/o) or an oil-in-water (o/w) type is dependent on the properties of the oil and surfactant used and on the structure and geometric packing of the polar heads and hydrocarbon tails of the surfactant molecules (Schott, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1985, p. 271).
- microemulsions offer the advantage of solubilizing water-insoluble drugs in a formulation of thermodynamically stable droplets that are formed spontaneously.
- Surfactants used in the preparation of microemulsions include, but are not limited to, ionic surfactants, non-ionic surfactants, Brij 96, polyoxyethylene oleyl ethers, polyglycerol fatty acid esters, tetraglycerol monolaurate (ML310), tetraglycerol monooleate (MO310), hexaglycerol monooleate (PO310), hexaglycerol pentaoleate (PO500), decaglycerol monocaprate (MCA750), decaglycerol monooleate (MO750), decaglycerol sesquioleate (SO750), decaglycerol decaoleate (DAO750), alone or in combination with cosurfactants.
- ML310 tetraglycerol monolaurate
- MO310 tetraglycerol monooleate
- PO310 hexaglycerol monooleate
- PO500 hexaglyce
- the cosurfactant usually a short-chain alcohol such as ethanol, 1-propanol, and 1-butanol, serves to increase the interfacial fluidity by penetrating into the surfactant film and consequently creating a disordered film because of the void space generated among surfactant molecules.
- Microemulsions may, however, be prepared without the use of cosurfactants and alcohol-free self-emulsifying microemulsion systems are known in the art.
- the aqueous phase may typically be, but is not limited to, water, an aqueous solution of the drug, glycerol, PEG300, PEG400, polyglycerols, propylene glycols, and derivatives of ethylene glycol.
- the oil phase may include, but is not limited to, materials such as Captex 300, Captex 355, Capmul MCM, fatty acid esters, medium chain (C8-C12) mono, di, and tri-glycerides, polyoxyethylated glyceryl fatty acid esters, fatty alcohols, polyglycolized glycerides, saturated polyglycolized C8-C10 glycerides, vegetable oils and silicone oil.
- materials such as Captex 300, Captex 355, Capmul MCM, fatty acid esters, medium chain (C8-C12) mono, di, and tri-glycerides, polyoxyethylated glyceryl fatty acid esters, fatty alcohols, polyglycolized glycerides, saturated polyglycolized C8-C10 glycerides, vegetable oils and silicone oil.
- Microemulsions are particularly of interest from the standpoint of drug solubilization and the enhanced absorption of drugs.
- Lipid based microemulsions both o/w and w/o have been proposed to enhance the oral bioavailability of drugs, including peptides (Constantinides et al., Pharmaceutical Research, 1994, 11, 1385-1390; Ritschel, Meth. Find. Exp. Clin. Pharmacol., 1993, 13, 205).
- Microemulsions afford advantages of improved drug solubilization, protection of drug from enzymatic hydrolysis, possible enhancement of drug absorption due to surfactant-induced alterations in membrane fluidity and permeability, ease of preparation, ease of oral administration over solid dosage forms, improved clinical potency, and decreased toxicity (Constantinides et al., Pharmaceutical Research, 1994, 11, 1385; Ho et al., J. Pharm. Sci., 1996, 85, 138-143). Often microemulsions may form spontaneously when their components are brought together at ambient temperature. This may be particularly advantageous when formulating thermolabile drugs, peptides or dsRNAs. Microemulsions have also been effective in the transdermal delivery of active components in both cosmetic and pharmaceutical applications.
- microemulsion compositions and formulations of the present invention will facilitate the increased systemic absorption of dsRNAs and nucleic acids from the gastrointestinal tract, as well as improve the local cellular uptake of dsRNAs and nucleic acids.
- Microemulsions of the present invention may also contain additional components and additives such as sorbitan monostearate (Grill 3), Labrasol, and penetration enhancers to improve the properties of the formulation and to enhance the absorption of the dsRNAs and nucleic acids of the present invention.
- Penetration enhancers used in the microemulsions of the present invention may be classified as belonging to one of five broad categories—surfactants, fatty acids, bile salts, chelating agents, and non-chelating non-surfactants (Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, p. 92). Each of these classes has been discussed above.
- HDL high-density lipoproteins
- LDL low density lipoproteins
- the invention provides formulated lipid particles (FLiPs) comprising (a) an oligonucleotide of the invention, e.g., antisense, antagomir, aptamer, ribozyme and an RNAi agent, where said oligonucleotide has been conjugated to a lipophile and (b) at least one lipid component, for example an emulsion, liposome, isolated lipoprotein, reconstituted lipoprotein or phospholipid, to which the conjugated oligonucleotide has been aggregated, admixed or associated.
- FLiPs formulated lipid particles
- the stoichiometry of oligonucleotide to the lipid component may be 1:1. Alternatively the stoichiometry may be 1:many, many:1 or many:many, where many is greater than 2.
- the FLiP may comprise triacylglycerol, phospholipids, glycerol and one or several lipid-binding proteins aggregated, admixed or associated via a lipophilic linker molecule with a single- or double-stranded oligonucleotide, wherein said FLiP has an affinity to heart, lung and/or muscle tissue.
- the affinity to heart, lung and/or muscle tissue is very specific.
- These FLiPs may therefore serve as carrier for oligonucleotides. Due to their affinity to heart, lung and muscle cells, they may specifically transport the oligonucleotides to these tissues. Therefore, the FLiPs according to the present invention may be used for many severe heart, lung and muscle diseases, for example myocarditis, ischemic heart disease, myopathies, cardiomyopathies, metabolic diseases, rhabdomyosarcomas.
- Intralipid is a brand name for the first safe fat emulsion for human use.
- Intralipid® 20% is a sterile, non-pyrogenic fat emulsion prepared for intravenous administration as a source of calories and essential fatty acids. It is made up of 20% soybean oil, 1.2% egg yolk phospholipids, 2.25% glycerin, and water for injection.
- Intralipid® 10% is made up of 10% soybean oil, 1.2% egg yolk phospholipids, 2.25% glycerin, and water for injection. It is further within the present invention that other suitable oils, such as saflower oil, may serve to produce the lipid component of the FLiP.
- a FLiP comprising a lipid particle comprising 15-25% triacylglycerol, about 1-2% phospholipids and 2-3% glycerol, and one or several lipid-binding proteins.
- the lipid particle comprises about 20% triacylglycerol, about 1.2% phospholipids and about 2.25% glycerol, which corresponds to the total composition of Intralipid, and one or several lipid-binding proteins.
- lipoproteins for example isolated lipoproteins or more preferably reconstituted lipoprotieins.
- Liporoteins are particles that contain both proteins and lipids. The lipids or their derivatives may be covalently or non-covalently bound to the proteins.
- Exemplary lipoproteins include chylomicrons, VLDL (Very Low Density Lipoproteins), IDL (Intermediate Density Lipoproteins), LDL (Low Density Lipoproteins) and HDL (High Density Lipoproteins).
- the most frequently used lipid for reconstitution is phosphatidyl choline, extracted either from eggs or soybeans.
- Other phospholipids are also used, also lipids such as triglycerides or cholesterol.
- the lipids are first dissolved in an organic solvent, which is subsequently evaporated under nitrogen. In this method the lipid is bound in a thin film to a glass wall. Afterwards the apolipoproteins and a detergent, normally sodium cholate, are added and mixed. The added sodium cholate causes a dispersion of the lipid.
- hydrophobic adsorbents are available which can adsorb detergents (Bio-Beads SM-2, Bio Rad; Amberlite XAD-2, Rohm & Haas) (E. A. Bonomo, J. B. Swaney, J. Lipid Res., 29, 380-384 (1988)), or the detergent can be removed by means of gel chromatography (Sephadex G-25, Pharmacia).
- Lipoproteins can also be produced without detergents, for example through incubation of an aqueous suspension of a suitable lipid with apolipoproteins, the addition of lipid which was dissolved in an organic solvent, to apolipoproteins, with or without additional heating of this mixture, or through treatment of an apoA-I-lipid-mixture with ultrasound.
- these methods starting, for example, with apoA-I and phosphatidyl choline, disk-shaped particles can be obtained which correspond to lipoproteins in their nascent state. Normally, following the incubation, unbound apolipoproteins and free lipid are separated by means of centrifugation or gel chromatography in order to isolate the homogeneous, reconstituted lipoproteins particles.
- Phospholipids used for reconstituted lipoproteins can be of natural origin, such as egg yolk or soybean phospholipids, or synthetic or semisynthetic origin.
- the phospholipids can be partially purified or fractionated to comprise pure fractions or mixtures of phosphatidyl cholines, phosphatidyl ethanolamines, phosphatidyl inositols, phosphatidic acids, phosphatidyl serines, sphingomyelin or phosphatidyl glycerols.
- phospholipids with defined fatty acid radicals such as dimyristoyl phosphatidyl choline (DMPC), dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE), palmitoyloleoylphosphatidylcholine (POPC), egg phosphatidylcholine (EPC), distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), dioleoylphosphatidylcholine (DOPC), dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine (DPPC), dioleoylphosphatidylglycerol (DOPG), dipalmitoylphosphatidylglycerol (DPPG), -phosphatidylethanolamine (POPE), dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-cyclohexane-1-carboxylate (DOPE-mal), and combinations thereof, and the like phosphatidyl choline (DMPC), dioleoylphosphatid
- phospholipids suitable for reconstitution with lipoproteins include, e.g., phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylglycerol, lecithin, b, g-dipalmitoyl-a-lecithin, sphingomyelin, phosphatidylserine, phosphatidic acid, N-(2,3-di(9-(Z)-octadecenyloxy))-prop-1-yl-N,N,N-trimethylammonium chloride, phosphatidylethanolamine, lysolecithin, lysophosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylinositol, cephalin, cardiolipin, cerebrosides, dicetylphosphate, dioleoylphosphatidylcholine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylglycerol, dioleoylphosphatidyl
- Non-phosphorus containing lipids may also be used in the liposomes of the compositions of the present invention. These include, e.g., stearylamine, docecylamine, acetyl palmitate, fatty acid amides, and the like.
- the lipoprotein may comprise, in various amounts at least one nonpolar component which can be selected among pharmaceutical acceptable oils (triglycerides) exemplified by the commonly employed vegetabilic oils such as soybean oil, safflower oil, olive oil, sesame oil, borage oil, castor oil and cottonseed oil or oils from other sources like mineral oils or marine oils including hydrogenated and/or fractionated triglycerides from such sources. Also medium chain triglycerides (MCT-oils, e.g.
- Miglyol® and various synthetic or semisynthetic mono-, di- or triglycerides, such as the defined nonpolar lipids disclosed in WO 92/05571 may be used in the present invention as well as acetylated monoglycerides, or alkyl esters of fatty acids, such isopropyl myristate, ethyl oleate (see EP 0 353 267) or fatty acid alcohols, such as oleyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol or various nonpolar derivatives of cholesterol, such as cholesterol esters.
- acetylated monoglycerides or alkyl esters of fatty acids, such isopropyl myristate, ethyl oleate (see EP 0 353 267) or fatty acid alcohols, such as oleyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol or various nonpolar derivatives of cholesterol, such as cholesterol esters.
- One or more complementary surface active agent can be added to the reconstituted lipoproteins, for example as complements to the characteristics of amphiphilic agent or to improve its lipid particle stabilizing capacity or enable an improved solubilization of the protein.
- Such complementary agents can be pharmaceutically acceptable non-ionic surfactants which preferably are alkylene oxide derivatives of an organic compound which contains one or more hydroxylic groups.
- non-ionic surfactants which preferably are alkylene oxide derivatives of an organic compound which contains one or more hydroxylic groups.
- ethoxylated and/or propoxylated alcohol or ester compounds or mixtures thereof are commonly available and are well known as such complements to those skilled in the art.
- esters of sorbitol and fatty acids such as sorbitan monopalmitate or sorbitan monopalmitate, oily sucrose esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitane fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitol fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene sterol ethers, polyoxyethylene-polypropoxy alkyl ethers, block polymers and cethyl ether, as well as polyoxyethylene castor oil or hydrogenated castor oil derivatives and polyglycerine fatty acid esters.
- esters of sorbitol and fatty acids such as sorbitan monopalmitate or sorbitan monopalmitate, oily sucrose esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitane fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitol fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene sterol ethers, polyoxyethylene-pol
- Suitable non-ionic surfactants include, but are not limited to various grades of Pluronic®, Poloxamer®, Span®, Tween®, Polysorbate®, Tyloxapol®, Emulphor® or Cremophor® and the like.
- the complementary surface active agents may also be of an ionic nature, such as bile duct agents, cholic acid or deoxycholic their salts and derivatives or free fatty acids, such as oleic acid, linoleic acid and others.
- Other ionic surface active agents are found among cationic lipids like C10-C24: alkylamines or alkanolamine and cationic cholesterol esters.
- the oligonucleotide component is aggregated, associated or admixed with the lipid components via a lipophilic moiety.
- This aggregation, association or admixture may be at the surface of the final FLiP formulation.
- some integration of any of a portion or all of the lipophilic moiety may occur, extending into the lipid particle.
- Any lipophilic linker molecule that is able to bind oligonucleotides to lipids can be chosen. Examples include pyrrolidine and hydroxyprolinol.
- the process for making the lipid particles comprises the steps of:
- lipophile e.g. cholesterol
- the FLiP can be made by first isolating the lipid particles comprising triacylglycerol, phospholipids, glycerol and one or several lipid-binding proteins and then mixing the isolated particles with >2-fold molar excess of lipophile (e.g. cholesterol) conjugated oligonucleotide. The steps of fractionating and selecting the particles are deleted by this alternative process for making the FLiPs.
- lipophile e.g. cholesterol conjugated oligonucleotide
- pharmacologically acceptable components can be added to the FLiPs when desired, such as antioxidants (exemplified by alpha-tocopherol) and solubilization adjuvants (exemplified by benzylalcohol).
- release characteristics of a formulation of the present invention depend on the encapsulating material, the concentration of encapsulated drug, and the presence of release modifiers.
- release can be manipulated to be pH dependent, for example, using a pH sensitive coating that releases only at a low pH, as in the stomach, or a higher pH, as in the intestine.
- An enteric coating can be used to prevent release from occurring until after passage through the stomach.
- Multiple coatings or mixtures of cyanamide encapsulated in different materials can be used to obtain an initial release in the stomach, followed by later release in the intestine.
- Release can also be manipulated by inclusion of salts or pore forming agents, which can increase water uptake or release of drug by diffusion from the capsule.
- Excipients which modify the solubility of the drug can also be used to control the release rate.
- Agents which enhance degradation of the matrix or release from the matrix can also be incorporated. They can be added to the drug, added as a separate phase (i.e., as particulates), or can be co-dissolved in the polymer phase depending on the compound. In all cases the amount should be between 0.1 and thirty percent (w/w polymer).
- Types of degradation enhancers include inorganic salts such as ammonium sulfate and ammonium chloride, organic acids such as citric acid, benzoic acid, and ascorbic acid, inorganic bases such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, zinc carbonate, and zinc hydroxide, and organic bases such as protamine sulfate, spermine, choline, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine and surfactants such as Tween® and Pluronic®.
- Pore forming agents which add microstructure to the matrices i.e., water soluble compounds such as inorganic salts and sugars
- the range should be between one and thirty percent (w/w polymer).
- Uptake can also be manipulated by altering residence time of the particles in the gut. This can be achieved, for example, by coating the particle with, or selecting as the encapsulating material, a mucosal adhesive polymer.
- a mucosal adhesive polymer examples include most polymers with free carboxyl groups, such as chitosan, celluloses, and especially polyacrylates (as used herein, polyacrylates refers to polymers including acrylate groups and modified acrylate groups such as cyanoacrylates and methacrylates).
- Hydrophilic polymers suitable for use in the formulations of the present invention are those which are readily water-soluble, can be covalently attached to a vesicle-forming lipid, and which are tolerated in vivo without toxic effects (i.e., are biocompatible).
- Suitable polymers include polyethylene glycol (PEG), polylactic (also termed polylactide), polyglycolic acid (also termed polyglycolide), a polylactic-polyglycolic acid copolymer, and polyvinyl alcohol.
- PEG polyethylene glycol
- polylactic also termed polylactide
- polyglycolic acid also termed polyglycolide
- a polylactic-polyglycolic acid copolymer a polyvinyl alcohol.
- Preferred polymers are those having a molecular weight of from about 100 or 120 daltons up to about 5,000 or 10,000 daltons, and more preferably from about 300 daltons to about 5,000 daltons.
- the polymer is polyethyleneglycol having a molecular weight of from about 100 to about 5,000 daltons, and more preferably having a molecular weight of from about 300 to about 5,000 daltons.
- the polymer is polyethyleneglycol of 750 daltons (PEG(750)).
- Polymers may also be defined by the number of monomers therein; a preferred embodiment of the present invention utilizes polymers of at least about three monomers, such PEG polymers consisting of three monomers (approximately 150 daltons).
- hydrophilic polymers which may be suitable for use in the present invention include polyvinylpyrrolidone, polymethoxazoline, polyethyloxazoline, polyhydroxypropyl methacrylamide, polymethacrylamide, polydimethylacrylamide, and derivatized celluloses such as hydroxymethylcellulose or hydroxyethylcellulose.
- a formulation of the present invention comprises a biocompatible polymer selected from the group consisting of polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polyvinyl polymers, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes and co-polymers thereof, celluloses, polypropylene, polyethylenes, polystyrene, polymers of lactic acid and glycolic acid, polyanhydrides, poly(ortho)esters, poly(butic acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(lactide-co-caprolactone), polysaccharides, proteins, polyhyaluronic acids, polycyanoacrylates, and blends, mixtures, or copolymers thereof.
- a biocompatible polymer selected from the group consisting of polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polyvinyl polymers, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes and
- the above discussed formulation may also include one or more surfactants.
- Surfactants find wide application in formulations such as emulsions (including microemulsions) and liposomes. The use of surfactants in drug products, formulations and in emulsions has been reviewed (Rieger, in “Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms,” Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., 1988, p. 285).
- Surfactants may be classified into different classes based on the nature of the hydrophilic group: nonionic, anionic, cationic and amphoteric (Rieger, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 285).
- Nonionic surfactants include, but are not limited to, nonionic esters such as ethylene glycol esters, propylene glycol esters, glyceryl esters, polyglyceryl esters, sorbitan esters, sucrose esters, and ethoxylated esters.
- nonionic esters such as ethylene glycol esters, propylene glycol esters, glyceryl esters, polyglyceryl esters, sorbitan esters, sucrose esters, and ethoxylated esters.
- Nonionic alkanolamides and ethers such as fatty alcohol ethoxylates, propoxylated alcohols, and ethoxylated/propoxylated block polymers are also included in this class.
- the polyoxyethylene surfactants are the most popular members of the nonionic surfactant class.
- Anionic surfactants include, but are not limited to, carboxylates such as soaps, acyl lactylates, acyl amides of amino acids, esters of sulfuric acid such as alkyl sulfates and ethoxylated alkyl sulfates, sulfonates such as alkyl benzene sulfonates, acyl isethionates, acyl taurates and sulfosuccinates, and phosphates.
- carboxylates such as soaps
- acyl lactylates acyl amides of amino acids
- esters of sulfuric acid such as alkyl sulfates and ethoxylated alkyl sulfates
- sulfonates such as alkyl benzene sulfonates
- acyl isethionates acyl taurates and sulfosuccinates
- phosphates The most important members of the ani
- Cationic surfactants include, but are not limited to, quaternary ammonium salts and ethoxylated amines.
- the quaternary ammonium salts are the most used members of this class.
- Amphoteric surfactants include, but are not limited to, acrylic acid derivatives, substituted alkylamides, N-alkylbetaines and phosphatides.
- a surfactant may also be selected from any suitable aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or aromatic surfactant, including but not limited to biocompatible lysophosphatidylcholines (LPCs) of varying chain lengths (for example, from about C14 to about C20).
- LPCs lysophosphatidylcholines
- Polymer-derivatized lipids such as PEG-lipids may also be utilized for micelle formation as they will act to inhibit micelle/membrane fusion, and as the addition of a polymer to surfactant molecules decreases the CMC of the surfactant and aids in micelle formation.
- surfactants with CMCs in the micromolar range; higher CMC surfactants may be utilized to prepare micelles entrapped within liposomes of the present invention, however, micelle surfactant monomers could affect liposome bilayer stability and would be a factor in designing a liposome of a desired stability.
- the formulations of the present invention employ various penetration enhancers to affect the efficient delivery of RNAi agents to the skin of animals.
- Most drugs are present in solution in both ionized and nonionized forms. However, usually only lipid soluble or lipophilic drugs readily cross cell membranes. It has been discovered that even non-lipophilic drugs may cross cell membranes if the membrane to be crossed is treated with a penetration enhancer. In addition to aiding the diffusion of non-lipophilic drugs across cell membranes, penetration enhancers also enhance the permeability of lipophilic drugs.
- the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the oligonucleotides described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents.
- compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, e.g., those targeted for buccal, sublingual, and systemic absorption, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous or epidural injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension, or sustained-release formulation; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment, or a controlled-release patch or spray applied to the skin; (4) intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam; (5) sublingually; (6) ocularly; (7) transdermally; or (8) nasally.
- oral administration for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets
- terapéuticaally-effective amount means that amount of a compound, material, or composition comprising a compound of the present invention which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect in at least a sub-population of cells in an animal at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
- phrases “pharmaceutically acceptable” is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
- pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier means a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, manufacturing aid (e.g., lubricant, talc magnesium, calcium or zinc stearate, or steric acid), or solvent encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject compound from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
- manufacturing aid e.g., lubricant, talc magnesium, calcium or zinc stearate, or steric acid
- solvent encapsulating material involved in carrying or transporting the subject compound from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
- Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient.
- materials which can serve as pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) lubricating agents, such as magnesium state, sodium lauryl sulfate and talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (1
- certain embodiments of the present compounds may contain a basic functional group, such as amino or alkylamino, and are, thus, capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable acids.
- pharmaceutically-acceptable salts refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ in the administration vehicle or the dosage form manufacturing process, or by separately reacting a purified compound of the invention in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed during subsequent purification.
- Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, napthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, and laurylsulphonate salts and the like.
- sulfate bisulfate
- phosphate nitrate
- acetate valerate
- oleate palmitate
- stearate laurate
- benzoate lactate
- phosphate tosylate
- citrate maleate
- fumarate succinate
- tartrate napthylate
- mesylate glucoheptonate
- lactobionate lactobionate
- laurylsulphonate salts and the like See, for example,
- the pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the subject compounds include the conventional nontoxic salts or quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds, e.g., from non-toxic organic or inorganic acids.
- such conventional nontoxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloride, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, palmitic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isothionic, and the like.
- the compounds of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable bases.
- pharmaceutically-acceptable salts refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can likewise be prepared in situ in the administration vehicle or the dosage form manufacturing process, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine.
- a suitable base such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine.
- Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts and the like.
- Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al., supra)
- wetting agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
- antioxidants examples include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
- water soluble antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like
- oil-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), le
- Formulations of the present invention include those suitable for oral, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal and/or parenteral administration.
- the formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
- the amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration.
- the amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally, out of one hundred percent, this amount will range from about 0.1 percent to about ninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5 percent to about 70 percent, most preferably from about 10 percent to about 30 percent.
- a formulation of the present invention comprises an excipient selected from the group consisting of cyclodextrins, celluloses, liposomes, micelle forming agents, e.g., bile acids, and polymeric carriers, e.g., polyesters and polyanhydrides; and a compound of the present invention.
- an aforementioned formulation renders orally bioavailable a compound of the present invention.
- Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association a compound of the present invention with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients.
- the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a compound of the present invention with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
- Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient.
- a compound of the present invention may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
- the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds and surfactants, such as poloxa
- pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate
- compositions may also comprise buffering agents.
- Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-shelled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
- a tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients.
- Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent.
- Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
- the tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. They may be formulated for rapid release, e.g., freeze-dried.
- compositions may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use.
- These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner.
- embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
- the active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.
- Liquid dosage forms for oral administration of the compounds of the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
- the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
- inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and
- the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
- adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
- Suspensions in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
- suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
- Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more compounds of the invention with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
- suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
- Formulations of the present invention which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
- Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants.
- the active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
- the ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
- excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
- Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to a compound of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances.
- Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
- Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound of the present invention to the body.
- dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the compound in the proper medium.
- Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
- Formulations for ocular administration can include mucomimetics such as hyaluronic acid, chondroitin sulfate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose or poly(vinyl alcohol), preservatives such as sorbic acid, EDTA or benzylchronium chloride, and the usual quantities of diluents and/or carriers.
- mucomimetics such as hyaluronic acid, chondroitin sulfate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose or poly(vinyl alcohol), preservatives such as sorbic acid, EDTA or benzylchronium chloride, and the usual quantities of diluents and/or carriers.
- compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more compounds of the invention in combination with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain sugars, alcohols, antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.
- aqueous and nonaqueous carriers examples include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate.
- polyols such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like
- vegetable oils such as olive oil
- injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
- Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
- compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms upon the subject compounds may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
- the absorption of the drug in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally-administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
- Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the subject compounds in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue.
- the compounds of the present invention are administered as pharmaceuticals, to humans and animals, they can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99% (more preferably, 10 to 30%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
- the preparations of the present invention may be given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are of course given in forms suitable for each administration route. For example, they are administered in tablets or capsule form, by injection, inhalation, eye lotion, ointment, suppository, etc. administration by injection, infusion or inhalation; topical by lotion or ointment; and rectal by suppositories. Oral administrations are preferred.
- parenteral administration and “administered parenterally” as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrasternal injection and infusion.
- systemic administration means the administration of a compound, drug or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes, for example, subcutaneous administration.
- These compounds may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, intracisternally and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually.
- the compounds of the present invention which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically-acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods known to those of skill in the art.
- Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
- the selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the particular compound of the present invention employed, or the ester, salt or amide thereof, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion or metabolism of the particular compound being employed, the rate and extent of absorption, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compound employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
- a physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition required.
- the physician or veterinarian could start doses of the compounds of the invention employed in the pharmaceutical composition at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved.
- a suitable daily dose of a compound of the invention will be that amount of the compound which is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above. Generally, oral, intravenous, intracerebroventricular and subcutaneous doses of the compounds of this invention for a patient, when used for the indicated analgesic effects, will range from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day.
- the effective daily dose of the active compound may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms. Preferred dosing is one administration per day.
- composition While it is possible for a compound of the present invention to be administered alone, it is preferable to administer the compound as a pharmaceutical formulation (composition).
- the compounds according to the invention may be formulated for administration in any convenient way for use in human or veterinary medicine, by analogy with other pharmaceuticals.
- the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the subject compounds, as described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents.
- the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin, lungs, or mucous membranes; or (4) intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam; (5) sublingually or buccally; (6)
- treatment is intended to encompass also prophylaxis, therapy and cure.
- the patient receiving this treatment is any animal in need, including primates, in particular humans, and other mammals such as equines, cattle, swine and sheep; and poultry and pets in general.
- the compound of the invention can be administered as such or in admixtures with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and can also be administered in conjunction with antimicrobial agents such as penicillins, cephalosporins, aminoglycosides and glycopeptides.
- Conjunctive therapy thus includes sequential, simultaneous and separate administration of the active compound in a way that the therapeutical effects of the first administered one is not entirely disappeared when the subsequent is administered.
- the addition of the active compound of the invention to animal feed is preferably accomplished by preparing an appropriate feed premix containing the active compound in an effective amount and incorporating the premix into the complete ration.
- nucleoside refers to a compound comprising a heterocyclic base moiety and a sugar moiety. Nucleosides include, but are not limited to, naturally occurring nucleosides (as found in DNA and RNA), abasic nucleosides, modified nucleosides, and sugar-modified nucleosides. Nucleosides may be modified with any of a variety of substituents.
- sugar moiety means a natural (furanosyl), a modified sugar moiety or a sugar surrogate.
- modified sugar moiety means a chemically-modified furanosyl sugar or a non-furanosyl sugar moiety. Also, embraced by this term are furanosyl sugar analogs and derivatives including bicyclic sugars, tetrahydropyrans, morpholinos, 2′-modified sugars, 4′-modified sugars, 5′-modified sugars, and 4′-substituted sugars.
- sugar surrogate refers to a structure that is capable of replacing the furanose ring of a naturally occurring nucleoside.
- sugar surrogates are non-furanose (or 4′-substituted furanose) rings or ring systems or open systems.
- Such structures include simple changes relative to the natural furanose ring, such as a six membered ring or may be more complicated as is the case with the non-ring system used in peptide nucleic acid.
- Sugar surrogates includes without limitation morpholinos and cyclohexenyls and cyclohexitols. In most nucleosides having a sugar surrogate group the heterocyclic base moiety is generally maintained to permit hybridization.
- nucleobase refers to the heterocyclic base portion of a nucleoside. Nucleobases may be naturally occurring or may be modified and therefore include, but are not limited to adenine, cytosine, guanidine, uracil, thymidine and analogues thereof. In certain embodiments, a nucleobase may comprise any atom or group of atoms capable of hydrogen bonding to a base of another nucleic acid.
- duplex includes a region of complementarity between two regions of two or more polynucleotides that comprise separate strands, such as a sense strand and an antisense strand, or between two regions of a single contiguous polynucleotide.
- first 5′ terminal nucleotide includes first 5′ terminal antisense nucleotides and first 5′ terminal antisense nucleotides.
- First 5′ terminal antisense nucleotide refers to the nucleotide of the antisense strand that is located at the 5′ most position of that strand with respect to the bases of the antisense strand that have corresponding complementary bases on the sense strand. Thus, in a double stranded polynucleotide that is made of two separate strands, it refers to the 5′ most base other than bases that are part of any 5′ overhang on the antisense strand.
- first 5′ terminal antisense nucleotide When the first 5′ terminal antisense nucleotide is part of a hairpin molecule, the term “terminal” refers to the 5′ most relative position within the antisense region and thus is the 5′′ most nucleotide of the antisense region.
- first 5′′ terminal sense nucleotide is defined in reference to the sense nucleotide. In molecules comprising two separate strands, it refers to the nucleotide of the sense strand that is located at the 5′ most position of that strand with respect to the bases of the sense strand that have corresponding complementary bases on the antisense strand. Thus, in a double stranded polynucleotide that is made of two separate strands, it is the 5′ most base other than bases that are part of any 5′ overhang on the sense strand.
- an RNAi agent is “sufficiently complementary” to a target sequence, e.g., a target mRNA, such that the RNAi agent silences production of protein encoded by the target mRNA.
- the RNAi agent is “exactly complementary” to a target sequence, e.g., the target RNA and the RNAi agent anneal, for example to form a hybrid made exclusively of Watson-Crick base pairs in the region of exact complementarity.
- a “sufficiently complementary” RNAi agent can include an internal region (e.g., of at least 10 nucleotides) that is exactly complementary to a target sequence.
- the RNAi agent specifically discriminates a single-nucleotide difference. In this case, the RNAi agent only mediates RNAi if exact complementary is found in the region (e.g., within 7 nucleotides of) the single-nucleotide difference.
- phrases “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent” includes compositions that facilitate the introduction of nucleic acid therapeutics such as siRNA, dsRNA, dsDNA, shRNA, microRNA, antimicroRNA, antagomir, antimir, antisense, aptamer or dsRNA/DNA hybrids into a cell and includes but is not limited to solvents or dispersants, coatings, anti-infective agents, isotonic agents, and agents that mediate absorption time or release of the inventive polynucleotides and double stranded polynucleotides.
- pharmaceutically acceptable includes approval by a regulatory agency of a government, for example, the U.S. federal government, a non-U.S. government, or a U.S. state government, or inclusion in a listing in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or any other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, including in humans.
- halo refers to any radical of fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
- aliphatic refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon radical containing up to twenty four carbon atoms wherein the saturation between any two carbon atoms is a single, double or triple bond.
- An aliphatic group preferably contains from 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, more typically from 1 to about 12 carbon atoms with from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms being more preferred.
- the straight or branched chain of an aliphatic group may be interrupted with one or more heteroatoms that include nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus.
- Such aliphatic groups interrupted by heteroatoms include without limitation polyalkoxys, such as polyalkylene glycols, polyamines, and polyimines. Aliphatic groups as used herein may optionally include further substitutent groups.
- acyl refers to hydrogen, alkyl, partially saturated or fully saturated cycloalkyl, partially saturated or fully saturated heterocycle, aryl, and heteroaryl substituted carbonyl groups.
- acyl includes groups such as (Ci-C6)alkanoyl (e.g., formyl, acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, valeryl, caproyl, t-butylacetyl, etc.), (C3-Ce)cycloalkylcarbonyl (e.g., cyclopropylcarbonyl, cyclobutylcarbonyl, cyclopentylcarbonyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl, etc.), heterocyclic carbonyl (e.g., pyrrolidinylcarbonyl, pyrrolid-2-one-S-carbonyl, piperidinylcarbonyl, piperazinylcarbonyl, tetrahydrofuranylcarbonyl, etc.),
- alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl and heteroaryl portion of the acyl group may be any one of the groups described in the respective definitions.
- the acyl group may be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents (typically, one to three substituents) independently selected from the group of substituents listed below in the definition for “substituted” or the alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl and heteroaryl portion of the acyl group may be substituted as described above in the preferred and more preferred list of substituents, respectively.
- chemical moieties are defined and referred to throughout can be univalent chemical moieties (e.g., alkyl, aryl, etc.) or multivalent moieties under the appropriate structural circumstances clear to those skilled in the art.
- an “alkyl” moiety can be referred to a monovalent radical (e.g.
- a bivalent linking moiety can be “alkyl,” in which case those skilled in the art will understand the alkyl to be a divalent radical (e.g., —CH 2 —CH 2 —), which is equivalent to the term “alkylene.”
- divalent moieties are required and are stated as being “alkoxy”, “alkylamino”, “aryloxy”, “alkylthio”, “aryl”, “heteroaryl”, “heterocyclic”, “alkyl” “alkenyl”, “alkynyl”, “aliphatic”, or “cycloalkyl”
- alkoxy”, “alkylamino”, “aryloxy”, “alkylthio”, “aryl”, “heteroaryl”, “heterocyclic”, “alkyl”, “alkenyl”, “alkynyl”, “aliphatic”, or “cycloalkyl” refer to the terms
- alkyl refers to a saturated non-aromatic hydrocarbon chain. Alkyls may be a straight chain or branched chain and contain containing the indicated number of carbon atoms For example, C 1 -C 10 indicates that the group may have from 1 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
- alkenyl refers to a non-aromatic hydrocarbon chain containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyls may be a straight chain or branched chain, containing the indicated number of carbon atoms For example, C 2 -C 10 indicates that the group may have from 2 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
- alkynyl refers to a non-aromatic hydrocarbon chain containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. Alkynyls may be a straight chain or branched chain, containing the indicated number of carbon atoms For example, C 2 -C 10 indicates that the group may have from 2 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
- heteroalkyl refers to a group comprising an alkyl and at least one heteroatom.
- the heteroatom is selected from O, S, and N.
- Certain heteroalkyls are acylalkyls, in which one or more heteroatoms are within the alkyl chain.
- Certain heteroalkyls are non-acylalkyl heteroalkyls, in which the heteroatom is not within the alkyl chain. Examples of heteroalkyls include, but are not limited to: CH 3 C( ⁇ )CH 2 —, CH 3 OCH 2 CH 2 —, CH 3 NHCH 2 —, CH 3 SHCH 2 —, and the like.
- heteroalkenyl and “heteroalkynyl” refer to groups comprising an alkenyl or alkynyl respectively and at least heteroatom.
- alkoxy refers to an —O-alkyl radical.
- alkylene refers to a divalent alkyl (i.e., —R—).
- alkylenedioxo refers to a divalent species of the structure —O—R—O—, in which R represents an alkylene.
- aminoalkyl refers to an alkyl substituted with an amino.
- mercapto refers to an —SH radical.
- thioalkoxy refers to an —S— alkyl radical.
- aryl refers to a 6-carbon monocyclic or 10-carbon bicyclic aromatic ring system wherein 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms of each ring may be substituted by a substituent. Examples of aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl and the like.
- arylalkyl or the term “aralkyl” refers to alkyl substituted with an aryl.
- arylalkoxy refers to an alkoxy substituted with aryl.
- cycloalkyl as employed herein includes saturated and partially unsaturated cyclic hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 12 carbons, for example, 3 to 8 carbons, and, for example, 3 to 6 carbons, wherein the cycloalkyl group additionally may be optionally substituted.
- Cycloalkyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl.
- heteroaryl refers to an aromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms of each ring may be substituted by a substituent.
- heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, furyl or furanyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, thiophenyl or thienyl, quinolinyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, and the like.
- heteroarylalkyl or the term “heteroaralkyl” refers to an alkyl substituted with a heteroaryl.
- heteroarylalkoxy refers to an alkoxy substituted with heteroaryl.
- heterocyclyl refers to a nonaromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein 0, 1, 2 or 3 atoms of each ring may be substituted by a substituent.
- heterocyclyl groups include piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, dioxanyl, morpholinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like.
- acyl refers to an alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, or heteroarylcarbonyl substituent, any of which may be further substituted by substituents.
- substituted refers to a group “substituted” on an identified group at any atom of that group. Suitable substituents include, without limitation, halo, hydroxy, oxo, nitro, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkaryl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, acylamino, alkylcarbamoyl, arylcarbamoyl, aminoalkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, carboxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkanesulfonyl, arenesulfonyl, alkanesulfonamido, arenesulfonamido, aralkylsulfonamido, alkylcarbonyl, acyloxy, cyano, ureido or conjugate groups.
- protecting groups are used during preparation of the compounds of the invention.
- the term “protected” means that the indicated moiety has a protecting group appended thereon.
- compounds contain one or more protecting groups.
- a wide variety of protecting groups can be employed in the methods of the invention. In general, protecting groups render chemical functionalities inert to specific reaction conditions, and can be appended to and removed from such functionalities in a molecule without substantially damaging the remainder of the molecule.
- Amino-protecting groups stable to acid treatment are selectively removed with base treatment, and are used to make reactive amino groups selectively available for substitution.
- Examples of such groups are the Fmoc (E. Atherton and R. C. Sheppard in The Peptides, S. Udenfriend, J. Meienhofer, Eds., Academic Press, Orlando, 1987, volume 9, p. 1) and various substituted sulfonylethyl carbamates exemplified by the Nsc group (Samukov et al., Tetrahedron Lett. 1994, 35, 7821; Verhart and Tesser, Rec. Trav. Chim. Pays - Bas 1987, 107, 621).
- Additional amino-protecting groups include, but are not limited to, carbamate protecting groups, such as 2-trimethylsilylethoxycarbonyl (Teoc), 1-methyl-1-(4-biphenylyl)ethoxycarbonyl (Bpoc), t-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), allyloxycarbonyl (Alloc), 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc), and benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz); amide protecting groups, such as formyl, acetyl, trihaloacetyl, benzoyl, and nitrophenylacetyl; sulfonamide protecting groups, such as 2-nitrobenzenesulfonyl; and imine and cyclic imide protecting groups, such as phthalimido and dithiasuccinoyl. Equivalents of these amino-protecting groups are also encompassed by the compounds and methods of the present invention.
- resistance to a degradent can be evaluated as follows.
- a candidate modified oligonucleotide (and a control molecule, usually the unmodified form) can be exposed to degradative conditions, e.g., exposed to a milieu, which includes a degradative agent, e.g., a nuclease.
- a biological sample e.g., one that is similar to a milieu, which might be encountered, in therapeutic use, e.g., blood or a cellular fraction, e.g., a cell-free homogenate or disrupted cells.
- the candidate and control could then be evaluated for resistance to degradation by any of a number of approaches.
- the candidate and control could be labeled prior to exposure, with, e.g., a radioactive or enzymatic label, or a fluorescent label, such as Cy3 or Cy5.
- Control and oligonucleotide can be incubated with the degradative agent, and optionally a control, e.g., an inactivated, e.g., heat inactivated, degradative agent.
- a physical parameter, e.g., size, of the modified and control molecules are then determined. They can be determined by a physical method, e.g., by polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or a sizing column, to assess whether the molecule has maintained its original length, or assessed functionally. Alternatively, Northern blot analysis can be used to assay the length of an unlabeled modified molecule.
- a functional assay can also be used to evaluate the candidate agent.
- a functional assay can be applied initially or after an earlier non-functional assay, (e.g., assay for resistance to degradation) to determine if the modification alters the ability of the molecule to silence gene expression.
- a cell e.g., a mammalian cell, such as a mouse or human cell, can be co-transfected with a plasmid expressing a fluorescent protein, e.g., GFP, and a candidate oligonucleotide homologous to the transcript encoding the fluorescent protein (see, e.g., WO 00/44914).
- a modified oligonucleotide homologous to the GFP mRNA can be assayed for the ability to inhibit GFP expression by monitoring for a decrease in cell fluorescence, as compared to a control cell, in which the transfection did not include the candidate dsiRNA, e.g., controls with no agent added and/or controls with a non-modified RNA added.
- Efficacy of the candidate agent on gene expression can be assessed by comparing cell fluorescence in the presence of the modified oligonucleotide and unmodified dssiRNA compounds.
- a candidate oligonucleotide compound homologous to an endogenous mouse gene for example, a maternally expressed gene, such as c-mos
- a maternally expressed gene such as c-mos
- a phenotype of the oocyte e.g., the ability to maintain arrest in metaphase II, can be monitored as an indicator that the agent is inhibiting expression. For example, cleavage of c-mos mRNA by an oligonucleotide would cause the oocyte to exit metaphase arrest and initiate parthenogenetic development (Colledge et al.
- oligonucleotide on target RNA levels can be verified by Northern blot to assay for a decrease in the level of target mRNA, or by Western blot to assay for a decrease in the level of target protein, as compared to a negative control.
- Controls can include cells in which with no agent is added.
- kits that include a suitable container containing an oligonucleotide formulation, e.g., pharmaceutical composition.
- the kit can include informational material.
- the informational material can be descriptive, instructional, marketing or other material that relates to the methods described herein and/or the use of the compound for the methods described herein.
- the informational material describes methods for administering the formulation to a subject.
- the kit can also include a delivery device.
- the informational material can include instructions to administer the formulation in a suitable manner, e.g., in a suitable dose, dosage form, or mode of administration (e.g., a dose, dosage form, or mode of administration described herein).
- the informational material can include instructions for identifying a suitable subject, e.g., a human, e.g., an adult human.
- the informational material of the kits is not limited in its form.
- the informational material, e.g., instructions is provided in printed matter, e.g., a printed text, drawing, and/or photograph, e.g., a label or printed sheet.
- the informational material can also be provided in other formats, such as Braille, computer readable material, video recording, or audio recording.
- the informational material of the kit is a link or contact information, e.g., a physical address, email address, hyperlink, website, or telephone number, where a user of the kit can obtain substantive information about the formulation and/or its use in the methods described herein.
- the informational material can also be provided in any combination of formats.
- the individual components of the formulation can be provided in one container.
- the different components can be combined, e.g., according to instructions provided with the kit.
- the components can be combined according to a method described herein, e.g., to prepare and administer a pharmaceutical composition.
- the composition of the kit can include other ingredients, such as a solvent or buffer, a stabilizer or a preservative, and/or a second agent for treating a condition or disorder described herein.
- the other ingredients can be included in the kit, but in different compositions or containers than the formulation.
- the kit can include instructions for admixing the formulation and the other ingredients, or for using the oligonucleotide together with the other ingredients.
- the oligonucleotide formulation can be provided in any form, e.g., liquid, dried or lyophilized form. It is preferred that the formulation be substantially pure and/or sterile.
- the liquid solution preferably is an aqueous solution, with a sterile aqueous solution being preferred.
- reconstitution generally is by the addition of a suitable solvent.
- the solvent e.g., sterile water or buffer, can optionally be provided in the kit.
- the kit contains separate containers, dividers or compartments for the formulation and informational material.
- the formulation can be contained in a bottle, vial, or syringe, and the informational material can be contained in a plastic sleeve or packet.
- the separate elements of the kit are contained within a single, undivided container.
- the formulation is contained in a bottle, vial or syringe that has attached thereto the informational material in the form of a label.
- the kit includes a plurality, e.g., a pack, of individual containers, each containing one or more unit dosage forms of the formulation.
- the kit includes a plurality of syringes, ampules, foil packets, or blister packs, each containing a single unit dose of the formulation.
- the containers of the kits can be air tight and/or waterproof.
- the compounds of the inventions may be prepared by any process known to be applicable to the preparation of chemically-related compounds. Necessary starting materials may be obtained by standard procedures of organic chemistry. Alternatively necessary starting materials are obtainable by analogous procedures to those illustrated which are within the ordinary skill of a chemist.
- the compounds and processes of the present invention will be better understood in connection with the following representative synthetic schemes and examples, which are intended as an illustration only and not limiting of the scope of the invention.
- Various changes and modifications to the disclosed embodiments will be apparent to those skilled in the art and such changes and modifications including, without limitation, those relating to the chemical structures, substituents, derivatives, formulations and/or methods of the invention may be made without departing from the spirit of the invention and the scope of the appended claims.
- 1,3-Diacetoxy-2-acetoxymethoxy propane (3) Anhydrous potassium acetate (0.356 mol) is added to (0.156 mol) of 2 in DMF (250 mL), which is stirred with a mechanical stirrer. The suspension is heated to 150° C. and maintained there until the reaction is determined complete. The reaction mixture is then cooled to room temperature and diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with sat. aq. Sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer is dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated in vacuo. To give 3. It can be used in the next step without purification.
- Example 3 In Vitro RNAi Activity of Acyclic and Abasic Nucleoside Comprising Single-Stranded and Double-Stranded RNAi Agents
- P is phosphate at 5′-end
- lowercase letters a, c, g and u represents 2′-OMe A, C, G and U respectively
- ‘s’ stands for phosphorothioate
- Af, Cf, Uf and Gf represents 2′-deoxy-2′-fluoro A, C, U and G respectively.
- T is ribo-T or 5-Methyl-riboU. Structures for Aeo, Aeos, Teo, Teso, Tgn, Tgns, Y33 and Y33s are shown in FIG. 3 .
Abstract
These monomers are useful for modifying of oligonucleotides at one or more positions. This invention also relates to a method of inhibiting the expression of a target gene in a cell. The method comprises contacting the cell with an oligonucleotide having one or more of the above formula (IV′).
Description
- This application is a divisional of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/642,772, filed Oct. 22, 2012, which claims priority to PCT Application No. PCT/US2011/033598, filed Apr. 22, 2011, which claims benefit of priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/326,969, filed Apr. 22, 2010, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
- Provided herein acyclic and abasic nucleosides and oligonucleotides prepared therefrom.
- Oligonucleotides and their analogs have been developed for various uses in molecular biology, including use as probes, primers, linkers, adapters, and gene fragments. In a number of these applications, the oligonucleotides specifically hybridize to a target nucleic acid.
- In certain instances, chemical modifications have been introduced into oligonucleotides to increase their usefulness in diagnostics, as research reagents and as therapeutic entities. Such modifications include those designed for a variety of purposes, for example: to increase binding to a target nucleic acid (i.e., increase their melting temperature, Tm), to assist in identification of the oligonucleotide or an oligonucleotide-target complex, to increase cell penetration, to stabilize against nucleases and other enzymes that degrade or interfere with the structure or activity of the oligonucleotide, to provide a mode of disruption (a terminating event) once sequence-specifically bound to a target, and to improve the pharmacokinetic properties of the oligonucleotide.
- In one aspect, the invention provides acyclic and abasic nucleosides having the structure of formula (I), formula (II), formula (III) or isomers thereof. These monomers are useful for modifying of oligonucleotides at one or more positions.
- In another aspect, the invention provides oligonucleotides comprising conformationally locked dinucleotide monomers having the structure of formula (IV)-formula (VI), or isomers thereof. The said oligonucleotides can be single-stranded RNAi agent (single-stranded siRNA), double-stranded RNAi agent (double-stranded siRNA), micro RNA, antimicroRNA, aptamer, ribozyme, decoy oligonucleotide, triplex forming oligonucleotide, U1 adaptor, or antisense oligonucleotides. In some embodiments, the invention provides single-stranded and double-stranded oligonucleotides that cleave a target RNA sequence by a RISC mediated pathway.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides methods of inhibiting the expression of a target gene in cell, the method comprising: contacting a cell with an oligonucleotide described herein.
-
FIG. 1 shows the in vitro activity of N1, internal and 3′-end acyclic GNA modified ssRNA siRNA in a PTEN assay. -
FIG. 2 shows the in vitro activity of N1, internal and 3′-end acyclic GNA modified ssRNA siRNA in a PTEN assay. -
FIG. 3 shows schematic representations of some the monomers used for oligonucleotide synthesis. - In one aspect, the invention provides acyclic and abasic nucleoside monomers having the structure of formula (I), formula (II), formula (III):
- or isomers thereof, wherein: each B is independently H or a nucleobase; X1 and X2 are independently for each occurrence absent, O, S, or NR′; each of R′, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9 and R10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR13, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted; R11 and R12 are independently for each occurrence H, protecting group, a reactive phosphorus group, or solid support; R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; Z1 and Z2 are each independently O, S, N(R′), C(R9)(R10), C(R9)(OR13), C(O), or C(S); each of R′ and R″ is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; and each of m, n, p, q, r, and s is independently for each occurrence 0-10.
- When B is a nucleobase, any known nucleobase in the art can be employed. A detailed description of the nucleobases amenable to the invention is provided below in the oligonucleotide section. Thus, it is to be understood that each B is selected independently from the nucleobases disclosed herein.
- The monomers provided herein are useful for modification of oligonucleotides at one or more positions. Accordingly, in some embodiments monomers having reactive phosphorus groups are provided that are useful for forming internucleoside linkages including for example phosphodiester and phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages. Such reactive phosphorus groups are known in the art and contain phosphorus atoms in PIII or PV valence state including, but not limited to, phosphoramidite, H-phosphonate, alkyl-phosphonate, phosphate triesters and phosphorus containing chiral auxiliaries. Generally, solid phase synthesis of oligonucleotides utilizes phosphoramidites (PIII chemistry) as reactive phosphites. The intermediate phosphite compounds are subsequently oxidized to the Pv state using known methods to yield, in preferred embodiments, phosphodiester or phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages. In some embodiments, the reactive phosphorous group is a diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite group.
- In some embodiments, one of R11 and 102 is a protecting group and the other is a reactive phosphorus group or a solid support. In one preferred embodiment, R11 is a protecting group and R12 is a reactive phosphorus group or a solid support.
- Representative protecting groups are disclosed in Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Chapter 2, 2d ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991; Oligonucleotides And Analogues A Practical Approach, Ekstein, F. Ed., IRL Press, N.Y., 1991; and Beaucage et al. Tetrahedron 1992, 48, 2223-2311.
- Exemplary hydroxyl protecting groups include, but are not limited to acetyl, t-butyl, t-butoxymethyl, methoxymethyl, tetrahydropyranyl, 1-ethoxyethyl, 1-(2-chloroethoxy)ethyl, 2-trimethylsilylethyl, p-chlorophenyl, 2,4-dinitrophenyl, benzyl, benzoyl, p-phenylbenzoyl, 2,6-dichlorobenzyl, diphenylmethyl, p-nitrobenzyl, triphenylmethyl (trityl), 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl, trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl, triphenylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl, benzoylformate, chloroacetyl, trichloroacetyl, trifluoroacetyl, pivaloyl, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbonate, mesylate, tosylate, triflate, trityl, monomethoxytrityl, dimethoxytrityl, trimethoxytrityl, 9-phenylxanthine-9-yl (Pixyl) or 9-(p-methoxyphenyl)xanthine-9-yl (MOX). In a preferred embodiment, each of the hydroxyl protecting groups is, independently, acetyl, benzyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl or 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl. In some embodiments, the hydroxyl protecting group is selected from the group consisting of trityl, monomethoxytrityl and 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl group.
- In some embodiments, X1 and X2 are each independently O or S.
- In some embodiments, the monomer of formula (I) is:
- wherein: each B is independently H or a nucleobase; each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9 and R10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR13, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted; R11 and R12 are independently for each occurrence H, protecting group, a reactive phosphorus group, or solid support; R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; Z1 and Z2 are each independently O, S, N(R′), C(R9)(R10), C(R9)(OR13), C(O), or C(S); each of R′ and R″ is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; and each of m, n, p, q, r, and s is independently for each occurrence 0-10.
- In some embodiments, the monomer of formula (II) is:
- wherein: each B is independently H or a nucleobase; each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9 and R10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR13, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted; R11 and R12 are independently for each occurrence H, protecting group, a reactive phosphorus group, or solid support; R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; Z1 and Z2 are each independently O, S, N(R′), C(R9)(R10), C(R9)(OR13), C(O), or C(S); each of R′ and R″ is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; and each of m, n, p, q, r, and s is independently for each occurrence 0-10.
- In some embodiments, the monomer of formula (III) is:
- wherein: each B is independently H or a nucleobase; each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9 and R10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR13, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted; R11 and R12 are independently for each occurrence H, protecting group, a reactive phosphorus group, or solid support; R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; Z1 and Z2 are each independently O, S, N(R′), C(R9)(R10), C(R9)(OR13), C(O), or C(S); each of R′ and R″ is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; and each of m, n, p, q, r, and s is independently for each occurrence 0-10.
- In another aspect the invention provides oligonucleotides comprising at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more) monomer described in the above formulas. The monomers described herein can be placed at any position in an oligonucleotide. For example, the monomers described herein can be placed the last position on the 5′-end (5′-end terminal position), the last position on 3′-end (3′-end terminal position), at an internal position. Accordingly, the invention provides an oligonucleotide comprising at least one modified nucleoside of formula (I), (II), (III), (I′), (II′), or (III′), optionally in combination with natural base and derivatives thereof, or modified nucleobase. The modified base includes high affinity modification such as G-clamp and analogs, phenoxazines and analogs; bi- and tricyclic non-natural nucleoside bases. The invention further provides said modified oligonucleotides with 3′, 5′ or both 3′ and 5′ terminal phosphate or phosphate mimics. The phosphate or phosphate mimics includes α- and/or β-configuration with respect to the sugar ring or combinations thereof. The phosphate or phosphate mimics include but not limited to: natural phosphate, -phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, borano phosphate, borano thiophospahte, phosphonate, halogen substituted phosphoantes, phosphoramidates, phosphodiester, phosphotriester, thiophosphodiester, thiophosphotriester, diphosphates and triphosphates. The invention also provides sugar modified purine dimers at 3′ and 5′-terminals (i.e. 5′/3′-GG, AA, AG, GA, GI, IA etc.), wherein the purine bases are natural or chemically modified preferably at 2, 6 and 7 positions of the base or combinations thereof. The invention also provides nucleoside at position 1 (5′-end) with 2′ and/or 4′-sugar modified natural and modified nucleobase, purine or pyrimidine nucleobase mimics or combinations thereof. The said modified oligonucleotides could be single stranded siRNA, double stranded siRNA, micro RNA, antimicroRNA, aptamer or antisense oligonucleotide containing a motif selected from the modifications described herein and combinations of modifications thereof. The invention provides that the said modified oligonucleotide is one of the strands or constitute for both strands of a double strands siRNA. In one occurrence the modified oligonucleotide is the guide or antisense strand and in another occurrence the modified oligonucleotide is sense or passenger strand of the double stranded siRNA or both the strands of ds siRNA bear modified oligonucleotides.
- The oligonucleotides containing the monomers of any of the above formulas can also be used in a method of inhibiting the expression of a target gene in a cell. Such method comprises contacting the cell with the oligonucleotide comprising the monomers of any of the above formulas.
- In some embodiments the oligonucleotide comprises at least one monomer of formula (IV), (V) or (VI):
- or isomers thereof, wherein: each B is independently H or a nucleobase; X1 and X2 are independently for each occurrence absent, O, S, or NR′; each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9 and R10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR13, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted; R11 and R12 are independently for each occurrence H,
- nucleoside, oligonucleotide,
- —O-oligonucleotide, —S-oligonucleotide, —S—S-oligonucleotide, —N(R′)—C(Z6)-oligonucleotide, —C(Z6)—N(R′)-oligonucleotide, —N(R′)—C(Z6)Z6-oligonucleotide, —Z6C(Z6)—N(R′)-oligonucleotide, N(R′)C(Z6)N(R′)-oligonucleotide,
- R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; R14 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR12, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; X3, X4, X5, and Z3 are each independently for each occurrence H, O−, OM, OR13, S−, SR13, SM, N(R′)(R″), B(R13)3, BH3 −, or Se; Z1 and Z2 are each independently O, S, N(R′), C(R9)(R10), C(R9)(OR13), C(O), or C(S); Y3, Y4, Y5, and Z6 are each independently for each occurrence O or S; Z4 is independently for each occurrence O, S, CH2, NR′; each of R′ and R″ is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; each of m, n, p, q, r, and s is independently for each occurrence 0-10; t is 0-2; and M is an organic or inorganic cation.
- Several studies have found the presence of a phosphate at the 5′-end siRNAs and microRNAs to be crucial for the efficient assembly of these small RNAs into the RISC (Nykänen, A., Haley, B. & Zamore, P. D. ATP requirements and small interfering RNA structure in the RNA interference pathway. Cell 107, 309-321 (2001); Elbashir, S. M., Martinez, J., Patkaniowska, A., Lendeckel, W. & Tuschl, T. Functional anatomy of siRNAs for mediating efficient RNAi in Drosophila melanogaster embryo lysate. EMBO J. 20, 6877-6888 (2001); Chiu, Y. L. & Rana, T. M. RNAi in human cells: basic structural and functional features of small interfering RNA. Mol. Cell 10, 549-561 (2002); and Liu, J. et al. Argonaute2 is the catalytic engine of mammalian RNAi. Science 305, 1437-1441 (2004)). Moreover, the 5′ phosphate group is seen to be essential for slicing fidelity, because the position of the cleavage site in the target RNA strand is determined by its distance from the 5′ phosphate group of the guide RNA strand (Elbashir, S. M., Martinez, J., Patkaniowska, A., Lendeckel, W. & Tuschl, T. Functional anatomy of siRNAs for mediating efficient RNAi in Drosophila melanogaster embryo lysate. EMBO J. 20, 6877-6888 (2001); Rivas, F. V. et al. Purified Argonaute2 and an siRNA form recombinant human RISC. Nature Struct. Mol. Biol. 12, 340-349 (2005); and Elbashir, S. M. et al. Duplexes of 21-nucleotide RNAs mediate RNA interference in cultured mammalian cells. Nature 411, 494-498 (2001).
- Accordingly, in some embodiments, when an abasic and/or acyclic nucleotide monomer described herein is present at the 5′-end terminal position, R11 is
- In some further embodiments of this, t is 0.
- In some embodiments, R11 is
- wherein t is 0; X3 and Z34 are independently O, S, or N(R′)(R″); and Y3 is O.
- When, an abasic and/or acyclic nucleotide monomer described herein is present at the 3′-end terminal position, R12 is H.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one monomer of formula (IV′):
- wherein the variables are as defined above.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one monomer of formula (V′):
- wherein the variables are as defined above.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one monomer of formula (VI′):
- wherein the variables are as defined above.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one monomer of formula (VII), (VIII), or (IX):
- or isomers thereof,
- wherein:
- each B is independently H or a nucleobase; each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9 and R10 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR13, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl each of which can be optionally substituted; R11 and R12 are independently for each occurrence H,
- nucleoside, oligonucleotide,
- —O-oligonucleotide, —S-oligonucleotide, —S—S-oligonucleotide, —N(R′)—C(Z6)-oligonucleotide, —C(Z6)—N(R′)-oligonucleotide, —N(R′)—C(Z6)Z6-oligonucleotide, —Z6C(Z6)—N(R′)-oligonucleotide, N(R′)C(Z6)N(R′)-oligonucleotide,
- R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; R14 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR12, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted X3, X4, X5, and Z3 are each independently for each occurrence H, O−, OM, OR13, S−, SR13, SM, N(R′)(R″), B(R13)3, BH3 −, or Se; Z1 and Z2 are each independently O, S, N(R′), C(R9)(R10), C(R9)(OR13), C(O), or C(S); Y3, Y4, Y5, and Z6 are each independently for each occurrence O or S; Z4 is independently for each occurrence O, S, CH2, NR′; each of R′ and R″ is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; each of m, n, p, q, r, and s is independently for each occurrence 0-10; t is 0-2; n1 and n2 are independently 0-49, provided that if n1 is present then n2 is absent and if n2 is present then n1 is absent; and M is an organic or inorganic cation.
- In some embodiments n1 and n2 are independently 0-20.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotides comprising the monomers of the above formulas (IV), (V), (VI), (IV′), (V′), (VI′), (VII), (VIII), or (IX) can be single stranded siRNA, double stranded siRNA, micro RNA, antimicroRNA, aptamer or antisense oligonucleotide containing a motif selected from the modifications described herein and combinations of modifications thereof. The oligonucleotide is one of the strands or constitutes both strands of a double-stranded siRNA. In one occurrence the oligonucleotide is the guide or antisense strand and in another occurrence the oligonucleotide is the sense or passenger strand of the double stranded siRNA.
- The oligonucleotides containing the monomers of any of the above formulas can also be used in a method of inhibiting the expression of a target gene in a cell. Such method comprises contacting the cell with the oligonucleotide comprising the monomers of any of the above formulas.
- When an oligonucleotide comprises two or more acyclic and/or abasic monomers described herein, they can be the same, different or any combination thereof. Such two or more monomers can be located at any position within the oligonucleotide. For example one at the 5′-end terminal position and at one or more internal positions; one at the 3′-end terminal position and at one or more internal positions; one at the 5′-end terminal position, one at the 3′-end terminal position and at one or more internal positions.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) acyclic and/or abasic monomers described herein at the 5′-end, e.g., within the first 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 positions from said end.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) acyclic and/or abasic monomers described herein at the 3′-end, e.g., within the first 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 positions from said end.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises two acyclic and/or abasic monomers described herein within the first two positions at the 3′-end. In some further embodiments of this the intersugar linkage between the two acyclic and/or abasic monomers is non-phosphodiester linkage, e.g., a non-phosphodiester internucleoside linkage selected from the group consisting of phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, H-phosphonate, alkyl-phosphonate, phosphoramidate internucleoside linkages, and any combinations thereof.
- In some embodiments, the monomers described herein are linked to the rest of the oligonucleotide via a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, e.g. a non-phosphodiester internucleoside linkage selected from the group consisting of phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, H-phosphonate, alkyl-phosphonate, phosphoramidate internucleoside linkages, and any combinations thereof.
- Furthermore when two or more acyclic and/or abasic monomers described herein, they can be in a continuous chain, alternate with one or more other non acyclic and/or abasic nucleosides, or any combination thereof.
- In some embodiments, an oligonucleotide of the invention comprises: (a) 1-20 first-type regions, each first-type region independently comprising 1-20 contiguous nucleosides wherein each nucleoside of each first-type region comprises a first-type modification; (b) 0-20 second-type regions, each second-type region independently comprising 1-20 contiguous nucleosides wherein each nucleoside of each second-type region comprises a second-type modification; and (c) 0-20 third-type regions, each third-type region independently comprising 1-20 contiguous nucleosides wherein each nucleoside of each third-type region comprises a third-type modification; wherein the first-type modification, the second-type modification, and the third-type modification are each independently selected from 2′-F, 2′-OCH3, 2′-O(CH2)2OCH3, BNA, F-HNA, 2′-H and 2′-OH.
- The monomers and oligonucleotides described herein contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)-, α or β, or as (D)- or (L)- such as for amino acids. Included herein are all such possible isomers, as well as their racemic and optically pure forms.
- Optical isomers may be prepared from their respective optically active precursors by the procedures described above, or by resolving the racemic mixtures. The resolution can be carried out in the presence of a resolving agent, by chromatography or by repeated crystallization or by some combination of these techniques which are known to those skilled in the art. Further details regarding resolutions can be found in Jacques, et al., Enantiomers, Racemates, and Resolutions (John Wiley & Sons, 1981). When the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds, other unsaturation, or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers or cis- and trans-isomers. Likewise, all tautomeric forms are also intended to be included. The configuration of any carbon-carbon double bond appearing herein is selected for convenience only and is not intended to designate a particular configuration unless the text so states; thus a carbon-carbon double bond or carbon-heteroatom double bond depicted arbitrarily herein as trans may be cis, trans, or a mixture of the two in any proportion.
- In some embodiments, an oligonucleotide of the invention comprises 5′ phosphorothioate or 5′-phosphorodithioate, nucleotides 1 and 2 having cationic modifications via C-5 position of pyrimidines, 2-Position of Purines, N2-G, G-clamp, 8-position of purines, 6-position of purines, internal nucleotides having a 2′-F sugar with base modifications (Pseudouridine, G-clamp, phenoxazine, pyridopyrimidines, gem2′-Me-up/2′-F-down), 3′-end with two purines with novel 2′-substituted MOE analogs, 5′-end nucleotides with novel 2′-substituted MOE analogs, 5′-end having a 3′-F and a 2′-5′-linkage, 4′-substituted nucleoside at the nucleotide 1 at 5′-end and the substituent is cationic, alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, thioether and the like, 4′-substitution at the 3′-end of the strand, and combinations thereof.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is a single-stranded oligonucleotide.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is a double-stranded oligonucleotide.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide has a hairpin structure.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide has a dumbbell structure.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is an RNAi agent, an antisense, a microRNA, a pre-microRNA, a supermir, an antimir, an antagomir, a ribozyme, a decoy oligonucleotide, an immunostimulatory oligonucleotide, RNA activator, U1 adaptor or an aptamer oligonucleotide.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is a single-stranded RNAi agent.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is a double-stranded RNAi agent.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one modification. In some embodiments, the modification is selected from the group consisting of a sugar modification, a non-phosphodiester intersugar (or internucleoside) linkage, nucleobase modification, and ligand conjugation.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least two different modifications selected from the group consisting of a sugar modification, a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, nucleobase modification, and ligand conjugation. In some embodiments, the at least two different modifications are present in the same subunit of the oligonucleotide, e.g. present in the same nucleotide.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is a double-stranded oligonucleotide and at least one strand comprises at least one modification. In some embodiments, sense strand comprises at least one modification. In another embodiment, antisense strand comprises at least one modification. In yet another embodiment, only the sense strand comprises at least one modification. In still yet another embodiment, only the antisense strand comprises at least one modification.
- In some embodiments, sense strand comprises at least one acyclic and/or abasic nucleoside described herein. In another embodiment, antisense strand comprises at least one acyclic and/or abasic nucleoside described herein. In yet another embodiment, both the sense and the antisense strands each comprise at least one acyclic and/or abasic nucleoside described herein.
- When the oligonucleotide is double-stranded and each strand comprises at least one at least one acyclic and/or abasic nucleoside described herein, such nucleosides can both be located on one end of the duplex (5′-end of one strand and 3′-end of the other strand), at opposite ends (5′-end of both strands or 3′-end of both strands), one at the end and one in the middle (5′ or 3′ end of one strand and an internal position of the other strand).
- In some embodiments, both strands of the double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise at least one modification each. In another embodiment, both strands of the double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise at least one modification that is the same in both strands. In yet another embodiment, both strands of the double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise the same modification.
- In some embodiment, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one ligand conjugate. In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is a double-stranded oligonucleotide and only one strand comprises the ligand conjugate. In a further embodiment, the strand is sense strand. In another embodiment, the strand is antisense strand.
- In yet another embodiment, both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise at least one ligand conjugate. In some embodiments, the ligand conjugate is same in both strands. In another embodiment, the ligand is different between the two strands.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises two or more ligand conjugates. When two or more ligands are present, the two or more ligands can be same ligand, different ligands, same type of ligand (e.g., targeting ligand, endosomolytic ligand, PK modulator), different types of ligands, or a combination thereof.
- In some embodiments, the RNAi agent is double stranded and only the sense strand comprises the acyclic and/or abasic monomer described herein.
- In one embodiment, the RNAi agent is double stranded and only the antisense strand comprises the acyclic and/or abasic monomer described herein.
- In one embodiment, the RNAi agent is double-stranded and both the sense and the antisense strands comprise at least one acyclic and/or abasic monomer described herein. When both the sense and the antisense strands comprise a acyclic and/or abasic monomer of the invention, such monomers can be same or different. Accordingly, in one embodiment, the acyclic and/or abasic monomer described herein is the same in both the sense and the antisense strands. In another embodiment, the acyclic and/or abasic monomer is different in the sense and the antisense strands
- In the context of this invention, the term “oligonucleotide” refers to a polymer or oligomer of nucleotide or nucleoside monomers consisting of naturally occurring bases, sugars and intersugar linkages. The term “oligonucleotide” also includes polymers or oligomers comprising non-naturally occurring monomers, or portions thereof, which function similarly. Such modified or substituted oligonucleotides are often preferred over native forms because of properties such as, for example, enhanced cellular uptake and increased stability in the presence of nucleases.
- The oligonucleotide as used herein can be single-stranded or double-stranded. A single-stranded oligonucleotide can have double-stranded regions and a double-stranded oligonucleotide can have single-stranded regions. Exemplary oligonucleotides include, but are not limited to structural genes, genes including control and termination regions, self-replicating systems such as viral or plasmid DNA, single-stranded and double-stranded siRNAs and other RNA interference reagents (RNAi agents or iRNA agents), shRNA, antisense oligonucleotides, ribozymes, microRNAs, microRNA mimics, supermirs, aptamers, antimirs, antagomirs, U1 adaptors, triplex-forming oligonucleotides, RNA activators, immuno-stimulatory oligonucleotides, and decoy oligonucleotides.
- Double-stranded and single-stranded oligonucleotides that are effective in inducing RNA interference are also referred to as siRNA, RNAi agent, or iRNA agent, herein. These RNA interference inducing oligonucleotides associate with a cytoplasmic multi-protein complex known as RNAi-induced silencing complex (RISC). In many embodiments, single-stranded and double-stranded RNAi agents are sufficiently long that they can be cleaved by an endogenous molecule, e.g. by Dicer, to produce smaller oligonucleotides that can enter the RISC machinery and participate in RISC mediated cleavage of a target sequence, e.g. a target mRNA.
- Oligonucleotides of the present invention can be of various lengths. In particular embodiments, oligonucleotides can range from about 10 to 100 nucleotides in length. In various related embodiments, oligonucleotides, single-stranded, double-stranded, and triple-stranded, can range in length from about 10 to about 50 nucleotides, from about 20 to about 50 nucleotides, from about 15 to about 30 nucleotides, from about 20 to about 30 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, oligonucleotide is from about 9 to about 39 nucleotides in length. In some other embodiments, oligonucleotide is at least 30 nucleotides in length.
- The oligonucleotides of the invention can comprise any oligonucleotide modification described herein and below. In certain instances, it can be desirable to modify one or both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide. In some cases, the two strands will include different modifications. In other instances, multiple different modifications can be included on each of the strands. The various modifications on a given strand can differ from each other, and can also differ from the various modifications on other strands. For example, one strand can have a modification, e.g., a modification described herein, and a different strand can have a different modification, e.g., a different modification described herein. In other cases, one strand can have two or more different modifications, and the another strand can include a modification that differs from the at least two modifications on the first strand.
- The skilled person is well aware that double-stranded oligonucleotides comprising a duplex structure of between 20 and 23, but specifically 21, base pairs have been hailed as particularly effective in inducing RNA interference (Elbashir et al., EMBO 2001, 20:6877-6888). However, others have found that shorter or longer double-stranded oligonucleotides can be effective as well.
- The double-stranded oligonucleotides comprise two oligonucleotide strands that are sufficiently complementary to hybridize to form a duplex structure. Generally, the duplex structure is between 15 and 30, more generally between 18 and 25, yet more generally between 19 and 24, and most generally between 19 and 21 base pairs in length. In some embodiments, longer double-stranded oligonucleotides of between 25 and 30 base pairs in length are preferred. In some embodiments, shorter double-stranded oligonucleotides of between 10 and 15 base pairs in length are preferred. In another embodiment, the double-stranded oligonucleotide is at least 21 nucleotides long.
- In some embodiments, the double-stranded oligonucleotide comprises a sense strand and an antisense strand, wherein the antisense RNA strand has a region of complementarity which is complementary to at least a part of a target sequence, and the duplex region is 14-30 nucleotides in length. Similarly, the region of complementarity to the target sequence is between 14 and 30, more generally between 18 and 25, yet more generally between 19 and 24, and most generally between 19 and 21 nucleotides in length.
- The phrase “antisense strand” as used herein, refers to an oligonucleotide that is substantially or 100% complementary to a target sequence of interest. The phrase “antisense strand” includes the antisense region of both oligonucleotides that are formed from two separate strands, as well as unimolecular oligonucleotides that are capable of forming hairpin or dumbbell type structures. The terms “antisense strand” and “guide strand” are used interchangeably herein.
- The phrase “sense strand” refers to an oligonucleotide that has the same nucleoside sequence, in whole or in part, as a target sequence such as a messenger RNA or a sequence of DNA. The terms “sense strand” and “passenger strand” are used interchangeably herein.
- By “target sequence” is meant any nucleic acid sequence whose expression or activity is to be modulated. The target nucleic acid can be DNA or RNA, such as endogenous DNA or RNA, viral DNA or viral RNA, or other RNA encoded by a gene, virus, bacteria, fungus, mammal, or plant.
- By “specifically hybridizable” and “complementary” is meant that a nucleic acid can form hydrogen bond(s) with another nucleic acid sequence by either traditional Watson-Crick or other non-traditional types. In reference to the nucleic molecules of the present invention, the binding free energy for a nucleic acid molecule with its complementary sequence is sufficient to allow the relevant function of the nucleic acid to proceed, e.g., RNAi activity. Determination of binding free energies for nucleic acid molecules is well known in the art (see, e.g., Turner et al, 1987, CSH Symp. Quant. Biol. LII pp. 123-133; Frier et al., 1986, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 83:9373-9377; Turner et al., 1987,/. Am. Chem. Soc. 109:3783-3785). A percent complementarity indicates the percentage of contiguous residues in a nucleic acid molecule that can form hydrogen bonds (e.g., Watson-Crick base pairing) with a second nucleic acid sequence (e.g., 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 out of 10 being 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 100% complementary). “Perfectly complementary” or 100% complementarity means that all the contiguous residues of a nucleic acid sequence will hydrogen bond with the same number of contiguous residues in a second nucleic acid sequence. Less than perfect complementarity refers to the situation in which some, but not all, nucleoside units of two strands can hydrogen bond with each other. “Substantial complementarity” refers to polynucleotide strands exhibiting 90% or greater complementarity, excluding regions of the polynucleotide strands, such as overhangs, that are selected so as to be noncomplementary. Specific binding requires a sufficient degree of complementarity to avoid non-specific binding of the oligomeric compound to non-target sequences under conditions in which specific binding is desired, i.e., under physiological conditions in the case of in vivo assays or therapeutic treatment, or in the case of in vitro assays, under conditions in which the assays are performed. The non-target sequences typically differ by at least 5 nucleotides.
- In many embodiments, the double-stranded oligonucleotide is sufficiently large that it can be cleaved by an endogenous molecule, e.g., by Dicer, to produce smaller double-stranded oligonucleotides, e.g., RNAi agents. In some embodiments, the double-stranded oligonucleotide modulates the expression of a target gene via RISC mediated cleavage of the target sequence.
- In some embodiments, the double-stranded region of a double-stranded oligonucleotide is equal to or at least, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 nucleotide pairs in length.
- In some embodiments, the antisense strand of a double-stranded oligonucleotide is equal to or at least 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 nucleotides in length.
- In some embodiments, the sense strand of a double-stranded oligonucleotide is equal to or at least 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 nucleotides in length.
- In some embodiments, one strand has at least one stretch of 1-5 single-stranded nucleotides in the double-stranded region. By “stretch of single-stranded nucleotides in the double-stranded region” is meant that there is present at least one nucleotidebase pair at both ends of the single-stranded stretch. In some embodiments, both strands have at least one stretch of 1-5 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) single-stranded nucleotides in the double stranded region. When both strands have a stretch of 1-5 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) single-stranded nucleotides in the double stranded region, such single-stranded nucleotides can be opposite to each other (e.g., a stretch of mismatches) or they can be located such that the second strand has no single-stranded nucleotides opposite to the single-stranded oligonucleotides of the first strand and vice versa (e.g., a single-stranded loop). In some embodiments, the single-stranded nucleotides are present within 8 nucleotides from either end, for example 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2 nucleotide from either the 5′ or 3′ end of the region of complementarity between the two strands.
- In some embodiments, each strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide has a ZXY structure, such as is described in International Application No. PCT/US2004/07070 filed on Mar. 8, 2004, contents of which are hereby incorporated in their entireties.
- The present invention also includes double-stranded oligonucleotide wherein the two strands are linked together. The two strands can be linked to each other at both ends, or at one end only. By linking at one end is meant that 5′-end of first strand is linked to the 3′-end of the second strand or 3′-end of first strand is linked to 5′-end of the second strand. When the two strands are linked to each other at both ends, 5′-end of first strand is linked to 3′-end of second strand and 3′-end of first strand is linked to 5′-end of second strand. The two strands can be linked together by an oligonucleotide linker including, but not limited to, (N)n; wherein N is independently a modified or unmodified nucleotide and n is 3-23. In some embodiments, n is 3-10, e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10. In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide linker is selected from the group consisting of GNRA, (G)4, (U)4, and (dT)4, wherein N is a modified or unmodified nucleotide and R is a modified or unmodified purine nucleotide. Some of the nucleotides in the linker can be involved in base-pair interactions with other nucleotides in the linker. The two strands can also be linked together by a non-nucleosidic linker, e.g. a linker described herein. It will be appreciated by one of skill in the art that any oligonucleotide chemical modifications or variations describe herein can be used in the oligonucleotide linker.
- Hairpin and dumbbell type RNAi agents will have a duplex region equal to or at least 14, 15, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 29, 21, 22, 23, 24, or 25 nucleotide pairs. The duplex region can be equal to or less than 200, 100, or 50, in length. In some embodiments, ranges for the duplex region are 15-30, 17 to 23, 19 to 23, and 19 to 21 nucleotides pairs in length. In some embodiments, the hairpin oligonucleotides can mimic the natural precursors of microRNAs.
- The hairpin RNAi agents can have a single strand overhang or terminal unpaired region, in some embodiments at the 3′, and in some embodiments on the antisense side of the hairpin. In some embodiments, the overhangs are 1-4, more generally 2-3 nucleotides in length.
- In some embodiments of hairpin RNAi agents, 3′-end of antisense is linked to 5′-end of sense strand. In some embodiments of hairpin RNAi agents, 5′-end of antisense is linked to 3′-end of sense strand.
- The hairpin oligonucleotides are also referred to as “shRNA” herein.
- The single-stranded oligonucleotides of the present invention also comprise nucleotide sequence that is substantially complementary to a “sense” nucleic acid encoding a gene expression product, e.g., complementary to the coding strand of a double-stranded cDNA molecule or complementary to an RNA sequence, e.g., a pre-mRNA, mRNA, miRNA, or pre-miRNA. The single-stranded oligonucleotides of the invention include antisense oligonucleotides and single-stranded RNAi agents. The region of complementarity is less than 30 nucleotides in length, and at least 15 nucleotides in length. Generally, the single stranded oligonucleotides are 10 to 25 nucleotides in length (e.g., 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, or 24 nucleotides in length). In some embodiments the strand is 25-30 nucleotides. In some embodiments, the single-stranded oligonucleotide is 15-29 nucleotides in length. Single strands having less than 100% complementarity to the mRNA, RNA or DNA are also embraced by the present invention. In some embodiments, the single-stranded oligonucleotide has a ZXY structure, such as is described in International Application No. PCT/US2004/07070 filed on Mar. 8, 2004.
- The single-stranded oligonucleotide can hybridize to a complementary RNA, e.g., mRNA, pre-mRNA, and prevent access of the translation machinery to the target RNA transcript, thereby preventing protein synthesis. The single-stranded oligonucleotide can also hybridize to a complementary RNA and the RNA target can be subsequently cleaved by an enzyme such as RNase H and thus preventing translation of target RNA. In other embodiments, the single-stranded oligonucleotide modulates the expression of a target gene via RISC mediated cleavage of the target sequence.
- A “single-stranded RNAi agent” as used herein, is an RNAi agent which is made up of a single molecule. A single-stranded RNAi agent can include a duplexed region, formed by intra-strand pairing, e.g., it can be, or include, a hairpin or pan-handle structure. Single-stranded RNAi agents can be antisense with regard to the target molecule. A single-stranded RNAi agent can be sufficiently long that it can enter the RISC and participate in RISC mediated cleavage of a target mRNA. Single-stranded siRNAs (ss siRNAs) are known and are described in U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2006/0166901, contents of which are herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- A single-strand RNAi agent is at least 14, and in other embodiments at least 15, at least 20, at least 25, at least 29, at least 35, at least 40, or at least 50 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, it is less than 200, 100, or 60 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments single-stranded RNAi agents are 5′ phosphorylated or include a phosphoryl analog at the 5′ prime terminus. Preferably, the single-stranded RNAi agent has length from 15-29 nucleotides.
- In some embodiments, single-stranded RNAi agents or at least one strand of the double-stranded RNAi agent, includes at least one of the following motifs: (a) 5′-phosphorothioate or 5′-phosphorodithioate; (b) a cationic modification of nucleotides 1 and 2 on the 5′ terminal, wherein the cationic modification is at C5 position of pyrimidines and C2, C6, C8, exocyclic N2 or exocyclic N6 of purines; (c) at least one G-clamp nucleotide in the first two terminal nucleotides at the 5′ end and the other nucleotide having a cationic modification, wherein the cationic modification is at C5 position of pyrimidines or C2, C6, C8, exocyclic N2 or exocyclic N6 position of purines; (d) at least one 2′-F modified nucleotide comprising a nucleobase base modification; (e) at least one gem-2′-O-methyl/2′-F modified nucleotide comprising a nucleobase modification, preferably the methyl substituent is in the up configuration, e.g. in the arabinose configuration; (f) a 5′-PuPu-3′ dinucleotide at the 3′ terminal wherein both nucleotides comprise a modified MOE at 2′-position as described in U.S. Provisional App. No. 61/226,017 filed Jul. 16, 2009; (g) a 5′-PuPu-3′ dinucleotide at the 5′ terminal wherein both nucleotides comprise a modified MOE at 2′-position as described in U.S. Provisional Appl. No. 61/226,017 filed Jul. 16, 2009; (h) nucleotide at the 5′ terminal having a modified MOE at 2′-position as described in U.S. Provisional Appl. No. 61/226,017 filed Jul. 16, 2009; (i) nucleotide at the 5′ terminal having a 3′-F modification; (j) 5′ terminal nucleotide comprising a 4′-substituent; (k) 5′ terminal nucleotide comprising a 04′ modification; (1) 3′ terminal nucleotide comprising a 4′-substituent; and (m) combinations thereof.
- In some embodiments, both strands of a double stranded oligonucleotide independently comprise at least one of the above described motifs. In some other embodiments, both strands of a double stranded oligonucleotide comprise at least one
- Single-stranded oligonucleotides, including those described and/or identified as single stranded siRNAs, microRNAs or mirs which may be used as targets or may serve as a template for the design of oligonucleotides of the invention are taught in, for example, Esau, et al. US Publication #20050261218 (U.S. Ser. No. 10/909,125) entitled “Oligonucleotides and compositions for use in modulation small non-coding RNAs” the entire contents of which is incorporated herein by reference. It will be appreciated by one of skill in the art that any oligonucleotide chemical modifications or variations describe herein also apply to single stranded oligonucleotides.
- MicroRNAs (miRNAs or mirs) are a highly conserved class of small RNA molecules that are transcribed from DNA in the genomes of plants and animals, but are not translated into protein. Pre-microRNAs are processed into miRNAs. Processed microRNAs are single stranded ˜17-25 nucleotide (nt) RNA molecules that become incorporated into the RNA-induced silencing complex (RISC) and have been identified as key regulators of development, cell proliferation, apoptosis and differentiation. They are believed to play a role in regulation of gene expression by binding to the 3′-untranslated region of specific mRNAs. RISC mediates down-regulation of gene expression through translational inhibition, transcript cleavage, or both. RISC is also implicated in transcriptional silencing in the nucleus of a wide range of eukaryotes.
- MicroRNAs have also been implicated in modulation of pathogens in hosts. For example, see Jopling, C. L., et al., Science (2005) vol. 309, pp 1577-1581. Without wishing to be bound by theory, administration of a microRNA, microRNA mimic, and/or anti microRNA oligonucleotide, leads to modulation of pathogen viability, growth, development, and/or replication. In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is a microRNA, microRNA mimic, and/or anti microRNA, wherein microRNA is a host microRNA.
- The number of miRNA sequences identified to date is large and growing, illustrative examples of which can be found, for example, in: “miRBase: microRNA sequences, targets and gene nomenclature” Griffiths-Jones S, Grocock R J, van Dongen S, Bateman A, Enright A J. NAR, 2006, 34, Database Issue, D140-D144; “The microRNA Registry” Griffiths-Jones S. NAR, 2004, 32, Database Issue, D109-D111; and also on the worldwide web at http://microrna.dot.sanger.dot.ac.dot.uk/sequences/.
- Ribozymes are oligonucleotides having specific catalytic domains that possess endonuclease activity (Kim and Cech, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 1987 December; 84(24):8788-92; Forster and Symons, Cell. 1987 Apr. 24; 49(2):211-20). At least six basic varieties of naturally-occurring enzymatic RNAs are known presently. In general, enzymatic nucleic acids act by first binding to a target RNA. Such binding occurs through the target binding portion of an enzymatic nucleic acid which is held in close proximity to an enzymatic portion of the molecule that acts to cleave the target RNA. Thus, the enzymatic nucleic acid first recognizes and then binds a target RNA through complementary base-pairing, and once bound to the correct site, acts enzymatically to cut the target RNA. Strategic cleavage of such a target RNA will destroy its ability to direct synthesis of an encoded protein. After an enzymatic nucleic acid has bound and cleaved its RNA target, it is released from that RNA to search for another target and can repeatedly bind and cleave new targets.
- Methods of producing a ribozyme targeted to any target sequence are known in the art. Ribozymes can be designed as described in Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 93/23569 and Int. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. WO 94/02595, each specifically incorporated herein by reference, and synthesized to be tested in vitro and in vivo, as described therein.
- Aptamers are nucleic acid or peptide molecules that bind to a particular molecule of interest with high affinity and specificity (Tuerk and Gold, Science 249:505 (1990); Ellington and Szostak, Nature 346:818 (1990)). DNA or RNA aptamers have been successfully produced which bind many different entities from large proteins to small organic molecules. See Eaton, Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 1:10-16 (1997), Famulok, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 9:324-9 (1999), and Hermann and Patel, Science 287:820-5 (2000). Aptamers can be RNA or DNA based. Generally, aptamers are engineered through repeated rounds of in vitro selection or equivalently, SELEX (systematic evolution of ligands by exponential enrichment) to bind to various molecular targets such as small molecules, proteins, nucleic acids, and even cells, tissues and organisms. The aptamer can be prepared by any known method, including synthetic, recombinant, and purification methods, and can be used alone or in combination with other aptamers specific for the same target. Further, as described more fully herein, the term “aptamer” specifically includes “secondary aptamers” containing a consensus sequence derived from comparing two or more known aptamers to a given target.
- Because transcription factors recognize their relatively short binding sequences, even in the absence of surrounding genomic DNA, short oligonucleotides bearing the consensus binding sequence of a specific transcription factor can be used as tools for manipulating gene expression in living cells. This strategy involves the intracellular delivery of such “decoy oligonucleotides”, which are then recognized and bound by the target factor. Occupation of the transcription factor's DNA-binding site by the decoy renders the transcription factor incapable of subsequently binding to the promoter regions of target genes. Decoys can be used as therapeutic agents, either to inhibit the expression of genes that are activated by a transcription factor, or to up-regulate genes that are suppressed by the binding of a transcription factor. Examples of the utilization of decoy oligonucleotides can be found in Mann et al., J. Clin. Invest., 2000, 106: 1071-1075, which is expressly incorporated by reference herein, in its entirety.
- miRNA Mimics
- miRNA mimics represent a class of molecules that can be used to imitate the gene modulating activity of one or more miRNAs. Thus, the term “microRNA mimic” refers to synthetic non-coding RNAs (i.e. the miRNA is not obtained by purification from a source of the endogenous miRNA) that are capable of entering the RNAi pathway and regulating gene expression. miRNA mimics can be designed as mature molecules (e.g. single stranded) or mimic precursors (e.g., pri- or pre-miRNAs).
- In one design, miRNA mimics are double stranded molecules (e.g., with a duplex region of between about 16 and about 31 nucleotides in length) and contain one or more sequences that have identity with the mature strand of a given miRNA. Double-stranded miRNA mimics have designs similar to as described above for double-stranded oligonucleotides.
- In some embodiments, a miRNA mimic comprises a duplex region of between 16 and 31 nucleotides and one or more of the following chemical modification patterns: the sense strand contains 2′-O-methyl modifications of nucleotides 1 and 2 (counting from the 5′ end of the sense oligonucleotide), and all of the Cs and Us; the antisense strand modifications can comprise 2′ F modification of all of the Cs and Us, phosphorylation of the 5′ end of the oligonucleotide, and stabilized internucleotide linkages associated with a 2 nucleotide 3′ overhang.
- A supermir refers to an oligonucleotide, e.g., single stranded, double stranded or partially double stranded, which has a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to an miRNA and that is antisense with respect to its target. This term includes oligonucleotides which comprise at least one non-naturally-occurring portion which functions similarly. In a preferred embodiment, the supermir does not include a sense strand, and in another preferred embodiment, the supermir does not self-hybridize to a significant extent. An supermir featured in the invention can have secondary structure, but it is substantially single-stranded under physiological conditions. A supermir that is substantially single-stranded is single-stranded to the extent that less than about 50% (e.g., less than about 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, or 5%) of the supermir is duplexed with itself. The supermir can include a hairpin segment, e.g., sequence, preferably at the 3′ end can self hybridize and form a duplex region, e.g., a duplex region of at least 1, 2, 3, or 4 and preferably less than 8, 7, 6, or 5 nucleotides, e.g., 5 nucleotides. The duplexed region can be connected by a linker, e.g., a nucleotide linker, e.g., 3, 4, 5, or 6 dTs, e.g., modified dTs. In another embodiment the supermir is duplexed with a shorter oligo, e.g., of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides in length, e.g., at one or both of the 3′ and 5′ end or at one end and in the non-terminal or middle of the supermir.
- Antimirs or miRNA Inhibitors
- The terms “antimir” “microRNA inhibitor” or “miR inhibitor” are synonymous and refer to oligonucleotides or modified oligonucleotides that interfere with the activity of specific miRNAs. Inhibitors can adopt a variety of configurations including single stranded, double stranded (RNA/RNA or RNA/DNA duplexes), and hairpin designs, in general, microRNA inhibitors comprise one or more sequences or portions of sequences that are complementary or partially complementary with the mature strand (or strands) of the miRNA to be targeted, in addition, the miRNA inhibitor can also comprise additional sequences located 5′ and 3′ to the sequence that is the reverse complement of the mature miRNA. The additional sequences can be the reverse complements of the sequences that are adjacent to the mature miRNA in the pri-miRNA from which the mature miRNA is derived, or the additional sequences can be arbitrary sequences (having a mixture of A, G, C, U, or dT). In some embodiments, one or both of the additional sequences are arbitrary sequences capable of forming hairpins. Thus, in some embodiments, the sequence that is the reverse complement of the miRNA is flanked on the 5′ side and on the 3′ side by hairpin structures. MicroRNA inhibitors, when double stranded, can include mismatches between nucleotides on opposite strands. Furthermore, microRNA inhibitors can be linked to conjugate moieties in order to facilitate uptake of the inhibitor into a cell.
- MicroRNA inhibitors, including hairpin miRNA inhibitors, are described in detail in Vermeulen et al., “Double-Stranded Regions Are Essential Design Components Of Potent Inhibitors of RISC Function,” RNA 13: 723-730 (2007) and in WO2007/095387 and WO 2008/036825 each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. A person of ordinary skill in the art can select a sequence from the database for a desired miRNA and design an inhibitor useful for the methods disclosed herein.
- Antagomirs are RNA-like oligonucleotides that harbor various modifications for RNAse protection and pharmacologic properties, such as enhanced tissue and cellular uptake. They differ from normal RNA by, for example, complete 2′-O-methylation of sugar, phosphorothioate intersugar linkage and, for example, a cholesterol-moiety at 3′-end. In a preferred embodiment, antagomir comprises a 2′-O-methylmodification at all nucleotides, a cholesterol moiety at 3′-end, two phsophorothioate intersugar linkages at the first two positions at the 5′-end and four phosphorothioate linkages at the 3′-end of the molecule. Antagomirs can be used to efficiently silence endogenous miRNAs by forming duplexes comprising the antagomir and endogenous miRNA, thereby preventing miRNA-induced gene silencing. An example of antagomir-mediated miRNA silencing is the silencing of miR-122, described in Krutzfeldt et al, Nature, 2005, 438: 685-689, which is expressly incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- U1 adaptors inhibit polyA sites and are bifunctional oligonucleotides with a target domain complementary to a site in the target gene's terminal exon and a ‘U1 domain’ that binds to the U1 smaller nuclear RNA component of the U1 snRNP. See for example, Int. Pat. App. Pub. No. WO2008/121963 and Goraczniak, et al., 2008, Nature Biotechnology, 27(3), 257-263, each of which is expressly incorporated by reference herein, in its entirety. U1 snRNP is a ribonucleoprotein complex that functions primarily to direct early steps in spliceosome formation by binding to the pre-mRNA exon-intron boundary, Brown and Simpson, 1998, Annu Rev Plant Physiol Plant MoI Biol 49:77-95.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide of the invention is a U1 adaptor, wherein the oligonucleotide comprises at least one annealing domain (targeting domain) linked to at least one effector domain (U1 domain), wherein the annealing domain hybridizes to a target gene sequence and the effector domain hybridizes to the U1 snRNA of U1 snRNP. In some embodiments, the U1 adaptor comprises one annealing domain. In some embodiments, the U1 adaptor comprises one effector domain.
- Without wishing to be bound by theory, the annealing domain will typically be from about 10 to about 50 nucleotides in length, more typically from about 10 to about 30 nucleotides or about 10 to about 20 nucleotides. In some preferred embodiments, the annealing domain is 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or 21 nucleotides in length. The annealing domain may be at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 97%, or, more preferably, 100% complementary to the target gene. In one embodiment, the annealing domain hybridizes with a target site within the 3′ terminal exon of a pre-mRNA, which includes the terminal coding region and the 3′UTR and polyadenylation signal sequences (e.g., through the polyadenylation site). In another embodiment, the target sequence is within about 500 basepair, about 250 basepair, about 100 basepair, or about 50 basepair of the poly (A) signal sequence of the pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, the annealing domain comprises 1, 2, 3, or 4, mismatches with the target gene sequence.
- The effector domain may be from about 8 nucleotides to about 30 nucleotides, from about 10 nucleotides to about 20 nucleotides, or from about 10 to about 15 nucleotides in length. The U1 domain can hybridize with U1 snRNA, particularly the 5′-end and more specifically nucleotides 2-11. In another embodiment, the U1 domain is perfectly complementary to nucleotides 2-11 of endogenous U1 snRNA. In some embodiments, the U1 domain comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO: 1 (5′-GCCAGGUAAGUAU-3′), SEQ ID NO: 2 (5′-CCAGGUAAGUAU-3′), SEQ ID NO: 4 (5′-CAGGUAAGUAU-3′), SEQ ID NO: 5 (5′-CAGGUAAGU-3′), SEQ ID NO: 6 (5′-CAGGUAAG-3′), and SEQ ID NO: 7 (5′-CAGGUAA-3′). In some embodiments, the U1 domain comprises a nucleotide sequence SEQ ID NO: 8 (5′-CAGGUAAGUA-3′). Without wishing to be bound by theory, increasing the length of the U1 domain to include basepairing into stem 1 and/or basepairing to position 1 of U1 snRNA improves the U1 adaptor's affinity to U1 snRNP.
- The annealing and effector domains of the U1 adaptor can be linked such that the effector domain is at the 5′ end and/or 3′ end of the annealing domain. The two domains can be linked by such that the 3′ end of one domain is linked to 5′ end of the other domain, or 3′ end of one domain is linked to 3′ end of the other domain, or 5′ end of one domain is linked to 5′ end of the other domain. The annealing and effector domains can be linked directly to each other or by a nucleotide based or non-nucleotide based linker. When the linker is nucleotide based, the linker can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, up to 15, up to 20, or up to 25 nucleotides.
- In some embodiments, the linker between the annealing domain and the effector domain is multivalent, e.g., bivalent, tetravalent or pentavalent. Without wishing to be bound by theory, a multivalent linker can be used to link together a single annealing domain with a plurality of adaptor domains.
- It is to be understood that the U1 adaptor can comprise any oligonucleotide modification described herein. Exemplary modifications for U1 adaptors include those that increase annealing affinity, specificity, bioavailability in the cell and organism, cellular and/or nuclear transport, stability, and/or resistance to degradation.
- In some embodiments, the U1 adaptor can be administered in combination with at least one other RNAi agent.
- Nucleic acids of the present invention can be immunostimulatory, including immunostimulatory oligonucleotides (single- or double-stranded) capable of inducing an immune response when administered to a subject, which can be a mammal or other patient. The immune response can be an innate or an adaptive immune response. The immune system is divided into a more innate immune system, and acquired adaptive immune system of vertebrates, the latter of which is further divided into humoral cellular components. In particular embodiments, the immune response can be mucosal.
- Immunostimulatory nucleic acids are considered to be non-sequence specific when it is not required that they specifically bind to and reduce the expression of a target polynucleotide in order to provoke an immune response. Thus, certain immunostimulatory nucleic acids can comprise a sequence corresponding to a region of a naturally occurring gene or mRNA, but they can still be considered non-sequence specific immunostimulatory nucleic acids.
- In some embodiments, the immunostimulatory nucleic acid or oligonucleotide comprises at least one CpG dinucleotide. The oligonucleotide or CpG dinucleotide can be unmethylated or methylated. In another embodiment, the immunostimulatory nucleic acid comprises at least one CpG dinucleotide having a methylated cytosine. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid comprises a single CpG dinucleotide, wherein the cytosine in said CpG dinucleotide is methylated.
- In another embodiment, the immunostimulatory oligonucleotide comprises a phosphate or a phosphate modification at the 5′-end. Without wishing to be bound by theory, oligonucleotides with modified or unmodified 5′-phospahtes induce an anti-viral or an antibacterial response, in particular, the induction of type I IFN, IL-18 and/or IL-1β by modulating RIG-I.
- Recent studies have found that dsRNA can also activate gene expression, a mechanism that has been termed “small RNA-induced gene activation” or RNAa. See for example Li, L. C. et al. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. (2006), 103(46):17337-42 and Li L. C. (2008). “Small RNA-Mediated Gene Activation”. RNA and the Regulation of Gene Expression: A Hidden Layer of Complexity. Caister Academic Press. ISBN 978-1-904455-25-7. It has been shown that dsRNAs targeting gene promoters induce potent transcriptional activation of associated genes. Endogenous miRNA that cause RNAa has also been found in humans. Check E. Nature (2007). 448 (7156): 855-858.
- Another surprising observation is that gene activation by RNAa is long-lasting. Induction of gene expression has been seen to last for over ten days. The prolonged effect of RNAa could be attributed to epigenetic changes at dsRNA target sites.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is an RNA activator, wherein oligonucleotide increases the expression of a gene. In some embodiments, increased gene expression inhibits viability, growth development, and/or reproduction.
- Recent studies have shown that triplex forming oligonucleotides (TFO) can be designed which can recognize and bind to polypurine/polypyrimidine regions in double-stranded helical DNA in a sequence-specific manner. These recognition rules are outline by Maher III, L. J., et al., Science (1989) vol. 245, pp 725-730; Moser, H. E., et al., Science (1987) vol. 238, pp 645-630; Beal, P. A., et al., Science (1992) vol. 251, pp 1360-1363; Conney, M., et al., Science (1988) vol. 241, pp 456-459 and Hogan, M. E., et al., EP Publication 375408. Modification of the oligonucleotides, such as the introduction of intercalators and intersugar linkage substitutions, and optimization of binding conditions (pH and cation concentration) have aided in overcoming inherent obstacles to TFO activity such as charge repulsion and instability, and it was recently shown that synthetic oligonucleotides can be targeted to specific sequences (for a recent review see Seidman and Glazer, J Clin invest 2003; 112:487-94). In general, the triplex-forming oligonucleotide has the sequence correspondence:
-
oligo 3′-A G G T duplex 5′-A G C T duplex 3′-T C G A - However, it has been shown that the A-AT and G-GC triplets have the greatest triple helical stability (Reither and Jeltsch, BMC Biochem, 2002, Sep. 12, Epub). The same authors have demonstrated that TFOs designed according to the A-AT and G-GC rule do not form non-specific triplexes, indicating that the triplex formation is indeed sequence specific.
- Thus for any given sequence a triplex forming sequence can be devised. Triplex-forming oligonucleotides preferably are at least 15, more preferably 25, still more preferably 30 or more nucleotides in length, up to 50 or 100 nucleotides.
- Formation of the triple helical structure with the target DNA induces steric and functional changes, blocking transcription initiation and elongation, allowing the introduction of desired sequence changes in the endogenous DNA and resulting in the specific down-regulation of gene expression. Examples of such suppression of gene expression in cells treated with TFOs include knockout of episomal supFG1 and endogenous HPRT genes in mammalian cells (Vasquez et al., Nucl Acids Res. 1999; 27: 1176-81, and Puri, et al, J Biol Chem, 2001; 276:28991-98), and the sequence- and target specific downregulation of expression of the Ets2 transcription factor, important in prostate cancer etiology (Carbone, et al, Nucl Acid Res. 2003; 31:833-43), and the pro-inflammatory ICAM-I gene (Besch et al, J Biol Chem, 2002; 277:32473-79). In addition, Vuyisich and Beal have recently shown that sequence specific TFOs can bind to dsRNA, inhibiting activity of dsRNA-dependent enzymes such as RNA-dependent kinases (Vuyisich and Beal, Nuc. Acids Res 2000; 28:2369-74).
- Additionally, TFOs designed according to the abovementioned principles can induce directed mutagenesis capable of effecting DNA repair, thus providing both down-regulation and up-regulation of expression of endogenous genes (Seidman and Glazer, J Gin Invest 2003; 112:487-94). Detailed description of the design, synthesis and administration of effective TFOs can be found in U.S. Pat. App. Nos. 2003 017068 and 2003 0096980 to Frothier et al, and 2002 01282118 and 2002 0123476 to Emanuele et al, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,721,138 to Lawn, contents of which are herein incorporated in their entireties.
- Unmodified oligonucleotides can be less than optimal in some applications, e.g., unmodified oligonucleotides can be prone to degradation by e.g., cellular nucleases. However, chemical modifications to one or more of the subunits of oligonucleotide can confer improved properties, e.g., can render oligonucleotides more stable to nucleases. Typical oligonucleotide modifications can include one or more of: (i) alteration, e.g., replacement, of one or both of the non-linking phosphate oxygens and/or of one or more of the linking phosphate oxygens in the phosphodiester intersugar linkage; (ii) alteration, e.g., replacement, of a constituent of the ribose sugar, e.g., of the 2′ hydroxyl on the ribose sugar; (iii) wholesale replacement of the phosphate moiety with “dephospho” linkers; (iv) modification or replacement of a naturally occurring base with a non-natural base; (v) replacement or modification of the ribose-phosphate backbone, e.g. peptide nucleic acid (PNA); (vi) modification of the 3′ end or 5′ end of the oligonucleotide, e.g., removal, modification or replacement of a terminal phosphate group or conjugation of a moiety, e.g., conjugation of a ligand, to either the 3′ or 5′ end of oligonucleotide; and (vii) modification of the sugar, e.g., six membered rings.
- The terms replacement, modification, alteration, and the like, as used in this context, do not imply any process limitation, e.g., modification does not mean that one must start with a reference or naturally occurring ribonucleic acid and modify it to produce a modified ribonucleic acid bur rather modified simply indicates a difference from a naturally occurring molecule. As described below, modifications, e.g., those described herein, can be provided as asymmetrical modifications.
- A modification described herein can be the sole modification, or the sole type of modification included on multiple nucleotides, or a modification can be combined with one or more other modifications described herein. The modifications described herein can also be combined onto an oligonucleotide, e.g. different nucleotides of an oligonucleotide have different modifications described herein.
- The phosphate group in the intersugar linkage can be modified by replacing one of the oxygens with a different substituent. One result of this modification to RNA phosphate intersugar linkages can be increased resistance of the oligonucleotide to nucleolytic breakdown. Examples of modified phosphate groups include phosphorothioate, phosphoroselenoate, borano phosphates, borano phosphate esters, hydrogen phosphonates, phosphoroamidites, alkyl or aryl phosphonates and phosphotriesters. In some embodiments, one of the non-bridging phosphate oxygen atoms in the intersugar linkage can be replaced by any of the following: S, Se, BR3 (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl), C (i.e. an alkyl group, an aryl group, etc. . . . ), H, NR2 (R is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, aryl), or OR (R is optionally substituted alkyl or aryl). The phosphorous atom in an unmodified phosphate group is achiral. However, replacement of one of the non-bridging oxygens with one of the above atoms or groups of atoms renders the phosphorous atom chiral; in other words a phosphorous atom in a phosphate group modified in this way is a stereogenic center. The stereogenic phosphorous atom can possess either the “R” configuration (herein Rp) or the “S” configuration (herein Sp).
- Phosphorodithioates have both non-bridging oxygens replaced by sulfur. The phosphorus center in the phosphorodithioates is achiral which precludes the formation of oligonucleotides diastereomers. Thus, while not wishing to be bound by theory, modifications to both non-bridging oxygens, which eliminate the chiral center, e.g. phosphorodithioate formation, can be desirable in that they cannot produce diastereomer mixtures. Thus, the non-bridging oxygens can be independently any one of O, S, Se, B, C, H, N, or OR (R is alkyl or aryl).
- The phosphate linker can also be modified by replacement of bridging oxygen, (i.e. oxygen that links the phosphate to the nucleoside), with nitrogen (bridged phosphoroamidates), sulfur (bridged phosphorothioates) and carbon (bridged methylenephosphonates). The replacement can occur at the either one of the linking oxygens or at both linking oxygens. When the bridging oxygen is the 3′-oxygen of a nucleoside, replacement with carbon is preferred. When the bridging oxygen is the 5′-oxygen of a nucleoside, replacement with nitrogen is preferred.
- Modified phosphate linkages where at least one of the oxygen linked to the phosphate has been replaced or the phosphate group has been replaced by a non-phosphorous group, are also referred to as “non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage” or “non-phosphodiester linker.”
- The phosphate group can be replaced by non-phosphorus containing connectors, e.g. dephospho linkers. Dephospho linkers are also referred to as non-phosphodiester linkers herein. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that since the charged phosphodiester group is the reaction center in nucleolytic degradation, its replacement with neutral structural mimics should impart enhanced nuclease stability. Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable, in some embodiment, to introduce alterations in which the charged phosphate group is replaced by a neutral moiety.
- Examples of moieties which can replace the phosphate group include, but are not limited to, amides (for example amide-3 (3′-CH2—C(═O)—N(H)-5′) and amide-4 (3′-CH2—N(H)—C(═O)-5′)), hydroxylamino, siloxane (dialkylsiloxxane), carboxamide, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, carboxylate ester, thioether, ethylene oxide linker, sulfide, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfonate ester, thioformacetal (3′-S—CH2—O-5′), formacetal (3′-O—CH2—O-5′), oxime, methyleneimino, methykenecarbonylamino, methylenemethylimino (MMI, 3′-CH2—N(CH3)—O-5′), methylenehydrazo, methyl enedimethylhydrazo, methyleneoxymethylimino, ethers (C3′-O—C5′), thioethers (C3′-S—C5′), thioacetamido (C3′-N(H)—C(═O)—CH2—S—C5′, C3′-O—P(O)—O—SS—C5′, C3′-CH2—NH—NH—C5′, 3′-NHP(O)(OCH3)—O-5′ and 3′-NHP(O)(OCH3)—O-5′ and nonionic linkages containing mixed N, O, S and CH2 component parts. See for example, Carbohydrate Modifications in Antisense Research; Y. S. Sanghvi and P. D. Cook Eds. ACS Symposium Series 580; Chapters 3 and 4, (pp. 40-65). Preferred embodiments include methylenemethylimino (MMI), methylenecarbonylamino, amides, carbamate and ethylene oxide linker.
- One skilled in the art is well aware that in certain instances replacement of a non-bridging oxygen can lead to enhanced cleavage of the intersugar linkage by the neighboring 2′-OH, thus in many instances, a modification of a non-bridging oxygen can necessitate modification of 2′-OH, e.g., a modification that does not participate in cleavage of the neighboring intersugar linkage, e.g., arabinose sugar, 2′-O-alkyl, 2′-F, LNA and ENA.
- Preferred non-phosphodiester intersugar linkages include phosphorothioates, phosphorothioates with an at least 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% 95% or more enantiomeric excess of Sp isomer, phosphorothioates with an at least 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% 95% or more enantiomeric excess of Rp isomer, phosphorodithioates, phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotrioesters, alkyl-phosphonaters (e.g., methyl-phosphonate), selenophosphates, phosphoramidates (e.g., N-alkylphosphoramidate), and boranophosphonates.
- Oligonucleotide-mimicking scaffolds can also be constructed wherein the phosphate linker and ribose sugar are replaced by nuclease resistant nucleoside or nucleotide surrogates. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that the absence of a repetitively charged backbone diminishes binding to proteins that recognize polyanions (e.g. nucleases). Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable in some embodiment, to introduce alterations in which the bases are tethered by a neutral surrogate backbone. Examples include the morpholino, cyclobutyl, pyrrolidine, peptide nucleic acid (PNA), aminoethylglycyl PNA (aegPNA) and backnone-extended pyrrolidine PNA (bepPNA) nucleoside surrogates. A preferred surrogate is a PNA surrogate.
- An oligonucleotide can include modification of all or some of the sugar groups of the nucleic acid. E.g., the 2′ hydroxyl group (OH) can be modified or replaced with a number of different “oxy” or “deoxy” substituents. While not being bound by theory, enhanced stability is expected since the hydroxyl can no longer be deprotonated to form a 2′-alkoxide ion. The 2′-alkoxide can catalyze degradation by intramolecular nucleophilic attack on the linker phosphorus atom. Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable to some embodiments to introduce alterations in which alkoxide formation at the 2′ position is not possible.
- Examples of “oxy”-2′ hydroxyl group modifications include alkoxy or aryloxy (OR, e.g., R═H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl or sugar); polyethyleneglycols (PEG), O(CH2CH2O)nCH2CH2OR, n=1-50; “locked” nucleic acids (LNA) in which the the oxygen at the 2′ position is connected by (CH2)n, wherein n=1-4, to the 4′ carbon of the same ribose sugar, preferably n is 1 (LNA) or 2 (ENA); O-AMINE or O—(CH2)nAMINE (n=1-10, AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine or polyamino); and O—CH2CH2(NCH2CH2NMe2)2.
- “Deoxy” modifications include hydrogen (i.e. deoxyribose sugars, which are of particular relevance to the single-strand overhangs); halo (e.g., fluoro); amino (e.g. NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid); NH(CH2CH2NH)nCH2CH2-AMINE (AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino); —NHC(O)R (R=alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl or sugar); cyano; mercapto; alkyl-thio-alkyl; thioalkoxy; thioalkyl; alkyl; cycloalkyl; aryl; alkenyl and alkynyl, which can be optionally substituted with e.g., an amino functionality.
- Other suitable 2′-modifications, e.g., modified MOE, are described in U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/226,017 filed Jul. 16, 2009, contents of which are herein incorporated by reference.
- A modification at the 2′ position can be present in the arabinose configuration The term “arabinose configuration” refers to the placement of a substituent on the C2′ of ribose in the same configuration as the 2′-OH is in the arabinose.
- The sugar group can comprise two different modifications at the same carbon in the sugar, e.g., gem modification. The sugar group can also contain one or more carbons that possess the opposite stereochemical configuration than that of the corresponding carbon in ribose. Thus, an oligonucleotide can include nucleotides containing e.g., arabinose, as the sugar. The monomer can have an alpha linkage at the 1′ position on the sugar, e.g., alpha-nucleosides. The monomer can also have the opposite configuration at the 4′-position, e.g., C5′ and H4′ or substituents replacing them are interchanged with each other. When the C5′ and H4′ or substituents replacing them are interchanged with each other, the sugar is said to be modified at the 4′ position.
- Oligonucleotides can also include abasic sugars, which lack a nucleobase at C-1′ or has other chemical groups in place of a nucleobase at C1′. See for example U.S. Pat. No. 5,998,203, contents of which are herein incorporated in their entirety. These abasic sugars can also be further containing modifications at one or more of the constituent sugar atoms. Oligonucleotides can also contain one or more sugars that are the L isomer, e.g. L-nucleosides. Modification to the sugar group can also include replacement of the 4′-O with a sulfur, optionally substituted nitrogen or CH2 group. In some embodiments, linkage between C1′ and nucleobase is in the a configuration.
- Modifications can also include acyclic nucleotides, wherein a C—C bonds between ribose carbons (e.g., C1′-C2′, C2′-C3′, C3′-C4′, C4′-04′, C1′-O4′) is absent and/or at least one of ribose carbons or oxygen (e.g., C1′, C2′, C3′, C4′ or O4′) are independently or in combination absent from the nucleotide. In some embodiments, acyclic nucleotide is
- wherein B is a modified or unmodified nucleobase, R1 and R2 independently are H, halogen, OR3, or alkyl; and R3 is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl or sugar).
- Preferred sugar modifications are 2′-H, 2′-O-Me (2′-O-methyl), 2′-O-MOE (2′-O-methoxyethyl), 2′-F, 2′-O-[2-(methylamino)-2-oxoethyl] (2′-O-NMA), 2′-S-methyl, 2′-O—CH2-(4′-C) (LNA), 2′-O—CH2CH2-(4′-C) (ENA), 2′-O-aminopropyl (2′-O-AP), 2′-O-dimethylaminoethyl (2′-O-DMAOE), 2′-O-dimethylaminopropyl (2′-O-DMAP), 2′-O-dimethylaminoethyloxyethyl (2′-O-DMAEOE) and gem 2′-OMe/2′F with 2′-O-Me in the arabinose configuration.
- It is to be understood that when a particular nucleotide is linked through its 2′-position to the next nucleotide, the sugar modifications described herein can be placed at the 3′-position of the sugar for that particular nucleotide, e.g., the nucleotide that is linked through its 2′-position. A modification at the 3′ position can be present in the xylose configuration The term “xylose configuration” refers to the placement of a substituent on the C3′ of ribose in the same configuration as the 3′-OH is in the xylose sugar.
- The hydrogen attached to C4′ and/or C1′ can be replaced by a straight- or branched-optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, wherein backbone of the alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl can contain one or more of O, S, S(O), SO2, N(R′), C(O), N(R′)C(O)O, OC(O)N(R′), CH(Z′), phosphorous containing linkage, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclic or optionally substituted cycloalkyl, where R′ is hydrogen, acyl or optionally substituted aliphatic, Z′ is selected from the group consisting of OR11, COR11, CO2R11,
- NR21R31, CONR21R31, CON(H)NR21R31, ONR21R31, CON(H)N═CR41R51, N(R21)C(═NR31)NR21R31, N(R21)C(O)NR21R31, N(R21)C(S)NR21R31, OC(O)NR21R31, SC(O)NR21R31, N(R21)C(S)OR11, N(R21)C(O)OR11, N(R21)C(O)SR11, N(R21)N═CR41R51, ON═CR41R51, SO2R11, SOR11, SR11, and substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic; R21 and R31 for each occurrence are independently hydrogen, acyl, unsubstituted or substituted aliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl heterocyclic, OR11, COR11, CO2R11, or NR11R11′; or R21 and R31, taken together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic ring; R41 and R51 for each occurrence are independently hydrogen, acyl, unsubstituted or substituted aliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, OR11, COR11, or CO2R11, or NR11R11′; and R11 and R11′ are independently hydrogen, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic. In some embodiments, the hydrogen attached to the C4′ of the 5′ terminal nucleotide is replaced.
- In some embodiments, C4′ and C5′ together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic, preferably comprising at least one —PX(Y)—, wherein X is H, OH, OM, SH, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted alkylthio, optionally substituted alkylamino or optionally substituted dialkylamino, where M is independently for each occurrence an alki metal or transition metal with an overall charge of +1; and Y is O, S, or NR′, where R′ is hydrogen, optionally substituted aliphatic. Preferably this modification is at the 5 terminal of the oligonucleotide.
- The 3′ and 5′ ends of an oligonucleotide can be modified. Such modifications can be at the 3′ end, 5′ end or both ends of the molecule. For example, the 3′ and/or 5′ ends of an oligonucleotide can be conjugated to other functional molecular entities such as labeling moieties, e.g., fluorophores (e.g., pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes) or protecting groups (based e.g., on sulfur, silicon, boron or ester). The functional molecular entities can be attached to the sugar through a phosphate group and/or a linker. The terminal atom of the linker can connect to or replace the linking atom of the phosphate group or the C-3′ or C-5′ O, N, S or C group of the sugar. Alternatively, the linker can connect to or replace the terminal atom of a nucleotide surrogate (e.g., PNAs).
- When a linker/phosphate-functional molecular entity-linker/phosphate array is interposed between two strands of a dsRNA, this array can substitute for a hairpin RNA loop in a hairpin-type RNA agent.
- Terminal modifications useful for modulating activity include modification of the 5′ end with phosphate or phosphate analogs. For example, in some embodiments antisense strands of dsRNAs, are 5′ phosphorylated or include a phosphoryl analog at the 5′ terminus. 5′-phosphate modifications include those which are compatible with RISC mediated gene silencing. Modifications at the 5′-terminal end can also be useful in stimulating or inhibiting the immune system of a subject. In some embodiments, the 5′-end of the oligonucleotide comprises the modification
- wherein W, X and Y are each independently selected from the group consisting of O, OR (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl), S, Se, BR3 (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl), BH3 −, C (i.e. an alkyl group, an aryl group, etc. . . . ), H, NR2 (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl), or OR (R is hydrogen, alkyl or aryl); A and Z are each independently for each occurrence absent, O, S, CH2, NR (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl), or optionally substituted alkylene, wherein backbone of the alkylene can comprise one or more of O, S, SS and NR (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl) internally and/or at the end; and n is 0-2. In some embodiments n is 1 or 2. It is understood that A is replacing the oxygen linked to 5′ carbon of sugar. When n is 0, W and Y together with the P to which they are attached can form an optionally substituted 5-8 membered heterocyclic, wherein W an Y are each independently O, S, NR′ or alkylene. Preferably the heterocyclic is substituted with an aryl or heteroaryl. In some embodiments, one or both hydrogen on C5′ of the 5′-terminal nucleotides are replaced with a halogen, e.g., F.
- Exemplary 5′-modifications include, but are not limited to, 5′-monophosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O-5′); 5′-diphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-triphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-monothiophosphate (phosphorothioate; (HO)2(S)P—O-5′); 5′-monodithiophosphate (phosphorodithioate; (HO)(HS)(S)P—O-5′), 5′-phosphorothiolate ((HO)2(O)P—S-5′); 5′-alpha-thiotriphosphate; 5′-beta-thiotriphosphate; 5′-gamma-thiotriphosphate; 5′-phosphoramidates ((HO)2(O)P—NH-5′, (HO)(NH2)(O)P—O-5′). Other 5′-modification include 5′-alkylphosphonates (R(OH)(O)P—O-5′, R=alkyl, e.g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, propyl, etc. . . . ), 5′-alkyletherphosphonates (R(OH)(O)P—O-5′, R=alkylether, e.g., methoxymethyl (CH2OMe), ethoxymethyl, etc. . . . ). Other exemplary 5′-modifications include where Z is optionally substituted alkyl at least once, e.g., ((HO)2(X)P—O[—(CH2)a—O—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′, ((HO)2(X)P—O[—(CH2)a—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′, ((HO)2(X)P—[—(CH2)a—O—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′; dialkyl terminal phosphates and phosphate mimics: HO[—(CH2)a—O—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′, H2N[—(CH2)a—O—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′, H[—(CH2)a—O—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′, Me2N[—(CH2)a—O—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′, HO[—(CH2)a—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′, H2N[—(CH2)a—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′, H[—(CH2)a—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′, Me2N[—(CH2)a—P(X)(OH)—O]b-5′, wherein a and bare each independently 1-10. Other embodiments, include replacement of oxygen and/or sulfur with BH3, BH3 − and/or Se.
- Terminal modifications can also be useful for monitoring distribution, and in such cases the preferred groups to be added include fluorophores, e.g., fluorescein or an Alexa dye, e.g., Alexa 488. Terminal modifications can also be useful for enhancing uptake, useful modifications for this include targeting ligands. Terminal modifications can also be useful for cross-linking an oligonucleotide to another moiety; modifications useful for this include mitomycin C, psoralen, and derivatives thereof.
- Adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine and uracil are the most common bases (or nucleobases) found in nucleic acids. These bases can be modified or replaced to provide oligonucleotides having improved properties. For example, nuclease resistant oligonucleotides can be prepared with these bases or with synthetic and natural nucleobases (e.g., inosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, isoguanisine, or tubercidine) and any one of the above modifications. Alternatively, substituted or modified analogs of any of the above bases and “universal bases” can be employed. When a natural base is replaced by a non-natural and/or universal base, the nucleotide is said to comprise a modified nucleobase and/or a nucleobase modification herein. Modified nucleobase and/or nucleobase modifications also include natural, non-natural and universal bases, which comprise conjugated moieties, e.g. a ligand described herein. Preferred conjugate moieties for conjugation with nucleobases include cationic amino groups which can be conjugated to the nucleobase via an appropriate alkyl, alkenyl or a linker with an amide linkage.
- An oligonucleotide can also include nucleobase (often referred to in the art simply as “base”) modifications or substitutions. As used herein, “unmodified” or “natural” nucleobases include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases thymine (T), cytosine (C) and uracil (U). Modified nucleobases include other synthetic and natural nucleobases such as inosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, isoguanisine, tubercidine, 2-(halo)adenine, 2-(alkyl)adenine, 2-(propyl)adenine, 2-(amino)adenine, 2-(aminoalkyl)adenine, 2-(aminopropyl)adenine, 2-(methylthio)-N6-(isopentenyl)adenine, 6-(alkyl)adenine, 6-(methyl)adenine, 7-(deaza)adenine, 8-(alkenyl)adenine, 8-(alkyl)adenine, 8-(alkynyl)adenine, 8-(amino)adenine, 8-(halo)adenine, 8-(hydroxyl)adenine, 8-(thioalkyl)adenine, 8-(thiol)adenine, N6-(isopentyl)adenine, N6-(methyl)adenine, N6,N6-(dimethyl)adenine, 2-(alkyl)guanine, 2-(propyl)guanine, 6-(alkyl)guanine, 6-(methyl)guanine, 7-(alkyl)guanine, 7-(methyl)guanine, 7-(deaza)guanine, 8-(alkyl)guanine, 8-(alkenyl)guanine, 8-(alkynyl)guanine, 8-(amino)guanine, 8-(halo)guanine, 8-(hydroxyl)guanine, 8-(thioalkyl)guanine, 8-(thiol)guanine, N-(methyl)guanine, 2-(thio)cytosine, 3-(deaza)-S-(aza)cytosine, 3-(alkyl)cytosine, 3-(methyl)cytosine, 5-(alkyl)cytosine, 5-(alkynyl)cytosine, 5-(halo)cytosine, 5-(methyl)cytosine, 5-(propynyl)cytosine, 5-(propynyl)cytosine, 5-(trifluoromethyl)cytosine, 6-(azo)cytosine, N4-(acetyl)cytosine, 3-(3-amino-3-carboxypropyl)uracil, 2-(thio)uracil, 5-(methyl)-2-(thio)uracil, 5-(methylaminomethyl)-2-(thio)uracil, 4-(thio)uracil, 5-(methyl)-4-(thio)uracil, 5-(methylaminomethyl)-4-(thio)uracil, 5-(methyl)-2,4-(dithio)uracil, 5-(methylaminomethyl)-2,4-(dithio)uracil, 5-(2-aminopropyl)uracil, 5-(alkyl)uracil, 5-(alkynyl)uracil, 5-(allylamino)uracil, 5-(aminoallyl)uracil, 5-(aminoalkyl)uracil, 5-(guanidiniumalkyl)uracil, 5-(1,3-diazole-1-alkyl)uracil, 5-(cyanoalkyl)uracil, 5-(dialkylaminoalkyl)uracil, 5-(dimethylaminoalkyl)uracil, 5-(halo)uracil, 5-(methoxy)uracil, uracil-S-oxyacetic acid, 5-(methoxycarbonylmethyl)-2-(thio)uracil, 5-(methoxycarbonyl-methyl)uracil, 5-(propynyl)uracil, 5-(propynyl)uracil, 5-(trifluoromethyl)uracil, 6-(azo)uracil, dihydrouracil, N3-(methyl)uracil, 5-uracil (i.e., pseudouracil), 2-(thio)pseudouracil, 4-(thio)pseudouracil, 2,4-(dithio)psuedouracil, 5-(alkyl)pseudouracil, 5-(methyl)pseudouracil, 5-(alkyl)-2-(thio)pseudouracil, 5-(methyl)-2-(thio)pseudouracil, 5-(alkyl)-4-(thio)pseudouracil, 5-(methyl)-4-(thio)pseudouracil, 5-(alkyl)-2,4-(dithio)pseudouracil, 5-(methyl)-2,4-(dithio)pseudouracil, 1-substituted pseudouracil, 1-substituted 2(thio)-pseudouracil, 1-substituted 4-(thio)pseudouracil, 1-substituted 2,4-(dithio)pseudouracil, 1-(aminocarbonylethylenyl)-pseudouracil, 1-(aminocarbonylethylenyl)-2(thio)-pseudouracil, 1-(aminocarbonylethylenyl)-4-(thio)pseudouracil, 1-(aminocarbonylethylenyl)-2,4-(dithio)pseudouracil, 1-(aminoalkylaminocarbonylethylenyl)-pseudouracil, 1-(aminoalkylamino-carbonylethylenyl)-2(thio)-pseudouracil, 1-(aminoalkylaminocarbonylethylenyl)-4-(thio)pseudouracil, 1-(aminoalkylaminocarbonylethylenyl)-2,4-(dithio)pseudouracil, 1,3-(diaza)-2-(oxo)-phenoxazin-1-yl, 1-(aza)-2-(thio)-3-(aza)-phenoxazin-1-yl, 1,3-(diaza)-2-(oxo)-phenthiazin-1-yl, 1-(aza)-2-(thio)-3-(aza)-phenthiazin-1-yl, 7-substituted 1,3-(diaza)-2-(oxo)-phenoxazin-1-yl, 7-substituted 1-(aza)-2-(thio)-3-(aza)-phenoxazin-1-yl, 7-substituted 1,3-(diaza)-2-(oxo)-phenthiazin-1-yl, 7-substituted 1-(aza)-2-(thio)-3-(aza)-phenthiazin-1-yl, 7-(aminoalkylhydroxy)-1,3-(diaza)-2-(oxo)-phenoxazin-1-yl, 7-(aminoalkylhydroxy)-1-(aza)-2-(thio)-3-(aza)-phenoxazin-1-yl, 7-(aminoalkylhydroxy)-1,3-(diaza)-2-(oxo)-phenthiazin-1-yl, 7-(aminoalkylhydroxy)-1-(aza)-2-(thio)-3-(aza)-phenthiazin-1-yl, 7-(guanidiniumalkylhydroxy)-1,3-(diaza)-2-(oxo)-phenoxazin-1-yl, 7-(guanidiniumalkylhydroxy)-1-(aza)-2-(thio)-3-(aza)-phenoxazin-1-yl, 7-(guanidiniumalkyl-hydroxy)-1,3-(diaza)-2-(oxo)-phenthiazin-1-yl, 7-(guanidiniumalkylhydroxy)-1-(aza)-2-(thio)-3-(aza)-phenthiazin-1-yl, 1,3,5-(triaza)-2,6-(dioxa)-naphthalene, inosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, tubercidine, isoguanisine, inosinyl, 2-aza-inosinyl, 7-deaza-inosinyl, nitroimidazolyl, nitropyrazolyl, nitrobenzimidazolyl, nitroindazolyl, aminoindolyl, pyrrolopyrimidinyl, 3-(methyl)isocarbostyrilyl, 5-(methyl)isocarbostyrilyl, 3-(methyl)-7-(propynyl)isocarbostyrilyl, 7-(aza)indolyl, 6-(methyl)-7-(aza)indolyl, imidizopyridinyl, 9-(methyl)-imidizopyridinyl, pyrrolopyrizinyl, isocarbostyrilyl, 7-(propynyl)isocarbostyrilyl, propynyl-7-(aza)indolyl, 2,4,5-(trimethyl)phenyl, 4-(methyl)indolyl, 4,6-(dimethyl)indolyl, phenyl, napthalenyl, anthracenyl, phenanthracenyl, pyrenyl, stilbenyl, tetracenyl, pentacenyl, difluorotolyl, 4-(fluoro)-6-(methyl)benzimidazole, 4-(methyl)benzimidazole, 6-(azo)thymine, 2-pyridinone, 5-nitroindole, 3-nitropyrrole, 6-(aza)pyrimidine, 2-(amino)purine, 2,6-(diamino)purine, 5-substituted pyrimidines, N2-substituted purines, N6-substituted purines, O6-substituted purines, substituted 1,2,4-triazoles, pyrrolo-pyrimidin-2-on-3-yl, 6-phenyl-pyrrolo-pyrimidin-2-on-3-yl, para-substituted-6-phenyl-pyrrolo-pyrimidin-2-on-3-yl, ortho-substituted-6-phenyl-pyrrolo-pyrimidin-2-on-3-yl, bis-ortho-substituted-6-phenyl-pyrrolo-pyrimidin-2-on-3-yl, para-(aminoalkylhydroxy)-6-phenyl-pyrrolo-pyrimidin-2-on-3-yl, ortho-(aminoalkylhydroxy)-6-phenyl-pyrrolo-pyrimidin-2-on-3-yl, bis-ortho-(aminoalkylhydroxy)-6-phenyl-pyrrolo-pyrimidin-2-on-3-yl, pyridopyrimidin-3-yl, 2-oxo-7-amino-pyridopyrimidin-3-yl, 2-oxo-pyridopyrimidine-3-yl, or any O-alkylated or N-alkylated derivatives thereof. Alternatively, substituted or modified analogs of any of the above bases and “universal bases” can be employed.
- As used herein, a universal nucleobase is any modified or nucleobase that can base pair with all of the four naturally occurring nucleobases without substantially affecting the melting behavior, recognition by intracellular enzymes or activity of the oligonucleotide duplex. Some exemplary universal nucleobases include, but are not limited to, 2,4-difluorotoluene, nitropyrrolyl, nitroindolyl, 8-aza-7-deazaadenine, 4-fluoro-6-methylbenzimidazle, 4-methylbenzimidazle, 3-methyl isocarbostyrilyl, 5-methyl isocarbostyrilyl, 3-methyl-7-propynyl isocarbostyrilyl, 7-azaindolyl, 6-methyl-7-azaindolyl, imidizopyridinyl, 9-methyl-imidizopyridinyl, pyrrolopyrizinyl, isocarbostyrilyl, 7-propynyl isocarbostyrilyl, propynyl-7-azaindolyl, 2,4,5-trimethylphenyl, 4-methylinolyl, 4,6-dimethylindolyl, phenyl, napthalenyl, anthracenyl, phenanthracenyl, pyrenyl, stilbenyl, tetracenyl, pentacenyl, and structural derivatives thereof (see for example, Loakes, 2001, Nucleic Acids Research, 29, 2437-2447).
- Further nucleobases include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,687,808; those disclosed in International Application No. PCT/US09/038425, filed Mar. 26, 2009; those disclosed in the Concise Encyclopedia Of Polymer Science And Engineering, pages 858-859, Kroschwitz, J. I., ed. John Wiley & Sons, 1990; those disclosed by English et al., Angewandte Chemie, International Edition, 1991, 30, 613; those disclosed in Modified Nucleosides in Biochemistry, Biotechnology and Medicine, Herdewijin, P. Ed. Wiley-VCH, 2008; and those disclosed by Sanghvi, Y. S., Chapter 15, dsRNA Research and Applications, pages 289-302, Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B., Eds., CRC Press, 1993. Contents of all of the above are herein incorporated by reference.
- The oligonucleotides used in accordance with this invention can be synthesized with solid phase synthesis, see for example “Oligonucleotide synthesis, a practical approach”, Ed. M. J. Gait, IRL Press, 1984; “Oligonucleotides and Analogues, A Practical Approach”, Ed. F. Eckstein, IRL Press, 1991 (especially Chapter 1, Modern machine-aided methods of oligodeoxyribonucleotide synthesis, Chapter 2, Oligoribonucleotide synthesis, Chapter 3, 2′-O-Methyloligoribonucleotides: synthesis and applications, Chapter 4, Phosphorothioate oligonucleotides, Chapter 5, Synthesis of oligonucleotide phosphorodithioates, Chapter 6, Synthesis of oligo-2′-deoxyribonucleoside methylphosphonates, and. Chapter 7, Oligodeoxynucleotides containing modified bases. Other particularly useful synthetic procedures, reagents, blocking groups and reaction conditions are described in Martin, P., Helv. Chim. Acta, 1995, 78, 486-504; Beaucage, S. L. and Iyer, R. P., Tetrahedron, 1992, 48, 2223-2311 and Beaucage, S. L. and Iyer, R. P., Tetrahedron, 1993, 49, 6123-6194, or references referred to therein. Modification described in WO 00/44895, WO01/75164, or WO02/44321 can be used herein. The disclosure of all publications, patents, and published patent applications listed herein are hereby incorporated by reference.
- The preparation of phosphinate oligonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,508,270. The preparation of alkyl phosphonate oligonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,469,863. The preparation of phosphoramidite oligonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,256,775 or U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,878. The preparation of phosphotriester oligonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,023,243. The preparation of boranophosphate oligonucleotide is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,130,302 and 5,177,198. The preparation of 3′-Deoxy-3′-amino phosphoramidate oligonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,476,925. 3′-Deoxy-3′-methylenephosphonate oligonucleotides is described in An, H, et al. J. Org. Chem. 2001, 66, 2789-2801. Preparation of sulfur bridged nucleotides is described in Sproat et al. Nucleosides Nucleotides 1988, 7,651 and Crosstick et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1989, 30, 4693.
- Modifications to the 2′ modifications can be found in Verma, S. et al. Annu. Rev. Biochem. 1998, 67, 99-134 and all references therein. Specific modifications to the ribose can be found in the following references: 2′-fluoro (Kawasaki et. al., J Med. Chem., 1993, 36, 831-841), 2′-MOE (Martin, P. Helv. Chim. Acta 1996, 79, 1930-1938), “LNA” (Wengel, J. Acc. Chem. Res. 1999, 32, 301-310).
- Methylenemethylimino linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as MMI linked oligonucleosides, methylenedimethylhydrazo linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as MDH linked oligonucleosides, and methylenecarbonylamino linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as amide-3 linked oligonucleosides, and methyleneaminocarbonyl linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as amide-4 linked oligonucleosides as well as mixed intersugar linkage compounds having, as for instance, alternating MMI and PO or PS linkages can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,378,825, 5,386,023, 5,489,677 and in International Application Nos. PCT/US92/04294 and PCT/US92/04305 (published as WO 92/20822 WO and 92/20823, respectively). Formacetal and thioformacetal linked oligonucleosides can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,264,562 and 5,264,564. Ethylene oxide linked oligonucleosides can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,618. Siloxane replacements are described in Cormier, J. F. et al. Nucleic Acids Res. 1988, 16, 4583. Carbonate replacements are described in Tittensor, J. R. J. Chem. Soc. C 1971, 1933. Carboxymethyl replacements are described in Edge, M. D. et al. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. 1 1972, 1991. Carbamate replacements are described in Stirchak, E. P. Nucleic Acids Res. 1989, 17, 6129.
- Cyclobutyl sugar surrogate compounds can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,359,044. Pyrrolidine sugar surrogate can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,519,134. Morpholino sugar surrogates can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,142,047 and 5,235,033, and other related patent disclosures. Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNAs) are known per se and can be prepared in accordance with any of the various procedures referred to in Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNA): Synthesis, Properties and Potential Applications, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry, 1996, 4, 5-23. They can also be prepared in accordance with U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,083.
- Terminal modifications are described in Manoharan, M. et al. Antisense and Nucleic Acid Drug Development 12, 103-128 (2002) and references therein.
- Representative U.S. patents that teach the preparation of certain of the above noted modified nucleobases as well as other modified nucleobases include, but are not limited to, the above noted U.S. Pat. No. 3,687,808, as well as U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,845,205; 5,130,30; 5,134,066; 5,175,273; 5,367,066; 5,432,272; 5,457,187; 5,457,191; 5,459,255; 5,484,908; 5,502,177; 5,525,711; 5,552,540; 5,587,469; 5,594,121, 5,596,091; 5,614,617; 5,681,941; 5,750,692; 6,015,886; 6,147,200; 6,166,197; 6,222,025; 6,235,887; 6,380,368; 6,528,640; 6,639,062; 6,617,438; 7,045,610; 7,427,672; and 7,495,088, each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- Placement of Modifications within an Oligonucleotide
- As oligonucleotides are polymers of subunits or monomers, many of the modifications described herein can occur at a position which is repeated within an oligonucleotide, e.g., a modification of a nucleobase, a sugar, a phosphate moiety, or the non-bridging oxygen of a phosphate moiety. It is not necessary for all positions in a given oligonucleotide to be uniformly modified, and in fact more than one of the aforementioned modifications can be incorporated in a single oligonucleotide or even at a single nucleoside within an oligonucleotide.
- In some cases the modification will occur at all of the subject positions in the oligonucleotide but in many, and in fact in most cases it will not. By way of example, a modification can occur at a 3′ or 5′ terminal position, can occur in the internal region, can occur in 3′, 5′ or both terminal regions, e.g. at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides of an oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the terminal nucleotide (e.g., 3′-terminal or preferably 5′-terminal) does not comprise a modification.
- In some embodiments, the terminal nucleotide or the last 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides of at least one end of the oligonucleotide all comprise at least one modification. In some embodiments, the modification is same. In some embodiments, the terminal nucleotide or the last 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides at both ends of the oligonucleotide all comprise at least one modification. It is to be understood that type of modification and number of modified nucleotides on one end is independent of type of modification and number of modified nucleotides on the other end.
- A modification can occur in a double strand region, a single strand region, or in both. A modification can occur in the double strand region of an oligonucleotide or can occur in a single strand region of an oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, a modification described herein does not occur in the region corresponding to the target cleavage site region. For example, a phosphorothioate modification at a non-bridging oxygen position can occur at one or both termini, can occur in a terminal regions, e.g., at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides of a strand, or can occur in double strand and single strand regions, particularly at termini.
- Some modifications can preferably be included on an oligonucleotide at a particular location, e.g., at an internal position of a strand, or on the 5′ or 3′ end of an oligonucleotide. A preferred location of a modification on an oligonucleotide, can confer preferred properties on the oligonucleotide. For example, preferred locations of particular modifications can confer optimum gene silencing properties, or increased resistance to endonuclease or exonuclease activity.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), of 5′-5′, 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-5′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage. In some embodiments, the last nucleotide on the terminal end is linked via a 5′-5′, 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-5′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage to the rest of the oligonucleotide. In some preferred embodiments, the last nucleotide on both the terminal ends is linked via a 5′-5′, 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage to the rest of the oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, at least one 5′-5′, 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-5′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage is a non-phosphodiester linkage.
- An oligonucleotide can comprise at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 more), 5′-pyrimidine-purine-3′ (5′-PyPu-3′) and/or 5′-pyrimidine-pyrimidine-3′ (5′-PyPy-3′) dinucleotide sequence motif, wherein the 5′-most pyrimidine ribose sugar is modified at the 2′-position. Preferred 2′-modifications include, but are not limited to, 2′-H, 2′-O-Me (2′-O-methyl), 2′-O-MOE (2′-O-methoxyethyl), 2′-F, 2′-O-[2-(methylamino)-2-oxoethyl] (2′-O-NMA), 2′-O—CH2CH2N(CH2CH2NMe2)2, 2′-S-methyl, 2′-O—CH2-(4′-C) (LNA) and 2′-O—CH2CH2-(4′-C) (ENA). Double-stranded oligonucleotides including these modifications are particularly stabilized against endonuclease activity. In some embodiments, the 3′ most nucleotide in the dinucleotide motif also comprises a ribose sugar which is modified at the 2′-position. When both nucleotides of the dinucleotide motif comprise ribose sugar with 2′-modification, the modification can be the same or different on the two nucleotides. In another embodiment, the 5′ most pyrimidine in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif in the oligonucleotide comprises a ribose sugar which is modified at the 2′-position. In yet another embodiment, both nucleotides in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprise a ribose sugar comprising a 2′-modification. In yet another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine. In yet still another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the intersugar linkage between the two nucleotides is not a phosphodiester. In some embodiments, the intersugar linkage is a non-phosphodiester linkage described herein. Preferred non-phosphodiester linkages include, but are not limited to, phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, N-alkyl phosphoramidate, alkyl phosphonate (e.g., methyl phosphonate) and borano phosphonate. In some embodiments, the intersugar linkage between the two nucleotides in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif is a non-phosphodiester linkage. In another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine. In yet another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein at least one of the nucleotides comprises a nucleobase modification, e.g. a modified nucleobase or a nucleobase with one or more conjugated moieties. In some embodiments, the 5′ most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide sequence motif comprises the nucleobase modification. In another embodiment, the 3′ most nucleotide in the dinucleotide motif also comprises the nucleobase modification. In yet another embodiment, both nucleotides in the dinucleotide motif comprise a nucleobase modification. In some embodiments, at least one nucleotides in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprises a nucleobase modification. In still another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine. In yet still another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the 5′-most pyrimidine ribose sugar is modified at the 2′-position and the oligonucleotide further comprises at least one of a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, a nucleobase modification or a 2′ modification. In some embodiments, the 5′-most pyrimidines in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprise a ribose sugar modified at the 2′-position, and the oligonucleotide further comprises at least one of a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, a nucleobase modification or a 2′ modification. In further embodiments, the non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, the nucleobase modification and/or the 2′-modification is comprised within the dinucleotide motif, e.g. the intersugar linkage between the two nucleosides of the dinucleotide motif is a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, one or both nucleosides comprise a nucleobase modification and/or the 3′-nucleoside of the motif comprises a 2′-modification. In some embodiments, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine. In another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif, wherein the ribose sugar of the 5′-most pyrimidine is replaced by a non ribose moiety, e.g., a six membered ring. In some embodiments, the 5′-most pyrimidines all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprise a non ribose sugar, e.g. a six membered ring. In some embodiments, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine. In another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10, 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the C5 position of the 5′-most pyrimidine is conjugated with a ligand, e.g. a cationic group, e.g. a cationic amino group. In some embodiments, the 5′-most pyrimidines all occurrences of dinucleotide motif are conjugated with a ligand, at the C5 position, wherein each ligand is selected independently of other ligands. In another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine. In yet another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ dinucleotide wherein the N2,N6, and/or C8 position of the purine is conjugated with a ligand, e.g. a cationic group, e.g. a cationic amino group. In some embodiments, the 3′-most purines in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif are conjugated with a ligand at the N2,N6, and/or C8 positions, wherein each ligand is selected independently of other ligands. In another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine. In yet another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein both nucleotides comprise nucleobase modifications, e.g., the C5 position of the pyrimidine and the N2,N6, and/or C8 position of the purine is conjugated with a ligand, e.g. a cationic group, wherein each ligand is selected independently. In some embodiments, both nucleotides in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif are conjugated with a ligand, wherein each ligand is selected independently of other ligands. In another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is uridine. In yet another embodiment, the 5′-most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif is cytidine.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein at least one of the nucleotides comprises a nucleobase modification and neither nucleotide comprises a modification at the 2′ position of the ribose sugar. In another embodiment, at least one nucleotide in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprise a nucleobase modification and neither nucleotide comprises a modification at the 2′ position of the ribose sugar. In yet another embodiment, both nucleotides in the dinucleotide motif comprise a nucleobase modification and neither nucleotide comprises a modification at the 2′ position of the ribose sugar.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the intersugar linkage between the two nucleotides is not a phosphodiester and neither nucleotide comprises a modification at the 2′ position of the ribose sugar. In some embodiments, the intersugar linkage is a non-phosphodiester linkage described herein. In some embodiments, the intersugar linkage between the two nucleotides in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif is a non-phosphodiester linkage and neither nucleotide comprises a modification at the 2′ position of the ribose sugar.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′ dinucleotide motif wherein the 5′-most pyrimidine comprises a modification at the 2′-position, the intersugar linkage between the two nucleosides is a non-phosphodiester linkage and at least one of the nucleotides comprises a nucleobase modification. In some embodiments, the 5′ most pyrimidine in the dinucleotide motif comprises the nucleobase modification. In another embodiment, the 3′ most nucleotide in the dinucleotide motif comprises the nucleobase modification. In yet another embodiment, both the nucleotides in the dinucleotide motif comprise the nucleobase modification. In yet still another embodiment, the 5′ most pyrimidine in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprises a 2′-modified ribose sugar, intersugar linkage between the two nucleosides is a non-phosphodiester linkage and at least one of the nucleosides comprises a nucleobase modification.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more), 5′-PyPu-3′ and/or 5′-PyPy-3′dinucleotide motif wherein the 3′ most nucleoside comprises a modification at the 2′-position, intersugar linkage between the two nucleosides is a non-phosphodiester linkage and at least one of the nucleosides comprises a nucleobase modification. In some embodiments, the 5′-most nucleoside in the dinucleotide motif comprises the nucleobase modification. In another embodiment, the 3′-most nucleoside in the dinucleotide motif comprises the nucleobase modification. In yet another embodiment, both nucleosides in the dinucleotide comprise the nucleobase modification. In yet still another embodiment, the 3′ most nucleoside in all occurrences of the dinucleotide motif comprises a 2′-modified ribose sugar, intersugar linkage between the two nucleotides is a non-phosphodiester linkage and at least one of the nucleosides comprises a nucleobase modification.
- In some embodiments, oligonucleotide comprises a motif selected from the group consisting of: 2′-modified uridines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-uridine-adenosine-3′ (5′-UA-3′), 2′-modified uridines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-uridine-guanosine-3′ (5′-UG-3′), 2′-modified cytidines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-cytidine-adenosine-3′ (5′-CA-3′), 2′-modified cytidines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-cytidine-Guanosine-3′ (5′-CA-3′), 2′-modified 5′-most uridines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-uridine-uridine-3′ (5′-UU-3′), 2′-modified 5′-most cytidines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-cytidine-cytidine-3′ (5′-CC-3′), 2′-modified cytidines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-cytidine-uridine-3′ (5′-CU-3′), 2′-modified uridines in all occurrences of the sequence motif 5′-uridine-cytidine-3′ (5′-UC-3′), and combinations thereof; and wherein the oligonucleotide further comprises at least one non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, nucleobase modification and/or sugar modification, e.g. a 2′ sugar modification. Preferably, the non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage, nucleobase modification and/or sugar modification is within the dinucleotide motif.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises a 5′-purine-purine-3′ (5′-PuPu-3′) dinucleotide motif at the 5′ and/or 3′ terminal end, wherein both nucleoside sugars are modified, e.g., 2′-modified. In some embodiments, at least one of the purines is modified at the 2, 6, 7, 8, N2 exocyclic, and/or N6 exocyclic positions, or combinations thereof. In another embodiment, the intersugar linkage between the purines is a non-phosphodiester linkage.
- In some embodiments, the 5′ terminal nucleoside of the oligonucleotide comprises a sugar modification, e.g., a 2′ modification, a 4′ modification or an O4′ modification, e.g., replacement of O4′ with S, substituted N, NH or CH2. In some embodiments, the 5′ terminal nucleotide further comprises a modified nucleobase or nucleobase modification.
- Double-stranded oligonucleotides having at least one single-stranded nucleotide overhang have unexpectedly superior inhibitory properties than their blunt-ended counterparts. As used herein, the term “overhang” refers to a double-stranded structure where at least one end of one strand is longer than the corresponding end of the other strand forming the double-stranded structure. Generally, the single-stranded overhang is located at the 3-terminal end of the antisense strand or, alternatively, at the 3′-terminal end of the sense strand. The double-stranded oligonucleotide can also have a blunt end, generally located at the 5′-end of the antisense strand. Generally, the antisense strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide has a single-stranded overhang at the 3′-end, and the 5′-end is blunt.
- In some embodiments, at least one end of the double-stranded region has a single-stranded nucleotide overhang of 1 to 4, generally 1 or 2 nucleotides. In some embodiment, both ends of the double-stranded region have a single-stranded nucleotide overhang of 1 to 4, generally 1 or 2 nucleotides.
- In some embodiments it is particularly preferred, e.g., to enhance stability, to include particular nucleobases in the single-stranded overhangs, or to include modified nucleotides or nucleotide surrogates, in single-strand overhangs. For example, it can be desirable to include purine nucleotides in overhangs. In some embodiments all or some of the bases in the single strand overhang will be modified, e.g., with a modification described herein. Modifications in the single-stranded overhangs can include, e.g., the use of modifications at the 2′ OH group of the ribose sugar, e.g., the use of deoxyribonucleotides, e.g., deoxythymidine, instead of ribonucleotides, and modifications in the phosphate group, e.g., phosphothioate modifications. Overhangs need not be homologous with the target sequence. In some embodiments, the single strand overhangs are asymmetrically modified with a modification described herein, e.g. a first single stand overhang comprises a modification that is not present in a second single strand overhang. In some embodiments, the overhang comprises at least one 5′-5′, 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-5′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage. In some embodiments, the single stranded overhang is linked via a 3′-3′, 3′-2′, 2′-5′, 2′-3′ or 2′-2′ intersugar linkage to the rest of the oligonucleotide.
- In some embodiments, the unpaired nucleotide adjacent to the terminal nucleotide base pair on the end of the double-stranded region is a purine. In some embodiments, the single-stranded overhang has the sequence 5′-GCNN-3′, wherein N is independently for each occurrence, A, G, C, U, dT, dU or absent. In some embodiment, the single-stranded overhang has the sequence 5′-NN-3′, wherein N is a modified or unmodified nucleotide described herein. In one preferred embodiment, the single-stranded overhang has the sequence 5′-dTdT-3′ (dT=deoxythymidine). In another preferred embodiment, the single-stranded overhang has the sequence 5′-dTdT-3′ (dT=deoxy thymidine) and the internucleotide linkage between the dTs is a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage.
- In some embodiments, the antisense strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide has 1-10 nucleotide single-stranded overhang at each of the 3′ end and the 5′ end over the sense strand. In another embodiment, the sense strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide has 1-10 nucleotide single-stranded overhang at each of the 3′ end and the 5′ end over the antisense strand.
- The antisense strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide can contain one or more mismatches to the target sequence. In a preferred embodiment, the antisense strand contains no more than 3 mismatches. If the antisense strand contains mismatches to a target sequence, it is preferable that the area of mismatch not be located in the center of the region of complementarity between the antisense strand and the target sequence. If the antisense strand contains mismatches to the target sequence, it is preferable that the mismatch be restricted to 5 nucleotides from either end, for example 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 nucleotide from either the 5′ or 3′ end of the region of complementarity between the antisense strand and the target sequence. Methods known in the art can be used to determine whether a double-stranded oligonucleotide containing a mismatch to a target sequence is effective in inhibiting the expression of the target gene.
- In some embodiment, the sense-strand comprises a mismatch to the antisense strand. In some embodiments, the sense strand comprises no more than 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 mismatches to the antisense strand. In preferred embodiments, the sense strand comprises no more than 3 mismatches to the antisense strand.
- In some embodiments, the sense-strand comprises a mismatch to the antisense strand and the mismatch is within the 5 nucleotides from the 3′-end of the sense strand, for example 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 nucleotide from the end of the region of complementarity between the sense and the antisense strands.
- In some embodiments, the sense-strand comprises a mismatch to the antisense strand and the mismatch is located in the target cleavage site region. In some embodiments, the sense strand comprises a nucleobase modification, e.g. an optionally substituted natural or non-natural nucleobase, a universal nucleobase, in the target cleavage site region.
- The “target cleavage site” herein means the intersugar linkage in the target gene, e.g. target mRNA, or the sense strand that is cleaved by the RISC mechanism by utilizing the RNAi agent. And the “target cleavage site region” comprises at least one or at least two nucleotides on 3′, 5′ or both sides of the cleavage site. Preferably, the target cleavage site region comprises two nucleotides on both sides of the cleavage site. For the sense strand, the target cleavage site is the intersugar linkage in the sense strand that would get cleaved if the sense strand itself was the target to be cleaved by the RNAi mechanism. The target cleavage site can be determined using methods known in the art, for example the 5′-RACE assay as detailed in Soutschek et al., Nature (2004) 432, 173-178. Without wishing to be bound by theory, the cleavage site region for a conical double stranded RNAi agent comprising two 21-nucleotides long strands (wherein the strands form a double stranded region of 19 consecutive nucleotide base pairs having 2-nucleotide single stranded overhangs at the 3′-ends), the cleavage site region corresponds to positions 9-12 from the 5′-end of the sense strand.
- In some embodiments, at least one of antisense strand or target sequence strand has at least one stretch of 1-5 single-stranded nucleotides in the region of complementarity between the antisense strand and the target sequence. In some embodiments, both the antisense strand and the target sequence strand have at least one stretch of 1-5 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) single-stranded nucleotides in the region of complementarity between the antisense strand and the target sequence. When both strands have a stretch of 1-5 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) single-stranded nucleotides in the double stranded region, such single-stranded nucleotides can be opposite to each other (e.g., a stretch of mismatches) or they can be located such that the second strand has no single-stranded nucleotides opposite to the single-stranded oligonucleotides of the first strand and vice versa (e.g., a single-stranded loop). Location of the single-stranded nucleotides is chosen as to minimize any deleterious effect on the gene silencing activity of the antisense strand. In some embodiments, the single-stranded nucleotides are present within 8 nucleotides from either end, for example 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2 nucleotide from either the 5′ or 3′ end of the region of complementarity between the antisense strand and the target sequence. In some embodiments, the antisense strand comprises the stretch of single-stranded nucleotides and which nucleotides are located in the target cleavage region.
- Consideration of the efficacy of RNAi agents with mismatches in inhibiting expression of the target gene is important, especially if the particular region of complementarity in the target gene is known to have polymorphic sequence variation within the population.
- Sequences that are different from each other at 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions can be targeted by a single RNAi agent, e.g., double-stranded or single-stranded RNAi agent. As used in this context, the phrase “different from each other” refers to the target sequences having different nucleotides at that position. In these cases the RNAi agent strand that is complementary to the target sequences comprises universal nucleobases at positions complementary to where the target sequences are different from each other. For example, the antisense strand of the double-stranded RNAi agent comprises universal nucleobases at positions complementary to where the sequences to be targeted do not match each other.
- These multi targeting RNAi agents can be used to alter the expression of different transcripts/alleles of a single gene, different isoforms of a single gene, different splice variants of a single gene, different transcripts of more than one gene, wild-type and mutated forms of a gene, or homolog of a gene in different species.
- The double-stranded RNAi agents of the invention can also target more than one RNA region by having each strand targeting a sequence or part thereof independently. For example, a double-stranded RNAi agent can include a first and second sequence that are sufficiently complementary to each other to hybridize. The first sequence can be complementary to a first target sequence and the second sequence can be complementary to a second target sequence. The first and second sequences of the RNAi agent can be on different RNA strands, and the mismatch between the first and second sequences can be less than 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, or 1%. The first and second sequences of the RNAi agent can be on the same RNA strand, and in a related embodiment more than 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 1% of the RNAi agent can be in bimolecular form. The first and second sequences of the RNAi agent can be fully complementary to each other.
- The first target sequence can be a first target gene and the second target sequence can be a second target gene, or the first and second target sequences can be different regions of a single target gene. The first and second sequences can differ by at least 1 nucleotide.
- The first and second target sequences can be transcripts encoded by first and second sequence variants, e.g., first and second alleles, of a gene. The sequence variants can be mutations, or polymorphisms, for example. The first target sequence can include a nucleotide substitution, insertion, or deletion relative to the second target sequence, or the second target sequence can be a mutant or variant of the first target sequence. The first and second target sequences can comprise viral or human genes. The first and second target sequences can also be on variant transcripts of an oncogene or include different mutations of a tumor suppressor gene transcript. In addition, the first and second target sequences can correspond to hot-spots for genetic variation.
- The double stranded oligonucleotides can be optimized for RNA interference by increasing the propensity of the duplex to disassociate or melt (decreasing the free energy of duplex association), in the region of the 5′ end of the antisense strand This can be accomplished, e.g., by the inclusion of modifications or modified nucleosides which increase the propensity of the duplex to disassociate or melt in the region of the 5′ end of the antisense strand. It can also be accomplished by inclusion of modifications or modified nucleosides or attachment of a ligand that increases the propensity of the duplex to disassociate of melt in the region of the 5′end of the antisense strand. While not wishing to be bound by theory, the effect can be due to promoting the effect of an enzyme such as helicase, for example, promoting the effect of the enzyme in the proximity of the 5′ end of the antisense strand.
- Modifications which increase the tendency of the 5′ end of the antisense strand in the duplex to dissociate can be used alone or in combination with other modifications described herein, e.g., with modifications which decrease the tendency of the 3′ end of the antisense in the duplex to dissociate. Likewise, modifications which decrease the tendency of the 3′ end of the antisense in the duplex to dissociate can be used alone or in combination with other modifications described herein, e.g., with modifications which increase the tendency of the 5′ end of the antisense in the duplex to dissociate.
- Nucleic acid base pairs can be ranked on the basis of their propensity to promote dissociation or melting (e.g., on the free energy of association or dissociation of a particular pairing, the simplest approach is to examine the pairs on an individual pair basis, though next neighbor or similar analysis can also be used). In terms of promoting dissociation: A:U is preferred over G:C; G:U is preferred over G:C; I:C is preferred over G:C (I=inosine); mismatches, e.g., non-canonical or other than canonical pairings are preferred over canonical (A:T, A:U, G:C) pairings; pairings which include a universal base are preferred over canonical pairings.
- It is preferred that pairings which decrease the propensity to form a duplex are used at 1 or more of the positions in the duplex at the 5′ end of the antisense strand. The terminal pair (the most 5′ pair in terms of the antisense strand), and the subsequent 4 base pairing positions (going in the 3′ direction in terms of the antisense strand) in the duplex are preferred for placement of modifications to decrease the propensity to form a duplex. More preferred are placements in the terminal most pair and the subsequent 3, 2, or 1 base pairings. It is preferred that at least 1, and more preferably 2, 3, 4, or 5 of the base pairs from the 5′-end of antisense strand in the duplex be chosen independently from the group of: A:U, G:U, I:C, mismatched pairs, e.g., non-canonical or other than canonical pairings or pairings which include a universal base. In a preferred embodiment at least one, at least 2, or at least 3 base-pairs include a universal base.
- Modifications or changes which promote dissociation are preferably made in the sense strand, though in some embodiments, such modifications/changes will be made in the antisense strand.
- Nucleic acid base pairs can also be ranked on the basis of their propensity to promote stability and inhibit dissociation or melting (e.g., on the free energy of association or dissociation of a particular pairing, the simplest approach is to examine the pairs on an individual pair basis, though next neighbor or similar analysis can also be used). In terms of promoting duplex stability: G:C is preferred over A:U, Watson-Crick matches (A:T, A:U, G:C) are preferred over non-canonical or other than canonical pairings, analogs that increase stability are preferred over Watson-Crick matches (A:T, A:U, G:C), e.g. 2-amino-A:U is preferred over A:U, 2-thio U or 5-Me-thio-U:A, are preferred over U:A, G-clamp (an analog of C having 4 hydrogen bonds):G is preferred over C:G, guanadinium-G-clamp:G is preferred over C:G, psuedo uridine:A, is preferred over U:A, sugar modifications, e.g., 2′ modifications, e.g., 2′F, ENA, or LNA, which enhance binding are preferred over non-modified moieties and can be present on one or both strands to enhance stability of the duplex.
- It is preferred that pairings which increase the propensity to form a duplex are used at 1 or more of the positions in the duplex at the 3′ end of the antisense strand. The terminal pair (the most 3′ pair in terms of the antisense strand), and the subsequent 4 base pairing positions (going in the 5′ direction in terms of the antisense strand) in the duplex are preferred for placement of modifications to increase the propensity to form a duplex. More preferred are placements in the terminal most pair and the subsequent 3, 2, or 1 base pairings. It is preferred that at least 1, and more preferably 2, 3, 4, or 5 of the pairs of the recited regions be chosen independently from the group of: G:C, a pair having an analog that increases stability over Watson-Crick matches (A:T, A:U, G:C), 2-amino-A:U, 2-thio U or 5 Me-thio-U:A, G-clamp (an analog of C having 4 hydrogen bonds):G, guanadinium-G-clamp:G, psuedo uridine:A, a base pair in which one or both subunits have a sugar modification, e.g., a 2′ modification, e.g., 2′F, ENA, or LNA, which enhance binding. In some embodiments, at least one, at least, at least 2, or at least 3, of the base pairs promote duplex stability.
- In a preferred embodiment, at least one, at least 2, or at least 3, of the base pairs are a pair in which one or both subunits has a sugar modification, e.g., a 2′ modification, e.g., 2′-O-methyl, 2′-O-Me (2′-O-methyl), 2′-O-MOE (2′-O-methoxyethyl), 2′-F, 2′-O—CH2-(4′-C) (LNA) and 2′-O—CH2CH2-(4′-C) (ENA), which enhance binding.
- G-clamps and guanidinium G-clamps are discussed in the following references: Holmes and Gait, “The Synthesis of 2′-O-Methyl G-Clamp Containing Oligonucleotides and Their Inhibition of the HIV-1 Tat-TAR Interaction,” Nucleosides, Nucleotides & Nucleic Acids, 22:1259-1262, 2003; Holmes et al., “Steric inhibition of human immunodeficiency virus type-1 Tat-dependent trans-activation in vitro and in cells by oligonucleotides containing 2′-O-methyl G-clamp ribonucleoside analogues,” Nucleic Acids Research, 31:2759-2768, 2003; Wilds, et al., “Structural basis for recognition of guanosine by a synthetic tricyclic cytosine analogue: Guanidinium G-clamp,” Helvetica Chimica Acta, 86:966-978, 2003; Rajeev, et al., “High-Affinity Peptide Nucleic Acid Oligomers Containing Tricyclic Cytosine Analogues,” Organic Letters, 4:4395-4398, 2002; Ausin, et al., “Synthesis of Amino- and Guanidino-G-Clamp PNA Monomers,” Organic Letters, 4:4073-4075, 2002; Maier et al., “Nuclease resistance of oligonucleotides containing the tricyclic cytosine analogues phenoxazine and 9-(2-aminoethoxy)-phenoxazine (“G-clamp”) and origins of their nuclease resistance properties,” Biochemistry, 41:1323-7, 2002; Flanagan, et al., “A cytosine analog that confers enhanced potency to antisense oligonucleotides,” PNAS, US, 96:3513-8, 1999.
- As is discussed above, an oligonucleotide can be modified to both decrease the stability of the antisense 5′end of the duplex and increase the stability of the antisense 3′ end of the duplex. This can be effected by combining one or more of the stability decreasing modifications in the antisense 5′ end of the duplex with one or more of the stability increasing modifications in the antisense 3′ end of the duplex.
- In vivo applications of oligonucleotides is limited due to presence of nucleases in the serum and/or blood. Thus in certain instances it is preferable to modify the 3′, 5′ or both ends of an oligonucleotide to make the oligonucleotide resistant against exonucleases. In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises a cap structure at 3′ (3′-cap), 5′ (5′-cap) or both ends. In some embodiments, oligonucleotide comprises a 3′-cap. In another embodiment, oligonucleotide comprises a 5′-cap. In yet another embodiment, oligonucleotide comprises both a 3′ cap and a 5′ cap. It is to be understood that when an oligonucleotide comprises both a 3′ cap and a 5′ cap, such caps can be same or they can be different.
- As used herein, “cap structure” refers to chemical modifications, which have been incorporated at either terminus of oligonucleotide. See for example U.S. Pat. No. 5,998,203 and International Patent Publication WO03/70918, contents of which are herein incorporated in their entireties. Without wishing to be bound by theory, the monomers of the invention can be used as caps.
- Exemplary 5′-caps include, but are not limited to, ligands, 5′-5′-inverted nucleotide, 5′-5′-inverted abasic nucleotide residue, 2′-5′ linkage, 5′-amino, 5′-amino-alkyl phosphate, 5′-hexylphosphate, 5′-aminohexyl phosphate, bridging and/or non-bridging 5′-phosphoramidate, bridging and/or non-bridging 5′-phosphorothioate and/or 5′-phosphorodithioate, bridging or non bridging 5′-methylphosphonate, non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage between the end two nucleotides, 4′,5′-methylene nucleotide, I-(beta-D-erythrofuranosyl) nucleotide, 4′-thio nucleotide, carbocyclic nucleotide, 1,5-anhydrohexitol nucleotide, L-nucleotides, alpha-nucleotides, modified nucleobase nucleotide, phosphorodithioate linkage, threo-pentofuranosyl nucleotide, acyclic nucleotide, acyclic 3,4-dihydroxybutyl nucleotide, acyclic 3,5-dihydroxypentyl nucleotide, 5′-mercapto nucleotide and 5′-1,4-butanediol phosphate.
- Exemplary 3′-caps include, but are not limited to, ligands, 3′-3′-inverted nucleotide, 3′-3′-inverted abasic nucleotide residue, 3′-2′-inverted nucleotide moiety, 3′-2′-inverted abasic moiety, 2′-5′-linkage, 3′-amino, 3′-amino-alkyl phosphate, 3′-hexylphosphate, 3′-aminohexyl phosphate, bridging and/or non-bridging 3′-phosphoramidate, bridging and/or non-bridging 3′-phosphorothioate and/or 3′-phosphorodithioate, bridging or non bridging 3′-methylphosphonate, non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage between the end two nucleotides, I-(beta-D-erythrofuranosyl) nucleotide, 4′-thio nucleotide, carbocyclic nucleotide, 1,5-anhydrohexitol nucleotide, L-nucleotides, alpha-nucleotides, modified nucleobase nucleotide, phosphorodithioate linkage, threo-pentofuranosyl nucleotide, acyclic nucleotide, acyclic 3,4-dihydroxybutyl nucleotide, acyclic 3,5-dihydroxypentyl nucleotide, and 3′-1,4-butanediol phosphate. For more details see Beaucage and Iyer, 1993, Tetrahedron 49, 1925, incorporated by reference herein.
- Other 3′ and/or 5′ caps amenable to the invention are described in U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/223,665, filed Jul. 7, 2009, contents of which are herein incorporated in their entirety.
- In some embodiments, a double-stranded oligonucleotide comprises, on at least one end of the duplex region, a G-C base pair at the terminal position of the duplex region (e.g., the last base pair of the duplex) or the four consecutive base from the duplex region end comprise at least two G-C base pairs. In some embodiments, both ends of duplex region comprise a terminal G-C base pair and/or the first four consecutive base pairs from the terminal end comprise at least two G-C base pairs. In some embodiments, the first base-paired nucleotide next to single-stranded overhang is a C.
- As used herein, the term “off-target” and the phrase “off-target effects” refer to any instance in which an oligonucleotide against a given target causes an unintended affect by interacting either directly or indirectly with another mRNA sequence, a DNA sequence or a cellular protein or other moiety. For example, an “off-target effect” may occur when there is a simultaneous degradation of other transcripts due to partial homology or complementarity between that other transcript and the sense and/or antisense strand of a double-stranded RNAi agent.
- In the RNA interference pathway, both strands of the double-stranded RNAi agent have the potential to enter the RISC complex and reduce the gene expression of corresponding complementary sequences. Without wishing to be bound by theory, one way an unwanted off-target effect happens ins when the sense strand enters the RISC complex and reduces the gene expression of a complementary sequence which is not the desired target of the RNAi agent.
- A number of strategies can be applied to reduce the off-target effects due to sense strand mediated RNA interference. The sense strand can be chemically modified so that it can no longer act in the RISC mediated cleavage of a target sequence. Without wishing to be bound by theory, such modifications minimize off-target RNAi effects due to sense strand.
- In some embodiments, the sense strand does not have a free terminal 5′-OH group. In another embodiment, the sense strand does not have a 5′-phosphate group. In some embodiments, the 5′-OH of sense strand is modified so that it can not be phosphorylated, e.g. with a cap moiety. In some embodiments, the cap moiety comprises L-sugar nucleotide, an alpha nucleotide, a hydroxy protecting group, an alkyl, a cycloalkyl or a heterocycle. In some embodiments, the linkage between the 5′ end of sense strand and a conjugate is a non-phosphodiester intersugar linkage. In a preferred embodiment, the linkage between the 5′ end of sense strand and a conjugate does not have a phosphate group.
- In some embodiments, the sense strand comprises at least one modified nucleotide in the target cleavage site region. Preferably, the modification include modification at 2′ position of ribose sugar or nucleobase modification.
- In some embodiments, ends of double-stranded oligonucleotide can be modified so that the end corresponding to 5′end of sense strand has a higher thermal stability as compared to the end corresponding 3′ end of sense strand, as described above in the Terminal end thermal stability section above. Without wishing to be bound by theory, this allows preferential incorporation of the antisense strand into the RISC complex and reduces off-target effects of sense strand.
- Modifications described herein can be used to asymmetrically modified a double-stranded oligonucleotide. An asymmetrically modified double-stranded oligonucleotide is one in which one strand has a modification which is not present on the other strand. As such, an asymmetrical modification is a modification found on one strand but not on the other strand. Any modification, e.g., any modification described herein, can be present as an asymmetrical modification. An asymmetrical modification can confer any of the desired properties associated with a modification, e.g., those properties discussed herein. For example, an asymmetrical modification can confer resistance to degradation, an alteration in half life; target the oligonucleotide to a particular target, e.g., to a particular tissue; modulate, e.g., increase or decrease, the affinity of a strand for its complement or target sequence; or hinder or promote modification of a terminal moiety, e.g., modification by a kinase or other enzymes involved in the RISC mechanism pathway. The designation of a modification as having one property does not mean that it has no other property, e.g., a modification referred to as one which promotes stabilization might also enhance targeting. Asymmetrical modifications can include those in which only one strand is modified as well as those in which both are modified.
- When the two strands of double-stranded oligonucleotide are linked together, e.g. a hairpin or a dumbbell, the two strands of the double stranded region can be also be asymmetrically modified. For example, first strand of the double-stranded region comprises at least one asymmetric modification that is not present in the second strand of the double stranded region or vice versa.
- While not wishing to be bound by theory or any particular mechanistic model, it is believed that asymmetrical modification allows a double-stranded RNAi agent to be optimized in view of the different or “asymmetrical” functions of the sense and antisense strands. For example, both strands can be modified to increase nuclease resistance, however, since some changes can inhibit RISC activity, these changes can be chosen for the sense stand. In addition, since some modifications, e.g., a ligand, can add large bulky groups that, e.g., can interfere with the cleavage activity of the RISC complex, such modifications are preferably placed on the sense strand. Thus, ligands, especially bulky ones (e.g. cholesterol), are preferentially added to the sense strand. The ligand can be present at either (or both) the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense strand of a RNAi agent.
- Each strand can include one or more asymmetrical modifications. By way of example: one strand can include a first asymmetrical modification which confers a first property on the oligonucleotide and the other strand can have a second asymmetrical modification which confers a second property on the oligonucleotide. For example, one strand, e.g., the sense strand can have a modification which targets the oligonucleotide to a tissue, and the other strand, e.g., the antisense strand, has a modification which promotes hybridization with the target gene sequence.
- In some embodiments both strands can be modified to optimize the same property, e.g., to increase resistance to nucleolytic degradation, but different modifications are chosen for the sense and the antisense strands, because the modifications affect other properties as well.
- Multiple asymmetric modifications can be introduced into either or both of the sense and antisense strand. A strand can have at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or more modifications and all or substantially all of the monomers, e.g., nucleotides of a strand can be asymmetrically modified.
- In some embodiments, the asymmetric modifications are chosen so that only one of the two strands of double-stranded RNAi agent is effective in inducing RNAi. Inhibiting the induction of RNAi by one strand can reduce the off target effects due to cleavage of a target sequence by that strand.
- In preferred embodiments asymmetrical modifications which result in one or more of the following are used: modifications of the 5′ end of the sense strand which inhibit kinase activation of the sense strand, including, e.g., attachments of ligands or the use modifications which protect against 5′ exonucleolytic degradation; or modifications of either strand, but preferably the sense strand, which enhance binding between 5′-end of the sense and 3′-end of the antisense strand and thereby promote a “tight” structure at this end of the molecule.
- The end region of the RNAi agent defined by the 3′ end of the sense strand and the 5′end of the antisense strand is also important for function. This region can include the terminal 2, 3, or 4 paired nucleotides and any 3′ overhang. Preferred embodiments include asymmetrical modifications of either strand, but preferably the sense strand, which decrease binding between 3′-end of the sense and 5′-end of the antisense strand and thereby promote an “open” structure at this end of the molecule. Such modifications include placing conjugates which target the molecule or modifications which promote nuclease resistance on the sense strand in this region. Modification of the antisense strand which inhibit kinase activation are avoided in preferred embodiments.
- Particularly preferred asymmetric modification are modifications of 2′-OH of ribose sugar and modification (or replacement) of intersugar phosphodiester linkage. Other preferred asymmetric modifications include conjugation of ligands. Each strand can be conjugated with ligands that are different between the two strands.
- In some embodiments, one strand has an asymmetrical 2′-modification, e.g., a 2′-O-alkyl modification, and the other strand has an asymmetrical modification of the intersugar phosphodiester linkage. In some embodiments, one strand has an asymmetrical 2′-modification, e.g., a 2′-O-alkyl modification, and the other strand also has an asymmetrical 2′-modification that is different from the first strand's asymmetrical 2′-modification, e.g., 2′-fluoro modification.
- In some embodiments, one strand is asymmetrically modified with 2′-O-alkyl, e.g. 2′-OMe modification and the second strand is asymmetrically modified with 2′-fluoro modification.
- In some embodiments, one strand is asymmetrically modified with 2′-O-alkyl, e.g. 2′-OMe modification and the second strand is asymmetrically modified with intersugar linkage modification, e.g. a phosphorothioate modification.
- In some embodiments, one strand is asymmetrically modified with 2′-fluoro modification and the second strand is asymmetrically modified with intersugar linkage modification, e.g. a phosphorothioate modification.
- It is preferable to have RNAi agents wherein there are multiple 2′-O-alkyl, e.g., 2′-OMe modifications on the sense strand and multiple 2′-fluoro and/or multiple modified intersugar linkages on the antisense strand.
- Modifications, e.g., those described herein, which modulate, e.g., increase or decrease, the affinity of a strand for its compliment or target, can be provided as asymmetrical modifications.
- The present invention also includes oligonucleotides which are chimeric oligonucleotides. “Chimeric” oligonucleotides or “chimeras,” in the context of this invention, are oligonucleotide which contain two or more chemically distinct regions, each made up of at least one monomer unit, i.e., a modified or unmodified nucleotide in the case of an oligonucleotide. Chimeric oligonucleotides can be described as having a particular motif. In some embodiments, the motifs include, but are not limited to, an alternating motif, a gapped motif, a hemimer motif, a uniformly fully modified motif and a positionally modified motif. As used herein, the phrase “chemically distinct region” refers to an oligonucleotide region which is different from other regions by having a modification that is not present elsewhere in the oligonucleotide or by not having a modification that is present elsewhere in the oligonucleotide. An oligonucleotide can comprise two or more chemically distinct regions. As used herein, a region that comprises no modifications is also considered chemically distinct.
- A chemically distinct region can be repeated within an oligonucleotide. Thus, a pattern of chemically distinct regions in an oligonucleotide can be realized such that a first chemically distinct region is followed by one or more second chemically distinct regions. This sequence of chemically distinct regions can be repeated one or more times. Preferably, the sequence is repeated more than one time. Both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotides can comprise these sequences. Each chemically distinct region can actually comprise as little as a single nucleotide. In some embodiments, each chemically distinct region comprises 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 or 18 nucleotides.
- In some embodiments, alternating nucleotides comprise the same modification, e.g. all the odd number nucleotides in a strand have the same modification and/or all the even number nucleotides in a strand have the similar modification to the first strand. In some embodiments, all the odd number nucleotides in an oligonucleotide have the same modification and all the even numbered nucleotides have a modification that is not present in the odd number nucleotides and vice versa.
- When both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise the alternating modification patterns, nucleotides of one strand can be complementary in position to nucleotides of the second strand which are similarly modified. In an alternative embodiment, there is a phase shift between the patterns of modifications of the first strand, respectively, relative to the pattern of similar modifications of the second strand. Preferably, the shift is such that the similarly modified nucleotides of the first strand and second strand are not in complementary position to each other.
- In some embodiments, the first strand has an alternating modification pattern wherein alternating nucleotides comprise a 2′-modification, e.g., 2′-O-Methyl modification. In some embodiments, the first strand comprises an alternating 2′-O-Methyl modification and the second strand comprises an alternating 2′-fluoro modification. In other embodiments, both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise alternating 2′-O-methyl modifications.
- When both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide comprise alternating 2′-O-methyl modifications, such 2′-modified nucleotides can be in complementary position in the duplex region. Alternatively, such 2′-modified nucleotides may not be in complementary positions in the duplex region.
- In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises two chemically distinct regions, wherein each region is 1-10 nucleotides in length.
- In other embodiments, the oligonucleotide comprises three chemically distinct region. The middle region is about 5-15, (e.g., 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15) nucleotide in length and each flanking or wing region is independently 1-10 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10) nucleotides in length. All three regions can have different modifications or the wing regions can be similarly modified to each other. In some embodiments, the wing regions are of equal length, e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 nucleotides long.
- As used herein the term “alternating motif” refers to a an oligonucleotide comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits wherein the monomer subunits have two different types of sugar groups that alternate for essentially the entire sequence of the oligonucleotide. Oligonucleotides having an alternating motif can be described by the formula: 5′-A(-L-B-L-A)n(-L-B)nn-3′ where A and B are monomelic subunits that have different sugar groups, each L is an internucleoside linking group, n is from about 4 to about 12 and nn is 0 or 1. This permits alternating oligonucleotides from about 9 to about 26 monomer subunits in length. This length range is not meant to be limiting as longer and shorter oligonucleotides are also amenable to the present invention. In one embodiment, one of A and B is a 2′-modified nucleoside as provided herein.
- As used herein, “type of modification” in reference to a nucleoside or a nucleoside of a “type” refers to the modification of a nucleoside and includes modified and unmodified nucleosides. Accordingly, unless otherwise indicated, a “nucleoside having a modification of a first type” may be an unmodified nucleoside.
- As used herein, “type region” refers to a portion of an oligomeric compound wherein the nucleosides and internucleoside linkages within the region all comprise the same type of modifications; and the nucleosides and/or the internucleoside linkages of any neighboring portions include at least one different type of modification. As used herein the term “uniformly fully modified motif” refers to an oligonucleotide comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits that each have the same type of sugar group. In one embodiment, the uniformly fully modified motif includes a contiguous sequence of nucleosides of the invention. In one embodiment, one or both of the 3′ and 5′-ends of the contiguous sequence of the nucleosides provided herein, comprise terminal groups such as one or more unmodified nucleosides.
- As used herein the term “hemimer motif” refers to an oligonucleotide having a short contiguous sequence of monomer subunits having one type of sugar group located at the 5′ or the 3′ end wherein the remainder of the monomer subunits have a different type of sugar group. In general, a hemimer is an oligomeric compound of uniform sugar groups further comprising a short region (1, 2, 3, 4 or about 5 monomelic subunits) having uniform but different sugar groups and located on either the 3′ or the 5′ end of the oligomeric compound. In one embodiment, the hemimer motif comprises a contiguous sequence of from about 10 to about 28 monomer subunits of one type with from 1 to 5 or from 2 to about 5 monomer subunits of a second type located at one of the termini. In one embodiment, a hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 8 to about 20 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-12 contiguous nucleosides of the invention located at one of the termini. In one embodiment, a hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 8 to about 20 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-5 contiguous nucleosides of the invention located at one of the termini. In one embodiment, a hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 12 to about 18 β-D-2′-deoxyribo-nucleosides having from 1-3 contiguous nucleosides of the invention located at one of the termini. In one embodiment, a hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 10 to about 14 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-3 contiguous nucleosides of the invention located at one of the termini.
- As used herein the term “blockmer motif” refers to an oligonucleotide comprising an otherwise contiguous sequence of monomer subunits wherein the sugar groups of each monomer subunit is the same except for an interrupting internal block of contiguous monomer subunits having a different type of sugar group. A blockmer overlaps somewhat with a gapmer in the definition but typically only the monomer subunits in the block have non-naturally occurring sugar groups in a blockmer and only the monomer subunits in the external regions have non-naturally occurring sugar groups in a gapmer with the remainder of monomer subunits in the blockmer or gapmer being β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides or β-D-ribonucleosides. In one embodiment, blockmer oligonucleotides are provided herein wherein all of the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups.
- As used herein the term “positionally modified motif” is meant to include an otherwise contiguous sequence of monomer subunits having one type of sugar group that is interrupted with two or more regions of from 1 to about 5 contiguous monomer subunits having another type of sugar group. Each of the two or more regions of from 1 to about 5 contiguous monomer subunits are independently uniformly modified with respect to the type of sugar group. In one embodiment, each of the two or more regions have the same type of sugar group. In one embodiment, each of the two or more regions have a different type of sugar group. In one embodiment, positionally modified oligonucleotides are provided comprising a sequence of from 8 to 20 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides that further includes two or three regions of from 2 to about 5 contiguous nucleosides of the invention. Positionally modified oligonucleotides are distinguished from gapped motifs, hemimer motifs, blockmer motifs and alternating motifs because the pattern of regional substitution defined by any positional motif does not fit into the definition provided herein for one of these other motifs. The term positionally modified oligomeric compound includes many different specific substitution patterns.
- As used herein the term “gapmer” or “gapped oligomeric compound” refers to an oligomeric compound having two external regions or wings and an internal region or gap. The three regions form a contiguous sequence of monomer subunits with the sugar groups of the external regions being different than the sugar groups of the internal region and wherein the sugar group of each monomer subunit within a particular region is the same. When the sugar groups of the external regions are the same the gapmer is a symmetric gapmer and when the sugar group used in the 5′-external region is different from the sugar group used in the 3′-external region, the gapmer is an asymmetric gapmer. In one embodiment, the external regions are small (each independently 1, 2, 3, 4 or about 5 monomer subunits) and the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups with the internal region comprising 3-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides. In one embodiment, the external regions each, independently, comprise from 1 to about 5 monomer subunits having non-naturally occurring sugar groups and the internal region comprises from 6 to 18 unmodified nucleosides. The internal region or the gap generally comprises β-D-2′-deoxyribo-nucleosides but can comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups.
- In one embodiment, the gapped oligonucleotides comprise an internal region of β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides with one of the external regions comprising nucleosides of the invention. In one embodiment, the gapped oligonucleotide comprise an internal region of β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides with both of the external regions comprising nucleosides of the invention. In one embodiment, the gapped oligonucleotide comprise an internal region of β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides with both of the external regions comprising nucleosides of the invention. In one embodiment, gapped oligonucleotides are provided herein wherein all of the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups. In one embodiment, gapped oliogonucleotides are provided comprising one or two nucleosides of the invention at the 5′-end, two or three nucleosides of the invention at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 16 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides. In one embodiment, gapped oligonucleotides are provided comprising one nucleoside of the invention at the 5′-end, two nucleosides of the invention at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 16 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides. In one embodiment, gapped oligonucleotides are provided comprising two nucleosides of the invention at the 5′-end, two nucleosides of the invention at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 14 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides. In one embodiment, gapped oligonucleotides are provided that are from about 10 to about 21 monomer subunits in length. In one embodiment, gapped oligonucleotides are provided that are from about 12 to about 16 monomer subunits in length. In one embodiment, gapped oligonucleotides are provided that are from about 12 to about 14 monomer subunits in length.
- In certain embodiments, the 5′-terminal nucleoside of an oligonucleotides of the present invention comprises a phosphorous moiety at the 5′-end. In certain embodiments the 5′-terminal nucleoside comprises a 2′-modification. In certain such embodiments, the 2′-modification of the 5′-terminal nucleoside is a cationic modification. In certain embodiments, the 5′-terminal nucleoside comprises a 5′-modification. In certain embodiments, the 5′-terminal nucleoside comprises a 2′-modification and a 5′-modification. In certain embodiments, the 5′-terminal nucleoside is a monomer of formula (I), (II) or (III).
- In certain embodiments, the 5′-terminal nucleoside is a 5′-stabilizing nucleoside. In certain embodiments, the modifications of the 5′-terminal nucleoside stabilize the 5′-phosphate. In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides comprising modifications of the 5′-terminal nucleoside are resistant to exonucleases. In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides comprising modifications of the 5′-terminal nucleoside have improved antisense properties. In certain such embodiments, oligonucleotides comprising modifications of the 5′-terminal nucleoside have improved association with members of the RISC pathway. In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides comprising modifications of the 5′-terminal nucleoside have improved affinity for Ago2.
- In certain embodiments, the 5′terminal nucleoside is attached to a plurality of nucleosides by a modified linkage. In certain such embodiments, the 5′terminal nucleoside is a plurality of nucleosides by a phosphorothioate linkage.
- In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides of the present invention comprise one or more regions of alternating modifications. In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides comprise one or more regions of alternating nucleoside modifications. In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides comprise one or more regions of alternating linkage modifications. In certan embodiments, oligonucleotides comprise one or more regions of alternating nucleoside and linkage modifications.
- In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides of the present invention comprise one or more regions of alternating 2′-F modified nucleosides and 2′-OMe modified nucleosides. In certain such embodiments, such regions of alternating 2′F modified and 2′OMe modified nucleosides also comprise alternating linkages. In certain such embodiments, the linkages at the 3′ end of the 2′-F modified nucleosides are phosphorothioate linkages. In certain such embodiments, the linkages at the 3′end of the 2′OMe nucleosides are phosphodiester linkages. In certain embodiments, such alternating regions are:
-
(2′-F)-(PS)-(2′-OMe)-(PO) - In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds comprise 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11 such alternating regions. Such regions may be contiguous or may be interrupted by differently modified nucleosides or linkages.
- In certain embodiments, one or more alternating regions in an alternating motif include more than a single nucleoside of a type. For example, oligomeric compounds of the present invention may include one or more regions of any of the following nucleoside motifs:
-
AABBAA; ABBABB; AABAAB; ABBABAABB; ABABAA; AABABAB; ABABAA; ABBAABBABABAA; BABBAABBABABAA; or ABABBAABBABABAA;
wherein A is a nucleoside of a first type and B is a nucleoside of a second type. In certain embodiments, A and B are each selected from 2′-F, 2′-OMe, BNA, DNA, MOE, and monomer of formula (I), (II) or (III). - In certain embodiments, A is DNA. In certain embodiments, B is 4′-CH2O-2′-BNA. In certain embodiments, A is DNA and B is 4′-CH2O-2′-BNA. In certain embodiments A is 4′-CH2O-2′-BNA. In certain embodiments, B is DNA. In certain embodiments A is 4′-CH2O-2′-BNA and B is DNA. In certain embodiments, A is 2′-F. In certain embodiments, B is 2′-OMe. In certain embodiments, A is 2′-F and B is 2′-OMe. In certain embodiments, A is 2′-OMe. In certain embodiments, B is 2′-F. In certain embodiments, A is 2′-OMe and B is 2′-F. In certain embodiments, A is DNA and B is 2′-OMe. In certain embodiments, A is 2′-OMe and B is DNA.
- In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds having such an alternating motif also comprise a 5′ terminal nucleoside comprising a phosphate stabilizing modification. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds having such an alternating motif also comprise a 5′ terminal nucleoside comprising a 2′-cationic modification. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds having such an alternating motif also comprise a 5′ terminal monomer of formula (I), (II) or (III).
- In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides of the present invention comprise a region having a 2-2-3 motif. Such regions comprises the following motif:
-
5′-(E)w-(A)2-(B)x-(A)2-(C)y-(A)3-(D)z - wherein: A is a first type of modified nucleoside;
- B, C, D, and E are nucleosides that are differently modified than A, however, B, C, D, and E may have the same or different modifications as one another;
- w and z are from 0 to 15;
- x and y are from 1 to 15.
- In certain embodiments, A is a 2′-OMe modified nucleoside. In certain embodiments, B, C, D, and E are all 2′-F modified nucleosides. In certain embodiments, A is a 2′-OMe modified nucleoside and B, C, D, and E are all 2′-F modified nucleosides.
- In certain embodiments, the linkages of a 2-2-3 motif are all modified linkages. In certain embodiments, the linkages are all phosphorothioate linkages. In certain embodiments, the linkages at the 3′-end of each modification of the first type are phosphodiester.
- In certain embodiments, Z is 0. In such embodiments, the region of three nucleosides of the first type are at the 3′-end of the oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, such region is at the 3′-end of the oligomeric compound, with no additional groups attached to the 3′ end of the region of three nucleosides of the first type. In certain embodiments, an oligomeric compound comprising an oligonucleotide where Z is 0, may comprise a terminal group attached to the 3′-terminal nucleoside. Such terminal groups may include additional nucleosides. Such additional nucleosides are typically non-hybridizing nucleosides.
- In certain embodiments, Z is 1-3. In certain embodiments, Z is 2. In certain embodiments, the nucleosides of Z are 2′-MOE nucleosides. In certain embodiments, Z represents non-hybridizing nucleosides. To avoid confusion, it is noted that such non-hybridizing nucleosides might also be described as a 3′-terminal group with Z=0.
- It is to be understood, that certain of the above described motifs and modifications may be combined. Since a motif may comprises only a few nucleosides, a particular oligonucleotide may comprise two or more motifs. By way of non-limiting example, in certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds may have nucleoside motifs as described in the table below. In the table below, the term “None” indicates that a particular feature is not present in the oligonucleotide. For example, “None” in the column labeled “5′ motif/modification” indicates that the 5′ end of the oligonucleotide comprises the first nucleoside of the central motif.
-
5′ motif/modification Central Motif 3′-motif Formula (I), (II) or (III) Alternating 2 MOE nucleosides Formula (I), (II) or (III) 2-2-3 motif 2 MOE nucleosides Formula (I), (II) or (III) Uniform 2 MOE nucleosides Formula (I), (II) or (III) Alternating 2 MOE nucleosides Formula (I), (II) or (III) Alternating 2 MOE A′s Formula (I), (II) or (III) 2-2-3 motif 2 MOE A′s Formula (I), (II) or (III) Uniform 2 MOE A′s Formula (I), (II) or (III) Alternating 2 MOE U′s Formula (I), (II) or (III) 2-2-3 motif 2 MOE U′s Formula (I), (II) or (III) Uniform 2 MOE U′s None Alternating 2 MOE nucleosides None 2-2-3 motif 2 MOE nucleosides None Uniform 2 MOE nucleosides
Oligomeric compounds having any of the various nucleoside motifs described herein, may have any linkage motif. For example, the oligomeric compounds, including but not limited to those described in the above table, may have a linkage motif selected from non-limiting the table below: -
5′ most linkage Central region 3′-region PS Alternating PO/PS 6 PS PS Alternating PO/PS 7 PS PS Alternating PO/PS 8 PS - As is apparent from the above, non-limiting tables, the lengths of the regions defined by a nucleoside motif and that of a linkage motif need not be the same. For example, the 3′ region in the nucleoside motif table above is 2 nucleosides, while the 3′-region of the linkage motif table above is 6-8 nucleosides. Combining the tables results in an oligonucleotide having two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides and six to eight 3′-terminal phosphorothioate linkages (so some of the linkages in the central region of the nucleoside motif are phosphorothioate as well). To further illustrate, and not to limit in any way, nucleoside motifs and sequence motifs are combined to show five non-limiting examples in the table below. The first column of the table lists nucleosides and linkages by position from N1 (the first nucleoside at the 5′-end) to N20 (the 20th position from the 5′-end). In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides of the present invention are longer than 20 nucleosides (the table is merely exemplary). Certain positions in the table recite the nucleoside or linkage “none” indicating that the oligonucleotide has no nucleoside at that position.
-
Pos A B C D E F N1 Formula Formula Formula Formula Formula 2′-F (I), (II) (I), (II) (I), (II) (I), (II) (I), (II) or (III) or (III) or (III) or (III) or (III) L1 PS PS PS PS PO PO N2 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-OMe MOE 2′-OMe L2 PS PS PS PO PS PO N3 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F L3 PO PS PS PS PS PS N4 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-OMe L4 PS PS PS PO PS PO N5 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-OMe 2′-F L5 PO PS PS PS PO PS N6 2′-F 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-OMe 2′-OMe 2′-OMe L6 PS PO PS PO PO PO N7 2′-OMe 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-F 2′-OMe 2′-F L7 PO PO PS PS PO PS N8 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-OMe L8 PS PS PS PO PS PO N9 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F L9 PO PS PS PS PS PS N10 2′-F 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-OMe 2′-OMe 2′-OMe L10 PS PO PS PO PO PO N11 2′-OMe 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-F 2′OMe 2′-F L11 PO PO PS PS PO PS N12 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-OMe L12 PS PS PS PO PS PO N13 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F L13 PO PS PS PS PS PS N14 2′-F 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F 2′-F L14 PS PS PS PS PS PS N15 2′-OMe 2′-OMe 2′-F 2′-F 2′-MOE 2′-F L15 PS PS PS PS PS PS N16 2′-F 2′OMe 2′-F 2′-F 2′-MOE 2′-F L16 PS PS PS PS PS PS N17 2′-OMe 2′-MOE U 2′-F 2′-F 2′-MOE 2′-F L17 PS PS PS PS None PS N18 2′-F 2′-MOE U 2′-F 2′-OMe None MOE A L18 PS None PS PS None PS N19 2′-MOE U None 2′-MOE U 2′-MOE A None MOE U L19 PS None PS PS None None N20 2′-MOE U None 2′-MOE U 2′-MOE A None None
In the above, non-limiting examples: - Column A represent an oligomeric compound consisting of 20 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III); a region of alternating nucleosides; a region of alternating linkages; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, each of which comprises a uracil base; and a region of six phosphorothioate linkages at the 3′-end.
- Column B represents an oligomeric compound consisting of 18 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III); a 2-2-3 motif wherein the modified nucleoside of the 2-2-3 motif are 2′O-Me and the remaining nucleosides are all 2′-F; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, each of which comprises a uracil base; and a region of six phosphorothioate linkages at the 3′-end.
- Column C represents an oligomeric compound consisting of 20 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III); a region of uniformly modified 2′-F nucleosides; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, each of which comprises a uracil base; and wherein each internucleoside linkage is a phosphorothioate linkage.
- Column D represents an oligomeric compound consisting of 20 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III); a region of alternating 2′-OMe/2′-F nucleosides; a region of uniform 2′F nucleosides; a region of alternating phosphorothioate/phosphodiester linkages; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, each of which comprises an adenine base; and a region of six phosphorothioate linkages at the 3′-end.
- Column E represents an oligomeric compound consisting of 17 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a modified 5′-terminal nucleoside of Formula (I), (II) or (III); a 2-2-3 motif wherein the modified nucleoside of the 2-2-3 motif are 2′F and the remaining nucleosides are all 2′-OMe; three 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides.
- Column F represents an oligomeric compound consisting of 18 linked nucleosides, wherein the oligomeric compound comprises: a region of alternating 2′-OMe/2′-F nucleosides; a region of uniform 2′F nucleosides; a region of alternating phosphorothioate/phosphodiester linkages; two 3′-terminal MOE nucleosides, one of which comprises a uracil base and the other of which comprises an adenine base; and a region of six phosphorothioate linkages at the 3′-end.
- The above examples are provided solely to illustrate how the described motifs may be used in combination and are not intended to limit the invention to the particular combinations or the particular modifications used in illustrating the combinations. Further, specific examples herein, including, but not limited to those in the above table are intended to encompass more generic embodiments. For example, column A in the above table exemplifies a region of alternating 2′-OMe and 2′-F nucleosides. Thus, that same disclosure also exemplifies a region of alternating different 2′-modifications. It also exemplifies a region of alternating 2′-O-alkyl and 2′-halogen nucleosides. It also exemplifies a region of alternating differently modified nucleosides. All of the examples throughout this specification contemplate such generic interpretation.
- It is also noted that the lengths of oligomeric compounds, such as those exemplified in the above tables, can be easily manipulated by lengthening or shortening one or more of the described regions, without disrupting the motif.
- In some embodiments, oligonucleotide comprises two or more chemically distinct regions and has a structure as described in International Application No. PCT/US09/038433, filed Mar. 26, 2009, contents of which are herein incorporated in their entirety.
- A wide variety of entities, e.g., ligands, can be coupled to the oligonucleotides described herein. Ligands can include naturally occurring molecules, or recombinant or synthetic molecules. Exemplary ligands include, but are not limited to, polylysine (PLL), poly L-aspartic acid, poly L-glutamic acid, styrene-maleic acid anhydride copolymer, poly(L-lactide-co-glycolied) copolymer, divinyl ether-maleic anhydride copolymer, N-(2-hydroxypropyl)methacrylamide copolymer (HMPA), polyethylene glycol (PEG, e.g., PEG-2K, PEG-5K, PEG-10K, PEG-12K, PEG-15K, PEG-20K, PEG-40K), MPEG, [MPEG]2, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyurethane, poly(2-ethylacryllic acid), N-isopropylacrylamide polymers, polyphosphazine, polyethylenimine, cationic groups, spermine, spermidine, polyamine, pseudopeptide-polyamine, peptidomimetic polyamine, dendrimer polyamine, arginine, amidine, protamine, cationic lipid, cationic porphyrin, quaternary salt of a polyamine, thyrotropin, melanotropin, lectin, glycoprotein, surfactant protein A, mucin, glycosylated polyaminoacids, transferrin, bisphosphonate, polyglutamate, polyaspartate, aptamer, asialofetuin, hyaluronan, procollagen, immunoglobulins (e.g., antibodies), insulin, transferrin, albumin, sugar-albumin conjugates, intercalating agents (e.g., acridines), cross-linkers (e.g. psoralen, mitomycin C), porphyrins (e.g., TPPC4, texaphyrin, Sapphyrin), polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (e.g., phenazine, dihydrophenazine), artificial endonucleases (e.g., EDTA), lipophilic molecules (e.g., steroids, bile acids, cholesterol, cholic acid, adamantane acetic acid, 1-pyrene butyric acid, dihydrotestosterone, 1,3-Bis-O(hexadecyl)glycerol, geranyloxyhexyl group, hexadecylglycerol, borneol, menthol, 1,3-propanediol, heptadecyl group, palmitic acid, myristic acid, O3-(oleoyl)lithocholic acid, O3-(oleoyl)cholenic acid, dimethoxytrityl, or phenoxazine), peptides (e.g., an alpha helical peptide, amphipathic peptide, RGD peptide, cell permeation peptide, endosomolytic/fusogenic peptide), alkylating agents, phosphate, amino, mercapto, polyamino, alkyl, substituted alkyl, radiolabeled markers, enzymes, haptens (e.g. biotin), transport/absorption facilitators (e.g., naproxen, aspirin, vitamin E, folic acid), synthetic ribonucleases (e.g., imidazole, bisimidazole, histamine, imidazole clusters, acridine-imidazole conjugates, Eu3+ complexes of tetraazamacrocycles), dinitrophenyl, HRP, AP, antibodies, hormones and hormone receptors, lectins, carbohydrates, multivalent carbohydrates, vitamins (e.g., vitamin A, vitamin E, vitamin K, vitamin B, e.g., folic acid, B12, riboflavin, biotin and pyridoxal), vitamin cofactors, lipopolysaccharide, an activator of p38 MAP kinase, an activator of NF-κB, taxon, vincristine, vinblastine, cytochalasin, nocodazole, japlakinolide, latrunculin A, phalloidin, swinholide A, indanocine, myoservin, tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNFalpha), interleukin-1 beta, gamma interferon, natural or recombinant low density lipoprotein (LDL), natural or recombinant high-density lipoprotein (HDL), and a cell-permeation agent (e.g., a helical cell-permeation agent).
- Peptide and peptidomimetic ligands include those having naturally occurring or modified peptides, e.g., D or L peptides; α, β, or γ peptides; N-methyl peptides; azapeptides; peptides having one or more amide, i.e., peptide, linkages replaced with one or more urea, thiourea, carbamate, or sulfonyl urea linkages; or cyclic peptides. A peptidomimetic (also referred to herein as an oligopeptidomimetic) is a molecule capable of folding into a defined three-dimensional structure similar to a natural peptide. The peptide or peptidomimetic ligand can be about 5-50 amino acids long, e.g., about 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 amino acids long.
- Exemplary amphipathic peptides include, but are not limited to, cecropins, lycotoxins, paradaxins, buforin, CPF, bombinin-like peptide (BLP), cathelicidins, ceratotoxins, S. clava peptides, hagfish intestinal antimicrobial peptides (HFIAPs), magainines, brevinins-2, dermaseptins, melittins, pleurocidin, H2A peptides, Xenopus peptides, esculentinis-1, and caerins.
- As used herein, the term “endosomolytic ligand” refers to molecules having endosomolytic properties. Endosomolytic ligands promote the lysis of and/or transport of the composition of the invention, or its components, from the cellular compartments such as the endosome, lysosome, endoplasmic reticulum (ER), golgi apparatus, microtubule, peroxisome, or other vesicular bodies within the cell, to the cytoplasm of the cell. Some exemplary endosomolytic ligands include, but are not limited to, imidazoles, poly or oligoimidazoles, linear or branched polyethyleneimines (PEIs), linear and branched polyamines, e.g. spermine, cationic linear and branched polyamines, polycarboxylates, polycations, masked oligo or poly cations or anions, acetals, polyacetals, ketals/polyketals, orthoesters, linear or branched polymers with masked or unmasked cationic or anionic charges, dendrimers with masked or unmasked cationic or anionic charges, polyanionic peptides, polyanionic peptidomimetics, pH-sensitive peptides, natural and synthetic fusogenic lipids, natural and synthetic cationic lipids.
- Exemplary endosomolytic/fusogenic peptides include, but are not limited to,
-
SEQ ID NO: 9, AALEALAEALEALAEALEALAEAAAAGGC (GALA); SEQ ID NO: 10, AALAEALAEALAEALAEALAEALAAAAGGC (EALA); SEQ ID NO: 11, ALEALAEALEALAEA; SEQ ID NO: 12, GLFEAIEGFIENGWEGMIWDYG (INF-7); SEQ ID NO: 13, GLFGAIAGFIENGWEGMIDGWYG (Inf HA-2); SEQ ID NO: 14, GLFEAIEGFIENGWEGMIDGWYGCGLFEAIEGFIENGWEGMID GWYGC (diINF-7); SEQ ID NO: 15, GLFEAIEGFIENGWEGMIDGGCGLFEAIEGFIENGWEGMIDGGC (diINF-3); SEQ ID NO: 16, GLFGALAEALAEALAEHLAEALAEALEALAAGGSC (GLF); SEQ ID NO: 17, GLFEAIEGFIENGWEGLAEALAEALEALAAGGSC (GALA-INF3); SEQ ID NO: 18, GLF EAI EGFI ENGW EGnI DG K GLF EAI EGFI ENGW EGnI DG (INF-5, n is norleucine); SEQ ID NO: 19, LFEALLELLESLWELLLEA (JTS-1); SEQ ID NO: 20, GLFKALLKLLKSLWKLLLKA (ppTG1); SEQ ID NO: 21, GLFRALLRLLRSLWRLLLRA (ppTG20); SEQ ID NO: 22, WEAKLAKALAKALAKHLAKALAKALKACEA (KALA); SEQ ID NO: 23, GLFFEAIAEFIEGGWEGLIEGC (HA); SEQ ID NO: 24, GIGAVLKVLTTGLPALISWIKRKRQQ (Melittin); SEQ ID NO: 25, H5WYG; and SEQ ID NO: 26, CHK6HC. - Without wishing to be bound by theory, fusogenic lipids fuse with and consequently destabilize a membrane. Fusogenic lipids usually have small head groups and unsaturated acyl chains. Exemplary fusogenic lipids include, but are not limited to, 1,2-dileoyl-sn-3-phosphoethanolamine (DOPE), phosphatidylethanolamine (POPE), palmitoyloleoylphosphatidylcholine (POPC), (6Z,9Z,28Z,31Z)-heptatriaconta-6,9,28,31-tetraen-19-ol (Di-Lin), N-methyl(2,2-di((9Z,12Z)-octadeca-9,12-dienyl)-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methanamine (DLin-k-DMA) and N-methyl-2-(2,2-di((9Z,12Z)-octadeca-9,12-dienyl)-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)ethanamine (also referred to as XTC herein).
- Synthetic polymers with endosomolytic activity amenable to the present invention are described in U.S. Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 2009/0048410; 2009/0023890; 2008/0287630; 2008/0287628; 2008/0281044; 2008/0281041; 2008/0269450; 2007/0105804; 20070036865; and 2004/0198687, contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
- Exemplary cell permeation peptides include, but are not limited to,
-
SEQ ID NO: 27, RQIKIWFQNRRMKWKK (penetratin); SEQ ID NO: 28, GRKKRRQRRRPPQC (Tat fragment 48-60); SEQ ID NO: 29, GALFLGWLGAAGSTMGAWSQPKKKRKV (signal sequence based peptide); SEQ ID NO: 30, LLIILRRRIRKQAHAHSK (PVEC); SEQ ID NO: 31, GWTLNSAGYLLKINLKALAALAKKIL (transportan); SEQ ID NO: 32, KLALKLALKALKAALKLA (amphiphilic model peptide); SEQ ID NO: 33, RRRRRRRRR (Arg9); SEQ ID NO: 34, KFFKFFKFFK (Bacterial cell wall permeating peptide); SEQ ID NO: 35, LLGDFFRKSKEKIGKEFKRIVQRIKDFLRNLVPRTES (LL-37); SEQ ID NO: 36, SWLSKTAKKLENSAKKRISEGIAIAIQGGPR (cecropin P1); SEQ ID NO: 37, ACYCRIPACIAGERRYGTCIYQGRLWAFCC (α-defensin) SEQ ID NO: 38, DHYNCVSSGGQCLYSACPIFTKIQGTCYRGKAKCCK (β- defensin); SEQ ID NO: 39, RRRPRPPYLPRPRPPPFFPPRLPPRIPPGFPPRFPPRFPGKR-NH2 (PR-39); SEQ ID NO: 40, ILPWKWPWWPWRR-NH2 (indolicidin); SEQ ID NO: 41, AAVALLPAVLLALLAP (RFGF); SEQ ID NO: 42, AALLPVLLAAP (RFGF analogue); and SEQ ID NO: 43, RKCRIVVIRVCR (bactenecin). - Exemplary cationic groups include, but are not limited to, protonated amino groups, derived from e.g., O-AMINE (AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine, polyamino); aminoalkoxy, e.g., O(CH2)nAMINE, (e.g., AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine, polyamino); amino (e.g. NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid); and NH(CH2CH2NH)nCH2CH2-AMINE (AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino).
- As used herein the term “targeting ligand” refers to any molecule that provides an enhanced affinity for a selected target, e.g., a cell, cell type, tissue, organ, region of the body, or a compartment, e.g., a cellular, tissue or organ compartment. Some exemplary targeting ligands include, but are not limited to, antibodies, antigens, folates, receptor ligands, carbohydrates, aptamers, integrin receptor ligands, chemokine receptor ligands, transferrin, biotin, serotonin receptor ligands, PSMA, endothelin, GCPII, somatostatin, LDL and HDL ligands.
- Carbohydrate based targeting ligands include, but are not limited to, D-galactose, multivalent galactose, N-acetyl-D-galactose (GalNAc), multivalent GalNAc, e.g. GaNAc2 and GalNAc3; D-mannose, multivalent mannose, multivalent lactose, N-acetyl-galactosamine, N-acetyl-gulucosamine, multivalent fucose, glycosylated polyaminoacids and lectins. The term multivalent indicates that more than one monosaccharide unit is present. Such monosaccharide subunits can be linked to each other through glycosidic linkages or linked to a scaffold molecule.
- A number of folate and folate analogs amenable to the present invention as ligands are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,816,110; 51,410,104; 5,552,545; 6,335,434 and 7,128,893, contents of which are herein incorporated in their entireties by reference.
- As used herein, the terms “PK modulating ligand” and “PK modulator” refers to molecules which can modulate the pharmacokinetics of the composition of the invention. Some exemplary PK modulator include, but are not limited to, lipophilic molecules, bile acids, sterols, phospholipid analogues, peptides, protein binding agents, vitamins, fatty acids, phenoxazine, aspirin, naproxen, ibuprofen, suprofen, ketoprofen, (S)-(+)-pranoprofen, carprofen, PEGs, biotin, and transthyretia-binding ligands (e.g., tetraiidothyroacetic acid, 2,4,6-triiodophenol and flufenamic acid). Oligonucleotides that comprise a number of phosphorothioate intersugar linkages are also known to bind to serum protein, thus short oligonucleotides, e.g. oligonucleotides of comprising from about 5 to 30 nucleotides (e.g., 5 to 25 nucleotides, preferably 5 to 20 nucleotides, e.g., 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 nucleotides), and that comprise a plurality of phosphorothioate linkages in the backbone are also amenable to the present invention as ligands (e.g. as PK modulating ligands). The PK modulating oligonucleotide can comprise at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or more phosphorothioate and/or phosphorodithioate linkages. In some embodiments, all internucleotide linkages in PK modulating oligonucleotide are phosphorothioate and/or phosphorodithioates linkages. In addition, aptamers that bind serum components (e.g. serum proteins) are also amenable to the present invention as PK modulating ligands. Binding to serum components (e.g. serum proteins) can be predicted from albumin binding assays, such as those described in Oravcova, et al., Journal of Chromatography B (1996), 677: 1-27.
- When two or more ligands are present, the ligands can all have same properties, all have different properties or some ligands have the same properties while others have different properties. For example, a ligand can have targeting properties, have endosomolytic activity or have PK modulating properties. In a preferred embodiment, all the ligands have different properties.
- In some embodiments, ligand on one strand of double-stranded oligonucleotide has affinity for a ligand on the second strand. In some embodiments, a ligand is covalently linked to both strands of a double-stranded oligonucleotide. As used herein, when a ligand is linked to more than oligonucleotide strand, point of attachment for an oligonuclotide can be an atom of the ligand self or an atom on a carrier molecule to which the ligand itself is attached.
- Ligands can be coupled to the oligonucleotides at various places, for example, 3′-end, 5′-end, and/or at an internal position. When two or more ligands are present, the ligand can be on opposite ends of an oligonucleotide. In preferred embodiments, the ligand is attached to the oligonucleotides via an intervening tether/linker. The ligand or tethered ligand can be present on a monomer when said monomer is incorporated into the growing strand. In some embodiments, the ligand can be incorporated via coupling to a “precursor” monomer after said “precursor” monomer has been incorporated into the growing strand. For example, a monomer having, e.g., an amino-terminated tether (i.e., having no associated ligand), e.g., monomer-linker-NH2 can be incorporated into a growing oligonucleotide strand. In a subsequent operation, i.e., after incorporation of the precursor monomer into the strand, a ligand having an electrophilic group, e.g., a pentafluorophenyl ester or aldehyde group, can subsequently be attached to the precursor monomer by coupling the electrophilic group of the ligand with the terminal nucleophilic group of the precursor monomer's tether.
- In another example, a monomer having a chemical group suitable for taking part in Click Chemistry reaction can be incorporated e.g., an azide or alkyne terminated tether/linker. In a subsequent operation, i.e., after incorporation of the precursor monomer into the strand, a ligand having complementary chemical group, e.g. an alkyne or azide can be attached to the precursor monomer by coupling the alkyne and the azide together.
- For double-stranded oligonucleotides, ligands can be attached to one or both strands. In some embodiments, a double-stranded RNAi agent comprises a ligand conjugated to the sense strand. In other embodiments, a double-stranded RNAi agent comprises a ligand conjugated to the antisense strand.
- In some embodiments, ligand can be conjugated to nucleobases, sugar moieties, or internucleosidic linkages of nucleic acid molecules. Conjugation to purine nucleobases or derivatives thereof can occur at any position including, endocyclic and exocyclic atoms. In some embodiments, the 2-, 6-, 7-, or 8-positions of a purine nucleobase are attached to a conjugate moiety. Conjugation to pyrimidine nucleobases or derivatives thereof can also occur at any position. In some embodiments, the 2-, 5-, and 6-positions of a pyrimidine nucleobase can be substituted with a conjugate moiety. When a ligand is conjugated to a nucleobase, the preferred position is one that does not interfere with hybridization, i.e., does not interfere with the hydrogen bonding interactions needed for base pairing.
- Conjugation to sugar moieties of nucleosides can occur at any carbon atom. Example carbon atoms of a sugar moiety that can be attached to a conjugate moiety include the 2′, 3′, and 5′ carbon atoms. The 1′ position can also be attached to a conjugate moiety, such as in an abasic residue. Internucleosidic linkages can also bear conjugate moieties. For phosphorus-containing linkages (e.g., phosphodiester, phosphorothioate, phosphorodithiotate, phosphoroamidate, and the like), the conjugate moiety can be attached directly to the phosphorus atom or to an O, N, or S atom bound to the phosphorus atom. For amine- or amide-containing internucleosidic linkages (e.g., PNA), the conjugate moiety can be attached to the nitrogen atom of the amine or amide or to an adjacent carbon atom.
- There are numerous methods for preparing conjugates of oligomeric compounds. Generally, an oligomeric compound is attached to a conjugate moiety by contacting a reactive group (e.g., OH, SH, amine, carboxyl, aldehyde, and the like) on the oligomeric compound with a reactive group on the conjugate moiety. In some embodiments, one reactive group is electrophilic and the other is nucleophilic.
- For example, an electrophilic group can be a carbonyl-containing functionality and a nucleophilic group can be an amine or thiol. Methods for conjugation of nucleic acids and related oligomeric compounds with and without linking groups are well described in the literature such as, for example, in Manoharan in Antisense Research and Applications, Crooke and LeBleu, eds., CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla., 1993, Chapter 17, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- Representative U.S. patents that teach the preparation of oligonucleotide conjugates include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,828,979; 4,948,882; 5,218,105; 5,525,465; 5,541,313; 5,545,730; 5,552,538; 5,578,717, 5,580,731; 5,580,731; 5,591,584; 5,109,124; 5,118,802; 5,138,045; 5,414,077; 5,486,603; 5,512,439; 5,578,718; 5,608,046; 4,587,044; 4,605,735; 4,667,025; 4,762,779; 4,789,737; 4,824,941; 4,835,263; 4,876,335; 4,904,582; 4,958,013; 5,082,830; 5,112,963; 5,214,136; 5,082, 830; 5,112,963; 5,149,782; 5,214,136; 5,245,022; 5,254,469; 5,258,506; 5,262,536; 5,272,250; 5,292,873; 5,317,098; 5,371,241, 5,391,723; 5,416,203, 5,451,463; 5,510,475; 5,512,667; 5,514,785; 5,565,552; 5,567,810; 5,574,142; 5,585,481; 5,587,371; 5,595,726; 5,597,696; 5,599,923; 5,599,928; 5,672,662; 5,688,941; 5,714,166; 6,153,737; 6,172,208; 6,300,319; 6,335,434; 6,335,437; 6,395,437; 6,444,806; 6,486,308; 6,525,031; 6,528,631; 6,559,279; contents which are herein incorporated in their entireties by reference.
- In some embodiments, the ligands, e.g. endosomolytic ligands, targeting ligands or other ligands, are linked to a monomer which is then incorporated into the growing oligonucleotide strand during chemical synthesis. Such monomers are also referred to as carrier monomers herein. The carrier monomer is a cyclic group or acyclic group; preferably, the cyclic group is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, [1,3]-dioxolane, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, quinoxalinyl, pyridazinonyl, tetrahydrofuryl and decalin; preferably, the acyclic group is selected from serinol backbone or diethanolamine backbone. In some embodiments, the cyclic carrier monomer is based on pyrrolidinyl such as 4-hydroxyproline or a derivative thereof.
- Exemplary ligands and ligand conjugated monomers amenable to the invention are described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/916,185, filed Aug. 10, 2004; Ser. No. 10/946,873, filed Sep. 21, 2004; Ser. No. 10/985,426, filed Nov. 9, 2004; Ser. No. 10/833,934, filed Aug. 3, 2007; Ser. No. 11/115,989 filed Apr. 27, 2005, Ser. No. 11/119,533, filed Apr. 29, 2005; Ser. No. 11/197,753, filed Aug. 4, 2005; Ser. No. 11/944,227, filed Nov. 21, 2007; Ser. No. 12/328,528, filed Dec. 4, 2008; and Ser. No. 12/328,537, filed Dec. 4, 2008, contents which are herein incorporated in their entireties by reference for all purposes. Ligands and ligand conjugated monomers amenable to the invention are also described in International Application Nos. PCT/US04/001461, filed Jan. 21, 2004; PCT/US04/010586, filed Apr. 5, 2004; PCT/US04/011255, filed Apr. 9, 2005; PCT/US05/014472, filed Apr. 27, 2005; PCT/US05/015305, filed Apr. 29, 2005; PCT/US05/027722, filed Aug. 4, 2005; PCT/US08/061289, filed Apr. 23, 2008; PCT/US08/071576, filed Jul. 30, 2008; PCT/US08/085574, filed Dec. 4, 2008 and PCT/US09/40274, filed Apr. 10, 2009, contents which are herein incorporated in their entireties by reference for all purposes.
- In some embodiments, the covalent linkages between the oligonucleotide and other components, e.g. a ligand or a ligand carrying monomer can be mediated by a linker. This linker can be cleavable linker or non-cleavable linker, depending on the application. As used herein, a “cleavable linker” refers to linkers that are capable of cleavage under various conditions. Conditions suitable for cleavage can include, but are not limited to, pH, UV irradiation, enzymatic activity, temperature, hydrolysis, elimination and substitution reactions, redox reactions, and thermodynamic properties of the linkage. In some embodiments, a cleavable linker can be used to release the oligonucleotide after transport to the desired target. The intended nature of the conjugation or coupling interaction, or the desired biological effect, will determine the choice of linker group.
- As used herein, the term “linker” means an organic moiety that connects two parts of a compound. Linkers typically comprise a direct bond or an atom such as oxygen or sulfur, a unit such as NR1, C(O), C(O)NH, SO, SO2, SO2NH or a chain of atoms, such as substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkylarylalkyl, alkylarylalkenyl, alkylarylalkynyl, alkenylarylalkyl, alkenylarylalkenyl, alkenylarylalkynyl, alkynylarylalkyl, alkynylarylalkenyl, alkynylarylalkynyl, alkylheteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroarylalkenyl, alkylheteroarylalkynyl, alkenylheteroarylalkyl, alkenylheteroarylalkenyl, alkenylheteroarylalkynyl, alkynylheteroarylalkyl, alkynylheteroarylalkenyl, alkynylheteroarylalkynyl, alkylheterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkylhererocyclylalkynyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkynyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkynyl, alkylaryl, alkenylaryl, alkynylaryl, alkylheteroaryl, alkenylheteroaryl, alkynylhereroaryl, where one or more methylenes can be interrupted or terminated by O, S, S(O), SO2, N(R 1)2, C(O), cleavable linking group, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic; where R 1 is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic.
- In some embodiments, the linker is —[(P-Q-R)q—X—(P′-Q′-R′)q′]q″-T-, wherein: P, R, T, P′ and R′ are each independently for each occurrence absent, CO, NH, O, S, OC(O), NHC(O), CH2, CH2NH, CH2O; NHCH(Ra)C(O), —C(O)—CH(Ra)—NH—, C(O)-(optionally substituted alkyl)-NH—, CH═N—O,
- cyclyl, heterocycyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl; R50 and R51 are independently alkyl, substituted alkyl, or R50 and R51 taken together to form a cyclic ring;
- Q and Q′ are each independently for each occurrence absent, —(CH2)n—, —C(R100)(R200)(CH2)n—, —(CH2)nC(R100)(R200)—, —(CH2CH2O)mCH2CH2—, or —(CH2CH2O)mCH2CH2NH—;
- X is absent or a cleavable linking group;
- R is H or an amino acid side chain;
- R100 and R200 are each independently for each occurrence H, CH3, OH, SH or N(RX)2;
- R X is independently for each occurrence H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl or benzyl;
- q, q′ and q″ are each independently for each occurrence 0-20 and wherein the repeating unit can be the same or different;
- n is independently for each occurrence 1-20; and
- m is independently for each occurrence 0-50.
- In some embodiments, the linker comprises at least one cleavable linking group.
- In some embodiments, the linker is a branched linker. The branchpoint of the branched linker may be at least trivalent, but can be a tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent atom, or a group presenting such multiple valencies. In some embodiments, the branchpoint is, —N, —N(Q)-C, —O—C, —S—C, —SS—C, —C(O)N(Q)-C, —OC(O)N(Q)-C, —N(Q)C(O)—C, or —N(Q)C(O)O—C; wherein Q is independently for each occurrence H or optionally substituted alkyl. In some embodiments, the branchpoint is glycerol or derivative thereof.
- A cleavable linking group is one which is sufficiently stable outside the cell, but which upon entry into a target cell is cleaved to release the two parts the linker is holding together. In a preferred embodiment, the cleavable linking group is cleaved at least 10 times or more, preferably at least 100 times faster in the target cell or under a first reference condition (which can, e.g., be selected to mimic or represent intracellular conditions) than in the blood or serum of a subject, or under a second reference condition (which can, e.g., be selected to mimic or represent conditions found in the blood or serum).
- Cleavable linking groups are susceptible to cleavage agents, e.g., pH, redox potential or the presence of degradative molecules. Generally, cleavage agents are more prevalent or found at higher levels or activities inside cells than in serum or blood. Examples of such degradative agents include: redox agents which are selected for particular substrates or which have no substrate specificity, including, e.g., oxidative or reductive enzymes or reductive agents such as mercaptans, present in cells, that can degrade a redox cleavable linking group by reduction; esterases; amidases; endosomes or agents that can create an acidic environment, e.g., those that result in a pH of five or lower; enzymes that can hydrolyze or degrade an acid cleavable linking group by acting as a general acid, peptidases (which can be substrate specific) and proteases, and phosphatases.
- A linker can include a cleavable linking group that is cleavable by a particular enzyme. The type of cleavable linking group incorporated into a linker can depend on the cell to be targeted. For example, liver targeting ligands can be linked to the cationic lipids through a linker that includes an ester group. Liver cells are rich in esterases, and therefore the linker will be cleaved more efficiently in liver cells than in cell types that are not esterase-rich. Other cell-types rich in esterases include cells of the lung, renal cortex, and testis.
- Linkers that contain peptide bonds can be used when targeting cell types rich in peptidases, such as liver cells and synoviocytes.
- In some embodiments, cleavable linking group is cleaved at least 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 times faster in the cell (or under in vitro conditions selected to mimic intracellular conditions) as compared to blood or serum (or under in vitro conditions selected to mimic extracellular conditions). In some embodiments, the cleavable linking group is cleaved by less than 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 55%, or 1% in the blood (or in vitro conditions selected to mimic extracellular conditions) as compared to in the cell (or under in vitro conditions selected to mimic intracellular conditions)
- Exemplary cleavable linking groups include, but are not limited to, redox cleavable linking groups (e.g., —S—S— and —C(R)2—S—S—, wherein R is H or C1-C6 alkyl and at least one R is C1-C6 alkyl such as CH3 or CH2CH3); phosphate-based cleavable linking groups (e.g., —O—P(O)(OR)—O—, —O—P(S)(OR)—O—, —O—P(S)(SR)—O—, —S—P(O)(OR)—O—, —O—P(O)(OR)—S—, —S—P(O)(OR)—S—, —O—P(S)(ORk)-S—, —S—P(S)(OR)—O—, —O—P(O)(R)—O—, —O—P(S)(R)—O—, —S—P(O)(R)—O—, —S—P(S)(R)—O—, —S—P(O)(R)—S—, —O—P(S)(R)—S—, —O—P(O)(OH)—O—, —O—P(S)(OH)—O—, —O—P(S)(SH)—O—, —S—P(O)(OH)—O—, —O—P(O)(OH)—S—, —S—P(O)(OH)—S—, —O—P(S)(OH)—S—, —S—P(S)(OH)—O—, —O—P(O)(H)—O—, —O—P(S)(H)—O—, —S—P(O)(H)—O—, —S—P(S)(H)—O—, —S—P(O)(H)—S—, and —O—P(S)(H)—S—, wherein R is optionally substituted linear or branched C1-C10 alkyl); acid cleavable linking groups (e.g., hydrazones, esters, and esters of amino acids, —C═NN— and —OC(O)—); ester-based cleavable linking groups (e.g., —C(O)O—); peptide-based cleavable linking groups, (e.g., linking groups that are cleaved by enzymes such as peptidases and proteases in cells, e.g., —NHCHRAC(O)NHCHRBC(O)—, where RA and RB are the R groups of the two adjacent amino acids). A peptide based cleavable linking group comprises two or more amino acids. In some embodiments, the peptide-based cleavage linkage comprises the amino acid sequence that is the substrate for a peptidase or a protease found in cells.
- In some embodiments, an acid cleavable linking group is cleaveable in an acidic environment with a pH of about 6.5 or lower (e.g., about 6.-, 5.5, 5.0, or lower), or by agents such as enzymes that can act as a general acid.
- The oligonucleotide compounds of the invention can be prepared using solution-phase or solid-phase organic synthesis, or enzymatically by methods known in the art. Organic synthesis offers the advantage that the oligonucleotide strands comprising non-natural or modified nucleotides can be easily prepared. Any other means for such synthesis known in the art can additionally or alternatively be employed. It is also known to use similar techniques to prepare other oligonucleotides, such as the phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates and alkylated derivatives. The double-stranded oligonucleotide compounds of the invention can be prepared using a two-step procedure. First, the individual strands of the double-stranded molecule are prepared separately. Then, the component strands are annealed.
- Regardless of the method of synthesis, the oligonucleotide can be prepared in a solution (e.g., an aqueous and/or organic solution) that is appropriate for formulation. For example, the oligonucleotide preparation can be precipitated and redissolved in pure double-distilled water, and lyophilized. The dried oligonucleotide can then be resuspended in a solution appropriate for the intended formulation process.
- In some embodiments, oligonucleotides of the invention are prepared by connecting nucleosides with optionally protected phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages. Representative protecting groups for phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages such as phosphodiester and phosphorothioate linkages include β-cyanoethyl, diphenylsilylethyl, δ-cyanobutenyl, cyano p-xylyl (CPX), N-methyl-N-trifluoroacetyl ethyl (META), acetoxy phenoxy ethyl (APE) and butene-4-yl groups. See for example U.S. Pat. No. 4,725,677 and Re. 34,069 (β-cyanoethyl); Beaucage, S. L. and Iyer, R. P., Tetrahedron, 49 No. 10, pp. 1925-1963 (1993); Beaucage, S. L. and Iyer, R. P., Tetrahedron, 49 No. 46, pp. 10441-10488 (1993); Beaucage, S. L. and Iyer, R. P., Tetrahedron, 48 No. 12, pp. 2223-2311 (1992).
- Teachings regarding the synthesis of particular modified oligonucleotides can be found in the following U.S. patents or pending patent applications: U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,138,045 and 5,218,105, drawn to polyamine conjugated oligonucleotides; U.S. Pat. No. 5,212,295, drawn to monomers for the preparation of oligonucleotides having chiral phosphorus linkages; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,378,825 and 5,541,307, drawn to oligonucleotides having modified backbones; U.S. Pat. No. 5,386,023, drawn to backbone-modified oligonucleotides and the preparation thereof through reductive coupling; U.S. Pat. No. 5,457,191, drawn to modified nucleobases based on the 3-deazapurine ring system and methods of synthesis thereof, U.S. Pat. No. 5,459,255, drawn to modified nucleobases based on N-2 substituted purines; U.S. Pat. No. 5,521,302, drawn to processes for preparing oligonucleotides having chiral phosphorus linkages; U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,082, drawn to peptide nucleic acids; U.S. Pat. No. 5,554,746, drawn to oligonucleotides having beta-lactam backbones; U.S. Pat. No. 5,571,902, drawn to methods and materials for the synthesis of oligonucleotides; U.S. Pat. No. 5,578,718, drawn to nucleosides having alkylthio groups, wherein such groups can be used as linkers to other moieties attached at any of a variety of positions of the nucleoside; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,587,361 and 5,599,797, drawn to oligonucleotides having phosphorothioate linkages of high chiral purity; U.S. Pat. No. 5,506,351, drawn to processes for the preparation of 2′-O-alkyl guanosine and related compounds, including 2,6-diaminopurine compounds; U.S. Pat. No. 5,587,469, drawn to oligonucleotides having N-2 substituted purines; U.S. Pat. No. 5,587,470, drawn to oligonucleotides having 3-deazapurines; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,223,168, and 5,608,046, both drawn to conjugated 4′-desmethyl nucleoside analogs; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,602,240, and 5,610,289, drawn to backbone-modified oligonucleotide analogs; and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,262,241, and 5,459,255, drawn to, inter alia, methods of synthesizing 2′-fluoro-oligonucleotides.
- One aspect of the present invention relates to a method of modulating the expression of a target gene in a cell. The method comprises: contacting a cell with a composition of the invention. In some embodiments, the method comprises further the step of allowing the cell to internalize the composition. In some embodiments, the method further comprises the step of providing a composition of the invention.
- The method can be performed in a cell culture, e.g., in vitro or ex vivo, or in vivo, e.g., to treat a subject identified as being in need of treatment by a composition of the invention.
- The term “contacting” or “contact” as used herein in connection with contacting a cell includes subjecting the cell to an appropriate culture media which comprises an oligonucleotide of the invention. Where the cell is in vivo, “contacting” or “contact” includes administering the oligonucleotide in a pharmaceutical composition to a subject via an appropriate administration route such that the oligonucleotide contacts the cell in vivo.
- For in vivo methods, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound described herein can be administered to a subject. Methods of administering compounds to a subject are known in the art and easily available to one of skill in the art.
- In some embodiments, the cell is a mammalian cell.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a method for modulating the expression of the target gene in a subject. The method comprises: administering a composition featured in the invention to the subject such that expression of the target gene is modulated.
- As used herein, the term “administer” refers to the placement of a composition into a subject by a method or route which results in at least partial localization of the composition at a desired site such that expression of the target gene is modulated. An oligonucleotide described herein can be administered by any appropriate route known in the art including, but not limited to oral or parenteral routes, including intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), pulmonary, nasal, rectal, and topical (including buccal and sublingual) administration.
- Exemplary modes of administration include, but are not limited to, injection, infusion, instillation, inhalation, or ingestion. “Injection” includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intraventricular, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, sub capsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, intracerebro spinal, and intrasternal injection and infusion. In preferred embodiments, the compositions are administered by intravenous infusion or injection.
- By “treatment”, “prevention” or “amelioration” of a disease or disorder is meant delaying or preventing the onset of such a disease or disorder, reversing, alleviating, ameliorating, inhibiting, slowing down or stopping the progression, aggravation, deterioration or severity of a condition associated with such a disease or disorder. In one embodiment, the symptoms of a disease or disorder are alleviated by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 40%, or at least 50%.
- As used herein, a “subject” means a human or animal. Usually the animal is a vertebrate such as a primate, rodent, domestic animal or game animal. Primates include chimpanzees, cynomologous monkeys, spider monkeys, and macaques, e.g., Rhesus. Rodents include mice, rats, woodchucks, ferrets, rabbits and hamsters. Domestic and game animals include cows, horses, pigs, deer, bison, buffalo, feline species, e.g., domestic cat, canine species, e.g., dog, fox, wolf, avian species, e.g., chicken, emu, ostrich, and fish, e.g., trout, catfish and salmon. Patient or subject includes any subset of the foregoing, e.g., all of the above, but excluding one or more groups or species such as humans, primates or rodents. In certain embodiments, the subject is a mammal, e.g., a primate, e.g., a human. The terms, “patient” and “subject” are used interchangeably herein.
- In some embodiments of the methods described herein further comprise selecting a subject identified as being in need of treatment by an oligonucleotide or composition of the invention. A subject suffering from a disease or disorder can be selected based on the symptoms presented.
- The oligonucleotide can be administrated to a subject in combination with a pharmaceutically active agent. Exemplary pharmaceutically active compound include, but are not limited to, those found in Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine, 13th Edition, Eds. T. R. Harrison et al. McGraw-Hill N.Y., NY; Physicians Desk Reference, 50th Edition, 1997, Oradell N.J., Medical Economics Co.; Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 8th Edition, Goodman and Gilman, 1990; and United States Pharmacopeia, The National Formulary, USP XII NF XVII, 1990, the complete contents of all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- The oligonucleotide and the pharmaceutically active agent may be administrated to the subject in the same pharmaceutical composition or in different pharmaceutical compositions (at the same time or at different times).
- The amount of oligonucleotide which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally out of one hundred percent, this amount will range from about 0.1% to 99% of oligonucleotide, preferably from about 5% to about 70%, most preferably from 10% to about 30%.
- Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. Compositions that exhibit large therapeutic indices, are preferred.
- The data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
- The therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the therapeutic which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography. The effects of any particular dosage can be monitored by a suitable bioassay.
- The dosage may be determined by a physician and adjusted, as necessary, to suit observed effects of the treatment. Generally, the compositions are administered so that oligonucleotide is given at a dose from 1 μg/kg to 150 mg/kg, 1 μg/kg to 100 mg/kg, 1 μg/kg to 50 mg/kg, 1 μg/kg to 20 mg/kg, 1 μg/kg to 10 mg/kg, 1 μg/kg to 1 mg/kg, 100 μg/kg to 100 mg/kg, 100 μg/kg to 50 mg/kg, 100 μg/kg to 20 mg/kg, 100 μg/kg to 10 mg/kg, 100 μg/kg to 1 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg to 50 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg, 1 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg, 10 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg, 10 mg/kg to 50 mg/kg, or 10 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg.
- With respect to duration and frequency of treatment, it is typical for skilled clinicians to monitor subjects in order to determine when the treatment is providing therapeutic benefit, and to determine whether to increase or decrease dosage, increase or decrease administration frequency, discontinue treatment, resume treatment or make other alteration to treatment regimen. The dosing schedule can vary from once a week to daily depending on a number of clinical factors, such as the subject's sensitivity to the polypeptides. The desired dose can be administered at one time or divided into subdoses, e.g., 2-4 subdoses and administered over a period of time, e.g., at appropriate intervals through the day or other appropriate schedule. Such sub-doses can be administered as unit dosage forms. Examples of dosing schedules are administration once a week, twice a week, three times a week, daily, twice daily, three times daily or four or more times daily.
- By “gene” or “target gene” is meant, a nucleic acid that encodes an RNA, for example, nucleic acid sequences including, but not limited to, structural genes encoding a polypeptide. The target gene can be a gene derived from a cell, an endogenous gene, a transgene, or exogenous genes such as genes of a pathogen, for example a virus, which is present in the cell after infection thereof. The cell containing the target gene can be derived from or contained in any organism, for example a plant, animal, protozoan, virus, bacterium, or fungus.
- Target genes include genes promoting unwanted cell proliferation, growth factor gene, growth factor receptor gene, genes expressing kinases, an adaptor protein gene, a gene encoding a G protein super family molecule, a gene encoding a transcription factor, a gene which mediates angiogenesis, a viral gene, a gene required for viral replication, a cellular gene which mediates viral function, a gene of a bacterial pathogen, a gene of an amoebic pathogen, a gene of a parasitic pathogen, a gene of a fungal pathogen, a gene which mediates an unwanted immune response, a gene which mediates the processing of pain, a gene which mediates a neurological disease, an allene gene found in cells characterized by loss of heterozygosity, or one allege gene of a polymorphic gene.
- Exemplary target genes include, but are not limited to, PDGF beta gene; Erb-B gene, Src gene; CRK gene; GRB2 gene; RAS gene; MEKK gene; JNK gene; RAF gene; Erk1/2 gene; PCNA(p21) gene; MYB gene; c-MYC gene; JUN gene; FOS gene; BCL-2 gene; Cyclin D gene; VEGF gene; EGFR gene; Cyclin A gene; Cyclin E gene; WNT-1 gene; beta-catenin gene; c-MET gene; PKC gene; NFKB gene; STAT3 gene; survivin gene; Her2/Neu gene; topoisomerase I gene; topoisomerase II alpha gene; p73 gene; p21(WAF1/CIP1) gene; p27(KIP1) gene; PPM1D gene; caveolin I gene; MIB I gene; MTAI gene; M68 gene; tumor suppressor genes; p53 gene; DN-p63 gene; pRb tumor suppressor gene; APC1 tumor suppressor gene; BRCA1 tumor suppressor gene; PTEN tumor suppressor gene; MLL fusion genes, e.g., MLL-AF9, BCR/ABL fusion gene; TEL/AML1 fusion gene; EWS/FLIl fusion gene; TLS/FUS1 fusion gene; PAX3/FKHR fusion gene; AML1/ETO fusion gene; alpha v-integrin gene; Flt-1 receptor gene; tubulin gene; Human Papilloma Virus gene, a gene required for Human Papilloma Virus replication, Human Immunodeficiency Virus gene, a gene required for Human Immunodeficiency Virus replication, Hepatitis A Virus gene, a gene required for Hepatitis A Virus replication, Hepatitis B Virus gene, a gene required for Hepatitis B Virus replication, Hepatitis C Virus gene, a gene required for Hepatitis C Virus replication, Hepatitis D Virus gene, a gene required for Hepatitis D Virus replication, Hepatitis E Virus gene, a gene required for Hepatitis E Virus replication, Hepatitis F Virus gene, a gene required for Hepatitis F Virus replication, Hepatitis G Virus gene, a gene required for Hepatitis G Virus replication, Hepatitis H Virus gene, a gene required for Hepatitis H Virus replication, Respiratory Syncytial Virus gene, a gene that is required for Respiratory Syncytial Virus replication, Herpes Simplex Virus gene, a gene that is required for Herpes Simplex Virus replication, herpes Cytomegalovirus gene, a gene that is required for herpes Cytomegalovirus replication, herpes Epstein Barr Virus gene, a gene that is required for herpes Epstein Barr Virus replication, Kaposi's Sarcoma-associated Herpes Virus gene, a gene that is required for Kaposi's Sarcoma-associated Herpes Virus replication, JC Virus gene, human gene that is required for JC Virus replication, myxovirus gene, a gene that is required for myxovirus gene replication, rhinovirus gene, a gene that is required for rhinovirus replication, coronavirus gene, a gene that is required for coronavirus replication, West Nile Virus gene, a gene that is required for West Nile Virus replication, St. Louis Encephalitis gene, a gene that is required for St. Louis Encephalitis replication, Tick-borne encephalitis virus gene, a gene that is required for Tick-borne encephalitis virus replication, Murray Valley encephalitis virus gene, a gene that is required for Murray Valley encephalitis virus replication, dengue virus gene, a gene that is required for dengue virus gene replication, Simian Virus 40 gene, a gene that is required for Simian Virus 40 replication, Human T Cell Lymphotropic Virus gene, a gene that is required for Human T Cell Lymphotropic Virus replication, Moloney-Murine Leukemia Virus gene, a gene that is required for Moloney-Murine Leukemia Virus replication, encephalomyocarditis virus gene, a gene that is required for encephalomyocarditis virus replication, measles virus gene, a gene that is required for measles virus replication, Varicella zoster virus gene, a gene that is required for Varicella zoster virus replication, adenovirus gene, a gene that is required for adenovirus replication, yellow fever virus gene, a gene that is required for yellow fever virus replication, poliovirus gene, a gene that is required for poliovirus replication, poxvirus gene, a gene that is required for poxvirus replication, plasmodium gene, a gene that is required for plasmodium gene replication, Mycobacterium ulcerans gene, a gene that is required for Mycobacterium ulcerans replication, Mycobacterium tuberculosis gene, a gene that is required for Mycobacterium tuberculosis replication, Mycobacterium leprae gene, a gene that is required for Mycobacterium leprae replication, Staphylococcus aureus gene, a gene that is required for Staphylococcus aureus replication, Streptococcus pneumoniae gene, a gene that is required for Streptococcus pneumoniae replication, Streptococcus pyogenes gene, a gene that is required for Streptococcus pyogenes replication, Chlamydia pneumoniae gene, a gene that is required for Chlamydia pneumoniae replication, Mycoplasma pneumoniae gene, a gene that is required for Mycoplasma pneumoniae replication, an integrin gene, a selectin gene, complement system gene, chemokine gene, chemokine receptor gene, GCSF gene, Gro1 gene, Gro2 gene, Gro3 gene, PF4 gene, MIG gene, Pro-Platelet Basic Protein gene, MIP-1I gene, MIP-1J gene, RANTES gene, MCP-1 gene, MCP-2 gene, MCP-3 gene, CMBKR1 gene, CMBKR2 gene, CMBKR3 gene, CMBKR5v, AIF-1 gene, I-309 gene, a gene to a component of an ion channel, a gene to a neurotransmitter receptor, a gene to a neurotransmitter ligand, amyloid-family gene, presenilin gene, HD gene, DRPLA gene, SCA1 gene, SCA2 gene, MJD1 gene, CACNLlA4 gene, SCA7 gene, SCA8 gene, allele gene found in loss of heterozygosity (LOH) cells, one allele gene of a polymorphic gene and combinations thereof.
- The loss of heterozygosity (LOH) can result in homozygosity for sequence, e.g., genes, in the area of LOH. This can result in a significant genetic difference between normal and disease-state cells, e.g., cancer cells, and provides a useful difference between normal and disease-state cells, e.g., cancer cells. This difference can arise because a gene or other sequence is heterozygous in diploid cells but is hemizygous in cells having LOH. The regions of LOH will often include a gene, the loss of which promotes unwanted proliferation, e.g., a tumor suppressor gene, and other sequences including, e.g., other genes, in some cases a gene which is essential for normal function, e.g., growth. Methods of the invention rely, in part, on the specific modulation of one allele of an essential gene with a composition of the invention.
- As used herein the term “modulate gene expression” means that expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecule or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits is up regulated or down regulated, such that expression, level, or activity is greater than or less than that observed in the absence of the modulator. For example, the term “modulate” can mean “inhibit,” but the use of the word “modulate” is not limited to this definition.
- As used herein, gene expression modulation happens when the expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecule or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits is at least 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%, 2-fold, 3-fold, 4-fold, 5-fold or more different from that observed in the absence of the modulator, e.g., RNAi agent. The % and/or fold difference can be calculated relative to the control or the non-control, for example,
-
- As used herein, the term “inhibit”, “down-regulate”, or “reduce”, means that the expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecules or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits, or activity of one or more proteins or protein subunits, is reduced below that observed in the absence of modulator. The gene expression is down-regulated when expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecules or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits, or activity of one or more proteins or protein subunits, is reduced at least 10% lower relative to a corresponding non-modulated control, and preferably at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99% or most preferably, 100% (i.e., no gene expression).
- As used herein, the term “increase” or “up-regulate”, means that the expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecules or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits, or activity of one or more proteins or protein subunits, is increased above that observed in the absence of modulator. The gene expression is up-regulated when expression of the gene, or level of RNA molecules or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits, or activity of one or more proteins or protein subunits, is increased at least 10% relative to a corresponding non-modulated control, and preferably at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 100%, 1.1-fold, 1.25-fold, 1.5-fold, 1.75-fold, 2-fold, 3-fold, 4-fold, 5-fold, 10-fold, 50-fold, 100-fold or more.
- For ease of exposition the formulations, compositions and methods in this section are discussed largely with regard to RNAi agents. It may be understood, however, that these formulations, compositions and methods can be practiced with other oligonucleotides of the invention, e.g., antisense, antagomir, aptamer and ribozyme, and such practice is within the invention.
- A formulated RNAi composition can assume a variety of states. In some examples, the composition is at least partially crystalline, uniformly crystalline, and/or anhydrous (e.g., less than 80, 50, 30, 20, or 10% water). In another example, the RNAi is in an aqueous phase, e.g., in a solution that includes water.
- The aqueous phase or the crystalline compositions can, e.g., be incorporated into a delivery vehicle, e.g., a liposome (particularly for the aqueous phase) or a particle (e.g., a microparticle as can be appropriate for a crystalline composition). Generally, the RNAi composition is formulated in a manner that is compatible with the intended method of administration.
- In particular embodiments, the composition is prepared by at least one of the following methods: spray drying, lyophilization, vacuum drying, evaporation, fluid bed drying, or a combination of these techniques; or sonication with a lipid, freeze-drying, condensation and other self-assembly.
- An RNAi preparation can be formulated in combination with another agent, e.g., another therapeutic agent or an agent that stabilizes the RNAi agent, e.g., a protein that complex with RNAi agent to form an iRNP. Still other agents include chelators, e.g., EDTA (e.g., to remove divalent cations such as Mg 2+), salts, RNAse inhibitors (e.g., a broad specificity RNAse inhibitor such as RNAsin) and so forth.
- In one embodiment, the RNAi preparation includes another RNAi agent, e.g., a second RNAi that can mediated RNAi with respect to a second gene, or with respect to the same gene. Still other preparation can include at least 3, 5, ten, twenty, fifty, or a hundred or more different RNAi species. Such RNAi agents can mediate RNAi with respect to a similar number of different genes.
- In one embodiment, the RNAi preparation includes at least a second therapeutic agent (e.g., an agent other than RNA or DNA). For example, an RNAi composition for the treatment of a viral disease, e.g., HIV, might include a known antiviral agent (e.g., a protease inhibitor or reverse transcriptase inhibitor). In another example, an RNAi agent composition for the treatment of a cancer might further comprise a chemotherapeutic agent.
- Exemplary formulations are discussed below:
- The oligonucleotides of the invention, e.g. antisense, antagomir, aptamer, ribozyme and RNAi agent can be formulated in liposomes. As used herein, a liposome is a structure having lipid-containing membranes enclosing an aqueous interior. Liposomes may have one or more lipid membranes. Liposomes may be characterized by membrane type and by size. Small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs) have a single membrane and typically range between 0.02 and 0.05 μm in diameter; large unilamellar vesicles (LUVS) are typically larger than 0.05 μm. Oligolamellar large vesicles and multilamellar vesicles have multiple, usually concentric, membrane layers and are typically larger than 0.1 μm. Liposomes with several nonconcentric membranes, i.e., several smaller vesicles contained within a larger vesicle, are termed multivesicular vesicles.
- Liposomes may further include one or more additional lipids and/or other components such as cholesterol. Other lipids may be included in the liposome compositions for a variety of purposes, such as to prevent lipid oxidation, to stabilize the bilayer, to reduce aggregation during formation or to attach ligands onto the liposome surface. Any of a number of lipids may be present, including amphipathic, neutral, cationic, and anionic lipids. Such lipids can be used alone or in combination.
- Additional components that may be present in a lipsomes include bilayer stabilizing components such as polyamide oligomers (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,320,017), peptides, proteins, detergents, lipid-derivatives, such as PEG conjugated to phosphatidylethanolamine, PEG conjugated to phosphatidic acid, PEG conjugated to ceramides (see, U.S. Pat. No. 5,885,613), PEG conjugated dialkylamines and PEG conjugated 1,2-diacyloxypropan-3-amines.
- Liposome can include components selected to reduce aggregation of lipid particles during formation, which may result from steric stabilization of particles which prevents charge-induced aggregation during formation. Suitable components that reduce aggregation include, but are not limited to, polyethylene glycol (PEG)-modified lipids, monosialoganglioside Gm1, and polyamide oligomers (“PAO”) such as (described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,320,017). Exemplary suitable PEG-modified lipids include, but are not limited to, PEG-modified phosphatidylethanolamine and phosphatidic acid, PEG-ceramide conjugates (e.g., PEG-CerC14 or PEG-CerC20), PEG-modified dialkylamines and PEG-modified 1,2-diacyloxypropan-3-amines. Particularly preferred are PEG-modified diacylglycerols and dialkylglycerols. Other compounds with uncharged, hydrophilic, steric-barrier moieties, which prevent aggregation during formation, like PEG, Gm1, or ATTA, can also be coupled to lipids to reduce aggregation during formation. ATTA-lipids are described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 6,320,017, and PEG-lipid conjugates are described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,820,873, 5,534,499 and 5,885,613. Typically, the concentration of the lipid component selected to reduce aggregation is about 1 to 15% (by mole percent of lipids). It should be noted that aggregation preventing compounds do not necessarily require lipid conjugation to function properly. Free PEG or free ATTA in solution may be sufficient to prevent aggregation. If the liposomes are stable after formulation, the PEG or ATTA can be dialyzed away before administration to a subject.
- Neutral lipids, when present in the liposome composition, can be any of a number of lipid species which exist either in an uncharged or neutral zwitterionic form at physiological pH. Such lipids include, for example diacylphosphatidylcholine, diacylphosphatidylethanolamine, ceramide, sphingomyelin, dihydrosphingomyelin, cephalin, and cerebrosides. The selection of neutral lipids for use in liposomes described herein is generally guided by consideration of, e.g., liposome size and stability of the liposomes in the bloodstream. Preferably, the neutral lipid component is a lipid having two acyl groups, (i.e., diacylphosphatidylcholine and diacylphosphatidylethanolamine). Lipids having a variety of acyl chain groups of varying chain length and degree of saturation are available or may be isolated or synthesized by well-known techniques. In one group of embodiments, lipids containing saturated fatty acids with carbon chain lengths in the range of C14 to C22 are preferred. In another group of embodiments, lipids with mono or diunsaturated fatty acids with carbon chain lengths in the range of C14 to C22 are used. Additionally, lipids having mixtures of saturated and unsaturated fatty acid chains can be used. Preferably, the neutral lipids used in the present invention are DOPE, DSPC, POPC, DMPC, DPPC or any related phosphatidylcholine. The neutral lipids useful in the present invention may also be composed of sphingomyelin, dihydrosphingomyeline, or phospholipids with other head groups, such as serine and inositol.
- The sterol component of the lipid mixture, when present, can be any of those sterols conventionally used in the field of liposome, lipid vesicle or lipid particle preparation. A preferred sterol is cholesterol.
- Cationic lipids, when present in the liposome composition, can be any of a number of lipid species which carry a net positive charge at about physiological pH. Such lipids include, but are not limited to, N,N-dioleyl-N,N-dimethylammonium chloride (“DODAC”); N-(2,3-dioleyloxy)propyl-N,N—N-triethylammonium chloride (“DOTMA”); N,N-distearyl-N,N-dimethylammonium bromide (“DDAB”); N-(2,3-dioleoyloxy)propyl)-N,N,N-trimethylammonium chloride (“DOTAP”); 1,2-Dioleyloxy-3-trimethylaminopropane chloride salt (“DOTAP.Cl”); 3β-(N—(N′,N′-dimethylaminoethane)-carbamoyl)cholesterol (“DC-Chol”), N-(1-(2,3-dioleyloxy)propyl)-N-2-(sperminecarboxamido)ethyl)-N,N-dimethylammonium trifluoracetate (“DOSPA”), dioctadecylamidoglycyl carboxyspermine (“DOGS”), 1,2-dileoyl-sn-3-phosphoethanolamine (“DOPE”), 1,2-dioleoyl-3-dimethylammonium propane (“DODAP”), N,N-dimethyl-2,3-dioleyloxy)propylamine (“DODMA”), N-(1,2-dimyristyloxyprop-3-yl)-N,N-dimethyl-N-hydroxyethyl ammonium bromide (“DMRIE”), 5-carboxyspermylglycine diocaoleyamide (“DOGS”), and dipalmitoylphosphatidylethanolamine 5-carboxyspermyl-amide (“DPPES”). Additionally, a number of commercial preparations of cationic lipids can be used, such as, e.g., LIPOFECTIN (including DOTMA and DOPE, available from GIBCO/BRL), and LIPOFECTAMINE (comprising DOSPA and DOPE, available from GIBCO/BRL). Other cationic lipids suitable for lipid particle formation are described in WO98/39359, WO96/37194. Other cationic lipids suitable for liposome formation are described in U.S. Provisional applications No. 61/018,616 (filed Jan. 2, 2008), No. 61/039,748 (filed Mar. 26, 2008), No. 61/047,087 (filed Apr. 22, 2008) and No. 61/051,528 (filed May 21-2008), all of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties for all purposes.
- Anionic lipids, when present in the liposome composition, can be any of a number of lipid species which carry a net negative charge at about physiological pH. Such lipids include, but are not limited to, phosphatidylglycerol, cardiolipin, diacylphosphatidylserine, diacylphosphatidic acid, N-dodecanoyl phosphatidylethanoloamine, N-succinyl phosphatidylethanolamine, N-glutaryl phosphatidylethanolamine, lysylphosphatidylglycerol, and other anionic modifying groups joined to neutral lipids.
- “Amphipathic lipids” refer to any suitable material, wherein the hydrophobic portion of the lipid material orients into a hydrophobic phase, while the hydrophilic portion orients toward the aqueous phase. Such compounds include, but are not limited to, phospholipids, aminolipids, and sphingolipids. Representative phospholipids include sphingomyelin, phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylserine, phosphatidylinositol, phosphatidic acid, palmitoyloleoylphosphatdylcholine, lysophosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidylethanolamine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, dioleoylphosphatidylcholine, distearoylphosphatidylcholine, or dilinoleoylphosphatidylcholine. Other phosphorus-lacking compounds, such as sphingolipids, glycosphingolipid families, diacylglycerols, and β-acyloxyacids, can also be used. Additionally, such amphipathic lipids can be readily mixed with other lipids, such as triglycerides and sterols.
- Also suitable for inclusion in the liposome compostions of the present invention are programmable fusion lipids. Liposomes containing programmable fusion lipids have little tendency to fuse with cell membranes and deliver their payload until a given signal event occurs. This allows the liposome to distribute more evenly after injection into an organism or disease site before it starts fusing with cells. The signal event can be, for example, a change in pH, temperature, ionic environment, or time. In the latter case, a fusion delaying or “cloaking” component, such as an ATTA-lipid conjugate or a PEG-lipid conjugate, can simply exchange out of the liposome membrane over time. By the time the liposome is suitably distributed in the body, it has lost sufficient cloaking agent so as to be fusogenic. With other signal events, it is desirable to choose a signal that is associated with the disease site or target cell, such as increased temperature at a site of inflammation.
- A liposome can also include a targeting moiety, e.g., a targeting moiety that is specific to a cell type or tissue. Targeting of liposomes with a surface coating of hydrophilic polymer chains, such as polyethylene glycol (PEG) chains, for targeting has been proposed (Allen, et al., Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 1237: 99-108 (1995); DeFrees, et al., Journal of the American Chemistry Society 118: 6101-6104 (1996); Blume, et al., Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 1149: 180-184 (1993); Klibanov, et al., Journal of Liposome Research 2: 321-334 (1992); U.S. Pat. No. 5,013,556; Zalipsky, Bioconjugate Chemistry 4: 296-299 (1993); Zalipsky, FEBS Letters 353: 71-74 (1994); Zalipsky, in Stealth Liposomes Chapter 9 (Lasic and Martin, Eds) CRC Press, Boca Raton Fla. (1995). Other targeting moieties, such as ligands, cell surface receptors, glycoproteins, vitamins (e.g., riboflavin), aptamers and monoclonal antibodies, can also be used. The targeting moieties can include the entire protein or fragments thereof. Targeting mechanisms generally require that the targeting agents be positioned on the surface of the liposome in such a manner that the targeting moiety is available for interaction with the target, for example, a cell surface receptor.
- In one approach, a targeting moiety, such as receptor binding ligand, for targeting the liposome is linked to the lipids forming the liposome. In another approach, the targeting moiety is attached to the distal ends of the PEG chains forming the hydrophilic polymer coating (Klibanov, et al., Journal of Liposome Research 2: 321-334 (1992); Kirpotin et al., FEBS Letters 388: 115-118 (1996)). A variety of different targeting agents and methods are known and available in the art, including those described, e.g., in Sapra, P. and Allen, T M, Prog. Lipid Res. 42(5):439-62 (2003); and Abra, R M et al., J. Liposome Res. 12:1-3, (2002). Other lipids conjugated with targeting moieties are described in U.S. provisional application No. 61/127,751 (filed May 14, 2008) and PCT application #PCT/US2007/080331 (filed Oct. 3, 2007), all of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties for all purposes.
- A liposome composition of the invention can be prepared by a variety of methods that are known in the art. See e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,235,871, 4,897,355 and 5,171,678; published PCT applications WO 96/14057 and WO 96/37194; Felgner, P. L. et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA (1987) 8:7413-7417, Bangham, et al. M. Mol. Biol. (1965) 23:238, Olson, et al. Biochim. Biophys. Acta (1979) 557:9, Szoka, et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (1978) 75: 4194, Mayhew, et al. Biochim. Biophys. Acta (1984) 775:169, Kim, et al. Biochim. Biophys. Acta (1983) 728:339, and Fukunaga, et al. Endocrinol. (1984) 115:757.
- For example, a liposome composition of the invention can be prepared by first dissolving the lipid components of a liposome in a detergent so that micelles are formed with the lipid component. The detergent can have a high critical micelle concentration and maybe nonionic. Exemplary detergents include, but are not limited to, cholate, CHAPS, octylglucoside, deoxycholate and lauroyl sarcosine. The RNAi agent preparation e.g., an emulsion, is then added to the micelles that include the lipid components. After condensation, the detergent is removed, e.g., by dialysis, to yield a liposome containing the RNAi agent. If necessary a carrier compound that assists in condensation can be added during the condensation reaction, e.g., by controlled addition. For example, the carrier compound can be a polymer other than a nucleic acid (e.g., spermine or spermidine). To favor condensation, pH of the mixture can also be adjusted.
- In another example, liposomes of the present invention may be prepared by diffusing a lipid derivatized with a hydrophilic polymer into preformed liposome, such as by exposing preformed liposomes to micelles composed of lipid-grafted polymers, at lipid concentrations corresponding to the final mole percent of derivatized lipid which is desired in the liposome. Liposomes containing a hydrophilic polymer can also be formed by homogenization, lipid-field hydration, or extrusion techniques, as are known in the art.
- In another exemplary formulation procedure, the RNAi agent is first dispersed by sonication in a lysophosphatidylcholine or other low CMC surfactant (including polymer grafted lipids). The resulting micellar suspension of RNAi agent is then used to rehydrate a dried lipid sample that contains a suitable mole percent of polymer-grafted lipid, or cholesterol. The lipid and active agent suspension is then formed into liposomes using extrusion techniques as are known in the art, and the resulting liposomes separated from the unencapsulated solution by standard column separation.
- In one aspect of the present invention, the liposomes are prepared to have substantially homogeneous sizes in a selected size range. One effective sizing method involves extruding an aqueous suspension of the liposomes through a series of polycarbonate membranes having a selected uniform pore size; the pore size of the membrane will correspond roughly with the largest sizes of liposomes produced by extrusion through that membrane. See e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,737,323.
- Other suitable formulations for RNAi agents are described in PCT application #PCT/US2007/080331 (filed Oct. 3, 2007) and U.S. Provisional applications No. 61/018,616 (filed Jan. 2, 2008), No. 61/039,748 (filed Mar. 26, 2008), No. 61/047,087 (filed Apr. 22, 2008) and No. 61/051,528 (filed May 21-2008), No. 61/113,179 (filed Nov. 10, 2008) all of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties for all purposes.
- Recently, the pharmaceutical industry introduced microemulsification technology to improve bioavailability of some lipophilic (water insoluble) pharmaceutical agents. Examples include Trimetrine (Dordunoo, S. K., et al., Drug Development and Industrial Pharmacy, 17(12), 1685-1713, 1991 and REV 5901 (Sheen, P. C., et al., J Pharm Sci 80(7), 712-714, 1991). Among other things, microemulsification provides enhanced bioavailability by preferentially directing absorption to the lymphatic system instead of the circulatory system, which thereby bypasses the liver, and prevents destruction of the compounds in the hepatobiliary circulation.
- In one aspect of invention, the formulations contain micelles formed from a compound of the present invention and at least one amphiphilic carrier, in which the micelles have an average diameter of less than about 100 nm. More preferred embodiments provide micelles having an average diameter less than about 50 nm, and even more preferred embodiments provide micelles having an average diameter less than about 30 nm, or even less than about 20 nm.
- As defined herein, “micelles” are a particular type of molecular assembly in which amphipathic molecules are arranged in a spherical structure such that all hydrophobic portions on the molecules are directed inward, leaving the hydrophilic portions in contact with the surrounding aqueous phase. The converse arrangement exists if the environment is hydrophobic.
- While all suitable amphiphilic carriers are contemplated, the presently preferred carriers are generally those that have Generally-Recognized-as-Safe (GRAS) status, and that can both solubilize the compound of the present invention and microemulsify it at a later stage when the solution comes into a contact with a complex water phase (such as one found in human gastrointestinal tract). Usually, amphiphilic ingredients that satisfy these requirements have HLB (hydrophilic to lipophilic balance) values of 2-20, and their structures contain straight chain aliphatic radicals in the range of C-6 to C-20. Examples are polyethylene-glycolized fatty glycerides and polyethylene glycols.
- Exemplary amphiphilic carriers include, but are not limited to, lecithin, hyaluronic acid, pharmaceutically acceptable salts of hyaluronic acid, glycolic acid, lactic acid, chamomile extract, cucumber extract, oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, monoolein, monooleates, monolaurates, borage oil, evening of primrose oil, menthol, trihydroxy oxo cholanyl glycine and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, glycerin, polyglycerin, lysine, polylysine, triolein, polyoxyethylene ethers and analogues thereof, polidocanol alkyl ethers and analogues thereof, chenodeoxycholate, deoxycholate, and mixtures thereof.
- Particularly preferred amphiphilic carriers are saturated and monounsaturated polyethyleneglycolyzed fatty acid glycerides, such as those obtained from fully or partially hydrogenated various vegetable oils. Such oils may advantageously consist of tri-. di- and mono-fatty acid glycerides and di- and mono-polyethyleneglycol esters of the corresponding fatty acids, with a particularly preferred fatty acid composition including capric acid 4-10, capric acid 3-9, lauric acid 40-50, myristic acid 14-24, palmitic acid 4-14 and stearic acid 5-15%. Another useful class of amphiphilic carriers includes partially esterified sorbitan and/or sorbitol, with saturated or mono-unsaturated fatty acids (SPAN-series) or corresponding ethoxylated analogs (TWEEN-series).
- Commercially available amphiphilic carriers are particularly contemplated, including Gelucire-series, Labrafil, Labrasol, or Lauroglycol (all manufactured and distributed by Gattefosse Corporation, Saint Priest, France), PEG-mono-oleate, PEG-di-oleate, PEG-monolaurate and di-laurate, Lecithin, Polysorbate 80, etc (produced and distributed by a number of companies in USA and worldwide).
- Mixed micelle formulation suitable for delivery through transdermal membranes may be prepared by mixing an aqueous solution of the RNAi composition, an alkali metal C8 to C22 alkyl sulphate, and an amphiphilic carrier. The amphiphilic carrier may be added at the same time or after addition of the alkali metal alkyl sulphate. Mixed micelles will form with substantially any kind of mixing of the ingredients but vigorous mixing in order to provide smaller size micelles.
- In one method a first micelle composition is prepared which contains the RNAi composition and at least the alkali metal alkyl sulphate. The first micelle composition is then mixed with at least three amphiphilic carriers to form a mixed micelle composition. In another method, the micelle composition is prepared by mixing the RNAi composition, the alkali metal alkyl sulphate and at least one of the amphiphilic carriers, followed by addition of the remaining micelle amphiphilic carriers, with vigorous mixing.
- Phenol and/or m-cresol may be added to the mixed micelle composition to stabilize the formulation and protect against bacterial growth. Alternatively, phenol and/or m-cresol may be added with the amphiphilic carriers. An isotonic agent such as glycerin may also be added after formation of the mixed micelle composition.
- For delivery of the micelle formulation as a spray, the formulation can be put into an aerosol dispenser and the dispenser is charged with a propellant, such as hydrogen-containing chlorofluorocarbons, hydrogen-containing fluorocarbons, dimethyl ether, diethyl ether and TEA 134a (1,1,1,2 tetrafluoroethane).
- The oligonucleotides of the present invention may be prepared and formulated as emulsions. Emulsions are typically heterogenous systems of one liquid dispersed in another in the form of droplets (Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199; Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., Volume 1, p. 245; Block in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 2, p. 335; Higuchi et al., in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1985, p. 301). Emulsions are often biphasic systems comprising two immiscible liquid phases intimately mixed and dispersed with each other. In general, emulsions may be of either the water-in-oil (w/o) or the oil-in-water (o/w) variety. When an aqueous phase is finely divided into and dispersed as minute droplets into a bulk oily phase, the resulting composition is called a water-in-oil (w/o) emulsion. Alternatively, when an oily phase is finely divided into and dispersed as minute droplets into a bulk aqueous phase, the resulting composition is called an oil-in-water (o/w) emulsion. Emulsions may contain additional components in addition to the dispersed phases, and the active drug which may be present as a solution in either the aqueous phase, oily phase or itself as a separate phase. Pharmaceutical excipients such as emulsifiers, stabilizers, dyes, and anti-oxidants may also be present in emulsions as needed. Pharmaceutical emulsions may also be multiple emulsions that are comprised of more than two phases such as, for example, in the case of oil-in-water-in-oil (o/w/o) and water-in-oil-in-water (w/o/w) emulsions. Such complex formulations often provide certain advantages that simple binary emulsions do not. Multiple emulsions in which individual oil droplets of an o/w emulsion enclose small water droplets constitute a w/o/w emulsion. Likewise a system of oil droplets enclosed in globules of water stabilized in an oily continuous phase provides an o/w/o emulsion.
- Emulsions are characterized by little or no thermodynamic stability. Often, the dispersed or discontinuous phase of the emulsion is well dispersed into the external or continuous phase and maintained in this form through the means of emulsifiers or the viscosity of the formulation. Either of the phases of the emulsion may be a semisolid or a solid, as is the case of emulsion-style ointment bases and creams. Other means of stabilizing emulsions entail the use of emulsifiers that may be incorporated into either phase of the emulsion. Emulsifiers may broadly be classified into four categories: synthetic surfactants, naturally occurring emulsifiers, absorption bases, and finely dispersed solids (Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199).
- Synthetic surfactants, also known as surface active agents, have found wide applicability in the formulation of emulsions and have been reviewed in the literature (Rieger, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 285; Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., 1988, volume 1, p. 199). Surfactants are typically amphiphilic and comprise a hydrophilic and a hydrophobic portion. The ratio of the hydrophilic to the hydrophobic nature of the surfactant has been termed the hydrophile/lipophile balance (HLB) and is a valuable tool in categorizing and selecting surfactants in the preparation of formulations. Surfactants may be classified into different classes based on the nature of the hydrophilic group: nonionic, anionic, cationic and amphoteric (Rieger, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 285).
- Naturally occurring emulsifiers used in emulsion formulations include lanolin, beeswax, phosphatides, lecithin and acacia. Absorption bases possess hydrophilic properties such that they can soak up water to form w/o emulsions yet retain their semisolid consistencies, such as anhydrous lanolin and hydrophilic petrolatum. Finely divided solids have also been used as good emulsifiers especially in combination with surfactants and in viscous preparations. These include polar inorganic solids, such as heavy metal hydroxides, nonswelling clays such as bentonite, attapulgite, hectorite, kaolin, montmorillonite, colloidal aluminum silicate and colloidal magnesium aluminum silicate, pigments and nonpolar solids such as carbon or glyceryl tristearate.
- A large variety of non-emulsifying materials is also included in emulsion formulations and contributes to the properties of emulsions. These include fats, oils, waxes, fatty acids, fatty alcohols, fatty esters, humectants, hydrophilic colloids, preservatives and antioxidants (Block, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 335; Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199).
- Hydrophilic colloids or hydrocolloids include naturally occurring gums and synthetic polymers such as polysaccharides (for example, acacia, agar, alginic acid, carrageenan, guar gum, karaya gum, and tragacanth), cellulose derivatives (for example, carboxymethylcellulose and carboxypropylcellulose), and synthetic polymers (for example, carbomers, cellulose ethers, and carboxyvinyl polymers). These disperse or swell in water to form colloidal solutions that stabilize emulsions by forming strong interfacial films around the dispersed-phase droplets and by increasing the viscosity of the external phase.
- Since emulsions often contain a number of ingredients such as carbohydrates, proteins, sterols and phosphatides that may readily support the growth of microbes, these formulations often incorporate preservatives. Commonly used preservatives included in emulsion formulations include methyl paraben, propyl paraben, quaternary ammonium salts, benzalkonium chloride, esters of p-hydroxybenzoic acid, and boric acid. Antioxidants are also commonly added to emulsion formulations to prevent deterioration of the formulation. Antioxidants used may be free radical scavengers such as tocopherols, alkyl gallates, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, or reducing agents such as ascorbic acid and sodium metabisulfite, and antioxidant synergists such as citric acid, tartaric acid, and lecithin.
- The application of emulsion formulations via dermatological, oral and parenteral routes and methods for their manufacture have been reviewed in the literature (Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199). Emulsion formulations for oral delivery have been very widely used because of ease of formulation, as well as efficacy from an absorption and bioavailability standpoint (Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 245; Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199). Mineral-oil base laxatives, oil-soluble vitamins and high fat nutritive preparations are among the materials that have commonly been administered orally as o/w emulsions.
- In one embodiment of the present invention, the compositions of FLiPs are formulated as microemulsions. A microemulsion may be defined as a system of water, oil and amphiphile which is a single optically isotropic and thermodynamically stable liquid solution (Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 245). Typically microemulsions are systems that are prepared by first dispersing an oil in an aqueous surfactant solution and then adding a sufficient amount of a fourth component, generally an intermediate chain-length alcohol to form a transparent system. Therefore, microemulsions have also been described as thermodynamically stable, isotropically clear dispersions of two immiscible liquids that are stabilized by interfacial films of surface-active molecules (Leung and Shah, in: Controlled Release of Drugs: Polymers and Aggregate Systems, Rosoff, M., Ed., 1989, VCH Publishers, New York, pages 185-215). Microemulsions commonly are prepared via a combination of three to five components that include oil, water, surfactant, cosurfactant and electrolyte. Whether the microemulsion is of the water-in-oil (w/o) or an oil-in-water (o/w) type is dependent on the properties of the oil and surfactant used and on the structure and geometric packing of the polar heads and hydrocarbon tails of the surfactant molecules (Schott, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1985, p. 271).
- The phenomenological approach utilizing phase diagrams has been extensively studied and has yielded a comprehensive knowledge, to one skilled in the art, of how to formulate microemulsions (Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 245; Block, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 335). Compared to conventional emulsions, microemulsions offer the advantage of solubilizing water-insoluble drugs in a formulation of thermodynamically stable droplets that are formed spontaneously.
- Surfactants used in the preparation of microemulsions include, but are not limited to, ionic surfactants, non-ionic surfactants, Brij 96, polyoxyethylene oleyl ethers, polyglycerol fatty acid esters, tetraglycerol monolaurate (ML310), tetraglycerol monooleate (MO310), hexaglycerol monooleate (PO310), hexaglycerol pentaoleate (PO500), decaglycerol monocaprate (MCA750), decaglycerol monooleate (MO750), decaglycerol sesquioleate (SO750), decaglycerol decaoleate (DAO750), alone or in combination with cosurfactants. The cosurfactant, usually a short-chain alcohol such as ethanol, 1-propanol, and 1-butanol, serves to increase the interfacial fluidity by penetrating into the surfactant film and consequently creating a disordered film because of the void space generated among surfactant molecules. Microemulsions may, however, be prepared without the use of cosurfactants and alcohol-free self-emulsifying microemulsion systems are known in the art. The aqueous phase may typically be, but is not limited to, water, an aqueous solution of the drug, glycerol, PEG300, PEG400, polyglycerols, propylene glycols, and derivatives of ethylene glycol. The oil phase may include, but is not limited to, materials such as Captex 300, Captex 355, Capmul MCM, fatty acid esters, medium chain (C8-C12) mono, di, and tri-glycerides, polyoxyethylated glyceryl fatty acid esters, fatty alcohols, polyglycolized glycerides, saturated polyglycolized C8-C10 glycerides, vegetable oils and silicone oil.
- Microemulsions are particularly of interest from the standpoint of drug solubilization and the enhanced absorption of drugs. Lipid based microemulsions (both o/w and w/o) have been proposed to enhance the oral bioavailability of drugs, including peptides (Constantinides et al., Pharmaceutical Research, 1994, 11, 1385-1390; Ritschel, Meth. Find. Exp. Clin. Pharmacol., 1993, 13, 205). Microemulsions afford advantages of improved drug solubilization, protection of drug from enzymatic hydrolysis, possible enhancement of drug absorption due to surfactant-induced alterations in membrane fluidity and permeability, ease of preparation, ease of oral administration over solid dosage forms, improved clinical potency, and decreased toxicity (Constantinides et al., Pharmaceutical Research, 1994, 11, 1385; Ho et al., J. Pharm. Sci., 1996, 85, 138-143). Often microemulsions may form spontaneously when their components are brought together at ambient temperature. This may be particularly advantageous when formulating thermolabile drugs, peptides or dsRNAs. Microemulsions have also been effective in the transdermal delivery of active components in both cosmetic and pharmaceutical applications. It is expected that the microemulsion compositions and formulations of the present invention will facilitate the increased systemic absorption of dsRNAs and nucleic acids from the gastrointestinal tract, as well as improve the local cellular uptake of dsRNAs and nucleic acids.
- Microemulsions of the present invention may also contain additional components and additives such as sorbitan monostearate (Grill 3), Labrasol, and penetration enhancers to improve the properties of the formulation and to enhance the absorption of the dsRNAs and nucleic acids of the present invention. Penetration enhancers used in the microemulsions of the present invention may be classified as belonging to one of five broad categories—surfactants, fatty acids, bile salts, chelating agents, and non-chelating non-surfactants (Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, p. 92). Each of these classes has been discussed above.
- It has been shown that cholesterol-conjugated sRNAis bind to HDL and LDL lipoprotein particles which mediate cellular uptake upon binding to their respective receptors. Both high-density lipoproteins (HDL) and low density lipoproteins (LDL) play a critical role in cholesterol transport. HDL directs sRNAi delivery into liver, gut, kidney and steroidogenic organs, whereas LDL targets sRNAi primarily to liver (Wolfrum et al. Nature Biotechnology Vol. 25 (2007)). Thus in one aspect the invention provides formulated lipid particles (FLiPs) comprising (a) an oligonucleotide of the invention, e.g., antisense, antagomir, aptamer, ribozyme and an RNAi agent, where said oligonucleotide has been conjugated to a lipophile and (b) at least one lipid component, for example an emulsion, liposome, isolated lipoprotein, reconstituted lipoprotein or phospholipid, to which the conjugated oligonucleotide has been aggregated, admixed or associated.
- The stoichiometry of oligonucleotide to the lipid component may be 1:1. Alternatively the stoichiometry may be 1:many, many:1 or many:many, where many is greater than 2.
- The FLiP may comprise triacylglycerol, phospholipids, glycerol and one or several lipid-binding proteins aggregated, admixed or associated via a lipophilic linker molecule with a single- or double-stranded oligonucleotide, wherein said FLiP has an affinity to heart, lung and/or muscle tissue. Surprisingly, it has been found that due to said one or several lipid-binding proteins in combination with the above mentioned lipids, the affinity to heart, lung and/or muscle tissue is very specific. These FLiPs may therefore serve as carrier for oligonucleotides. Due to their affinity to heart, lung and muscle cells, they may specifically transport the oligonucleotides to these tissues. Therefore, the FLiPs according to the present invention may be used for many severe heart, lung and muscle diseases, for example myocarditis, ischemic heart disease, myopathies, cardiomyopathies, metabolic diseases, rhabdomyosarcomas.
- One suitable lipid component for FLiP is Intralipid. Intralipid® is a brand name for the first safe fat emulsion for human use. Intralipid® 20% (a 20% intravenous fat emulsion) is a sterile, non-pyrogenic fat emulsion prepared for intravenous administration as a source of calories and essential fatty acids. It is made up of 20% soybean oil, 1.2% egg yolk phospholipids, 2.25% glycerin, and water for injection. Intralipid® 10% is made up of 10% soybean oil, 1.2% egg yolk phospholipids, 2.25% glycerin, and water for injection. It is further within the present invention that other suitable oils, such as saflower oil, may serve to produce the lipid component of the FLiP.
- In one embodiment of the invention is a FLiP comprising a lipid particle comprising 15-25% triacylglycerol, about 1-2% phospholipids and 2-3% glycerol, and one or several lipid-binding proteins.
- In another embodiment of the invention the lipid particle comprises about 20% triacylglycerol, about 1.2% phospholipids and about 2.25% glycerol, which corresponds to the total composition of Intralipid, and one or several lipid-binding proteins.
- Another suitable lipid component for FLiPs is lipoproteins, for example isolated lipoproteins or more preferably reconstituted lipoprotieins. Liporoteins are particles that contain both proteins and lipids. The lipids or their derivatives may be covalently or non-covalently bound to the proteins. Exemplary lipoproteins include chylomicrons, VLDL (Very Low Density Lipoproteins), IDL (Intermediate Density Lipoproteins), LDL (Low Density Lipoproteins) and HDL (High Density Lipoproteins).
- Methods of producing reconstituted lipoproteins have been described in scientific literature, for example see A. Jones, Experimental Lung Res. 6, 255-270 (1984), U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,643,988 and 5,128,318, PCT publication WO87/02062, Canadian patent #2,138,925. Other methods of producing reconstituted lipoproteins, especially for apolipoproteins A-I, A-II, A-IV, apoC and apoE have been described in A. Jonas, Methods in Enzymology 128, 553-582 (1986) and G. Franceschini et al. J. Biol. Chem., 260(30), 16321-25 (1985).
- The most frequently used lipid for reconstitution is phosphatidyl choline, extracted either from eggs or soybeans. Other phospholipids are also used, also lipids such as triglycerides or cholesterol. For reconstitution the lipids are first dissolved in an organic solvent, which is subsequently evaporated under nitrogen. In this method the lipid is bound in a thin film to a glass wall. Afterwards the apolipoproteins and a detergent, normally sodium cholate, are added and mixed. The added sodium cholate causes a dispersion of the lipid. After a suitable incubation period, the mixture is dialyzed against large quantities of buffer for a longer period of time; the sodium cholate is thereby removed for the most part, and at the same time lipids and apolipoproteins spontaneously form themselves into lipoproteins or so-called reconstituted lipoproteins. As alternatives to dialysis, hydrophobic adsorbents are available which can adsorb detergents (Bio-Beads SM-2, Bio Rad; Amberlite XAD-2, Rohm & Haas) (E. A. Bonomo, J. B. Swaney, J. Lipid Res., 29, 380-384 (1988)), or the detergent can be removed by means of gel chromatography (Sephadex G-25, Pharmacia). Lipoproteins can also be produced without detergents, for example through incubation of an aqueous suspension of a suitable lipid with apolipoproteins, the addition of lipid which was dissolved in an organic solvent, to apolipoproteins, with or without additional heating of this mixture, or through treatment of an apoA-I-lipid-mixture with ultrasound. With these methods, starting, for example, with apoA-I and phosphatidyl choline, disk-shaped particles can be obtained which correspond to lipoproteins in their nascent state. Normally, following the incubation, unbound apolipoproteins and free lipid are separated by means of centrifugation or gel chromatography in order to isolate the homogeneous, reconstituted lipoproteins particles.
- Phospholipids used for reconstituted lipoproteins can be of natural origin, such as egg yolk or soybean phospholipids, or synthetic or semisynthetic origin. The phospholipids can be partially purified or fractionated to comprise pure fractions or mixtures of phosphatidyl cholines, phosphatidyl ethanolamines, phosphatidyl inositols, phosphatidic acids, phosphatidyl serines, sphingomyelin or phosphatidyl glycerols. According to specific embodiments of the present invention it is preferred to select phospholipids with defined fatty acid radicals, such as dimyristoyl phosphatidyl choline (DMPC), dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE), palmitoyloleoylphosphatidylcholine (POPC), egg phosphatidylcholine (EPC), distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), dioleoylphosphatidylcholine (DOPC), dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine (DPPC), dioleoylphosphatidylglycerol (DOPG), dipalmitoylphosphatidylglycerol (DPPG), -phosphatidylethanolamine (POPE), dioleoylphosphatidylethanolamine 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-cyclohexane-1-carboxylate (DOPE-mal), and combinations thereof, and the like phosphatidyl cholines with defined acyl groups selected from naturally occurring fatty acids, generally having 8 to 22 carbon atoms. According to a specific embodiment of the present invention phosphatidyl cholines having only saturated fatty acid residues between 14 and 18 carbon atoms are preferred, and of those dipalmitoyl phosphatidyl choline is especially preferred.
- Other phospholipids suitable for reconstitution with lipoproteins include, e.g., phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylglycerol, lecithin, b, g-dipalmitoyl-a-lecithin, sphingomyelin, phosphatidylserine, phosphatidic acid, N-(2,3-di(9-(Z)-octadecenyloxy))-prop-1-yl-N,N,N-trimethylammonium chloride, phosphatidylethanolamine, lysolecithin, lysophosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylinositol, cephalin, cardiolipin, cerebrosides, dicetylphosphate, dioleoylphosphatidylcholine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylglycerol, dioleoylphosphatidylglycerol, palmitoyl-oleoyl-phosphatidylcholine, di-stearoyl-phosphatidylcholine, stearoyl-palmitoyl-phosphatidylcholine, di-palmitoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine, di-stearoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine, di-myrstoyl-phosphatidylserine, di-oleyl-phosphatidylcholine, and the like. Non-phosphorus containing lipids may also be used in the liposomes of the compositions of the present invention. These include, e.g., stearylamine, docecylamine, acetyl palmitate, fatty acid amides, and the like.
- Besides the phospholipids, the lipoprotein may comprise, in various amounts at least one nonpolar component which can be selected among pharmaceutical acceptable oils (triglycerides) exemplified by the commonly employed vegetabilic oils such as soybean oil, safflower oil, olive oil, sesame oil, borage oil, castor oil and cottonseed oil or oils from other sources like mineral oils or marine oils including hydrogenated and/or fractionated triglycerides from such sources. Also medium chain triglycerides (MCT-oils, e.g. Miglyol®), and various synthetic or semisynthetic mono-, di- or triglycerides, such as the defined nonpolar lipids disclosed in WO 92/05571 may be used in the present invention as well as acetylated monoglycerides, or alkyl esters of fatty acids, such isopropyl myristate, ethyl oleate (see
EP 0 353 267) or fatty acid alcohols, such as oleyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol or various nonpolar derivatives of cholesterol, such as cholesterol esters. - One or more complementary surface active agent can be added to the reconstituted lipoproteins, for example as complements to the characteristics of amphiphilic agent or to improve its lipid particle stabilizing capacity or enable an improved solubilization of the protein. Such complementary agents can be pharmaceutically acceptable non-ionic surfactants which preferably are alkylene oxide derivatives of an organic compound which contains one or more hydroxylic groups. For example ethoxylated and/or propoxylated alcohol or ester compounds or mixtures thereof are commonly available and are well known as such complements to those skilled in the art. Examples of such compounds are esters of sorbitol and fatty acids, such as sorbitan monopalmitate or sorbitan monopalmitate, oily sucrose esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitane fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitol fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene sterol ethers, polyoxyethylene-polypropoxy alkyl ethers, block polymers and cethyl ether, as well as polyoxyethylene castor oil or hydrogenated castor oil derivatives and polyglycerine fatty acid esters. Suitable non-ionic surfactants, include, but are not limited to various grades of Pluronic®, Poloxamer®, Span®, Tween®, Polysorbate®, Tyloxapol®, Emulphor® or Cremophor® and the like. The complementary surface active agents may also be of an ionic nature, such as bile duct agents, cholic acid or deoxycholic their salts and derivatives or free fatty acids, such as oleic acid, linoleic acid and others. Other ionic surface active agents are found among cationic lipids like C10-C24: alkylamines or alkanolamine and cationic cholesterol esters.
- In the final FLiP, the oligonucleotide component is aggregated, associated or admixed with the lipid components via a lipophilic moiety. This aggregation, association or admixture may be at the surface of the final FLiP formulation. Alternatively, some integration of any of a portion or all of the lipophilic moiety may occur, extending into the lipid particle. Any lipophilic linker molecule that is able to bind oligonucleotides to lipids can be chosen. Examples include pyrrolidine and hydroxyprolinol.
- The process for making the lipid particles comprises the steps of:
- a) mixing a lipid components with one or several lipophile (e.g. cholesterol) conjugated oligonucleotides that may be chemically modified;
b) fractionating this mixture;
c) selecting the fraction with particles of 30-50 nm, preferably of about 40 nm in size. - Alternatively, the FLiP can be made by first isolating the lipid particles comprising triacylglycerol, phospholipids, glycerol and one or several lipid-binding proteins and then mixing the isolated particles with >2-fold molar excess of lipophile (e.g. cholesterol) conjugated oligonucleotide. The steps of fractionating and selecting the particles are deleted by this alternative process for making the FLiPs.
- Other pharmacologically acceptable components can be added to the FLiPs when desired, such as antioxidants (exemplified by alpha-tocopherol) and solubilization adjuvants (exemplified by benzylalcohol).
- The release characteristics of a formulation of the present invention depend on the encapsulating material, the concentration of encapsulated drug, and the presence of release modifiers. For example, release can be manipulated to be pH dependent, for example, using a pH sensitive coating that releases only at a low pH, as in the stomach, or a higher pH, as in the intestine. An enteric coating can be used to prevent release from occurring until after passage through the stomach. Multiple coatings or mixtures of cyanamide encapsulated in different materials can be used to obtain an initial release in the stomach, followed by later release in the intestine. Release can also be manipulated by inclusion of salts or pore forming agents, which can increase water uptake or release of drug by diffusion from the capsule. Excipients which modify the solubility of the drug can also be used to control the release rate. Agents which enhance degradation of the matrix or release from the matrix can also be incorporated. They can be added to the drug, added as a separate phase (i.e., as particulates), or can be co-dissolved in the polymer phase depending on the compound. In all cases the amount should be between 0.1 and thirty percent (w/w polymer). Types of degradation enhancers include inorganic salts such as ammonium sulfate and ammonium chloride, organic acids such as citric acid, benzoic acid, and ascorbic acid, inorganic bases such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, zinc carbonate, and zinc hydroxide, and organic bases such as protamine sulfate, spermine, choline, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine and surfactants such as Tween® and Pluronic®. Pore forming agents which add microstructure to the matrices (i.e., water soluble compounds such as inorganic salts and sugars) are added as particulates. The range should be between one and thirty percent (w/w polymer).
- Uptake can also be manipulated by altering residence time of the particles in the gut. This can be achieved, for example, by coating the particle with, or selecting as the encapsulating material, a mucosal adhesive polymer. Examples include most polymers with free carboxyl groups, such as chitosan, celluloses, and especially polyacrylates (as used herein, polyacrylates refers to polymers including acrylate groups and modified acrylate groups such as cyanoacrylates and methacrylates).
- Hydrophilic polymers suitable for use in the formulations of the present invention are those which are readily water-soluble, can be covalently attached to a vesicle-forming lipid, and which are tolerated in vivo without toxic effects (i.e., are biocompatible). Suitable polymers include polyethylene glycol (PEG), polylactic (also termed polylactide), polyglycolic acid (also termed polyglycolide), a polylactic-polyglycolic acid copolymer, and polyvinyl alcohol. Preferred polymers are those having a molecular weight of from about 100 or 120 daltons up to about 5,000 or 10,000 daltons, and more preferably from about 300 daltons to about 5,000 daltons. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the polymer is polyethyleneglycol having a molecular weight of from about 100 to about 5,000 daltons, and more preferably having a molecular weight of from about 300 to about 5,000 daltons. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the polymer is polyethyleneglycol of 750 daltons (PEG(750)). Polymers may also be defined by the number of monomers therein; a preferred embodiment of the present invention utilizes polymers of at least about three monomers, such PEG polymers consisting of three monomers (approximately 150 daltons).
- Other hydrophilic polymers which may be suitable for use in the present invention include polyvinylpyrrolidone, polymethoxazoline, polyethyloxazoline, polyhydroxypropyl methacrylamide, polymethacrylamide, polydimethylacrylamide, and derivatized celluloses such as hydroxymethylcellulose or hydroxyethylcellulose.
- In one embodiment, a formulation of the present invention comprises a biocompatible polymer selected from the group consisting of polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polyvinyl polymers, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes and co-polymers thereof, celluloses, polypropylene, polyethylenes, polystyrene, polymers of lactic acid and glycolic acid, polyanhydrides, poly(ortho)esters, poly(butic acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(lactide-co-caprolactone), polysaccharides, proteins, polyhyaluronic acids, polycyanoacrylates, and blends, mixtures, or copolymers thereof.
- The above discussed formulation may also include one or more surfactants. Surfactants find wide application in formulations such as emulsions (including microemulsions) and liposomes. The use of surfactants in drug products, formulations and in emulsions has been reviewed (Rieger, in “Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms,” Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., 1988, p. 285). Surfactants may be classified into different classes based on the nature of the hydrophilic group: nonionic, anionic, cationic and amphoteric (Rieger, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 285).
- Nonionic surfactants include, but are not limited to, nonionic esters such as ethylene glycol esters, propylene glycol esters, glyceryl esters, polyglyceryl esters, sorbitan esters, sucrose esters, and ethoxylated esters. Nonionic alkanolamides and ethers such as fatty alcohol ethoxylates, propoxylated alcohols, and ethoxylated/propoxylated block polymers are also included in this class. The polyoxyethylene surfactants are the most popular members of the nonionic surfactant class.
- Anionic surfactants include, but are not limited to, carboxylates such as soaps, acyl lactylates, acyl amides of amino acids, esters of sulfuric acid such as alkyl sulfates and ethoxylated alkyl sulfates, sulfonates such as alkyl benzene sulfonates, acyl isethionates, acyl taurates and sulfosuccinates, and phosphates. The most important members of the anionic surfactant class are the alkyl sulfates and the soaps.
- Cationic surfactants include, but are not limited to, quaternary ammonium salts and ethoxylated amines. The quaternary ammonium salts are the most used members of this class.
- Amphoteric surfactants include, but are not limited to, acrylic acid derivatives, substituted alkylamides, N-alkylbetaines and phosphatides.
- A surfactant may also be selected from any suitable aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or aromatic surfactant, including but not limited to biocompatible lysophosphatidylcholines (LPCs) of varying chain lengths (for example, from about C14 to about C20). Polymer-derivatized lipids such as PEG-lipids may also be utilized for micelle formation as they will act to inhibit micelle/membrane fusion, and as the addition of a polymer to surfactant molecules decreases the CMC of the surfactant and aids in micelle formation. Preferred are surfactants with CMCs in the micromolar range; higher CMC surfactants may be utilized to prepare micelles entrapped within liposomes of the present invention, however, micelle surfactant monomers could affect liposome bilayer stability and would be a factor in designing a liposome of a desired stability.
- In one embodiment, the formulations of the present invention employ various penetration enhancers to affect the efficient delivery of RNAi agents to the skin of animals. Most drugs are present in solution in both ionized and nonionized forms. However, usually only lipid soluble or lipophilic drugs readily cross cell membranes. It has been discovered that even non-lipophilic drugs may cross cell membranes if the membrane to be crossed is treated with a penetration enhancer. In addition to aiding the diffusion of non-lipophilic drugs across cell membranes, penetration enhancers also enhance the permeability of lipophilic drugs.
- In another aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the oligonucleotides described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents. As described in detail below, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, e.g., those targeted for buccal, sublingual, and systemic absorption, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous or epidural injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension, or sustained-release formulation; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment, or a controlled-release patch or spray applied to the skin; (4) intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam; (5) sublingually; (6) ocularly; (7) transdermally; or (8) nasally.
- The phrase “therapeutically-effective amount” as used herein means that amount of a compound, material, or composition comprising a compound of the present invention which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect in at least a sub-population of cells in an animal at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
- The phrase “pharmaceutically acceptable” is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
- The phrase “pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier” as used herein means a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, manufacturing aid (e.g., lubricant, talc magnesium, calcium or zinc stearate, or steric acid), or solvent encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject compound from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body. Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) lubricating agents, such as magnesium state, sodium lauryl sulfate and talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginic acid; (16) pyrogen-free water; (17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer's solution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) pH buffered solutions; (21) polyesters, polycarbonates and/or polyanhydrides; (22) bulking agents, such as polypeptides and amino acids (23) serum component, such as serum albumin, HDL and LDL; and (22) other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations.
- As set out above, certain embodiments of the present compounds may contain a basic functional group, such as amino or alkylamino, and are, thus, capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable acids. The term “pharmaceutically-acceptable salts” in this respect, refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ in the administration vehicle or the dosage form manufacturing process, or by separately reacting a purified compound of the invention in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed during subsequent purification.
- Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, napthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, and laurylsulphonate salts and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al. (1977) “Pharmaceutical Salts”, J. Pharm. Sci. 66:1-19)
- The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the subject compounds include the conventional nontoxic salts or quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds, e.g., from non-toxic organic or inorganic acids. For example, such conventional nontoxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloride, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, palmitic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isothionic, and the like.
- In other cases, the compounds of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable bases. The term “pharmaceutically-acceptable salts” in these instances refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can likewise be prepared in situ in the administration vehicle or the dosage form manufacturing process, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine. Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts and the like. Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al., supra)
- Wetting agents, emulsifiers and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
- Examples of pharmaceutically-acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
- Formulations of the present invention include those suitable for oral, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal and/or parenteral administration. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally, out of one hundred percent, this amount will range from about 0.1 percent to about ninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5 percent to about 70 percent, most preferably from about 10 percent to about 30 percent.
- In one embodiment, a formulation of the present invention comprises an excipient selected from the group consisting of cyclodextrins, celluloses, liposomes, micelle forming agents, e.g., bile acids, and polymeric carriers, e.g., polyesters and polyanhydrides; and a compound of the present invention. In one embodiment, an aforementioned formulation renders orally bioavailable a compound of the present invention.
- Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association a compound of the present invention with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a compound of the present invention with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
- Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient. A compound of the present invention may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
- In solid dosage forms of the invention for oral administration (capsules, tablets, pills, dragees, powders, granules, trouches and the like), the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds and surfactants, such as poloxamer and sodium lauryl sulfate; (7) wetting agents, such as, for example, cetyl alcohol, glycerol monostearate, and non-ionic surfactants; (8) absorbents, such as kaolin and bentonite clay; (9) lubricants, such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, zinc stearate, sodium stearate, stearic acid, and mixtures thereof; (10) coloring agents; and (11) controlled release agents such as crospovidone or ethyl cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-shelled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
- A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
- The tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, such as dragees, capsules, pills and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. They may be formulated for rapid release, e.g., freeze-dried. They may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.
- Liquid dosage forms for oral administration of the compounds of the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredient, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
- Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
- Suspensions, in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
- Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more compounds of the invention with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
- Formulations of the present invention which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
- Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants. The active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
- The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
- Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to a compound of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
- Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound of the present invention to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the compound in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
- Ophthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like, are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention. Formulations for ocular administration can include mucomimetics such as hyaluronic acid, chondroitin sulfate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose or poly(vinyl alcohol), preservatives such as sorbic acid, EDTA or benzylchronium chloride, and the usual quantities of diluents and/or carriers.
- Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more compounds of the invention in combination with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain sugars, alcohols, antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.
- Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers which may be employed in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
- These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms upon the subject compounds may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
- In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally-administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
- Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the subject compounds in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue.
- When the compounds of the present invention are administered as pharmaceuticals, to humans and animals, they can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99% (more preferably, 10 to 30%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
- The preparations of the present invention may be given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are of course given in forms suitable for each administration route. For example, they are administered in tablets or capsule form, by injection, inhalation, eye lotion, ointment, suppository, etc. administration by injection, infusion or inhalation; topical by lotion or ointment; and rectal by suppositories. Oral administrations are preferred.
- The phrases “parenteral administration” and “administered parenterally” as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrasternal injection and infusion.
- The phrases “systemic administration,” “administered systemically,” “peripheral administration” and “administered peripherally” as used herein mean the administration of a compound, drug or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes, for example, subcutaneous administration.
- These compounds may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, intracisternally and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually.
- Regardless of the route of administration selected, the compounds of the present invention, which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically-acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods known to those of skill in the art.
- Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
- The selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the particular compound of the present invention employed, or the ester, salt or amide thereof, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion or metabolism of the particular compound being employed, the rate and extent of absorption, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compound employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
- A physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition required. For example, the physician or veterinarian could start doses of the compounds of the invention employed in the pharmaceutical composition at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved.
- In general, a suitable daily dose of a compound of the invention will be that amount of the compound which is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above. Generally, oral, intravenous, intracerebroventricular and subcutaneous doses of the compounds of this invention for a patient, when used for the indicated analgesic effects, will range from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day.
- If desired, the effective daily dose of the active compound may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms. Preferred dosing is one administration per day.
- While it is possible for a compound of the present invention to be administered alone, it is preferable to administer the compound as a pharmaceutical formulation (composition).
- The compounds according to the invention may be formulated for administration in any convenient way for use in human or veterinary medicine, by analogy with other pharmaceuticals.
- In another aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the subject compounds, as described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents. As described in detail below, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin, lungs, or mucous membranes; or (4) intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam; (5) sublingually or buccally; (6) ocularly; (7) transdermally; or (8) nasally.
- The term “treatment” is intended to encompass also prophylaxis, therapy and cure.
- The patient receiving this treatment is any animal in need, including primates, in particular humans, and other mammals such as equines, cattle, swine and sheep; and poultry and pets in general.
- The compound of the invention can be administered as such or in admixtures with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and can also be administered in conjunction with antimicrobial agents such as penicillins, cephalosporins, aminoglycosides and glycopeptides. Conjunctive therapy, thus includes sequential, simultaneous and separate administration of the active compound in a way that the therapeutical effects of the first administered one is not entirely disappeared when the subsequent is administered.
- The addition of the active compound of the invention to animal feed is preferably accomplished by preparing an appropriate feed premix containing the active compound in an effective amount and incorporating the premix into the complete ration.
-
- Alternatively, an intermediate concentrate or feed supplement containing the active ingredient can be blended into the feed. The way in which such feed premixes and complete rations can be prepared and administered are described in reference books (such as “Applied Animal Nutrition”, W.H. Freedman and CO., San Francisco, U.S.A., 1969 or “Livestock Feeds and Feeding” O and B books, Corvallis, Ore., U.S.A., 1977).
- Unless stated otherwise, or implicit from context, the following terms and phrases include the meanings provided below. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, or apparent from context, the terms and phrases below do not exclude the meaning that the term or phrase has acquired in the art to which it pertains. The definitions are provided to aid in describing particular embodiments, and are not intended to limit the claimed invention, because the scope of the invention is limited only by the claims.
- As used herein, the term “nucleoside” refers to a compound comprising a heterocyclic base moiety and a sugar moiety. Nucleosides include, but are not limited to, naturally occurring nucleosides (as found in DNA and RNA), abasic nucleosides, modified nucleosides, and sugar-modified nucleosides. Nucleosides may be modified with any of a variety of substituents.
- As used herein, “sugar moiety” means a natural (furanosyl), a modified sugar moiety or a sugar surrogate.
- As used herein, “modified sugar moiety” means a chemically-modified furanosyl sugar or a non-furanosyl sugar moiety. Also, embraced by this term are furanosyl sugar analogs and derivatives including bicyclic sugars, tetrahydropyrans, morpholinos, 2′-modified sugars, 4′-modified sugars, 5′-modified sugars, and 4′-substituted sugars.
- As used herein the term “sugar surrogate” refers to a structure that is capable of replacing the furanose ring of a naturally occurring nucleoside. In certain embodiments, sugar surrogates are non-furanose (or 4′-substituted furanose) rings or ring systems or open systems. Such structures include simple changes relative to the natural furanose ring, such as a six membered ring or may be more complicated as is the case with the non-ring system used in peptide nucleic acid. Sugar surrogates includes without limitation morpholinos and cyclohexenyls and cyclohexitols. In most nucleosides having a sugar surrogate group the heterocyclic base moiety is generally maintained to permit hybridization.
- As used herein, “nucleobase” refers to the heterocyclic base portion of a nucleoside. Nucleobases may be naturally occurring or may be modified and therefore include, but are not limited to adenine, cytosine, guanidine, uracil, thymidine and analogues thereof. In certain embodiments, a nucleobase may comprise any atom or group of atoms capable of hydrogen bonding to a base of another nucleic acid.
- The term “duplex” includes a region of complementarity between two regions of two or more polynucleotides that comprise separate strands, such as a sense strand and an antisense strand, or between two regions of a single contiguous polynucleotide.
- The phrase “first 5′ terminal nucleotide” includes first 5′ terminal antisense nucleotides and first 5′ terminal antisense nucleotides. “First 5′ terminal antisense nucleotide” refers to the nucleotide of the antisense strand that is located at the 5′ most position of that strand with respect to the bases of the antisense strand that have corresponding complementary bases on the sense strand. Thus, in a double stranded polynucleotide that is made of two separate strands, it refers to the 5′ most base other than bases that are part of any 5′ overhang on the antisense strand. When the first 5′ terminal antisense nucleotide is part of a hairpin molecule, the term “terminal” refers to the 5′ most relative position within the antisense region and thus is the 5″ most nucleotide of the antisense region. The phrase “first 5″ terminal sense nucleotide” is defined in reference to the sense nucleotide. In molecules comprising two separate strands, it refers to the nucleotide of the sense strand that is located at the 5′ most position of that strand with respect to the bases of the sense strand that have corresponding complementary bases on the antisense strand. Thus, in a double stranded polynucleotide that is made of two separate strands, it is the 5′ most base other than bases that are part of any 5′ overhang on the sense strand.
- In one embodiment, an RNAi agent is “sufficiently complementary” to a target sequence, e.g., a target mRNA, such that the RNAi agent silences production of protein encoded by the target mRNA. In another embodiment, the RNAi agent is “exactly complementary” to a target sequence, e.g., the target RNA and the RNAi agent anneal, for example to form a hybrid made exclusively of Watson-Crick base pairs in the region of exact complementarity. A “sufficiently complementary” RNAi agent can include an internal region (e.g., of at least 10 nucleotides) that is exactly complementary to a target sequence. Moreover, In one embodiment, the RNAi agent specifically discriminates a single-nucleotide difference. In this case, the RNAi agent only mediates RNAi if exact complementary is found in the region (e.g., within 7 nucleotides of) the single-nucleotide difference.
- The phrase “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent” includes compositions that facilitate the introduction of nucleic acid therapeutics such as siRNA, dsRNA, dsDNA, shRNA, microRNA, antimicroRNA, antagomir, antimir, antisense, aptamer or dsRNA/DNA hybrids into a cell and includes but is not limited to solvents or dispersants, coatings, anti-infective agents, isotonic agents, and agents that mediate absorption time or release of the inventive polynucleotides and double stranded polynucleotides. The phrase “pharmaceutically acceptable” includes approval by a regulatory agency of a government, for example, the U.S. federal government, a non-U.S. government, or a U.S. state government, or inclusion in a listing in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or any other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, including in humans.
- The term “halo” refers to any radical of fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
- The term “aliphatic,” as used herein, refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon radical containing up to twenty four carbon atoms wherein the saturation between any two carbon atoms is a single, double or triple bond. An aliphatic group preferably contains from 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, more typically from 1 to about 12 carbon atoms with from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms being more preferred. The straight or branched chain of an aliphatic group may be interrupted with one or more heteroatoms that include nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus. Such aliphatic groups interrupted by heteroatoms include without limitation polyalkoxys, such as polyalkylene glycols, polyamines, and polyimines. Aliphatic groups as used herein may optionally include further substitutent groups.
- The term “acyl” refers to hydrogen, alkyl, partially saturated or fully saturated cycloalkyl, partially saturated or fully saturated heterocycle, aryl, and heteroaryl substituted carbonyl groups. For example, acyl includes groups such as (Ci-C6)alkanoyl (e.g., formyl, acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, valeryl, caproyl, t-butylacetyl, etc.), (C3-Ce)cycloalkylcarbonyl (e.g., cyclopropylcarbonyl, cyclobutylcarbonyl, cyclopentylcarbonyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl, etc.), heterocyclic carbonyl (e.g., pyrrolidinylcarbonyl, pyrrolid-2-one-S-carbonyl, piperidinylcarbonyl, piperazinylcarbonyl, tetrahydrofuranylcarbonyl, etc.), aroyl (e.g., benzoyl) and heteroaroyl (e.g., thiophenyl-2-carbonyl, thiophenyl-3-carbonyl, furanyl-2-carbonyl, furanyl-3-carbonyl, 1H-pyrroyl-2-carbonyl, 1H-pyrroyl-3-carbonyl, benzo[b]thiophenyl-2-carbonyl, etc.). In addition, the alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl and heteroaryl portion of the acyl group may be any one of the groups described in the respective definitions. When indicated as being “optionally substituted”, the acyl group may be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents (typically, one to three substituents) independently selected from the group of substituents listed below in the definition for “substituted” or the alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl and heteroaryl portion of the acyl group may be substituted as described above in the preferred and more preferred list of substituents, respectively.
- For simplicity, chemical moieties are defined and referred to throughout can be univalent chemical moieties (e.g., alkyl, aryl, etc.) or multivalent moieties under the appropriate structural circumstances clear to those skilled in the art. For example, an “alkyl” moiety can be referred to a monovalent radical (e.g. CH3—CH2—), or in other instances, a bivalent linking moiety can be “alkyl,” in which case those skilled in the art will understand the alkyl to be a divalent radical (e.g., —CH2—CH2—), which is equivalent to the term “alkylene.” Similarly, in circumstances in which divalent moieties are required and are stated as being “alkoxy”, “alkylamino”, “aryloxy”, “alkylthio”, “aryl”, “heteroaryl”, “heterocyclic”, “alkyl” “alkenyl”, “alkynyl”, “aliphatic”, or “cycloalkyl”, those skilled in the art will understand that the terms alkoxy”, “alkylamino”, “aryloxy”, “alkylthio”, “aryl”, “heteroaryl”, “heterocyclic”, “alkyl”, “alkenyl”, “alkynyl”, “aliphatic”, or “cycloalkyl” refer to the corresponding divalent moiety.
- The term “alkyl” refers to a saturated non-aromatic hydrocarbon chain. Alkyls may be a straight chain or branched chain and contain containing the indicated number of carbon atoms For example, C1-C10 indicates that the group may have from 1 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
- The term “alkenyl” refers to a non-aromatic hydrocarbon chain containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyls may be a straight chain or branched chain, containing the indicated number of carbon atoms For example, C2-C10 indicates that the group may have from 2 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
- The term “alkynyl” refers to a non-aromatic hydrocarbon chain containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. Alkynyls may be a straight chain or branched chain, containing the indicated number of carbon atoms For example, C2-C10 indicates that the group may have from 2 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
- The term “heteroalkyl” refers to a group comprising an alkyl and at least one heteroatom. In certain such embodiments, the heteroatom is selected from O, S, and N. Certain heteroalkyls are acylalkyls, in which one or more heteroatoms are within the alkyl chain. Certain heteroalkyls are non-acylalkyl heteroalkyls, in which the heteroatom is not within the alkyl chain. Examples of heteroalkyls include, but are not limited to: CH3C(═)CH2—, CH3OCH2CH2—, CH3NHCH2—, CH3SHCH2—, and the like. The terms “heteroalkenyl” and “heteroalkynyl” refer to groups comprising an alkenyl or alkynyl respectively and at least heteroatom.
- The term “alkoxy” refers to an —O-alkyl radical. The term “alkylene” refers to a divalent alkyl (i.e., —R—). The term “alkylenedioxo” refers to a divalent species of the structure —O—R—O—, in which R represents an alkylene. The term “aminoalkyl” refers to an alkyl substituted with an amino. The term “mercapto” refers to an —SH radical. The term “thioalkoxy” refers to an —S— alkyl radical.
- The term “aryl” refers to a 6-carbon monocyclic or 10-carbon bicyclic aromatic ring system wherein 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms of each ring may be substituted by a substituent. Examples of aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl and the like. The term “arylalkyl” or the term “aralkyl” refers to alkyl substituted with an aryl. The term “arylalkoxy” refers to an alkoxy substituted with aryl.
- The term “cycloalkyl” as employed herein includes saturated and partially unsaturated cyclic hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 12 carbons, for example, 3 to 8 carbons, and, for example, 3 to 6 carbons, wherein the cycloalkyl group additionally may be optionally substituted. Cycloalkyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl.
- The term “heteroaryl” refers to an aromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms of each ring may be substituted by a substituent. Examples of heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, furyl or furanyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, thiophenyl or thienyl, quinolinyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, and the like. The term “heteroarylalkyl” or the term “heteroaralkyl” refers to an alkyl substituted with a heteroaryl. The term “heteroarylalkoxy” refers to an alkoxy substituted with heteroaryl.
- The term “heterocyclyl” or “heterocyclic” refers to a nonaromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein 0, 1, 2 or 3 atoms of each ring may be substituted by a substituent. Examples of heterocyclyl groups include piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, dioxanyl, morpholinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like.
- The term “acyl” refers to an alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, or heteroarylcarbonyl substituent, any of which may be further substituted by substituents.
- The term “substituents” refers to a group “substituted” on an identified group at any atom of that group. Suitable substituents include, without limitation, halo, hydroxy, oxo, nitro, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkaryl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, acylamino, alkylcarbamoyl, arylcarbamoyl, aminoalkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, carboxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkanesulfonyl, arenesulfonyl, alkanesulfonamido, arenesulfonamido, aralkylsulfonamido, alkylcarbonyl, acyloxy, cyano, ureido or conjugate groups.
- In many cases, protecting groups are used during preparation of the compounds of the invention. As used herein, the term “protected” means that the indicated moiety has a protecting group appended thereon. In some preferred embodiments of the invention, compounds contain one or more protecting groups. A wide variety of protecting groups can be employed in the methods of the invention. In general, protecting groups render chemical functionalities inert to specific reaction conditions, and can be appended to and removed from such functionalities in a molecule without substantially damaging the remainder of the molecule.
- Amino-protecting groups stable to acid treatment are selectively removed with base treatment, and are used to make reactive amino groups selectively available for substitution. Examples of such groups are the Fmoc (E. Atherton and R. C. Sheppard in The Peptides, S. Udenfriend, J. Meienhofer, Eds., Academic Press, Orlando, 1987, volume 9, p. 1) and various substituted sulfonylethyl carbamates exemplified by the Nsc group (Samukov et al., Tetrahedron Lett. 1994, 35, 7821; Verhart and Tesser, Rec. Trav. Chim. Pays-Bas 1987, 107, 621).
- Additional amino-protecting groups include, but are not limited to, carbamate protecting groups, such as 2-trimethylsilylethoxycarbonyl (Teoc), 1-methyl-1-(4-biphenylyl)ethoxycarbonyl (Bpoc), t-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), allyloxycarbonyl (Alloc), 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc), and benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz); amide protecting groups, such as formyl, acetyl, trihaloacetyl, benzoyl, and nitrophenylacetyl; sulfonamide protecting groups, such as 2-nitrobenzenesulfonyl; and imine and cyclic imide protecting groups, such as phthalimido and dithiasuccinoyl. Equivalents of these amino-protecting groups are also encompassed by the compounds and methods of the present invention.
- One can evaluate a candidate oligonucleotide, e.g., a modified RNA, for a selected property by exposing the agent or modified molecule and a control molecule to the appropriate conditions and evaluating for the presence of the selected property. For example, resistance to a degradent can be evaluated as follows. A candidate modified oligonucleotide (and a control molecule, usually the unmodified form) can be exposed to degradative conditions, e.g., exposed to a milieu, which includes a degradative agent, e.g., a nuclease. E.g., one can use a biological sample, e.g., one that is similar to a milieu, which might be encountered, in therapeutic use, e.g., blood or a cellular fraction, e.g., a cell-free homogenate or disrupted cells. The candidate and control could then be evaluated for resistance to degradation by any of a number of approaches. For example, the candidate and control could be labeled prior to exposure, with, e.g., a radioactive or enzymatic label, or a fluorescent label, such as Cy3 or Cy5. Control and oligonucleotide can be incubated with the degradative agent, and optionally a control, e.g., an inactivated, e.g., heat inactivated, degradative agent. A physical parameter, e.g., size, of the modified and control molecules are then determined. They can be determined by a physical method, e.g., by polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or a sizing column, to assess whether the molecule has maintained its original length, or assessed functionally. Alternatively, Northern blot analysis can be used to assay the length of an unlabeled modified molecule.
- A functional assay can also be used to evaluate the candidate agent. A functional assay can be applied initially or after an earlier non-functional assay, (e.g., assay for resistance to degradation) to determine if the modification alters the ability of the molecule to silence gene expression. For example, a cell, e.g., a mammalian cell, such as a mouse or human cell, can be co-transfected with a plasmid expressing a fluorescent protein, e.g., GFP, and a candidate oligonucleotide homologous to the transcript encoding the fluorescent protein (see, e.g., WO 00/44914). For example, a modified oligonucleotide homologous to the GFP mRNA can be assayed for the ability to inhibit GFP expression by monitoring for a decrease in cell fluorescence, as compared to a control cell, in which the transfection did not include the candidate dsiRNA, e.g., controls with no agent added and/or controls with a non-modified RNA added. Efficacy of the candidate agent on gene expression can be assessed by comparing cell fluorescence in the presence of the modified oligonucleotide and unmodified dssiRNA compounds.
- In an alternative functional assay, a candidate oligonucleotide compound homologous to an endogenous mouse gene, for example, a maternally expressed gene, such as c-mos, can be injected into an immature mouse oocyte to assess the ability of the agent to inhibit gene expression in vivo (see, e.g., WO 01/36646). A phenotype of the oocyte, e.g., the ability to maintain arrest in metaphase II, can be monitored as an indicator that the agent is inhibiting expression. For example, cleavage of c-mos mRNA by an oligonucleotide would cause the oocyte to exit metaphase arrest and initiate parthenogenetic development (Colledge et al. Nature 370: 65-68, 1994; Hashimoto et al. Nature, 370:68-71, 1994). The effect of the oligonucleotide on target RNA levels can be verified by Northern blot to assay for a decrease in the level of target mRNA, or by Western blot to assay for a decrease in the level of target protein, as compared to a negative control. Controls can include cells in which with no agent is added.
- In some aspects, the invention provides kits that include a suitable container containing an oligonucleotide formulation, e.g., pharmaceutical composition. In addition to the formulation, the kit can include informational material. The informational material can be descriptive, instructional, marketing or other material that relates to the methods described herein and/or the use of the compound for the methods described herein. For example, the informational material describes methods for administering the formulation to a subject. The kit can also include a delivery device.
- In one embodiment, the informational material can include instructions to administer the formulation in a suitable manner, e.g., in a suitable dose, dosage form, or mode of administration (e.g., a dose, dosage form, or mode of administration described herein). In another embodiment, the informational material can include instructions for identifying a suitable subject, e.g., a human, e.g., an adult human. The informational material of the kits is not limited in its form. In many cases, the informational material, e.g., instructions, is provided in printed matter, e.g., a printed text, drawing, and/or photograph, e.g., a label or printed sheet. However, the informational material can also be provided in other formats, such as Braille, computer readable material, video recording, or audio recording. In another embodiment, the informational material of the kit is a link or contact information, e.g., a physical address, email address, hyperlink, website, or telephone number, where a user of the kit can obtain substantive information about the formulation and/or its use in the methods described herein. Of course, the informational material can also be provided in any combination of formats.
- In some embodiments the individual components of the formulation can be provided in one container. Alternatively, it can be desirable to provide the components of the formulation separately in two or more containers, e.g., one container for an oligonucleotide preparation, and at least another for a carrier compound. The different components can be combined, e.g., according to instructions provided with the kit. The components can be combined according to a method described herein, e.g., to prepare and administer a pharmaceutical composition.
- In addition to the formulation, the composition of the kit can include other ingredients, such as a solvent or buffer, a stabilizer or a preservative, and/or a second agent for treating a condition or disorder described herein. Alternatively, the other ingredients can be included in the kit, but in different compositions or containers than the formulation. In such embodiments, the kit can include instructions for admixing the formulation and the other ingredients, or for using the oligonucleotide together with the other ingredients.
- The oligonucleotide formulation can be provided in any form, e.g., liquid, dried or lyophilized form. It is preferred that the formulation be substantially pure and/or sterile. When the formulation is provided in a liquid solution, the liquid solution preferably is an aqueous solution, with a sterile aqueous solution being preferred. When the formulation is provided as a dried form, reconstitution generally is by the addition of a suitable solvent. The solvent, e.g., sterile water or buffer, can optionally be provided in the kit.
- In some embodiments, the kit contains separate containers, dividers or compartments for the formulation and informational material. For example, the formulation can be contained in a bottle, vial, or syringe, and the informational material can be contained in a plastic sleeve or packet. In other embodiments, the separate elements of the kit are contained within a single, undivided container. For example, the formulation is contained in a bottle, vial or syringe that has attached thereto the informational material in the form of a label.
- In some embodiments, the kit includes a plurality, e.g., a pack, of individual containers, each containing one or more unit dosage forms of the formulation. For example, the kit includes a plurality of syringes, ampules, foil packets, or blister packs, each containing a single unit dose of the formulation. The containers of the kits can be air tight and/or waterproof.
- The invention now being generally described, it will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples which are included merely for purposes of illustration of certain aspects and embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the invention.
- The compounds of the inventions may be prepared by any process known to be applicable to the preparation of chemically-related compounds. Necessary starting materials may be obtained by standard procedures of organic chemistry. Alternatively necessary starting materials are obtainable by analogous procedures to those illustrated which are within the ordinary skill of a chemist. The compounds and processes of the present invention will be better understood in connection with the following representative synthetic schemes and examples, which are intended as an illustration only and not limiting of the scope of the invention. Various changes and modifications to the disclosed embodiments will be apparent to those skilled in the art and such changes and modifications including, without limitation, those relating to the chemical structures, substituents, derivatives, formulations and/or methods of the invention may be made without departing from the spirit of the invention and the scope of the appended claims.
-
- (S)-2-((bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)methyl)oxirane (2): A solution of (R)-(+)-glycidol 1 (64 mmol) and TEA (240 mmol) in DCM (200 mL) was prepared under dry nitrogen. This was followed by the addition of DMTrCl (83 mmol). The reaction mixture was then stirred 16 h. It was then poured into sat. aq. Sodium bicarbonate and was mixed with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was collected, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated in vacuo. It was purified by column chromatography using a gradient up to 10:1 hexanes/EtOAc with 1% TEA to give 2 in quantitative yield.
- (S)-1-(3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)-2-hydroxypropyl)-S-methylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione (3): Thymidine (14 mmol) was dried overnight in a 100 mL round bottom flask and then suspended in DMF (22 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere. This was followed by the addition of NaH (3.3 mmol). The reaction mixture was allowed to stir for 2 h at room temperature. This was followed by the addition of 2 in DMF (22 mL). The reaction mixture was then heated to 110° C. and kept overnight. Upon completion of the reaction, it was evaporated to dryness and coevaporated with toluene and ethyl acetate. It was then purified by column chromatography using 1:2 hexanes/EtOAc to give 3 in 30% yield.
- (S)-1-(3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)-2-((bis(diisopropylamino)phosphino)oxy)propyl)-S-methylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione (4): Compound 3 (5.2 mmol) was dissolved in THE (10 mL) under a dry nitrogen environment. This was followed by the addition of DIPEA (22 mmol) and the dropwise addition of β-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphorochlorodite (6.2 mmol). The reaction was allowed to proceed for 6 h. Upon completion, the reaction mixture was filtered and evaporated to dryness to give a white foam. This was purified by column chromatography using a gradient of 7:3 hexanes/ethyl acetate with 1% TEA to 50:50 hexanes ethyl acetate with 1% TEA. The final compound 4 was obtained in 90% yield. 31P NMR (121 MHz, CD3CN) 154.7, 154.2. ESI-TOF: calc. 702.3 (M+) found 702.2 (M+).
- (S)-(1-(3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)-2-hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl)carbamic acid (5): N-acetyl Cytosine (14 mmol) is dried overnight in a 100 mL round bottom flask and then suspended in DMF (22 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere. This is followed by the addition of NaH (3.3 mmol). The reaction mixture is allowed to stir for 2 h at room temperature. This is followed by the addition of 2 in DMF (22 mL). The reaction mixture is then heated to 110° C. and kept overnight. Upon completion of the reaction, it is evaporated to dryness and coevaporated with toluene and ethyl acetate. It is then purified by column chromatography to give 5.
- (S)-1-(4-acetamido-2-oxopyrimidin-1(2H)-yl)-3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)propan-2-yl (2-cyanoethyl) diisopropylphosphoramidite (6): Compound 5 (5.2 mmol) is dissolved in THE (10 mL) under a dry nitrogen environment. This is followed by the addition of DIPEA (22 mmol) and the dropwise addition of β-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphorochlorodite (6.2 mmol). The reaction is allowed to proceed for 6 h. Upon completion, the reaction mixture is filtered and evaporated to dryness to give a white foam. This is purified by column chromatography to give 6.
- (S)-1-(6-amino-9H-purin-9-yl)-3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)propan-2-ol (7): Adenosine (14 mmol) is dried overnight in a 100 mL round bottom flask and then suspended in DMF (22 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere. This is followed by the addition of NaH (3.3 mmol). The reaction mixture is allowed to stir for 2 h at room temperature. This is followed by the addition of 2 in DMF (22 mL). The reaction mixture is then heated to 110° C. and kept overnight. Upon completion of the reaction, it is evaporated to dryness and coevaporated with toluene and ethyl acetate. It is then purified by column chromatography to give 7.
- (S,Z)—N′-(9-(3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)-2-hydroxypropyl)-9H-purin-6-yl)-N,N-dimethylformimidamide (8): Compound 7 (5.2 mmol) is dissolved in methanol (40 mL). This is followed by the addition of dimethyl formamidine dimethyl acetal (20 mmol) and stirring for 16 h. The reaction mixture is then evaporated to dryness and purified by column chromatography to give 8.
- (S)-1-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)-3-(6-((Z)-((dimethylamino)methylene)amino)-9H-purin-9-yl)propan-2-yl (2-cyanoethyl) diisopropylphosphoramidite (9): Compound 8 (5.2 mmol) is dissolved in THE (10 mL) under a dry nitrogen environment. This is followed by the addition of DIPEA (22 mmol) and the dropwise addition of β-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphorochlorodite (6.2 mmol). The reaction is allowed to proceed for 6 h. Upon completion, the reaction mixture is filtered and evaporated to dryness to give a white foam. This is purified by column chromatography to give 9.
- (S)-1-(2-amino-6-(benzyloxy)-9H-purin-9-yl)-3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)propan-2-ol (10): O-6-benzyl guanosine (14 mmol) is dried overnight in a 100 mL round bottom flask and then suspended in DMF (22 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere. This is followed by the addition of NaH (3.3 mmol). The reaction mixture is allowed to stir for 2 h at room temperature. This is followed by the addition of 2 in DMF (22 mL). The reaction mixture is then heated to 110° C. and kept overnight. Upon completion of the reaction, it is evaporated to dryness and coevaporated with toluene and ethyl acetate. It is then purified by column chromatography to give 10.
- (S)-2-amino-9-(3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)-2-hydroxypropyl)-1H-purin-6(9H)-one (11): Compound 10 (14 mmol) is dissolved in methanol (50 mL). This is followed by the addition of 20% by weight 10% Pd/C. The reaction mixture is then purged with nitrogen and fitted with a balloon of hydrogen. The reaction is then stirred 3 h at room temperature at which point it is filtered over a pad of celite. The celite is washed with methanol and the pooled organic fractions are evaporated to dryness to give 11. This material is used without further purification.
- (S,E)-N′-(9-(3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)-2-hydroxypropyl)-6-oxo-6,9-dihydro-1H-purin-2-yl)-N,N-dimethylformimidamide (12): Compound 11 (5.2 mmol) is dissolved in methanol (40 mL). This is followed by the addition of dimethyl formamidine dimethyl acetal (20 mmol) and stirring for 16 h. The reaction mixture is then evaporated to dryness and purified by column chromatography to give 12.
- (S)-1-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)-3-(2-((E)-((dimethylamino)methylene)amino)-6-oxo-1H-purin-9(6H)-yl)propan-2-yl (2-cyanoethyl) diisopropylphosphoramidite (13): Compound 12 (5.2 mmol) is dissolved in THF (10 mL) under a dry nitrogen environment. This is followed by the addition of DIPEA (22 mmol) and the dropwise addition of β-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphorochlorodite (6.2 mmol). The reaction is allowed to proceed for 6 h. Upon completion, the reaction mixture is filtered and evaporated to dryness to give a white foam. This is purified by column chromatography to give 13.
-
- 1-Chloro-2-acetoxymethoxy-3-acetoxypropane (2): A mixture of 4-chloromethyl-1,3-dioxolane 1 (0.2 mol), acetic anhydride (0.63 mol), glacial acetic acid (0.12 mol), and ZnCl2 (0.015 mol) is stirred under a nitrogen atmosphere in. The mixture is stirred for 2 hr at room temperature. The solvent is then removed under reduced pressure, and the oil is mixed with diethyl ether (100 ml), washed with saturated NaHCO3 solution and water, dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. To give a mix of isomers. This material is then purified by column chromatography to give 2.
- 1,3-Diacetoxy-2-acetoxymethoxy propane (3): Anhydrous potassium acetate (0.356 mol) is added to (0.156 mol) of 2 in DMF (250 mL), which is stirred with a mechanical stirrer. The suspension is heated to 150° C. and maintained there until the reaction is determined complete. The reaction mixture is then cooled to room temperature and diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with sat. aq. Sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer is dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated in vacuo. To give 3. It can be used in the next step without purification.
- 9-{[2-Acetoxy-1-(acetoxymethyl)ethoxy]methyl}-2-acetamidopurin-6-one (4): A short-path distillation apparatus with a 500-ml distilling flask is charged with diacetylguanine (0.18 mol), III (49 g, 0.198 mol), and ethanesulfonic acid (0.0198 mol). The mixture is then heated at 165-170° C. under reduced pressure. After 0.5 hr, it is allowed to cool and is dissolved in dichloromethane (1 L) and filtered, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue is then purified by column chromatography to give 4.
- N-(9-(((1,3-dihydroxypropan-2-yl)oxy)methyl)-6-oxo-6,9-dihydro-1H-purin-2-yl)acetamide (5): Compound 4 (0.10 mol) is dissolved in methanol (200 mL). This solution is then cooled to 0° C. followed by the addition of ammonium hydroxide (20 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred for 30 min and then evaporated in vacuo. The resulting residue is then precipitated from ether to give 5.
- N-(9-(((1-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)-3-hydroxypropan-2-yl)oxy)methyl)-6-oxo-6,9-dihydro-1H-purin-2-yl)acetamide (6): Compound 5 (0.10 mol) is dissolved in pyridine (200 mL) under nitrogen atmosphere. This is followed by the addition of DMTrCl (0.105 mol). The reaction mixture is then stirred overnight. The solvent is then removed in vacuo and the residue is redissolved in ethyl acetate. It is washed with sat. aq. Bicarbonate, brine, and water. The organic layer is dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue is then purified by column chromatography to give 6.
- 2-((2-acetamido-6-oxo-1H-purin-9(6H)-yl)methoxy)-3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)propyl (2-cyanoethyl) diisopropylphosphoramidite (7): Compound 6 (0.5 mol) is dissolved in THE (50 mL) under a dry nitrogen environment. This is followed by the addition of DIPEA (2 mol) and the dropwise addition of β-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphorochlorodite (0.505). The reaction is allowed to proceed until completion. Upon completion, it is quenched with 10 mL of 5% aq. Sodium bicarbonate and diluted with 250 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layer is washed with 5% aq. Bicarbonate, brine, and water is filtered and evaporated to dryness. It is then purified by column chromatography to give 7.
-
-
TABLE 1 ssRNA & siRNA activity at 1 nM in HeLa SEO ID AS ID NO: Sequence(5′----3′) % KD siRNA ID % KD Position 447581 3 P0-T5UfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 87 A-53286 44 P(Teos)UfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 72 AD-26396 87 A-63607 45 PusUfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Tgns)(Tgn) 77 AD-29348 89 A-63608 46 PusUfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Tgn)(Tgn) 73 AD-29349 87 A-63605 47 P(Tgns)UfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 54 AD-29346 79 N1 A-63606 48 P(Tgn)UfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 63 AD-29347 81 N1 A-63609 49 Pus(Tgns)gUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 61 AD-29350 43 N2 A-63610 50 PusUfsg(Tgns)cUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 72 AD-29351 91 N4 A-63611 51 PusUfsgUfsc(Tgns)cUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) A-63612 52 PusUfsgUfscUfsc(Tgns)gGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) -
TABLE 2 ssRNA & siRNA activity at 1 nM in HeLa SEQ ID AS ID NO: Sequence(5′------3′) % KD siRNA ID % KD Position 447581 3 P0-T5UfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 87 A-53286 44 P(Teos)UfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 72 AD-26396 87 A-63830 53 PusUfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsusY33sY33 49 AD-29360 88 A-63831 53 PusUfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsusY33Y33 54 AD-29361 85 A-63828 54 PY33sUfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 60 AD-29354 90 N1 A-63829 54 PY33UfsgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 75 AD-29355 93 N1 A-63832 55 PusY33sgUfscUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 64 AD-29356 91 N2 A-63833 56 PusUfsgY33scUfscUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 77 AD-29357 94 N4 A-63834 57 PusUfsgUfscY33scUfsgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 86 AD-29358 96 N6 A-63835 58 PusUfsgUfscUfscY33sgGfsuCfscUfsusAfscsUfsus(Aeos)(Aeo) 67 AD-29359 93 N8
% KD: % KD refers to % knockdown. - In table 1 and 2, P is phosphate at 5′-end, lowercase letters a, c, g and u represents 2′-OMe A, C, G and U respectively, ‘s’ stands for phosphorothioate, Af, Cf, Uf and Gf represents 2′-deoxy-2′-fluoro A, C, U and G respectively. T is ribo-T or 5-Methyl-riboU. Structures for Aeo, Aeos, Teo, Teso, Tgn, Tgns, Y33 and Y33s are shown in
FIG. 3 . - Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments of the invention described herein. It is, therefore, to be understood that the foregoing embodiments are presented by way of example only and that, within the scope of the appended claims and equivalents thereto, the invention may be practiced otherwise than as specifically described and claimed.
Claims (23)
1. A monomer of formula (I′):
or isomers thereof,
wherein:
each B is independently H or a nucleobase;
each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, and R9 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR13, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl, each of which can be optionally substituted;
R11 and R12 are independently for each occurrence H, protecting group, a reactive phosphorus group, or solid support;
R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted;
each of R′ and R″ is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl, each of which can be optionally substituted; and
each of m, n, p, q, r, and s is independently for each occurrence 0-10.
2. The monomer of claim 1 , wherein R11 is a protecting group and R12 is a reactive phosphorous group or solid support.
3. The monomer of claim 1 , wherein R11 is a reactive phosphorous group or solid support and R12 is a protecting group.
4. The monomer of claim 1 , wherein the reactive phosphorus group is selected from the group consisting of phosphoramidite, H-phosphonate, alkyl-phosphonate, and phosphate triester.
5. The monomer of claim 1 , wherein the protecting group is a hydroxyl protecting group selected from the group consisting of acetyl, benzyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl, trityl, monomethoxytrityl, and dimethoxytrityl.
6. An oligonucleotide comprising at least one monomer of claim 1 .
7. An oligonucleotide comprising at least one monomer of formula (IV′):
or isomers thereof,
wherein:
each B is independently H or a nucleobase;
each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, and R9 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR13, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl, each of which can be optionally substituted;
R11 and R12 are independently for each occurrence H,
nucleoside, oligonucleotide,
—O-oligonucleotide, —S-oligonucleotide, —S—S-oligonucleotide, —N(R′)—C(Z6)-oligonucleotide, —C(Z 6)—N(R′)-oligonucleotide, —N(R′)—C(Z6)Z6-oligonucleotide, —Z6C(Z6)—N(R′)-oligonucleotide, N(R′)C(Z6)N(R′)-oligonucleotide,
R13 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted;
R14 is independently for each occurrence H, halo, OR12, N(R′)(R″), alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, or ω-hydroxy alkenyl, each of which can be optionally substituted;
X3, X4, X5, and Z3 are each independently for each occurrence H, O−, OM, OR13, S−, SR13, SM, N(R′)(R″), B(R13)3, BH3 −, or Se;
Y3, Y4, Y5, and Z6 are each independently for each occurrence O or S;
Z4 is independently for each occurrence O, S, CH2, or NR′;
each of R′ and R″ is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclyl, heterocyclyl, ω-amino alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkyl, ω-hydroxy alkenyl, or ω-hydroxy alkynyl, each of which can be optionally substituted;
each of m, n, p, q, r, and s is independently for each occurrence 0-10; and
t is 0-2.
9. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the monomer is at the 5′-end terminal position of the oligonucleotide.
10. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the monomer is at the 3′-end terminal position of the oligonucleotide.
11. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the monomer is at an internal position of the oligonucleotide.
12. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the oligonucleotide comprises at least one non-phosphodiester internucleoside linkage.
13. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the oligonucleotide comprises at least one non-phosphodiester internucleoside linkage selected from the group consisting of phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, H-phosphonate, alkyl-phosphonate, phosphoramidate internucleoside linkages, and any combinations thereof.
14. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the oligonucleotide comprises at least one nucleobase modification.
15. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the oligonucleotide comprises at least one sugar modification.
16. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the oligonucleotide comprises at least one ligand conjugate.
17. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the oligonucleotide is a double-stranded oligonucleotide comprising a first strand and a second strand.
18. The oligonucleotide of claim 17 , wherein the double-stranded oligonucleotide is a double-stranded siRNA.
19. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the oligonucleotide is a single-stranded oligonucleotide.
20. The oligonucleotide of claim 19 , wherein the single-stranded oligonucleotide is a single-stranded siRNA.
21. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the oligonucleotide is a hairpin oligonucleotide.
22. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the oligonucleotide is an antisense oligonucleotide, an antagomir, a microRNA, a pre-microRNA, an antimir, a supermir, a ribozyme, a U1 adaptor, RNA activator, RNAi agent, a decoy oligonucleotide, a triplex forming oligonucleotide, or an aptamer.
23. The oligonucleotide of claim 7 , wherein the oligonucleotide comprises:
1-20 first-type regions, each first-type region independently comprising 1-20 contiguous nucleosides wherein each nucleoside of each first-type region comprises a first-type modification;
0-20 second-type regions, each second-type region independently comprising 1-20 contiguous nucleosides wherein each nucleoside of each second-type region comprises a second-type modification; and
0-20 third-type regions, each third-type region independently comprising 1-20 contiguous nucleosides wherein each nucleoside of each third-type region comprises a third-type modification,
wherein the first-type modification, the second-type modification, and the third-type modification are each independently selected from the group consisting of 2′-F, 2′-OCH3, 2′-O(CH2)2OCH3, BNA, F-HNA, 2′-H and 2′-OH.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/111,096 US20210087219A1 (en) | 2010-04-22 | 2020-12-03 | Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US32696910P | 2010-04-22 | 2010-04-22 | |
PCT/US2011/033598 WO2011133876A2 (en) | 2010-04-22 | 2011-04-22 | Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs |
US201313642772A | 2013-02-01 | 2013-02-01 | |
US17/111,096 US20210087219A1 (en) | 2010-04-22 | 2020-12-03 | Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs |
Related Parent Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2011/033598 Division WO2011133876A2 (en) | 2010-04-22 | 2011-04-22 | Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs |
US13/642,772 Division US10913767B2 (en) | 2010-04-22 | 2011-04-22 | Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20210087219A1 true US20210087219A1 (en) | 2021-03-25 |
Family
ID=44626253
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/642,772 Active 2033-04-29 US10913767B2 (en) | 2010-04-22 | 2011-04-22 | Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs |
US17/111,096 Pending US20210087219A1 (en) | 2010-04-22 | 2020-12-03 | Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/642,772 Active 2033-04-29 US10913767B2 (en) | 2010-04-22 | 2011-04-22 | Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US10913767B2 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2011133876A2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (131)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR101979134B1 (en) | 2008-10-15 | 2019-05-15 | 아이오니스 파마수티컬즈, 인코포레이티드 | Modulation of factor 11 expression |
KR20130137160A (en) | 2010-08-24 | 2013-12-16 | 머크 샤프 앤드 돔 코포레이션 | Single-stranded rnai agents containing an internal, non-nucleic acid spacer |
CA2817960C (en) | 2010-11-17 | 2020-06-09 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulation of alpha synuclein expression |
EP3301177B1 (en) * | 2011-11-18 | 2020-03-25 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Rnai agents, compositions and methods of use thereof for treating transthyretin (ttr) associated diseases |
JP6492003B2 (en) | 2012-03-30 | 2019-03-27 | ワシントン・ユニバーシティWashington University | Methods of modulating tau expression to reduce stroke and to modify neurodegenerative syndrome |
US9255154B2 (en) | 2012-05-08 | 2016-02-09 | Alderbio Holdings, Llc | Anti-PCSK9 antibodies and use thereof |
RU2674600C2 (en) | 2012-07-03 | 2018-12-11 | Просенса Текнолоджиз Б.В. | Oligonucleotide for treatment of muscular dystrophy patients |
NZ631512A (en) | 2013-05-01 | 2016-10-28 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc | Compositions and methods for modulating apolipoprotein (a) expression |
CN103290018B (en) * | 2013-05-07 | 2015-07-29 | 南方医科大学 | A kind of nucleic acid aptamer of being combined with Human epidermal growth factor receptor type III mutant specific and application thereof |
JP6617702B2 (en) | 2013-07-15 | 2019-12-11 | ザ リージェンツ オブ ザ ユニバーシティ オブ カリフォルニア | FTY720 azacyclic constraint analog |
TWI657819B (en) | 2013-07-19 | 2019-05-01 | 美商Ionis製藥公司 | Compositions for modulating tau expression |
EP3052645B1 (en) * | 2013-09-30 | 2019-01-09 | Qiagen GmbH | Dna-adapter-molecules for the preparation of dna-libraries and method for producing them and use |
US11162096B2 (en) | 2013-10-14 | 2021-11-02 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc | Methods for modulating expression of C9ORF72 antisense transcript |
CN116970607A (en) | 2014-03-19 | 2023-10-31 | Ionis制药公司 | Compositions for modulating ataxin 2 expression |
WO2015143245A1 (en) | 2014-03-19 | 2015-09-24 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods for modulating ataxin 2 expression |
EP3757214B1 (en) | 2014-04-01 | 2022-06-15 | Biogen MA Inc. | Compositions for modulating sod-1 expression |
EP3608406B1 (en) | 2014-05-01 | 2023-02-15 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions and methods for modulating complement factor b expression |
CN107075516A (en) | 2014-08-20 | 2017-08-18 | 阿尔尼拉姆医药品有限公司 | Double-stranded RNA reagent through modification |
AU2015364508A1 (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2017-07-06 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | ReversirTM compounds |
US10793855B2 (en) | 2015-01-06 | 2020-10-06 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions for modulating expression of C9ORF72 antisense transcript |
WO2016115490A1 (en) | 2015-01-16 | 2016-07-21 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for modulation of dux4 |
US11129844B2 (en) | 2015-03-03 | 2021-09-28 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions and methods for modulating MECP2 expression |
WO2016167780A1 (en) | 2015-04-16 | 2016-10-20 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions for modulating expression of c9orf72 antisense transcript |
CA2990699A1 (en) | 2015-06-29 | 2017-01-05 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modified crispr rna and modified single crispr rna and uses thereof |
ES2917181T3 (en) | 2015-07-10 | 2022-07-07 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc | Diacylglycerol acyltransferase 2 (DGAT2) modulators |
JP2018520683A (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2018-08-02 | アルニラム ファーマスーティカルズ インコーポレイテッドAlnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Multi-target single-body conjugates |
EP3353328A4 (en) | 2015-09-24 | 2019-06-12 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of kras expression |
MX2018003685A (en) | 2015-09-24 | 2018-08-15 | Univ California | Synthetic sphingolipid-like molecules, drugs, methods of their synthesis and methods of treatment. |
PT3353303T (en) | 2015-09-25 | 2023-10-10 | Academisch Ziekenhuis Leiden | Compositions and methods for modulating ataxin 3 expression |
WO2017079745A1 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2017-05-11 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Conjugated antisense compounds for use in therapy |
WO2017096395A1 (en) | 2015-12-04 | 2017-06-08 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of treating breast cancer |
CA3006599A1 (en) | 2016-01-05 | 2017-07-13 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods for reducing lrrk2 expression |
AU2017229778A1 (en) | 2016-03-09 | 2018-08-16 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods and compositions for inhibiting PMP22 expression |
AU2017234678A1 (en) | 2016-03-16 | 2018-08-16 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of modulating KEAP1 |
WO2017161168A1 (en) | 2016-03-16 | 2017-09-21 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulation of dyrk1b expression |
AU2017248637A1 (en) | 2016-04-13 | 2018-09-27 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods for reducing C9ORF72 expression |
WO2017219017A1 (en) | 2016-06-17 | 2017-12-21 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulation of gys1 expression |
PL3484524T3 (en) | 2016-07-15 | 2023-03-20 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for modulation of smn2 |
WO2018013999A1 (en) | 2016-07-15 | 2018-01-18 | Am Chemicals Llc | Non-nucleosidic solid supports and phosphoramidite building blocks for oligonucleotide synthesis |
JOP20190065A1 (en) | 2016-09-29 | 2019-03-28 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc | Compounds and methods for reducing tau expression |
US11400161B2 (en) | 2016-10-06 | 2022-08-02 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Method of conjugating oligomeric compounds |
US11447519B2 (en) | 2016-11-10 | 2022-09-20 | San Diego State University Research Foundation | Compounds for fluorescence sensing of duplex formation |
JOP20190104A1 (en) | 2016-11-10 | 2019-05-07 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc | Compounds and methods for reducing atxn3 expression |
CN117757791A (en) * | 2016-11-23 | 2024-03-26 | 阿尔尼拉姆医药品有限公司 | Modified RNA agents with reduced off-target effects |
TWI788312B (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2023-01-01 | 美商阿尼拉製藥公司 | SERPINA1 iRNA COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS OF USE THEREOF |
US11033570B2 (en) | 2016-12-02 | 2021-06-15 | Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory | Modulation of Lnc05 expression |
US11180756B2 (en) | 2017-03-09 | 2021-11-23 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals | Morpholino modified oligomeric compounds |
JOP20190215A1 (en) | 2017-03-24 | 2019-09-19 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc | Modulators of pcsk9 expression |
CN107022549B (en) * | 2017-04-19 | 2021-06-01 | 华中农业大学 | Pelteobagrus fulvidraco beta defensin gene, beta defensin antibacterial peptide and application thereof |
CA3071033A1 (en) | 2017-08-18 | 2019-02-21 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulation of the notch signaling pathway for treatment of respiratory disorders |
US10517889B2 (en) | 2017-09-08 | 2019-12-31 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of SMAD7 expression |
TWI809004B (en) | 2017-11-09 | 2023-07-21 | 美商Ionis製藥公司 | Compounds and methods for reducing snca expression |
WO2019118916A1 (en) | 2017-12-14 | 2019-06-20 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Conjugated antisense compounds and their use |
WO2019126641A2 (en) | 2017-12-21 | 2019-06-27 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulation of frataxin expression |
CN111902537A (en) | 2018-01-15 | 2020-11-06 | Ionis制药公司 | Modulators of DNM2 expression |
EP3752612A4 (en) | 2018-02-12 | 2021-11-10 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modified compounds and uses thereof |
TW202000199A (en) | 2018-03-02 | 2020-01-01 | 美商Ionis製藥公司 | Modulators of IRF4 expression |
WO2019169243A1 (en) | 2018-03-02 | 2019-09-06 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for the modulation of amyloid-beta precursor protein |
US11661601B2 (en) | 2018-03-22 | 2023-05-30 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods for modulating FMR1 expression |
US11365416B2 (en) | 2018-04-11 | 2022-06-21 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of EZH2 expression |
WO2019217459A1 (en) | 2018-05-07 | 2019-11-14 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Extrahepatic delivery |
BR112020021253A2 (en) | 2018-05-09 | 2021-02-02 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | compounds and methods for reducing the expression of atxn3 |
EP3799604A4 (en) | 2018-05-09 | 2022-09-07 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for reducing fxi expression |
JP7384833B2 (en) * | 2018-05-16 | 2023-11-21 | アルニラム・ファーマシューティカルズ・インコーポレーテッド | Modified RNA agents with reduced off-target effects |
EP3807411A4 (en) | 2018-06-14 | 2022-08-03 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for increasing stmn2 expression |
SG11202011864XA (en) | 2018-06-27 | 2020-12-30 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc | Compounds and methods for reducing lrrk2 expression |
SG11202100077PA (en) | 2018-07-25 | 2021-02-25 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc | Compounds and methods for reducing atxn2 expression |
WO2020033791A1 (en) | 2018-08-09 | 2020-02-13 | Verseau Therapeutics, Inc. | Oligonucleotide compositions for targeting ccr2 and csf1r and uses thereof |
EA202190581A1 (en) | 2018-08-20 | 2021-07-13 | Рогкон, Инк. | ANTI-SENSE OLIGONUCLEOTIDES TARGETING SCN2A FOR THE TREATMENT OF SCN1A ENCEPHALOPATHY |
EP3620520A1 (en) | 2018-09-10 | 2020-03-11 | Universidad del Pais Vasco | Novel target to treat a metabolic disease in an individual |
TW202023573A (en) | 2018-09-19 | 2020-07-01 | 美商Ionis製藥公司 | Modulators of pnpla3 expression |
TW202028465A (en) | 2018-09-28 | 2020-08-01 | 美商阿尼拉製藥公司 | Transthyretin (ttr) irna compositions and methods of use thereof for treating or preventing ttr-associated ocular diseases |
TW202028222A (en) | 2018-11-14 | 2020-08-01 | 美商Ionis製藥公司 | Modulators of foxp3 expression |
JOP20210108A1 (en) | 2018-11-15 | 2023-01-30 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc | Modulators of irf5 expression |
TW202039841A (en) | 2018-11-21 | 2020-11-01 | 美商Ionis製藥公司 | Compounds and methods for reducing prion expression |
CA3128093A1 (en) | 2019-01-31 | 2020-08-06 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of yap1 expression |
TW202045724A (en) | 2019-02-27 | 2020-12-16 | 美商Ionis製藥公司 | Modulators of malat1 expression |
CN117431244A (en) | 2019-03-29 | 2024-01-23 | Ionis制药公司 | Compounds and methods for modulating UBE3A-ATS |
CA3138915A1 (en) | 2019-05-17 | 2020-11-26 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Oral delivery of oligonucleotides |
TW202111123A (en) | 2019-05-28 | 2021-03-16 | 美商Ionis製藥公司 | Compounds and methods for reducing fus expression |
US11786546B2 (en) | 2019-07-26 | 2023-10-17 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for modulating GFAP |
WO2021030522A1 (en) | 2019-08-13 | 2021-02-18 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | SMALL RIBOSOMAL PROTEIN SUBUNIT 25 (RPS25) iRNA AGENT COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS OF USE THEREOF |
WO2021067747A1 (en) | 2019-10-04 | 2021-04-08 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions and methods for silencing ugt1a1 gene expression |
CN114728017A (en) | 2019-10-14 | 2022-07-08 | 阿斯利康(瑞典)有限公司 | Modulators of PNPLA3 expression |
WO2021087325A1 (en) | 2019-11-01 | 2021-05-06 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions and methods for silencing dnajb1-prkaca fusion gene expression |
AR120341A1 (en) | 2019-11-01 | 2022-02-09 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc | COMPOSITIONS OF RNAi AGENTS AGAINST HUNTINGTINE (HTT) AND THEIR METHODS OF USE |
CN114945669A (en) | 2019-11-06 | 2022-08-26 | 阿尔尼拉姆医药品有限公司 | Extrahepatic delivery |
EP4055165A1 (en) | 2019-11-06 | 2022-09-14 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Transthyretin (ttr) irna compositions and methods of use thereof for treating or preventing ttr-associated ocular diseases |
EP4061945A1 (en) | 2019-11-22 | 2022-09-28 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Ataxin3 (atxn3) rnai agent compositions and methods of use thereof |
WO2021119226A1 (en) | 2019-12-13 | 2021-06-17 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Human chromosome 9 open reading frame 72 (c9orf72) irna agent compositions and methods of use thereof |
WO2021163066A1 (en) | 2020-02-10 | 2021-08-19 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions and methods for silencing vegf-a expression |
US20220064638A1 (en) | 2020-02-28 | 2022-03-03 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for modulating smn2 |
WO2021178607A1 (en) | 2020-03-05 | 2021-09-10 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Complement component c3 irna compositions and methods of use thereof for treating or preventing complement component c3-associated diseases |
TW202204615A (en) | 2020-03-26 | 2022-02-01 | 美商阿尼拉製藥公司 | Coronavirus irna compositions and methods of use thereof |
WO2021202443A2 (en) | 2020-03-30 | 2021-10-07 | Alnylam Pharmaceucticals, Inc. | Compositions and methods for silencing dnajc15 gene expression |
EP4133078A1 (en) | 2020-04-06 | 2023-02-15 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions and methods for silencing myoc expression |
WO2021206922A1 (en) | 2020-04-07 | 2021-10-14 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Transmembrane serine protease 2 (tmprss2) irna compositions and methods of use thereof |
TW202204617A (en) | 2020-04-07 | 2022-02-01 | 美商艾爾妮蘭製藥公司 | Compositions and methods for silencing scn9a expression |
EP4133076A1 (en) | 2020-04-07 | 2023-02-15 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Angiotensin-converting enzyme 2 (ace2) irna compositions and methods of use thereof |
EP4143319A1 (en) | 2020-04-27 | 2023-03-08 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Apolipoprotein e (apoe) irna agent compositions and methods of use thereof |
CA3181546A1 (en) | 2020-05-01 | 2021-11-04 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for modulating atxn1 |
WO2021237097A1 (en) | 2020-05-21 | 2021-11-25 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions and methods for inhibiting marc1 gene expression |
EP4162050A1 (en) | 2020-06-09 | 2023-04-12 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Rnai compositions and methods of use thereof for delivery by inhalation |
JP2023532518A (en) | 2020-06-29 | 2023-07-28 | アイオーニス ファーマシューティカルズ, インコーポレーテッド | Compounds and methods for modulating PLP1 |
WO2022011214A1 (en) | 2020-07-10 | 2022-01-13 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Circular sirnas |
TW202227102A (en) | 2020-09-22 | 2022-07-16 | 瑞典商阿斯特捷利康公司 | Method of treating fatty liver disease |
EP4217489A1 (en) | 2020-09-24 | 2023-08-02 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Dipeptidyl peptidase 4 (dpp4) irna compositions and methods of use thereof |
JP2023544413A (en) | 2020-10-05 | 2023-10-23 | アルナイラム ファーマシューティカルズ, インコーポレイテッド | G protein-coupled receptor 75 (GPR75) iRNA compositions and methods of use thereof |
EP4232582A1 (en) | 2020-10-23 | 2023-08-30 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Mucin 5b (muc5b) irna compositions and methods of use thereof |
EP4136092A4 (en) | 2020-11-18 | 2023-10-11 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for modulating angiotensinogen expression |
WO2022106695A1 (en) | 2020-11-23 | 2022-05-27 | Alpha Anomeric Sas | Nucleic acid duplexes |
GB2603454A (en) | 2020-12-09 | 2022-08-10 | Ucl Business Ltd | Novel therapeutics for the treatment of neurodegenerative disorders |
EP4271695A2 (en) | 2020-12-31 | 2023-11-08 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | 2'-modified nucleoside based oligonucleotide prodrugs |
CA3207125A1 (en) | 2020-12-31 | 2022-07-07 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Cyclic-disulfide modified phosphate based oligonucleotide prodrugs |
CA3210763A1 (en) | 2021-02-12 | 2022-08-18 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Superoxide dismutase 1 (sod1) irna compositions and methods of use thereof for treating or preventing superoxide dismutase 1- (sod1-) associated neurodegenerative diseases |
EP4298220A1 (en) | 2021-02-25 | 2024-01-03 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Prion protein (prnp) irna compositions and methods of use thereof |
EP4305169A1 (en) | 2021-03-12 | 2024-01-17 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Glycogen synthase kinase 3 alpha (gsk3a) irna compositions and methods of use thereof |
KR20230162024A (en) | 2021-03-29 | 2023-11-28 | 알닐람 파마슈티칼스 인코포레이티드 | Huntingtin (HTT) iRNA preparation composition and method of use thereof |
WO2022245583A1 (en) | 2021-05-18 | 2022-11-24 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Sodium-glucose cotransporter-2 (sglt2) irna compositions and methods of use thereof |
AR126000A1 (en) | 2021-06-04 | 2023-08-30 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc | ARNI AGENTS OF OPEN READING FRAME 72 OF HUMAN CHROMOSOME 9 (C9ORF72), COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS OF USE THEREOF |
CA3223192A1 (en) | 2021-06-18 | 2022-12-22 | Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for reducing ifnar1 expression |
WO2023283403A2 (en) | 2021-07-09 | 2023-01-12 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Bis-rnai compounds for cns delivery |
IL309897A (en) | 2021-07-21 | 2024-03-01 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc | Metabolic disorder-associated target gene irna compositions and methods of use thereof |
AU2022364838A1 (en) | 2021-10-15 | 2024-04-11 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Extra-hepatic delivery irna compositions and methods of use thereof |
WO2023076450A2 (en) | 2021-10-29 | 2023-05-04 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | HUNTINGTIN (HTT) iRNA AGENT COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS OF USE THEREOF |
GB202117758D0 (en) | 2021-12-09 | 2022-01-26 | Ucl Business Ltd | Therapeutics for the treatment of neurodegenerative disorders |
WO2023141314A2 (en) | 2022-01-24 | 2023-07-27 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Heparin sulfate biosynthesis pathway enzyme irna agent compositions and methods of use thereof |
WO2023220744A2 (en) | 2022-05-13 | 2023-11-16 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Single-stranded loop oligonucleotides |
WO2024006999A2 (en) | 2022-06-30 | 2024-01-04 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Cyclic-disulfide modified phosphate based oligonucleotide prodrugs |
WO2024039776A2 (en) | 2022-08-18 | 2024-02-22 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Universal non-targeting sirna compositions and methods of use thereof |
WO2024073732A1 (en) | 2022-09-30 | 2024-04-04 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modified double-stranded rna agents |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4891363A (en) * | 1985-07-26 | 1990-01-02 | Sankyo Company Limited | Cyclic ether derivatives and their use |
US5726300A (en) * | 1990-10-26 | 1998-03-10 | Genta Incorporated | Process for the synthesis of oligonucleotides and analogs with low water oxidation step |
US20060189550A1 (en) * | 2002-02-04 | 2006-08-24 | Biomira Inc. | Immunostimulatory, Covalently lipidated oligonucleotides |
Family Cites Families (208)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US513030A (en) | 1894-01-16 | Machine for waxing or coating paper | ||
US940274A (en) | 1909-10-08 | 1909-11-16 | Willis A Phipps | Cotton-picker. |
US1861608A (en) | 1929-12-21 | 1932-06-07 | Emerson Electric Mfg Co | Fan and means for directing the air current therethrough |
US2816110A (en) | 1956-11-23 | 1957-12-10 | Merck & Co Inc | Methods for the production of substituted pteridines |
US3687808A (en) | 1969-08-14 | 1972-08-29 | Univ Leland Stanford Junior | Synthetic polynucleotides |
US4001461A (en) | 1973-03-30 | 1977-01-04 | David Grigorievich Bykhovsky | Method of producing electrode units for plasmatrons |
CH562376A5 (en) | 1974-02-27 | 1975-05-30 | Brechbuehler Fritz | |
US3974808A (en) | 1975-07-02 | 1976-08-17 | Ford Motor Company | Air intake duct assembly |
US4011255A (en) | 1975-09-04 | 1977-03-08 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Air Force | Fluoroalkyleneether difunctional compounds |
US4235871A (en) | 1978-02-24 | 1980-11-25 | Papahadjopoulos Demetrios P | Method of encapsulating biologically active materials in lipid vesicles |
US4469863A (en) | 1980-11-12 | 1984-09-04 | Ts O Paul O P | Nonionic nucleic acid alkyl and aryl phosphonates and processes for manufacture and use thereof |
US5023243A (en) | 1981-10-23 | 1991-06-11 | Molecular Biosystems, Inc. | Oligonucleotide therapeutic agent and method of making same |
US5140104A (en) | 1982-03-09 | 1992-08-18 | Cytogen Corporation | Amine derivatives of folic acid analogs |
JPS5927900A (en) | 1982-08-09 | 1984-02-14 | Wakunaga Seiyaku Kk | Oligonucleotide derivative and its preparation |
US4708708A (en) | 1982-12-06 | 1987-11-24 | International Paper Company | Method and apparatus for skiving and hemming |
FR2540122B1 (en) | 1983-01-27 | 1985-11-29 | Centre Nat Rech Scient | NOVEL COMPOUNDS COMPRISING A SEQUENCE OF OLIGONUCLEOTIDE LINKED TO AN INTERCALATION AGENT, THEIR SYNTHESIS PROCESS AND THEIR APPLICATION |
US4605735A (en) | 1983-02-14 | 1986-08-12 | Wakunaga Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha | Oligonucleotide derivatives |
US4948882A (en) | 1983-02-22 | 1990-08-14 | Syngene, Inc. | Single-stranded labelled oligonucleotides, reactive monomers and methods of synthesis |
US4824941A (en) | 1983-03-10 | 1989-04-25 | Julian Gordon | Specific antibody to the native form of 2'5'-oligonucleotides, the method of preparation and the use as reagents in immunoassays or for binding 2'5'-oligonucleotides in biological systems |
DE3329892A1 (en) | 1983-08-18 | 1985-03-07 | Köster, Hubert, Prof. Dr., 2000 Hamburg | METHOD FOR PRODUCING OLIGONUCLEOTIDES |
USRE34069E (en) | 1983-08-18 | 1992-09-15 | Biosyntech Gmbh | Process for the preparation of oligonucleotides |
US4587044A (en) | 1983-09-01 | 1986-05-06 | The Johns Hopkins University | Linkage of proteins to nucleic acids |
US5118802A (en) | 1983-12-20 | 1992-06-02 | California Institute Of Technology | DNA-reporter conjugates linked via the 2' or 5'-primary amino group of the 5'-terminal nucleoside |
US4643988A (en) | 1984-05-15 | 1987-02-17 | Research Corporation | Amphipathic peptides |
US5258506A (en) | 1984-10-16 | 1993-11-02 | Chiron Corporation | Photolabile reagents for incorporation into oligonucleotide chains |
US5367066A (en) | 1984-10-16 | 1994-11-22 | Chiron Corporation | Oligonucleotides with selectably cleavable and/or abasic sites |
US5430136A (en) | 1984-10-16 | 1995-07-04 | Chiron Corporation | Oligonucleotides having selectably cleavable and/or abasic sites |
US4828979A (en) | 1984-11-08 | 1989-05-09 | Life Technologies, Inc. | Nucleotide analogs for nucleic acid labeling and detection |
US4897355A (en) | 1985-01-07 | 1990-01-30 | Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. | N[ω,(ω-1)-dialkyloxy]- and N-[ω,(ω-1)-dialkenyloxy]-alk-1-yl-N,N,N-tetrasubstituted ammonium lipids and uses therefor |
FR2575751B1 (en) | 1985-01-08 | 1987-04-03 | Pasteur Institut | NOVEL ADENOSINE DERIVATIVE NUCLEOSIDES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR BIOLOGICAL APPLICATIONS |
JPS61267592A (en) * | 1985-01-16 | 1986-11-27 | Sankyo Co Ltd | Phosphoric ester derivative, production thereof, and antitumor agent containing same |
ATE81872T1 (en) | 1985-03-15 | 1992-11-15 | James Summerton | STEROREOGULAR POLYNUCLEOTIDE BINDING POLYMERS. |
US5235033A (en) | 1985-03-15 | 1993-08-10 | Anti-Gene Development Group | Alpha-morpholino ribonucleoside derivatives and polymers thereof |
US4762779A (en) | 1985-06-13 | 1988-08-09 | Amgen Inc. | Compositions and methods for functionalizing nucleic acids |
WO1987002062A1 (en) | 1985-10-04 | 1987-04-09 | Biotechnology Research Partners, Ltd. | Recombinant apolipoproteins and methods |
US4737323A (en) | 1986-02-13 | 1988-04-12 | Liposome Technology, Inc. | Liposome extrusion method |
US5014472A (en) | 1986-03-06 | 1991-05-14 | Sten Svensson | Tombstone |
US5317098A (en) | 1986-03-17 | 1994-05-31 | Hiroaki Shizuya | Non-radioisotope tagging of fragments |
JPS638396A (en) | 1986-06-30 | 1988-01-14 | Wakunaga Pharmaceut Co Ltd | Poly-labeled oligonucleotide derivative |
US5128318A (en) | 1987-05-20 | 1992-07-07 | The Rogosin Institute | Reconstituted HDL particles and uses thereof |
US4904582A (en) | 1987-06-11 | 1990-02-27 | Synthetic Genetics | Novel amphiphilic nucleic acid conjugates |
AU598946B2 (en) | 1987-06-24 | 1990-07-05 | Howard Florey Institute Of Experimental Physiology And Medicine | Nucleoside derivatives |
US5585481A (en) | 1987-09-21 | 1996-12-17 | Gen-Probe Incorporated | Linking reagents for nucleotide probes |
US5525465A (en) | 1987-10-28 | 1996-06-11 | Howard Florey Institute Of Experimental Physiology And Medicine | Oligonucleotide-polyamide conjugates and methods of production and applications of the same |
DE3738460A1 (en) | 1987-11-12 | 1989-05-24 | Max Planck Gesellschaft | MODIFIED OLIGONUCLEOTIDS |
SE467861B (en) | 1987-12-18 | 1992-09-28 | Kabi Pharmacia Ab | EMULSION FOR PARENTERAL ADMINISTRATION |
US5082830A (en) | 1988-02-26 | 1992-01-21 | Enzo Biochem, Inc. | End labeled nucleotide probe |
US5109124A (en) | 1988-06-01 | 1992-04-28 | Biogen, Inc. | Nucleic acid probe linked to a label having a terminal cysteine |
US5175273A (en) | 1988-07-01 | 1992-12-29 | Genentech, Inc. | Nucleic acid intercalating agents |
US5149782A (en) | 1988-08-19 | 1992-09-22 | Tanox Biosystems, Inc. | Molecular conjugates containing cell membrane-blending agents |
US5262536A (en) | 1988-09-15 | 1993-11-16 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Reagents for the preparation of 5'-tagged oligonucleotides |
CH687441A5 (en) | 1988-10-13 | 1996-12-13 | Abb Management Ag | Method and apparatus for processing slag from waste incineration plants |
US5512439A (en) | 1988-11-21 | 1996-04-30 | Dynal As | Oligonucleotide-linked magnetic particles and uses thereof |
CA2006008C (en) | 1988-12-20 | 2000-02-15 | Donald J. Kessler | Method for making synthetic oligonucleotides which bind specifically to target sites on duplex dna molecules, by forming a colinear triplex, the synthetic oligonucleotides and methods of use |
US5599923A (en) | 1989-03-06 | 1997-02-04 | Board Of Regents, University Of Tx | Texaphyrin metal complexes having improved functionalization |
US5457183A (en) | 1989-03-06 | 1995-10-10 | Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System | Hydroxylated texaphyrins |
FR2645866B1 (en) | 1989-04-17 | 1991-07-05 | Centre Nat Rech Scient | NEW LIPOPOLYAMINES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR USE |
US5391723A (en) | 1989-05-31 | 1995-02-21 | Neorx Corporation | Oligonucleotide conjugates |
US5256775A (en) | 1989-06-05 | 1993-10-26 | Gilead Sciences, Inc. | Exonuclease-resistant oligonucleotides |
US4958013A (en) | 1989-06-06 | 1990-09-18 | Northwestern University | Cholesteryl modified oligonucleotides |
NL8901881A (en) | 1989-07-20 | 1991-02-18 | Rockwool Grodan Bv | Drainage coupling element. |
US5451463A (en) | 1989-08-28 | 1995-09-19 | Clontech Laboratories, Inc. | Non-nucleoside 1,3-diol reagents for labeling synthetic oligonucleotides |
US5134066A (en) | 1989-08-29 | 1992-07-28 | Monsanto Company | Improved probes using nucleosides containing 3-dezauracil analogs |
US5254469A (en) | 1989-09-12 | 1993-10-19 | Eastman Kodak Company | Oligonucleotide-enzyme conjugate that can be used as a probe in hybridization assays and polymerase chain reaction procedures |
US5013556A (en) | 1989-10-20 | 1991-05-07 | Liposome Technology, Inc. | Liposomes with enhanced circulation time |
US5264562A (en) | 1989-10-24 | 1993-11-23 | Gilead Sciences, Inc. | Oligonucleotide analogs with novel linkages |
US5264564A (en) | 1989-10-24 | 1993-11-23 | Gilead Sciences | Oligonucleotide analogs with novel linkages |
US5292873A (en) | 1989-11-29 | 1994-03-08 | The Research Foundation Of State University Of New York | Nucleic acids labeled with naphthoquinone probe |
US5177198A (en) | 1989-11-30 | 1993-01-05 | University Of N.C. At Chapel Hill | Process for preparing oligoribonucleoside and oligodeoxyribonucleoside boranophosphates |
CA2029273A1 (en) | 1989-12-04 | 1991-06-05 | Christine L. Brakel | Modified nucleotide compounds |
US5223168A (en) | 1989-12-12 | 1993-06-29 | Gary Holt | Surface cleaner and treatment |
US5130302A (en) | 1989-12-20 | 1992-07-14 | Boron Bilogicals, Inc. | Boronated nucleoside, nucleotide and oligonucleotide compounds, compositions and methods for using same |
US5486603A (en) | 1990-01-08 | 1996-01-23 | Gilead Sciences, Inc. | Oligonucleotide having enhanced binding affinity |
US5587470A (en) | 1990-01-11 | 1996-12-24 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | 3-deazapurines |
US5578718A (en) | 1990-01-11 | 1996-11-26 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Thiol-derivatized nucleosides |
US6153737A (en) | 1990-01-11 | 2000-11-28 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Derivatized oligonucleotides having improved uptake and other properties |
US5587361A (en) | 1991-10-15 | 1996-12-24 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Oligonucleotides having phosphorothioate linkages of high chiral purity |
US5506351A (en) | 1992-07-23 | 1996-04-09 | Isis Pharmaceuticals | Process for the preparation of 2'-O-alkyl guanosine and related compounds |
US5681941A (en) | 1990-01-11 | 1997-10-28 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Substituted purines and oligonucleotide cross-linking |
US5459255A (en) | 1990-01-11 | 1995-10-17 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | N-2 substituted purines |
US5457191A (en) | 1990-01-11 | 1995-10-10 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | 3-deazapurines |
US5212295A (en) | 1990-01-11 | 1993-05-18 | Isis Pharmaceuticals | Monomers for preparation of oligonucleotides having chiral phosphorus linkages |
US5015305A (en) | 1990-02-02 | 1991-05-14 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Air Force | High temperature hydrogenation of gamma titanium aluminide |
US5149797A (en) | 1990-02-15 | 1992-09-22 | The Worcester Foundation For Experimental Biology | Method of site-specific alteration of rna and production of encoded polypeptides |
US5214136A (en) | 1990-02-20 | 1993-05-25 | Gilead Sciences, Inc. | Anthraquinone-derivatives oligonucleotides |
AU7579991A (en) | 1990-02-20 | 1991-09-18 | Gilead Sciences, Inc. | Pseudonucleosides and pseudonucleotides and their polymers |
DE69032425T2 (en) | 1990-05-11 | 1998-11-26 | Microprobe Corp | Immersion test strips for nucleic acid hybridization assays and methods for covalently immobilizing oligonucleotides |
US5541307A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1996-07-30 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogs and solid phase synthesis thereof |
US5608046A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1997-03-04 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Conjugated 4'-desmethyl nucleoside analog compounds |
US5378825A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1995-01-03 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogs |
US5218105A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1993-06-08 | Isis Pharmaceuticals | Polyamine conjugated oligonucleotides |
US5688941A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1997-11-18 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of making conjugated 4' desmethyl nucleoside analog compounds |
US5602240A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1997-02-11 | Ciba Geigy Ag. | Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogs |
US5386023A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1995-01-31 | Isis Pharmaceuticals | Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogs and preparation thereof through reductive coupling |
US5610289A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1997-03-11 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogues |
US5223618A (en) | 1990-08-13 | 1993-06-29 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | 4'-desmethyl nucleoside analog compounds |
WO1992002258A1 (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1992-02-20 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Nuclease resistant, pyrimidine modified oligonucleotides that detect and modulate gene expression |
US5489677A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1996-02-06 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Oligonucleoside linkages containing adjacent oxygen and nitrogen atoms |
US5138045A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1992-08-11 | Isis Pharmaceuticals | Polyamine conjugated oligonucleotides |
US5245022A (en) | 1990-08-03 | 1993-09-14 | Sterling Drug, Inc. | Exonuclease resistant terminally substituted oligonucleotides |
US6262241B1 (en) | 1990-08-13 | 2001-07-17 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compound for detecting and modulating RNA activity and gene expression |
US5512667A (en) | 1990-08-28 | 1996-04-30 | Reed; Michael W. | Trifunctional intermediates for preparing 3'-tailed oligonucleotides |
US5157309A (en) | 1990-09-13 | 1992-10-20 | Motorola Inc. | Cold-cathode field emission device employing a current source means |
US5432272A (en) | 1990-10-09 | 1995-07-11 | Benner; Steven A. | Method for incorporating into a DNA or RNA oligonucleotide using nucleotides bearing heterocyclic bases |
WO1992008728A1 (en) | 1990-11-08 | 1992-05-29 | Hybridon, Inc. | Incorporation of multiple reporter groups on synthetic oligonucleotides |
US20020123476A1 (en) | 1991-03-19 | 2002-09-05 | Emanuele R. Martin | Therapeutic delivery compositions and methods of use thereof |
US5539082A (en) | 1993-04-26 | 1996-07-23 | Nielsen; Peter E. | Peptide nucleic acids |
US5229523A (en) * | 1991-05-30 | 1993-07-20 | The Scripps Research Institute | 2-methyl-5-hydroxymethyl- and 2,5-dimethyl-3,4-dihydroxypyrrolidines |
US5371241A (en) | 1991-07-19 | 1994-12-06 | Pharmacia P-L Biochemicals Inc. | Fluorescein labelled phosphoramidites |
US5599797A (en) | 1991-10-15 | 1997-02-04 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Oligonucleotides having phosphorothioate linkages of high chiral purity |
US6335434B1 (en) | 1998-06-16 | 2002-01-01 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc., | Nucleosidic and non-nucleosidic folate conjugates |
US5594121A (en) | 1991-11-07 | 1997-01-14 | Gilead Sciences, Inc. | Enhanced triple-helix and double-helix formation with oligomers containing modified purines |
US6235887B1 (en) | 1991-11-26 | 2001-05-22 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Enhanced triple-helix and double-helix formation directed by oligonucleotides containing modified pyrimidines |
US5484908A (en) | 1991-11-26 | 1996-01-16 | Gilead Sciences, Inc. | Oligonucleotides containing 5-propynyl pyrimidines |
US5359044A (en) | 1991-12-13 | 1994-10-25 | Isis Pharmaceuticals | Cyclobutyl oligonucleotide surrogates |
US5159079A (en) | 1991-12-20 | 1992-10-27 | Eli Lilly And Company | 2-piperidones as intermediates for 5-deaza-10-oxo- and 5-deaza-10-thio-5,6,7,8-tetrahydrofolic acids |
US5595726A (en) | 1992-01-21 | 1997-01-21 | Pharmacyclics, Inc. | Chromophore probe for detection of nucleic acid |
US5565552A (en) | 1992-01-21 | 1996-10-15 | Pharmacyclics, Inc. | Method of expanded porphyrin-oligonucleotide conjugate synthesis |
CA2135646A1 (en) | 1992-05-11 | 1993-11-25 | Kenneth G. Draper | Method and reagent for inhibiting viral replication |
US6172208B1 (en) | 1992-07-06 | 2001-01-09 | Genzyme Corporation | Oligonucleotides modified with conjugate groups |
US5272250A (en) | 1992-07-10 | 1993-12-21 | Spielvogel Bernard F | Boronated phosphoramidate compounds |
WO1994002595A1 (en) | 1992-07-17 | 1994-02-03 | Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Method and reagent for treatment of animal diseases |
US5574142A (en) | 1992-12-15 | 1996-11-12 | Microprobe Corporation | Peptide linkers for improved oligonucleotide delivery |
US5721138A (en) | 1992-12-15 | 1998-02-24 | Sandford University | Apolipoprotein(A) promoter and regulatory sequence constructs and methods of use |
US5476925A (en) | 1993-02-01 | 1995-12-19 | Northwestern University | Oligodeoxyribonucleotides including 3'-aminonucleoside-phosphoramidate linkages and terminal 3'-amino groups |
GB9304620D0 (en) | 1993-03-06 | 1993-04-21 | Ciba Geigy Ag | Compounds |
ES2107205T3 (en) * | 1993-03-30 | 1997-11-16 | Sanofi Sa | ANALOGS OF ACICLIC NUCLEOSIDES AND OLIGONUCLEOTIDE SEQUENCES THAT CONTAIN THEM. |
US6015886A (en) | 1993-05-24 | 2000-01-18 | Chemgenes Corporation | Oligonucleotide phosphate esters |
US5571902A (en) | 1993-07-29 | 1996-11-05 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Synthesis of oligonucleotides |
CA2170869C (en) | 1993-09-03 | 1999-09-14 | Phillip Dan Cook | Amine-derivatized nucleosides and oligonucleosides |
US5502177A (en) | 1993-09-17 | 1996-03-26 | Gilead Sciences, Inc. | Pyrimidine derivatives for labeled binding partners |
US5457187A (en) | 1993-12-08 | 1995-10-10 | Board Of Regents University Of Nebraska | Oligonucleotides containing 5-fluorouracil |
US5652339A (en) | 1993-12-31 | 1997-07-29 | Rotkreuzstiftung Zentrallaboratorium | Method of producing reconstituted lipoproteins |
US5519134A (en) | 1994-01-11 | 1996-05-21 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Pyrrolidine-containing monomers and oligomers |
US5539083A (en) | 1994-02-23 | 1996-07-23 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Peptide nucleic acid combinatorial libraries and improved methods of synthesis |
ZA951877B (en) | 1994-03-07 | 1996-09-09 | Dow Chemical Co | Bioactive and/or targeted dendrimer conjugates |
US5596091A (en) | 1994-03-18 | 1997-01-21 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Antisense oligonucleotides comprising 5-aminoalkyl pyrimidine nucleotides |
US5554746A (en) | 1994-05-16 | 1996-09-10 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Lactam nucleic acids |
US5525711A (en) | 1994-05-18 | 1996-06-11 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services | Pteridine nucleotide analogs as fluorescent DNA probes |
US5534499A (en) | 1994-05-19 | 1996-07-09 | The University Of British Columbia | Lipophilic drug derivatives for use in liposomes |
US5597696A (en) | 1994-07-18 | 1997-01-28 | Becton Dickinson And Company | Covalent cyanine dye oligonucleotide conjugates |
US6001248A (en) | 1994-08-25 | 1999-12-14 | The University Of Iowa Research Foundation | Gradient interface magnetic composites and systems therefor |
US5580731A (en) | 1994-08-25 | 1996-12-03 | Chiron Corporation | N-4 modified pyrimidine deoxynucleotides and oligonucleotide probes synthesized therewith |
US5820873A (en) | 1994-09-30 | 1998-10-13 | The University Of British Columbia | Polyethylene glycol modified ceramide lipids and liposome uses thereof |
US5885613A (en) | 1994-09-30 | 1999-03-23 | The University Of British Columbia | Bilayer stabilizing components and their use in forming programmable fusogenic liposomes |
IL115849A0 (en) | 1994-11-03 | 1996-01-31 | Merz & Co Gmbh & Co | Tangential filtration preparation of liposomal drugs and liposome product thereof |
AU5359496A (en) | 1995-03-06 | 1996-09-23 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Improved process for the synthesis of 2'-o-substituted pyrimidines and oligomeric compounds therefrom |
US6166197A (en) | 1995-03-06 | 2000-12-26 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Oligomeric compounds having pyrimidine nucleotide (S) with 2'and 5 substitutions |
US5801155A (en) | 1995-04-03 | 1998-09-01 | Epoch Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Covalently linked oligonucleotide minor grove binder conjugates |
EP0833613A1 (en) | 1995-05-26 | 1998-04-08 | Somatix Therapy Corporation | Delivery vehicles comprising stable lipid/nucleic acid complexes |
US5693773A (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 1997-12-02 | Hybridon Incorporated | Triplex-forming antisense oligonucleotides having abasic linkers targeting nucleic acids comprising mixed sequences of purines and pyrimidines |
US5672662A (en) | 1995-07-07 | 1997-09-30 | Shearwater Polymers, Inc. | Poly(ethylene glycol) and related polymers monosubstituted with propionic or butanoic acids and functional derivatives thereof for biotechnical applications |
US7144869B2 (en) | 1995-12-13 | 2006-12-05 | Mirus Bio Corporation | Nucleic acid injected into hapatic vein lumen and delivered to primate liver |
US8217015B2 (en) | 2003-04-04 | 2012-07-10 | Arrowhead Madison Inc. | Endosomolytic polymers |
US5998203A (en) * | 1996-04-16 | 1999-12-07 | Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Enzymatic nucleic acids containing 5'-and/or 3'-cap structures |
US6444806B1 (en) | 1996-04-30 | 2002-09-03 | Hisamitsu Pharmaceutical Co., Inc. | Conjugates and methods of forming conjugates of oligonucleotides and carbohydrates |
US6623724B2 (en) * | 1996-09-18 | 2003-09-23 | Applied Genetics Incorporated Dermatics | Dermatological compositions and methods |
US6639062B2 (en) | 1997-02-14 | 2003-10-28 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Aminooxy-modified nucleosidic compounds and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom |
US6034135A (en) | 1997-03-06 | 2000-03-07 | Promega Biosciences, Inc. | Dimeric cationic lipids |
US6617438B1 (en) | 1997-11-05 | 2003-09-09 | Sirna Therapeutics, Inc. | Oligoribonucleotides with enzymatic activity |
US6528640B1 (en) | 1997-11-05 | 2003-03-04 | Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Incorporated | Synthetic ribonucleic acids with RNAse activity |
US6320017B1 (en) | 1997-12-23 | 2001-11-20 | Inex Pharmaceuticals Corp. | Polyamide oligomers |
US7045610B2 (en) | 1998-04-03 | 2006-05-16 | Epoch Biosciences, Inc. | Modified oligonucleotides for mismatch discrimination |
US6300319B1 (en) | 1998-06-16 | 2001-10-09 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Targeted oligonucleotide conjugates |
JP2002519439A (en) * | 1998-07-07 | 2002-07-02 | 久光製薬株式会社 | Antisense oligonucleotides targeted to IL-15 |
US6335437B1 (en) | 1998-09-07 | 2002-01-01 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods for the preparation of conjugated oligomers |
WO2000044914A1 (en) | 1999-01-28 | 2000-08-03 | Medical College Of Georgia Research Institute, Inc. | Composition and method for in vivo and in vitro attenuation of gene expression using double stranded rna |
DE19956568A1 (en) | 1999-01-30 | 2000-08-17 | Roland Kreutzer | Method and medicament for inhibiting the expression of a given gene |
US20080281041A1 (en) | 1999-06-07 | 2008-11-13 | Rozema David B | Reversibly Masked Polymers |
US8211468B2 (en) | 1999-06-07 | 2012-07-03 | Arrowhead Madison Inc. | Endosomolytic polymers |
US6147200A (en) | 1999-08-19 | 2000-11-14 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | 2'-O-acetamido modified monomers and oligomers |
US6395437B1 (en) | 1999-10-29 | 2002-05-28 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Junction profiling using a scanning voltage micrograph |
GB9927444D0 (en) | 1999-11-19 | 2000-01-19 | Cancer Res Campaign Tech | Inhibiting gene expression |
GB0001309D0 (en) | 2000-01-20 | 2000-03-08 | Nestle Sa | Valve arrangement |
WO2003070918A2 (en) | 2002-02-20 | 2003-08-28 | Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Incorporated | Rna interference by modified short interfering nucleic acid |
ES2336887T5 (en) | 2000-03-30 | 2019-03-06 | Whitehead Inst Biomedical Res | Mediators of RNA interference specific to RNA sequences |
WO2001085751A1 (en) | 2000-05-09 | 2001-11-15 | Reliable Biopharmaceutical, Inc. | Polymeric compounds useful as prodrugs |
US6559279B1 (en) | 2000-09-08 | 2003-05-06 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Process for preparing peptide derivatized oligomeric compounds |
DK2813582T3 (en) | 2000-12-01 | 2017-07-31 | Max-Planck-Gesellschaft Zur Förderung Der Wss E V | Small RNA molecules that mediate RNA interference |
MXPA04004056A (en) * | 2001-10-29 | 2004-09-10 | Univ Mcgill | Acyclic linker-containing oligonucleotides and uses thereof. |
EP1443966B1 (en) | 2001-11-15 | 2007-03-14 | Pantarhei Bioscience B.V. | Method of preventing or treating benign gynaecological disorders |
US8138383B2 (en) | 2002-03-11 | 2012-03-20 | Arrowhead Madison Inc. | Membrane active heteropolymers |
US8008355B2 (en) | 2002-03-11 | 2011-08-30 | Roche Madison Inc. | Endosomolytic poly(vinyl ether) polymers |
DE60330135D1 (en) | 2002-05-06 | 2009-12-31 | Endocyte Inc | Folate receptor directed imaging conjugates |
US20050130924A1 (en) * | 2002-06-26 | 2005-06-16 | Monia Brett P. | Antisense inhibition via RNAse H-independent reduction in mRNA |
EP1620544B1 (en) * | 2003-04-17 | 2018-09-19 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. | MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS |
KR100527569B1 (en) | 2003-05-09 | 2005-11-09 | 주식회사 하이닉스반도체 | Non-volatile ferroelectric memory and controlling device thereof |
WO2005013901A2 (en) | 2003-07-31 | 2005-02-17 | Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Oligomeric compounds and compositions for use in modulation of small non-coding rnas |
ES2382807T3 (en) | 2003-08-28 | 2012-06-13 | Takeshi Imanishi | New artificial nucleic acids of the N-O link type with cross-linking |
CA2536333C (en) * | 2003-08-28 | 2013-01-08 | Jan Weiler | Interfering rna duplex having blunt-ends and 3'-modifications |
US20060166901A1 (en) | 2005-01-03 | 2006-07-27 | Yu Ruey J | Compositions comprising O-acetylsalicyl derivatives of aminocarbohydrates and amino acids |
CH698304B1 (en) | 2005-10-10 | 2009-07-15 | Fatzer Ag | Cable anchor, in particular for rockfall or avalanche prevention structures. |
FR2894582B1 (en) * | 2005-12-12 | 2008-02-22 | Fabre Pierre Dermo Cosmetique | SIRNA ANTI MYOSINE VA AND DEPIGMENTATION OF THE SKIN |
US20100184209A1 (en) | 2006-02-17 | 2010-07-22 | Dharmacon, Inc. | Compositions and methods for inhibiting gene silencing by rna interference |
US7527006B2 (en) | 2006-03-29 | 2009-05-05 | Jon Khachaturian | Marine lifting apparatus |
US8017109B2 (en) | 2006-08-18 | 2011-09-13 | Roche Madison Inc. | Endosomolytic poly(acrylate) polymers |
CA2660842C (en) | 2006-08-18 | 2012-03-13 | F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag | Polyconjugates for in vivo delivery of polynucleotides |
WO2008036825A2 (en) | 2006-09-22 | 2008-03-27 | Dharmacon, Inc. | Duplex oligonucleotide complexes and methods for gene silencing by rna interference |
WO2008121963A2 (en) | 2007-03-30 | 2008-10-09 | Rutgers, The State University Of New Jersey | Compositions and methods for gene silencing |
EP2167662A2 (en) * | 2007-05-14 | 2010-03-31 | Technische Universität München | Pharmaceutical compounds comprising abasic oligonucleotides |
DK2162538T3 (en) * | 2007-05-22 | 2016-06-06 | Arcturus Therapeutics Inc | Oligomers for THERAPY |
EP2220102B1 (en) | 2007-11-06 | 2014-04-16 | Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. | Baseless nucleotide analogues and uses thereof |
DE102010001299A1 (en) | 2010-01-28 | 2011-08-18 | BSH Bosch und Siemens Hausgeräte GmbH, 81739 | Washing machine with a laundry drum |
AP3284A (en) * | 2010-02-24 | 2015-05-31 | Arrowhead Res Corp | Compositions for targeted delivery of SIRNA |
EP2610881B1 (en) | 2011-12-28 | 2014-04-30 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Pressure compensator for a subsea device |
US9788835B2 (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2017-10-17 | Ethicon Llc | Devices and methods for facilitating ejection of surgical fasteners from cartridges |
WO2020163883A1 (en) | 2019-02-04 | 2020-08-13 | Detnet South Africa (Pty) Ltd | Boost pump |
US11115989B1 (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2021-09-07 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Primary component carrier selection in a wireless access node that uses multiple radio frequency bands |
-
2011
- 2011-04-22 US US13/642,772 patent/US10913767B2/en active Active
- 2011-04-22 WO PCT/US2011/033598 patent/WO2011133876A2/en active Application Filing
-
2020
- 2020-12-03 US US17/111,096 patent/US20210087219A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4891363A (en) * | 1985-07-26 | 1990-01-02 | Sankyo Company Limited | Cyclic ether derivatives and their use |
US5726300A (en) * | 1990-10-26 | 1998-03-10 | Genta Incorporated | Process for the synthesis of oligonucleotides and analogs with low water oxidation step |
US20060189550A1 (en) * | 2002-02-04 | 2006-08-24 | Biomira Inc. | Immunostimulatory, Covalently lipidated oligonucleotides |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
Title |
---|
Gilbert, LW, "Der tropfbar flussige Sauerstoff, oder das oxygenierte Wasser", Anal of Physics, 65-66 (1), 3. (Year: 1820) * |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
WO2011133876A2 (en) | 2011-10-27 |
WO2011133876A3 (en) | 2013-05-16 |
US10913767B2 (en) | 2021-02-09 |
US20130130378A1 (en) | 2013-05-23 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20210087219A1 (en) | Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs | |
US20130260460A1 (en) | Conformationally restricted dinucleotide monomers and oligonucleotides | |
US9725479B2 (en) | 5′-end derivatives | |
US9102938B2 (en) | 2′ and 5′ modified monomers and oligonucleotides | |
US9453043B2 (en) | Nucleic acid chemical modifications | |
JP7209682B2 (en) | Multi-targeted monomeric conjugates | |
US20110130440A1 (en) | Non-natural ribonucleotides, and methods of use thereof | |
US7772387B2 (en) | Oligonucleotides comprising a modified or non-natural nucleobase | |
US20130196434A1 (en) | ENHANCEMENT OF siRNA SILENCING ACTIVITY USING UNIVERSAL BASES OR MISMATCHES IN THE SENSE STRAND | |
JP7450008B2 (en) | endosomal cleavable linker | |
AU2018318230A1 (en) | Tunable REVERSIRTM compounds | |
AU2018201666A1 (en) | Nucleic acid chemical modifications |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |